Fake Science, Invalid Data: There Is No Such Thing As A “Confirmed Covid-19 Case” & Robert F. Kennedy, Jr.'s Highly Anticipated Book, “The Real Anthony Fauci” December 7 2021 | From: GlobalResearch / LewRockwell / Various
“The PCR is a Process. It does not tell you that you are sick."
- Dr. Kary Mullis, Nobel Laureate and Inventor of the RT-PCR, passed away in August 2019
“… All or a substantial part of these positives could be due to what’s called false positives tests.” - Dr. Michael Yeadon: former Vice President and Chief Science Officer for Pfizer
"This misuse of the RT-PCR technique is applied as a relentless and intentional strategy by some governments to justify excessive measures such as the violation of a large number of constitutional rights, … under the pretext of a pandemic based on a number of positive RT-PCR tests, and not on a real number of patients."
- Dr. Pascal Sacré, Belgian physician specialized in critical care and renowned public health analyst
Media lies coupled with a systemic and carefully engineered fear campaign have sustained the image of a killer virus which is relentlessly spreading to all major regions of the World.
Several billion people in more than 190 countries have been tested (as well as retested) for Covid-19.
At the time of writing, approximately 260 million people Worldwide have been categorized as “confirmed Covid-19 cases”. The alleged pandemic is said to have resulted in more than 5 million Covid-19 related deaths.
Both sets of figures: Morbidity and mortality are fabricated.
A highly organized Covid testing apparatus (part of which is funded by the billionaire foundations) has been established with a view to driving up the numbers of “Confirmed Covid-19 Cases”, which are then used as a justification to impose the “vaccine” passport coupled with the repeal of fundamental human rights.
A so-called “Global Tracker System” has been established with an interactive map pointing to global as well as country level trends and weekly tendencies.
A Fourth Wave has been announced. Invalid figures pertaining to Covid-19 are routinely plastered on the news tabloids.
Meanwhile, both the media and the governments have turned a blind eye to the rising trend of Covid-19 vaccine deaths and adverse events, which are confirmed by “official” government agencies. (See below)
TOTAL for EU / UK / USA
45,250 Covid-19 injection related deaths, 7,418,980 injuries
The Reverse Transcription Polymerase Chain Reaction Test (RT-PCR)
The slanted methodology applied under WHO guidance for detecting the alleged spread of the virus is the Polymerase Chain Reaction Test (RT-PCR), which is routinely applied all over the World.
The RT-PCR Test has been used Worldwide to generate millions of erroneous “Confirmed Covid-19 cases”, which are thenused to sustain the illusion that the alleged pandemic is Real.
This assessment based on erroneous numbers has been used in the course of the last 20 months to spearhead and sustain the fear campaign.
And people are now led to believe that the Covid-19 “vaccine” is the “solution”. And that “normality” will be restored once the entire population of Planet Earth has been vaccinated.
“Confirmed” is a misnomer: A “Confirmed RT-PCR Positive Case” does not Imply a “Confirmed Covid-19 Case”.
Positive RT-PCR is not synonymous with COVID-19 disease!
PCR specialists make it clear that a test must always be compared with the clinical record of the patient being tested, with the patient’s state of health to confirm its value [reliability] (Dr. Pascal Sacré)
The procedure used by the national health authorities is to categorize all RT-PCR positive cases, as “Confirmed Covid-19 Cases” (with or without a medical diagnosis). Ironically, this routine process of identifying “confirmed cases” is in derogation of the CDC’s own guideline:
“Detection of viral RNA may not indicate the presence of infectious virus or that 2019-nCoV is the causative agent for clinical symptoms.
The performance of this test has not been established for monitoring treatment of 2019-nCoV infection.
This test cannot rule out diseases caused by other bacterial or viral pathogens.”
In this article we will present detailed evidence that the methodology used to detect and estimate the spread of the virus is flawed and invalid.
The earlier debate at the outset of the crisis focused on the issue of “False Positives.”
Acknowledged by the WHO and the CDC, the RT-PCR Test was known to produce a high percentage of false positives. According to Dr. Pascal Sacré:
"Today, as authorities test more people, there are bound to be more positive RT-PCR tests. This does not mean that COVID-19 is coming back, or that the epidemic is moving in waves. There are more people being tested, that’s all.”
The debate on false positives (acknowledged by the health authorities) points to so-called errors without necessarily questioning the overall validity of the RT-PCR test as a means to detecting the alleged spread of the CoV-SARS-2 virus.
Australians gathered in massive numbers across the country recently in protest against COVID-19 vaccine mandates and other CCP virus pandemic restrictions in a wave of planned “freedom rallies.”
At least tens of thousands of people in Melbourne arrived at Flagstaff Gardens in large numbers for a rally. One man declared, while filming the peaceful march, “We’ve taken over the whole CBD.”
2. The PCR-Test Does Not Detect the Identity of the Virus
The RT-PCR test does not identify/ detect the virus. What the PCR test identifies are genetic fragments of numerous viruses (including influenza viruses types A and B, and coronaviruses which trigger common colds).
The results of the TR-PCR test cannot “confirm” whether an individual who undertakes the test is infected with Covid-19.
According to Dr. Kary Mullis, inventor of the PCR technique: “The PCR detects a very small segment of the nucleic acid which is part of a virus itself.”According to renowned Swiss immunologist Dr B. Stadler
"So if we do a PCR corona test on an immune person, it is not a virus that is detected, but a small shattered part of the viral genome.
The test comes back positive for as long as there are tiny shattered parts of the virus left.
Even if the infectious viri are long dead, a corona test can come back positive, because the PCR method multiplies even a tiny fraction of the viral genetic material enough [to be detected].”
Dr. Pascal Sacré concurs: “These tests detect viral particles, genetic sequences, not the whole virus.”
"In an attempt to quantify the viral load, these sequences are then amplified several times through numerous complex steps that are subject to errors, sterility errors and contamination.”
The PCR Test does not identify the virus as outlined above. Moreover, the WHO in January 2020, did not possess an isolate and purified sample of the novel 2019-nCov virus.
What was contemplated in January 2020 was a “customization”of the PCR test by the WHO, under the scientific guidance of the Berlin Virology Institute at Charité Hospital.
The title of the Berlin Virology Institute Study is an obvious misnomer. The PCR test cannot “detect” the 2019 novel coronavirus. (See Dr. Kary Mullis, Dr. B. Stadler, Dr. Pascal Sacré quoted in Section 2).
Moreover, the study, published by Eurosurveillance acknowledges that the WHO did not possess an isolate and purified sample of the novel 2019-nCov virus:
"[While]… several viral genome sequences had been released,… virus isolates or samples [of 2019-nCoV] from infected patients were not available …”
The Drosten et al team then recommended to the WHO, that in the absence of an isolate of the 2019-nCoV virus, a similar 2003-SARS-CoV should be used as a “proxy” of the novel virus:
"The genome sequences suggest presence of a virus closely related to the members of a viral species termed severe acute respiratory syndrome (SARS)-related CoV, a species defined by the agent of the 2002/03 outbreak of SARS in humans [3,4].
We report on the the establishment and validation of a diagnostic workflow for 2019-nCoV screening and specific confirmation [using the RT-PCR test], designed in absence of available virus isolates or original patient specimens.
Design and validation were enabled by the close genetic relatedness to the 2003 SARS-CoV, and aided by the use of synthetic nucleic acid technology.”
What this ambiguous statement suggests is that the identity of 2019-nCoV was not required and that “Confirmed Covid-19 Cases” (aka infection resulting from the novel 2019 coronavirus) would be validated by “the close genetic relatedness to the 2003-SARS-CoV.”
What this means is that a coronavirus detected 19 years ago (2003-SARS-CoV) is being used to “validate” the identity of a so-called “novel coronavirus” first detected in China’s Hubei Province in late December 2019.
The recommendations of the Drosten study (generously supported and financed by the Gates Foundation) were then transmitted to the WHO. They were subsequently endorsed by the Director General of the WHO, Tedros Adhanom.
The WHO did not have in its possession the “virus isolate” required to identify the virus. It was decided that an isolate of the new coronavirus was not required.
The Drosten et al article pertaining to the use of the RT-PCR test Worldwide (under WHO guidance) was challenged in a November 27, 2020 study by a group of 23 international virologists, microbiologists et al.
It stands to reason that if the PCR test uses the 2003 SARS- CoV virus as “a point of reference”, there can be no “confirmed” Covid-19 cases resulting from the novel virus 2019-nCoV, subsequently renamed SARS-CoV-2.
The Chinese authorities announced on January 7, 2020 that “a new type of virus” had been “identified” “similar to the one associated with SARS and MERS” (related report, not original Chinese government source). The underlying method adopted by the Chinese research team is described below:
"We prospectively collected and analysed data on patients with laboratory-confirmed 2019-nCoV infection by real-time RT-PCR and next-generation sequencing.
Data were obtained with standardised data collection forms shared by WHO and the International Severe Acute Respiratory and Emerging Infection Consortium from electronic medical records."
The above study (quotation above as well as other documents consulted) suggest that China’s health authorities did not undertake an isolation / purification of a patient’s specimen.
Using“laboratory-confirmed 2019-nCoV infection by real-time RT-PCR” is an obvious misnomer, i.e. the RT-PCR test cannot under any circumstances be used to identify the virus.
The isolate of the virus by the Chinese authorities is unconfirmed.
Freedom of Information (FOI) requests were addressed to ninety Health / Science institutions in a large number of countries.
The responses to these requests confirm that there is no record of isolation / purification of SARS-CoV-2“having been performed by anyone, anywhere, ever."
"The 90 Health / Science institutions that have responded thus far have provided and/or cited, in total, zero such records:
Our requests [under “freedom of information”] have not been limited to records of isolation performed by the respective institution, or limited to records authored by the respective institution, rather they were open to any records describing “COVID-19 virus” (aka “SARS-COV-2”) isolation/purification performed by anyone, ever, anywhere on the planet."
The Food and Drug Administration (FDA) asked a federal judge on Nov. 15 to give it until the year 2076 to fully release the documents in its possession tied to the approval of the Pfizer-BioNTech COVID-19 vaccine.
The FDA’s request was made in a filing as part of a Freedom of Information Act (FOIA) lawsuit by a medical transparency group. The government told the court it has 329,000 pages of documents responsive to the FOIA request and proposed releasing 500 pages per month to allow for redactions of exempt material.
At that rate, the FDA would fully release the records in question in just under 55 years.
5. The Threshold Amplification Cycles. The WHO Admits that the The Results of the RT-PCR “Test” are Totally Invalid
The rRT-PCR test was adopted by the WHO on January 23, 2020 as a means to detecting the SARS-COV-2 virus, following the recommendations of the Berlin Virology research group (quoted above).
Exactly one year later on January 20th, 2021, the WHO retracts. They don’t say “We Made a Mistake”. The retraction is carefully formulated. (See original WHO document here)
The contentious issue pertains to the number of amplification threshold cycles (Ct). According to Pieter Borger, et al
"The number of amplification cycles [should be] less than 35; preferably 25-30 cycles. In case of virus detection, >35 cycles only detects signals which do not correlate with infectious virus as determined by isolation in cell culture…"
The World Health Organization (WHO) tacitly admits one year later that ALL PCR tests conducted at a 35 cycle amplification threshold (Ct) or higher are INVALID.
But that is what they recommended in January 2020, in consultation with the virology team at Charité Hospital in Berlin.
If the test is conducted at a 35 Ct threshold or above (which was recommended by the WHO), genetic segments of the SARS-CoV-2 virus cannot be detected, which means that ALL the so-called “Confirmed Covid-19 Cases” tabulated Worldwide in the course of the last 22 months are invalid.
The cycle threshold (Ct) needed to detect virus is inversely proportional to the patient’s viral load. Where test results do not correspond with the clinical presentation, a new specimen should be taken and retested using the same or different NAT technology. (emphasis added)
WHO reminds IVD users that disease prevalence alters the predictive value of test results; as disease prevalence decreases, the risk of false positive increases (2).
This means that the probability that a person who has a positive result (SARS-CoV-2 detected) is truly infected with SARS-CoV-2 decreases as prevalence decreases, irrespective of the claimed specificity.”
An elderly COVID-19 patient has recovered after a court order allowed him to be treated with ivermectin, despite objections from the hospital in which he was staying, according to the family’s attorney.
This is not an issue of “Weak Positives” and “Risk of False Positive Increases”. What is at stake is a “Flawed Methodology” which leads to invalid estimates of “Confirmed Covid-19 Cases”.
What this admission of the WHO confirms is that the estimate of covid positive from a PCR test (with an amplification threshold of 35 cycles or higher) is invalid. In which case, the WHO recommends retesting: “a new specimen should be taken and retested…”.
The WHO calls for “Retesting”, which is tantamount to saying “We Screwed Up”.
That recommendation is pro-forma. It won’t happen. Several billion people Worldwide have already been tested, starting in early February 2020. Nonetheless,we must conclude that unless retested, those estimates (according to the WHO) are invalid.
From the outset, the PCR test has routinely been applied at a Ct amplification threshold of 35 or higher, following the January 2020 recommendations of the WHO.
What this means is that the PCR methodology as applied Worldwide has in the course of the last 20 months led to the compilation of faulty and misleading Covid statistics.
And these are the statistics which are used to measure the progression of the so-called “pandemic”.
Above an amplification cycle of 35 or higher, the test will not detect fragments of the virus. Therefore, the official “covid numbers” (Confirmed Covid-19 Cases) are meaningless.
It follows that there is no scientific basis for confirming the existence of a pandemic.
Which in turn means that the lockdown / economic measures which have resulted in social panic, mass poverty and unemployment (allegedly to curtail the spread of the virus) have no justification whatsoever.
According to scientific opinion:
"If someone is tested by PCR as positive when a threshold of 35 cycles or higher is used (as is the case in most laboratories in Europe & the US), the probability that said person is actually infected is less than 3%, the probability that said result is a false positive is 97%
As outlined above, “the probability that said result is a false positive is 97%”: It follows that using the >35 cycles detection will indelibly contribute to “hiking up” the number of “fake positives”.
The WHO’ Mea Culpa confirms that the Covid-19 PCR test procedure as applied is invalid.
Was the 2009 H1N1 Pandemic a “Dress Rehearsal”?
In 2009 a H1N1 pandemic allegedly affecting 2 billion people was carried out by the WHO.
Corruption at the highest levels of the WHO: Several critics including Dr. Wolfgang Wodarg confirmed that the H1N1 Pandemic was “Fake."
"The Parliamentary Assembly of the Council of Europe (PACE), a human rights watchdog, is publicly investigating the WHO’s motives in declaring a pandemic. Indeed, the chairman of its influential health committee, epidemiologist Wolfgang Wodarg, has declared that the “false pandemic” is “one of the greatest medicine scandals of the century.”
The RT-PCR Test is the Smoking Gun. It invalidates Everything.
There is no such thing as a “Confirmed Covid-19 Case”. The entire data bank is invalid.
At the time of writing, the number of tabulated so-called “Confirmed Covid-19 Cases” is of the order of 260 million Worldwide. These numbers are totally meaningless.
"None of this data can be categorized as “Confirmed.
The PCR Test does not identify the novel virus, and the genetic fragments of a so-called “similar” 2003 coronavirus (SARS-1) cannot be used as a means to identify the virus which causes Covid-19, nor can it be used to identify the deadly variants of the 2019 novel coronavirus.
Moreover, according to the Freedom of Information (FOI) study quoted above, the isolate of the novel coronavirus is unconfirmed.
As this pandemic wears on, the question of mass psychosis has to come up. To be clear, there are multiple paths that can lead to this result, whether a deep fear of authority or deep fear of the virus.
Sustained by a complexity of lies, the covid-19 narrative is extremely fragile. This consensus relies on fake science and a totally invalid data bank of alleged “confirmed Covid-19 cases”.
"How did Big Pharma manage to develop a vaccine (sponsored by the WHO, GAVI, the Gates Foundation, et al) with a mandate “to protect people” against a virus which has not been isolated/ purified from an “unadulterated sample taken from a diseased patient”?
Vaccine in relation to What? The virus has not been identified.
Moreover, 2019SARS-CoV-2 has been categorized as similar to the 2003 SARS-CoV which means that the 2019 SARS-CoV-2 is not a novel virus.
The legitimacy of the Covid vaccine project hinges upon the validity of hundreds of thousands of RT-PCR fake positive cases Worldwide combined with fake Covid related mortality data."
Important Resources - If You Have Taken a Covid "Vaccine"
If you have already taken one or more Covid shots and have become aware of the dangers - there is information available on steps that can be taken to mitigate risks.
National governments have announced a Fifth Wave, focussing on the alleged “deadly variants” of SARS-CoV-2, including the Delta variant.
The variant is a scam. How do they identify the “variants”. The PCR test neither detects the virus nor the variants of the virus.
There is no isolate of the novel coronavirus on record. Moreover, the WHO’s “customized” PCR test uses as a proxy a similar 2003 SARS-CoV virus (which no doubt has mutated extensively over the last 19 years).
"Restrictions would have to be reintroduced”. … the Delta variant poses a “higher risk of hospitalisations”
These announcements are intended to justify a continuation of repressive policy measures, the speeding up of the vaccination program, as well as the repression of the protest movement.
There is no Pandemic. The Endgame is Tyranny.
The Pandemic is being used to Impose a New World Order.
When the Lie Becomes the Truth, There is No Moving Backwards.
The first Step is to Dismantle the Propaganda Apparatus.
The Elite’s Covid Consensus is Extremely Fragile.
There is no Pandemic. They Do not have a Leg to Stand on.
Robert F. Kennedy, Jr.'s Highly Anticipated Book, “The Real Anthony Fauci”
Children’s Health Defense’s board chair and lead counsel Robert F. Kennedy, Jr.’s highly anticipated book, “The Real Anthony Fauci,” is available now in bookstores throughout the U.S. and Canada.
The New York Times bestselling author’s latest work details how Anthony Fauci, Bill Gates and their cohorts used their control of media outlets, scientific journals, key government and quasi-governmental agencies, and influential scientists and physicians to flood the public with fearful propaganda about COVID-19 virulence and pathogenesis, and to muzzle debate and ruthlessly censor dissent.
As people the world over are questioning the origins of the COVID crisis, news continues to emerge about U.S. taxpayers’ funding of gain-of-function research in Wuhan, China.
Some U.S. Senators including Rand Paul are calling for Fauci’s resignation while U.S. Rep. Nancy Mace is leading a bipartisan effort to investigate his agency’s treatment of beagle puppies during experiments that the group of lawmakers calls “cruel.”
“The Real Anthony Fauci” exposes a side of Dr. Fauci that has thus far been shielded from the public by the ongoing media blackout of any information that counters the Pharma / government narrative.
"The research I conducted for this book exposes how Fauci’s gargantuan yearly disbursements allow him to dictate the subject, content and outcome of scientific health research across the globe,” said Kennedy.
"These annual disbursements also allow Fauci to exercise dictatorial control over the army of ‘knowledge and innovation’ leaders who populate the ‘independent’ federal panels that approve and mandate drugs and vaccines - including the committees that allowed the Emergency Use Authorization of COVID-19 vaccines.”
“The Real Anthony Fauci” informs readers of how Fauci, Gates and their collaborators:
Invented and weaponized a parade of fraudulently concocted global pandemics, including bird flu (2005), swine flu (2009) and Zika (2015-2016), in order to sell novel vaccines, enrich their Pharma partners and increase the power of public health technocrats and Gates’ entourage of international agencies.
Made a series of prescient predictions about the imminent COVID-19 pandemic — almost to the day. Their precision soothsaying further awed a fawning, credulous and scientifically illiterate media that treats Gates and Fauci as religious deities, insulates them from public criticism and vilifies their doubters as heretics and “conspiracy theorists.” Adulatory mainstream media abetted Fauci’s conspiracy to cover up COVID’s origins at the Wuhan lab.
Teamed with government technocrats, military and intelligence planners, and health officials from the U.S., Europe and China to stage sophisticated pandemic “simulations” and “Germ Games.” Exercises like these, encouraged by the Global Preparedness Monitoring Board, laid the groundwork for imposition of global totalitarianism, including compulsory masking, lockdowns, mass propaganda and censorship, with the ultimate goal of mandating the coercive vaccination of 7 billion humans.
Practiced, in each of their “simulations,” psychological warfare techniques to create chaos, stoke fear, shatter economies, destroy public morale and quash individual self-expression - and then impose autocratic governance.
Kennedy discussed “The Real Anthony Fauci” at length Monday with Tucker Carlson on FOX Nation. Portions of that interview were featured last night on Tucker Carlson Tonight:
"Fauci’s COVID policies also spawned new insidious authoritarianism - and propelled America down a slippery slope toward a grim future as a dark totalitarian security and surveillance state,” said Kennedy.
Sign up for free news and updates from Robert F. Kennedy, Jr. and the Children’s Health Defense. CHD is planning many strategies, including legal, in an effort to defend the health of our children and obtain justice for those already injured. Your support is essential to CHD’s successful mission.
Vaccine Passports and A Cashless Society
Vaccine passports are the trap they have been working on from the beginning. Once people agree to their use, they can say goodbye to all their freedoms, and welcome tyranny.
If people’s freedom is based on a digital ID and that id has the info about whether you had this or that injection and later on your social score, that freedom (privilege for now) can be taken away anytime.
People need to say no to these vax passports, no matter what, even if they are jabbed already. Vax passports are not about health, it is about taking people’s freedom away! It is making their freedom to privileges that tyrannical govt can take away anytime they wish.
Did you notice vaccine passports are valid for 6 months from the date of their issue? [From 37 minutes here.]
So, if people use their brain, they would know this is not about health, as those who received their 2nd dose in Feb, March, April & May are already overdue for their Booster (ie the same jab that didn’t work 1st or 2nd time.)
But they are in a hurry to roll out the vax passports (and their NWO) and get people trapped, then they can threaten them with expiring 'passports' for any reason they might decide upon.
Total Individual Control Technology – Insider Exposes How You And Your DNA Are Being Targeted & Psychotechnology: How Artificial Intelligence Is Designed To Change Humanity December 6 2021 | From: WakeUpWorld / GlobalResearch / Various
Total Individual Control Technology is a type of EM (Electromagnetic) and V2K (Voice to Skull) mind-control technology that is being experimented with and deployed by the military industrial complex against segments of the American population.
Total Individual Control Technology is the ultimate weapon of control, since it can targets your individual DNA. Those attacked by this electronic stalking are known as TIs (Targeted Individuals).
Recently another brave whistleblower has stepped forward to expose it. Bryan Kofron (who formerly used the alias of Justin Carter) is a security industry specialist who used to work for a private security company SIS (Security Industry Specialists) in Seattle, Washington.
He quit in disgust after realizing that his former firm, and others just like it, were actively using so-called “total individual control technology” to target people, then ultimately control and destroy their lives.
Since he quit, he has himself become a victim of the technology via gangstalking.
What is Total Individual Control Technology Capable Of?
According to Kofron, this technology is so advanced that it can be used to read your mind, program your mind with thoughts (that you would believe are your own) and induce emotional states in you (including pain, hate and fear).
It can be used to tap into your optical nerve and auditory systems to see and hear what you are seeing and hearing.
It can target particular people by engaging in individual-specific attacks (based on the target’s DNA resonance). Finally, it is being used in vast social engineering programs as a way to experiment upon poor, homeless and weak people who have little or no chance of fighting back.
In interviews or presentations [no longer available] , Kofron explains that this technology is being used by psychopaths who have little scruples about the harm they are causing.
They are targeting specific groups of people: those who are cognitively inclined, highly intelligent, knowledgeable about advanced technology or interested in ‘alternative’ research (i.e. conspiracy research.)
In general, they are either targeting empowered individuals with free minds (to stop dissidents and revolutionaries) or those too poor and weak to fight back.
According to Kofron, here are some of the things Total Individual Control Technology is able to do:
“This technology manipulates the electrical signals in the brain, thus controlling thoughts and feelings and emotions and sensations throughout the body. It works by rewiring the brain by creating new neural pathways and destroying existing neural pathways, thus this literally changes the way a person thinks and thus behaves.”
“This technology can also be used to control the muscle movement of the target. It can take over one’s hands or feet while driving and make you press on the accelerator or press on the brake or turn. This can be used to cause accidents it can also be used to prevent accidents from happening.”
“This technology can also tap into the optical nerve of the target, and the auditory system of the target, so that those monitoring the target can see what the target is seeing and hear what target is hearing.
This information is then downloaded and stored on a computer, in a highly secure classified site on servers that are guarded by some of the tightest security in the world.
This results in the individual’s entire day, everything they see, everything they hear, everything they experiment, everything they experience, and everything they feel being recorded till the end of time.”
“This technology can also be used to manipulate the emotions of the target. It can induce fear, love, hate.”
“This technology can be used to beam images and even motion pictures into one’s brain. Images and motion pictures that are so realistic that you think you are actually watching a movie or seeing something in reality. It’s like a virtual reality 3D rendering that takes place within the target’s mind.
The images and motion pictures manifest themselves in such a way that the target if they are not aware that this technology is being used on them will believe that they are natural thoughts and natural images.”
“This technology can also be used to induce and control dreams. It can be used to control dream cycles and sleep patterns. To cause one to sleep very deeply or to cause one to not sleep at all. REM cycles, alpha beta and delta brainwaves can be induced immediately by this technology.
And this technology can also be used to mimic spiritual experiences. Joy, love, peace that passes understanding can all be induced artificially by this technology to make the target believe that they are having a genuine spiritual experience when they’re not.”
“This technology can also be used to sexually manipulate the target. Make them feel sexual arousal or turn off their sexuality altogether, it can stimulate them and it can shut them down at a moments notice. It can also be used to manipulate the hormones of the target, thus lowering and raising estrogen and testosterone levels in women and men respectively.”
“This technology can also be used to read the thoughts of the target in real time … they can read your thoughts verbatim as they occur within your own mind.”
“Anywhere from small groups of people 10-20 to 100, to medium size groups of people several thousand to tens of thousands.
This is done by creating a field effect, where an entire field of electromagnetic energy is created in a geographical location and any human being within that geographical location within that electromagnetic field affecting that geographical location will be effected by the technology.
This can be used to induce a general mood in a population or a crowd of people. It can be used to make them passive, it can be used to make them agitated. And this can be used to cause or stop, induce riots. Stop crime, start crime. Stop thoughts, start thoughts. Massive mind control on a citywide level.”
Total Individual Control Technology Attacks Specific Individuals Based on DNA Resonance
As I have discussed in previous articles on mind control - such as “They” Can’t Read Your Thoughts … Right? - the state of current mind control technology is beyond most’s people comprehension and idea of what is possible.
Yet, we have had enough out-of-the-closet whistleblowers and leaked or declassified documents to give us a clear idea of the scary extent to which we can be psychically attacked.
Whistleblowers such as Dr. Robert Duncan have lectured at length about the capabilities of V2K technology, which is defined as an EM frequency technology that utilizes RF (Radio Frequency) signals to induce sound within the cranial cavity of the target. V2K literally pipes thoughts directly into people’s heads without them knowing it.
Kofron bases his information on his own experience as an insider in this field, and also as recent victim of V2K himself. He was attacked once he went public. He claims he has been assaulted with a beta version which is especially nasty, piping thoughts into his head such as:
“Everyone’s against you.”
“Please be quiet or we’re going to kill you.”
“Don’t work again or we’re going to kill you.”
“You’re the lab rat now motherfucker.”
Kofron claims the Total Individual Control Technology attacks are attempting to turn him against his former work colleagues, friends and family.
However, since he was trained in this area, he knows that the voices are technological and can defend himself against the manipulations once he hears and identifies them.
Kofron echoes exactly what Duncan has warned about: individual-specific attacks. Duncan states that every person has a “unique resonance signature”, and in almost exactly the same words, Kofron states that:
“… the DNA of the individual is used to determine the resonant frequency of the DNA itself, the resonant frequency is then used to fine tune the technology … to tune it perfectly to the resonant frequency of the targeted individual’s DNA.”
This leads into another aspect of the NWO agenda: the drive to create a worldwide DNA database. When seen in the light of Total Individual Control Technology, the acquisition of an entire population’s DNA takes on a very sinister meaning.
It is no coincidence that Amazon and Google (who are ultimately controlled by the same force, as David Icke suggests) are racing each other, along with Microsoft, IBM and other companies, to assemble a DNA database as quickly as they can.
Those in power who gain access a completed worldwide DNA database and total individual control technology would have a horrifying weapon at their disposal to target literally anyone they wanted.
Kofron exposes how prospective employees are tricked out of their DNA. They apply for a job at SIS, get told they have to do a drug test, and when the urine sample is sent to a lab, part is siphoned off as DNA to go into Amazon’s burgeoning DNA database.
Americans, in the millions, are having their DNA stolen from them, without their knowledge or consent, so they become unwitting targets of this insidious program!
Social Engineering with Total Individual Control Technology
Kofron talks at length about how this technology is fully operational and is already being tested upon those in society who are struggling (such as those who are homeless, poor and who don’t have much family or many friends) since they make the easiest targets.
On his website GangstalkerWars.com, he exposed the details of ongoing operations within Seattle (where he used to work for SIS).
This social engineering is being done by the Federal Government, the Military Intelligence agencies, private security firms (more on this below), some of the largest US corporations (after all, we live in a corporatocracy), local and state police, and social programs within inner-city America.
In one such operation, the perpetrators would target certain geographical blocks of the city, and, for instance, cause everyone in that area to be in a bad mood. In another operation, SIS (employed by Amazon whose headquarters are in Seattle) would test upon Amazon employees.
In another operation, SIS would experiment upon its own low level employees.
In another operation, homeless people were brought in from all over the nation to special buildings that were then targeted. This is true gangstalking - the ganging up by sociopaths and psychopaths upon the innocent to electronically harass and stalk them.
The Rising Danger of the Private Security Firm Industry in America
Kofron warns about an alarming trend in American society: the rise of private security companies who mostly employ ex-military and ex-intelligence agents. As I covered in this 2-part series, the US Military Intelligence Complex is completely and utterly out of control.
It runs the government and pulls the strings attached to all the puppet politicians, who don’t have the necessary “clearance” to access the truly top secret information. These security firms, like the MIC itself, appear to operate above and outside the law.
The culture inside of these companies is toxic. People rising up the ranks are conditioned to use this technology against innocent victims, and are told they will be rewarded with everything (money, power, women, sex, connection, access, status, belonging to the power club) if they go along with the program and become perpetrators.
If they have a strong conscience and refuse, they will be sacked, shunned, cut off, threatened and even made into TIs themselves.
Another aspect of Total Individual Control Technology which the perpetrators use to shield themselves is the cruel use of false psychiatric diagnoses.
Here’s how it works: they manipulate TI victims to see a psychiatrist, and then they bribe the psychiatrist to deliver a fake diagnosis that the victim is mentally unstable, deranged, delusional, crazy, incompetent, paranoid, schizophrenic, suffering from Multiple Personality Disorder – or they invent some similar legal-medical-psychobabble diagnosis.
This has the unfortunate effect of stripping away the victim’s natural or human rights, which leaves him or her with no recourse to fight back against his attackers, since his claims and testimonies will be dismissed as the ravings of a madman.
This is a similar tactic to what is used with other victims of mind control. In my interview with Max Spiers, he touched on the use of the Big Pharma “false memory” foundation, which includes bogus therapists and psychiatrists who convince mind control victims that they’re having false memories (when they are actually recalling how they were tortured and programmed).
The Infrastructure Underlying Total Individual Control Technology
The infrastructure that is enabling the total individual control technology is composed mostly of antennae, radar and cell phone towers. Often, the antennae are camouflaged (hidden behind walls).
Some or most of the radar used is from military bases.
Kofron was not able to explain much of how the technology actually works, although an electrical engineer who called in on one of the radio interviews suggested that the perpetrators are setting up a standing wave of DNA, then doing slight variations in the phasing using pulse code modulation.
Final Thoughts: Total Individual Control Technology Perpetrated by the Cult of Power
In concluding, it’s important to realize how such cruel surveillance is being perpetuated.
As Kofron explains, it’s all about creating an “in” club of perpetrators who get rewarded with money, sex, power and the intrinsic human need for belonging, get told they are on the “right” side and the TIs are on the “wrong” side – and get threatened that if they speak up or quit, they may end up on that wrong side. It’s the cult of power.
Hopefully this testimony can serve as a wake up call for those on the fence who can’t quite bring themselves to believe or act. In many ways, time is running out and the net is being drawn tighter and tighter.
The more technology advances, the more weapons the cult of power will have to enslave those who stand for truth and freedom. At a certain point, there will literally be nowhere to run or hide. The only option is to face it now before it’s too late.
Psychotechnology: How Artificial Intelligence Is Designed To Change Humanity
Psychotechnologyis a word coined by William Ammerman, although the word may also have been coined by others and share multiple meanings. Ammerman defines the word as “technology that influences people psychologically by deploying artificial intelligence through digital media.”
This neologism is a portmanteau, being made up (obviously) of psycho from psychological, plus technology.
The concept behind the word psychotechnology is an extremely important (and dangerous) one: the idea that as technology becomes more advanced, more personable and more human-like, it will start persuading us more and more.
Psychotechnology and Voice AI
There are many dangers of AI or Artificial Intelligence. As I pointed out in my previous article Voice AI: Dawn of the Reduction of Human Thinking, the emergence of voice AI may herald a new era of intellectual passivity and laziness.
People may start to depend so heavily on their voice AI oracle that they no longer bother to fact check, research the veracity if its answers or seek alternative viewpoints.
This, in turn, will place a colossal limit on human perception, which will essentially be constrained by whatever limits and algorithms Big Tech constructs – working closely, of course, as it always has, with the MIC (Military Intelligence Complex) and other elements of the NWO (New World Order).
The Danger of AI: Humans Extending Empathy to Machines
I regard psychotechnology as a key danger of AI. It represents a particularly insidious threat, since it ostensibly appears benign and helpful. Here is the point: as we talk to our smart devices and smart machines, we become more empathetically connected to them.
Digital assistants like Apple’s Siri, Amazon’s Alexa, the Google Assistant and Microsoft’s Cortana use voice user interface (VUI) technology. There is something about the act of giving and receiving speech to an object that moves into a different ontological category.
The makers of AI know this; indeed, Big Tech founders and executives have openly boasted about hacking human psychology and exploiting vulnerabilities in the human psyche (here is former Facebook executive Sean Parker, one example of many).
As we engage more and more with our smart devices, we start to project our feelings onto them (despite the fact they are inanimate objects).
We start to take hear their voice as the voice of some animate, autonomous being. We start to become persuaded by them.
AI Machines are Designed to Operate Upon you Psychologically
Psychotechnology is psychological technology. It is technology that operates upon us psychologically. We need to stop and reflect for a moment. We are having conversations with AI machines intentionally designed to learn how to persuade us with personalized information.
These AI machines know how to trigger us emotionally, because they have been programmed that way. Ammerman explains that this is due to a convergence of 4 factors:
1. Personalization of information/ads
2.
Increased science of persuasion
3.
Machine learning
4.
Natural language processing
We are at the point in our evolution where the science of persuasion has become quite advanced, as Ammerman explains:
“A social media “like” triggers a small release of dopamine which produces pleasure in our brains and keeps us addicted to our social media feeds.
Video game developers use similar triggers to reward us and keep us addicted to our games. Researchers including Clifford Nass and BJ Fogg have transformed the study of persuasion into a science while simultaneously demonstrating that humans can develop an empathetic relationship with their computers.
They have also demonstrated that the more humanlike computers seem, the more empathy humans display toward them. As computers gain more humanlike qualities, such as speech, they become more persuasive.”
Then, when you combine this with machine learning, you have a recipe for the dangerous potential of AI machines to transform from servant to master:
“Algorithms no longer simply predict. They prescribe and improve. Advances in artificial intelligence, including supervised learning, unsupervised learning, and reinforcement learning, ensure that marketers and advertisers are constantly improving the tactics they are using to deliver persuasive and personalized messaging.
Quite literally, computers are learning to persuade us using personalized information.”
Siri and Alexa, I Love You
Ammerman tells the story of how he interacted with a little boy (4 years old) who was commanding the Amazon Echo device to do certain things, e.g. play Star Wars music. Then, at a certain point, he declared to Alexa, “I love you!”
His mother overheard this; Ammerman noticed a look of pain and/or jealousy on her face. Sadly, this story is not uncommon. There are numerous reports of people falling in love with their machines. Mechanophilia (being sexually turned on by machines) is a diagnosable psychological disorder.
Have you heard about dating simulations where the aim of the video game is to fall in love with a computer character and live happily ever after?
None of this is really surprising when you consider that it’s the NWO agenda. We are being conditioned to do so. We are being encouraged to anthropomorphize our machines and relate to them as living beings when they are actually just inanimate objects.
Why? The agenda behind it is transhumanism, the merging of man and machine. We are being trained to treat AI as animate, then to befriend it, then to worship it, so that finally we can be convinced to merge with it – and lose our humanity in the process.
Final Thoughts: We Must Be Aware of the Impacts of Psychotechnology
This is one area where being aware is the main part of the solution. If we want to retain our autonomy (and mental sanity), we must resist the urge to anthropomorphize our smart devices and computers. They are machines, not matter how ‘clever’ they become.
There is no substitute for human relationships, human interaction and human intimacy. Stop referring to machines as ‘he’ or ‘she’ when they can never be more than inanimate objects that have been programmed to do something.
Stop using them as a substitute for thinking, entertainment and – most importantly – for deeper fulfillment. We ignore the impacts of psychotechnology only at our own peril.
Massive Genetic Study Reveals 90 Percent Of Earth’s Animals Appeared At The Same Time December 5 2021 | From: TechTimes
Landmark new research that involves analyzing millions of DNA barcodes has debunked much about what we know today about the evolution of species.
In a massive genetic study, senior research associate at the Program for the Human Environment at Rockefeller University Mark Stoeckle and University of Basel geneticist David Thaler discovered that virtually 90 percent of all animals on Earth appeared at right around the same time.
More specifically, they found out that 9 out of 10 animal species on the planet came to being at the same time as humans did some 100,000 to 200,000 years ago.
"This conclusion is very surprising,"says Thaler, "and I fought against it as hard as I could."
What Is DNA Barcoding?
Over the last decade, hundreds of scientists collected around 5 million DNA barcodes from 100,000 animal species in different parts of the globe. Stoeckle and Thaler looked through these 5 million genetic imprints to find one of the most surprising discoveries about evolution to date.
There are two types of DNA. Most people know nuclear DNA. This is the DNA containing the genetic blueprint for each single individual. It is passed down from the parents to the offspring.
The genome is made from kinds types of molecules arranged in pairs. There are 3 billion of these pairs, which are then used to form thousands of genes.
The latest research is debunking current knowledge about evolution. After studying 5 million genetic barcodes, scientists found 90 percent of species on Earth may have emerged around the same time as humans
The other, less familiar type of DNA is one found in the mitochondria of cells. The mitochondria generate energy for the cell and contains 37 genes. One of these is the COI gene, which is used to create DNA barcodes. All species have a very similar mitochondrial DNA, but their DNA is also different enough so we can distinguish between species.
Paul Hebert, biologist and director of the Biodiversity Institute of Ontario, developed a new way to identify species by studying the COI gene.
Born Around The Same Time
In analyzing the COI of 100,000 species, Stoeckle and Thaler arrived at the conclusion that most animals appeared simultaneously. They found that the neutral mutation across species were not as varied as expected. Neutral mutation refers to the slight DNA changes that occur across generations.
They can be compared to tree rings because they can tell how old a certain specie or individual is.
As to how that could have happened, it's unclear. A likely possibility is the occurrence of a sudden event that caused large-scale environmental trauma and wiped out majority of the Earth's species.
"Viruses, ice ages, successful new competitors, loss of prey - all these may cause periods when the population of an animal drops sharply," explains Jesse Ausubel, director of the Program for the Human Environment.
Such times give rise to sweeping genetic changes across the planet, causing new species to appear. However, the last time such an occurrence took place was 65 million years ago, when an asteroid hit the Earth and killed off the dinosaurs and half of all other species on the planet.
The study is published in the journal Human Evolution.
Corporate Mass Media Controls Your Mind December 4 2021 | From: FinalWakeupCall / Various
A True and honest media is a dream: The mainstream mass media, is focusing their news programmes and lacking narratives with transparency on negative stories on fires, wrecks, murder, mayhem, third-party scandals, and not to forget; bashing Russia with flame and blame, intentionally creating fear, distrust and conflict.
Was this nothing more than an attempt to discredit Trump and his victory?
The question is; Is there any good news? Yes, there is. But the mainstream media isn’t used to having their spin questioned – especially by the president. Since Donald Trump was elected, the aggressive media attacks against the administration have served as undeniable proof that the news is biased and unfairly controlled.
The editorial board destroys any illusion that the mainstream media has remained impartial. This is an outright dream. These are the people pulling the strings that everyday decide which story to run, when and where.
They edit the context and content of every story coming out of their newsroom. They decide, which story is front page, and throw away any idea they don’t like. It’s hard to imagine for honest journalists trying to work in that kind of environment.
On the other hand; Fake news, it seems, is what people want. Because News is seen as a form of entertainment. They want entertainment that makes them feel smart, heroic, and honourable. This is the stimulus; people want lies! They don’t want to feel uncomfortable, inadequate, or stupid. So the last thing they want, is any serious contemplation or real insight.
The truth is too difficult to accept and too bitter to swallow. People seem to want news that goes down smoothly, and makes them feel taller and slimmer. The farther away from the hard facts – as in first-hand experience – the falser the news becomes.
The news you read in the newspaper, usually takes place far away, based on motives you can’t understand, built on compounded fantasies, myths, and delusions. This is clearly shown by looking, for example, at the economic news.
They propagate that the economy is doing great, while median income and the standard of living are declining, people are suffering under austerity measures, and can hardly can get by on two or three-part-time jobs, while being forced to pay more for most things.
What if a brave young reporter had a hot lead on a Trump story that could shake things up, and make the president look good to readers? Does one risk their job by speaking out, or does the reporter cave in to their bosses’ unfair pressure and kill the story?
This isn’t new, of course. The fascist-leftist spinning machine has been at work for decades. Only now, it has grown so out-of-control, it’s almost comical in its obviousness.
Nowadays, the only way to advance in the mainstream media is to push leftist views, instead of the truth. In the past ten years, liberal media sources have seen a sharp decline in distribution. People simply aren’t subscribing or reading anymore. As a result, advertising revenue and growth have both dried up. But the old guard – the big bosses with fat salaries, great pensions and thirty years of experience – haven’t left yet, while refusing to adapt to the market.
Mass Media Controls People’s Minds:
The mass media is controlled by only a handful of multinational corporations. Insightful journalism is continuously impeded, while secretive operations disregard the freedom of information Act.
The purpose of this law is to declassify governmental documents. It also is the subject of an ongoing conflict between government officials and news organisations, as well as private citizens.
It is especially troubling that media ownership is so concentrated when considered that more than 98% of people in the West have a television. Of this 98%; 82% watch primetime TV, and 71% watch cable programs every week. Additionally, 84% listen to the radio regularly, while 79% are newspaper readers.
Nearly half of these people have access to the Internet, whilst certain demographic groups reach 70%. These totals suggest that most westerners spend an excessive amount of time staring at a screen, which in itself is bad enough.
But when realised that everything these people see and hear comes from a mere five major media outlets, the threat of potential propagandising and mind control becomes absolutely clear.
If people would know just how deeply they have been programmed and mind controlled, straight up truth could prove to be far too disruptive, negatively impacting too many.
Contemplate the starting of a transition for humanity into a sovereign consciousness, by inserting Trump into a leadership position, in which he can stir the pot with the mix of some bold-faced lies and hard truths, scaring everyone awake with a nonsensical missile strike on an abandoned airfield, coordinated as a reverse false flag operation in which the Chinese, Russians and Syrians are all involved on behalf of the Alliance.
They apparently feel this action will do the mass awakening trick. For people that are already awake, it’s very bad and awkward watching all this deceit playing out, both malevolent and benevolent. But for the ones that are still asleep, as most are, this will possibly be eye opening.
There is no substitute for free and unfettered news gathering. Journalists are not cops nor are they public relations agents.
They are reporters, for them there are no substitutes. One of the largest problems affecting freedom of the press is the corporatisation of the media, which dilutes news content in order to make it more appealing to larger audiences, in line with the instruction from the Deep State cabal.
Corporate media giants are silencing conflicting voices to the spoon-fed narrative, abandoning quality journalism and eliminating local content. Society is in desperate need of better media.
The world is changing fast, and many people, at least in the developed world, are starting to see through corporate- owned mainstream media.
Television is specialised in ‘faking’ and lying about major global events on multiple occasions, meanwhile some media-employees are leaving their jobs and are telling the truth about what and who dominates a large portion of mainstream media.
The Future for the Media:
The future media, will be organised by private citizens who, making use of cell-phone cameras and the internet, take it upon themselves to find and report news, reporting on what people do, and what has happened.
If they have studied a specific profession and have become interested in the issues involved, they can actively search for, collect, and read numerous cases from others, on the same or related subjects, comparing different points of view and insights, all the while fact-checking. Sources should be scrutinised and then they could blog or write an article on the subject, eventually participating in the media debate, etc.
A few conscious individuals believe that the world is undergoing an exciting, but uncomfortable change, that may be unsettling, but the current advances in technology and environmentalism, and the soon to be released thousands of patents that have been hidden by the cabal, will eventually lead to a brighter and more harmonious future, that comes with free energy, and engines that run on water. More specifically, technologies are to be released that are so advanced compared to what is currently known.
People will be totally amazed when these are revealed and implemented.
Time, to Listen to the Conspiracy Theorists:
But the public must be cautious and patient. We have been deceived for far too long by the cabal plutocrats who dominate finance, corporate life and the mass media. For many years now and from all different angles, awakened and conscious people have been warning of a coming New World Order, which entails socialist globalisation desired by the cabal.
Together with their puppets, centred in the various secret societies of satanic Luciferianism, this is the agenda they are pursuing.
In a world of ignorance, apathy, gross contradiction, cognitive dissonance and denial, what will it take for the masses to wake up?
Granted, they have been deceived, but living in zombie-like trances, they lack responsibility towards themselves and their fellow humans: It’s therefore no surprise to see them buy into the cabal’s chutzpah and blindly give their consent to the ruling elite’s agenda, not knowing about the underlying hidden, dark and destructive concealed motives.
A major objective of the cabal’s agenda is; the dehumanisation of the masses on many levels through manipulation, keeping people in the dark about what must be done to prevent the disastrous consequences.
They may have heard about untested vaccines, GMO, and toxic food, corporate drug companies influencing government policies, totalitarian martial law, like in France, and the ever-increasing restrictions on liberties.
But people are unfortunately lacking the interest and motivation to come into action against these atrocities. This could be easily stopped through our mass refusal to co-operate, in the awareness of their disempowering and destructive secret motives.
Without a doubt, we have reached the point in time when the common public should listen to the ‘conspiracy theorists’ and the youthful activists.
Why should people believe the same officials that have made false statements and allegations over and over again, coercing us into making wrong choices? Why should people listen to anything these institutions say?
Individual Freedom:
If people are again to experience the individual freedom and capitalist initiatives that once brought prosperity to the middleclass and beyond, as well as social success, it is obvious that something must change.
Simply bouncing back and forth between different administrations that actually are in essence the same; controlled by the deep state’s hidden government, and the globalists from the shadows, will not bring any improvement in the standard of living of ordinary people.
When people awaken en masse, and ally with the Eastern gnostic bloodline nobility, then the 13 Khazarian Archon bloodline families that comprise the Deep State, resp. the dark nobility, will soon be out of oxygen everywhere on planet Earth.
Once the Central Banks are abolished, and all currencies are backed by gold or silver, they won’t have the money to create wars. They’ll lose their power structure, their agencies, allies, and weapons of mass destruction, resulting in game over for them.
What will remain, is their final public surrender announced by Donald Trump, which will bring down Netanyahu in Israel, and Poroshenko in the Ukraine, solve the 9/11, MH 17 downing, and all other false flag operations. It will also guarantee Marine Le Pen wins the French elections, that will bring down Merkel in Germany, end the European Union, and give rise to the default of the Euro.
People Unite:
People must unite, against their domestic fascist government, the most formidable enemy is the one that controls every nation’s government, the financial system, the educational system, the health system, and evencitizens’ lifestyle.
The force in numbers of the enemy is negligible, while we, the people have an impressive majority; provided many of us are awake and conscious. It is time for all individual citizens to become proactive!
If the people in this world of violence do not unite for the important purpose of destroying the Deep State with their murderous terrorist attacks, and drug organisations, we are lost. The cabal will not go away without a fight, but will rise in strength and will use force to suppress us even more.
People must unite, like an army that quickly diffuses their killers by mobilising their own rescue from a pending threat.
People’s sheer numbers and faith could free us all and we could experience a world of peace, prosperity, being able to take care of ourselves without intervention.
Governments: The Enemy Of Freedom & Globalists Interviewed: They Admitted They Controlled The Government December 3 2021 | From: Sott / JonRappoport / Various
My friends, we're being played for fools. On paper, we may be technically free.
In reality, however, we are only as free as a government official may allow.
"Rights aren't rights if someone can take them away. They're privileges. That's all we've ever had in this country, is a bill of temporary privileges. And if you read the news even badly, you know that every year the list gets shorter and shorter.
Sooner or later, the people in this country are gonna realize the government ... doesn't care about you, or your children, or your rights, or your welfare or your safety... It's interested in its own power.
That's the only thing. Keeping it and expanding it wherever possible."
- George Carlin
We only think we live in a constitutional republic, governed by just laws created for our benefit.
Truth be told, we live in a dictatorship disguised as a democracy where all that we own, all that we earn, all that we say and do - our very lives - depends on the benevolence of government agents and corporate shareholders for whom profit and power will always trump principle.
And now the government is litigating and legislating its way into a new framework where the dictates of petty bureaucrats carry greater weight than the inalienable rights of the citizenry.
This holds true whether you're talking about the right to criticize the government in word or deed, the right to be free from government surveillance, the right to not have your person or your property subjected to warrantless searches by government agents, the right to due process, the right to be safe from soldiers invading your home, the right to be innocent until proven guilty and every other right that once reinforced the founders' belief that this would be "a government of the people, by the people and for the people."
Not only do we no longer have dominion over our bodies, our families, our property and our lives, but the government continues to chip away at what few rights we still have to speak freely and think for ourselves.
If the government can control speech, it can control thought and, in turn, it can control the minds of the citizenry.
The unspoken freedom enshrined in the First Amendment is the right to think freely and openly debate issues without being muzzled or treated like a criminal.
In other words, if we no longer have the right to tell a Census Worker to get off our property, if we no longer have the right to tell a police officer to get a search warrant before they dare to walk through our door, if we no longer have the right to stand in front of the Supreme Court wearing a protest sign or approach an elected representative to share our views, if we no longer have the right to protest unjust laws by voicing our opinions in public or on our clothing or before a legislative body - no matter how misogynistic, hateful, prejudiced, intolerant, misguided or politically incorrect they might be - then we do not have free speech.
What we have instead is regulated, controlled speech, and that's a whole other ballgame.
Protest laws, free speech zones, bubble zones, trespass zones, anti-bullying legislation, zero tolerance policies, hate crime laws and a host of other legalistic maladies dreamed up by politicians and prosecutors are conspiring to corrode our core freedoms purportedly for our own good.
For instance, the protest laws being introduced across the country - in 18 states so far - are supposedly in the name of "public safety and limiting economic damage."
Don't fall for it.
No matter how you package these laws, no matter how well-meaning they may sound, no matter how much you may disagree with the protesters or sympathize with the objects of the protest, these proposed laws are aimed at one thing only: discouraging dissent.
In Arizona, police would be permitted to seize the assets of anyone involved in a protest that at some point becomes violent.
In Minnesota, protesters would be forced to pay for the cost of having police on hand to "police" demonstrations.
Oregon lawmakers want to "require public community colleges and universities to expel any student convicted of participating in a violent riot."
A proposed North Dakota law would give drivers the green light to "accidentally" run over protesters who are blocking a public roadway. Florida and Tennessee are entertaining similar laws.
Pushing back against what it refers to as "economic terrorism," Washington wants to increase penalties for protesters who block access to highways and railways.
Anticipating protests over the Keystone Pipeline, South Dakota wants to apply the governor's emergency response authority to potentially destructive protests, create new trespassing penalties and make it a crime to obstruct highways.
In Iowa, protesters who block highways with speeds posted above 55 mph could spend five years in prison, plus a fine of up to $7,500. Obstruct traffic in Mississippi and you could be facing a $10,000 fine and a five-year prison sentence.
A North Carolina law would make it a crime to heckle state officials. Under this law, shouting at a former governor would constitute a crime.
Indiana lawmakers wanted to authorize police to use "any means necessary" to breakup mass gatherings that block traffic. That legislation has since been amended to merely empower police to issue fines for such behavior.
Georgia is proposing harsh penalties and mandatory sentencing laws for those who obstruct public passages or throw bodily fluids on "public safety officers."
Virginia wants to subject protesters who engage in an "unlawful assembly" after "having been lawfully warned to disperse" with up to a year of jail time and a fine of up to $2,500.
Missouri wants to make it illegal for anyone participating in an "unlawful assembly" to intentionally conceal "his or her identity by the means of a robe, mask, or other disguise."
Colorado wants to lock up protesters for up to 18 months who obstruct or tamper with oil and gas equipment and charge them with up to $100,000 in fines.
Oklahoma wants to create a sliding scale for protesters whose actions impact or impede critical infrastructure. The penalties would range from $1,000 and six months in a county jail to $100,000 and up to 10 years in prison. And if you're part of an organization, that fine goes as high as $1,000,000.
Michigan hopes to make it easier for courts to shut down "mass picketing" demonstrations and fine protesters who block entrances to businesses, private residences or roadways up to $1,000 a day. That fine jumps to $10,000 a day for unions or other organizing groups.
Ask yourself: if there are already laws on the books in all of the states that address criminal or illegal behavior such as blocking public roadways or trespassing on private property - because such laws are already on the books - then why does the government need to pass laws criminalizing activities that are already outlawed?
What's really going on here?
No matter what the politicians might say, the government doesn't care about our rights, our welfare or our safety.
How many times will we keep falling for the same tricks?
Every despotic measure used to control us and make us cower and fear and comply with the government's dictates has been packaged as being for our benefit, while in truth benefiting only those who stand to profit, financially or otherwise, from the government's transformation of the citizenry into a criminal class.
Remember, the Patriot Act didn't make us safer. It simply turned American citizens into suspects and, in the process, gave rise to an entire industry - private and governmental - whose profit depends on its ability to undermine our Fourth Amendment rights.
Placing TSA agents in our nation's airports didn't make us safer.
It simply subjected Americans to invasive groping, ogling and bodily searches by government agents.
So, too, these protest laws are not about protecting the economy or private property or public roads. Rather, they are intended to muzzle discontent and discourage anyone from challenging government authority.
These laws are the shot across the bow.
They're intended to send a strong message that in the American police state, you're either a patriot who marches in lockstep with the government's dictates or you're a pariah, a suspect, a criminal, a troublemaker, a terrorist, a radical, a revolutionary.
Yet by muzzling the citizenry, by removing the constitutional steam valves that allow people to speak their minds, air their grievances and contribute to a larger dialogue that hopefully results in a more just world, the government is deliberately stirring the pot, creating a climate in which violence becomes inevitable.
When there is no steam valve - when there is no one to hear what the people have to say, because government representatives have removed themselves so far from their constituents - then frustration builds, anger grows and people become more volatile and desperate to force a conversation.
Then again, perhaps that was the government's plan all along.
As John F. Kennedy warned in March 1962, "Those who make peaceful revolution impossible will make violent revolution inevitable."
You sow discontent and fear among the populace. You terrorize the people into believing that radicalized foreigners are preparing to invade.
You teach them to be non-thinkers who passively accept whatever is told them, whether it's delivered by way of the corporate media or a government handler. You brainwash them into believing that everything the government does is for their good and anyone who opposes the government is an enemy.
You acclimate them to a state of martial law, carried out by soldiers disguised as police officers but bearing the weapons of war. You polarize them so that they can never unite and stand united against the government.
Click on the image above to see more detail in a new window
You create a climate in which silence is golden and those who speak up are shouted down. You spread propaganda and lies. You package the police state in the rhetoric of politicians.
And then, when and if the people finally wake up to the fact that the government is not and has never been their friend, when it's too late for peaceful protests and violence is all that remains to them as a recourse against tyranny, you use all of the tools you've been so carefully amassing - the criminal databases and surveillance and identification systems and private prisons and protest laws - and you shut them down for good.
The NSA will continue to collect electronic files on everything we do. More and more Americans are going to face jail time for offenses that prior generations did not concern themselves with.
The government - at all levels - could crack down on virtually anyone at any time.
Martin Luther King saw it coming: both the "spontaneous explosion of anger by various citizen groups" and the ensuing crackdown by the government.
"Police, national guard and other armed bodies are feverously preparing for repression," King wrote shortly before he was assassinated.
"They can be curbed not by unorganized resort to force...but only by a massive wave of militant nonviolence...
It also may be the instrument of our national salvation."
Militant nonviolent resistance.
"A nationwide nonviolent movement is very important," King wrote. "We know from past experience that Congress and the President won't do anything until you develop a movement around which people of goodwill can find a way to put pressure on them...
This means making the movement powerful enough, dramatic enough, morally appealing enough, so that people of goodwill, the churches, laborers, liberals, intellectuals, students, poor people themselves begin to put pressure on congressmen to the point that they can no longer elude our demands.
It must be militant, massive nonviolence," King emphasized.
In other words, besides marches and protests, there would have to be civil disobedience. Civil disobedience forces the government to expend energy in many directions, especially if it is nonviolent, organized and is conducted on a massive scale.
This is, as King knew, the only way to move the beast. It is the way to effect change without resorting to violence. And it is exactly what these protest laws are attempting to discourage
We are coming to a crossroads. Either we gather together now and attempt to restore freedom or all will be lost.
As King cautioned, "everywhere, 'time is winding up,' in the words of one of our spirituals, corruption in the land, people take your stand; time is winding up."
First of all, David Rockefeller’s Trilateral Commission was born in 1973, in part because the Globalist plan to ensure “free trade” (no tariffs paid by predatory mega-corporations) had run into a glitch.
That glitch was President Richard Nixon. He began laying tariffs on certain goods imported into the US, in order to level the playing field and protect American companies. Nixon, a substantial crook in other respects, went off-script in this case and actually started a movement to reject the Globalist vision.
After Nixon’s ouster from the White House, Gerald Ford became president, and he chose David’s brother, Nelson Rockefeller as his vice-president. It was a sign Globalism and free trade were back on track.
But David Rockefeller and his sidekick, Brzezinski, wanted more. They wanted a man in the White House whom they’d created from scratch.
That man was a peanut farmer no one had ever heard of: Jimmy Carter.
Through their media connections, David and Brzezinski vaulted Carter into the spotlight. He won the Democratic nomination (1976), spread a syrupy message of love and coming together after the Watergate debacle, and soon he was ensconced in the Oval Office.
Flash forward to 1978, the second year of Carter’s presidency. An interview took place.
It’s a close-up snap shot of a remarkable moment. It’s a through-the-looking-glass secret - in the form of a conversation between a reporter, Jeremiah Novak, and two Trilateral Commission members, Karl Kaiser and Richard Cooper.
The interview concerned the issue of who exactly, during President Carter’s administration, was formulating and controlling US economic and political policy.
The careless and off-hand attitude of Trilateralists Kaiser and Cooper is astonishing. It’s as if they’re saying, “What we’re revealing is already out in the open, it’s too late to do anything about it, why are you so worked up, we’ve already won…”
"NOVAK (the reporter): Is it true that a private [Trilateral committee] led by Henry Owen of the US and made up of [Trilateral] representatives of the US, UK, West Germany, Japan, France and the EEC is coordinating the economic and political policies of the Trilateral countries [which would include the US]?
COOPER: Yes, they have met three times.
NOVAK: Yet, in your recent paper you state that this committee should remain informal because to formalize ‘this function might well prove offensive to some of the Trilateral and other countries which do not take part.’ Who are you afraid of?
KAISER: Many countries in Europe would resent the dominant role that West Germany plays at these [Trilateral] meetings.
COOPER: Many people still live in a world of separate nations [!], and they would resent such coordination [of policy].
NOVAK: But this [Trilateral] committee is essential to your whole policy. How can you keep it a secret or fail to try to get popular support [for its decisions on how Trilateral member nations will conduct their economic and political policies]?
COOPER: Well, I guess it’s the press’ job to publicize it.
NOVAK: Yes, but why doesn’t President Carter come out with it and tell the American people that [US] economic and political power is being coordinated by a [Trilateral] committee made up of Henry Owen and six others? After all, if [US] policy is being made on a multinational level, the people should know.
COOPER: President Carter and Secretary of State Vance have constantly alluded to this in their speeches.
KAISER: It just hasn’t become an issue.
Source: “Trilateralism: The Trilateral Commission and Elite Planning for World Management,” ed. by Holly Sklar, 1980. South End Press, Boston. Pages 192-3.
Of course, although Kaiser and Cooper claimed everything being manipulated by the Trilateral Commission committee was already out in the open, it wasn’t.
Their interview slipped under the mainstream media radar, which is to say, it was ignored and buried. It didn’t become a scandal on the level of, say, Watergate, although its essence was far larger than Watergate.
US economic and political policy run by a committee of the Trilateral Commission - the Commission had been created in 1973 as an “informal discussion group” by David Rockefeller and his sidekick, Brzezinski, who would become Jimmy Carter’s National Security Advisor.
Shortly after Carter won the presidential election, his aide, Hamilton Jordan, said that if after the inauguration, Cy Vance and Brzezinski came on board as secretary of state and national security adviser, “We have lost. And I will quit.”
Lost - because both men were powerful members of the Trilateral Commission and their appointment to key positions would signal a surrender of White House control to the Commission.
Vance and Brzezinski were appointed secretary of state and national security adviser, as Jordan feared. But he didn’t quit. He became Carter’s chief of staff.
In the run-up to his inauguration after the 2008 presidential election, Obama was tutored by the co-founder of the Trilateral Commission, Zbigniew Brzezinski.
Four years before birthing the Commission with his boss of bosses, David Rockefeller, Brzezinski wrote:
"[The] nation state as a fundamental unit of man’s organized life has ceased to be the principal creative force. International banks and multinational corporations are acting and planning in terms that are far in advance of the political concepts of the nation state.”
Goodbye, separate nations.
Any doubt on the question of Trialteral goals is answered by David Rockefeller himself, in his Memoirs (2002):
"Some even believe we are part of a secret cabal working against the best interests of the United States, characterizing my family and me as ‘internationalists’ and of conspiring with others around the world to build a more integrated global political and economic structure - one world, if you will. If that is the charge, I stand guilty, and I am proud of it.”
Patrick Wood, author of Trilaterals Over Washington and Technocracy Rising, points out there are only 87 members of the Trilateral Commission who live in America.
Obama appointed eleven of them to posts in his administration. For example:
Tim Geithner, Treasury Secretary;
James Jones, National Security Advisor;
Paul Volker, Chairman, Economic Recovery Committee;
Dennis Blair, Director of National Intelligence.
Here is the payoff. The US Trade Representative (appointed by Obama in 2013), who was responsible for negotiating the Globalist TPP (Trans-Pacific Partnership) treaty with 11 other nations, was Michael Froman, a former member of the Trilateral Commission.
Don’t let the word “former” fool you. Commission members resign when they take positions in the Executive Branch of government. And when they serve in vital positions, such as US Trade Representative, they aren’t there by accident. They’re operatives with a specific agenda.
Flash forward one more time. Trump, who squashed the Globalist TPP treaty as soon as he was inaugurated, has been busy making staff appointments. Patrick Wood writes (2/6/17):
“According to a White House press release, the first member of the Trilateral Commission has entered the Trump administration as the Deputy Assistant to the President for International Economic Affairs, where he will sit on the National Security Council:
Kenneth I. Juster will serve as Deputy Assistant to the President for International Economic Affairs. He will coordinate the Administration’s international economic policy and integrate it with national security and foreign policy. He will also be the President’s representative and lead U.S. negotiator (“Sherpa”) for the annual G-7, G-20, and APEC Summits.”
Juster’s duties will take him into the heart of high-level negotiations with foreign governments on economic policy.
Keep your eye on Mr. Juster. Will he take actions in line with Trump’s avowed anti-Globalist stance? Or will Juster work as one more covert Trilateral operative in the center of American decision-making?
If the answer is “covert operative,” does Trump know this? Does he condone what Mr. Juster will do? Or is this a case of secret infiltration, on behalf the most powerful Globalist group in the world, the Trilateral Commission?
The Counterfeiters December 2 2021 | From: OpeningMinds / Various
Suppose you were a counterfeiter and were given the right to print all money in the United States [Read: Any Western Nation] with the sole proviso that you could not directly buy anything. You could make all the money you wanted but you were only allowed to pass it onto an unsuspecting public by loaning it to them or to their government.
Your only source of income would be the interest you collected on the total American money supply which is currently more than ten trillion dollars.
Actually, the Federal Reserve Bank issued a notice in 2005 saying they would no longer tell us what the total money supply starting in 2006, John Williams at Shadow Stats says the total M3 money supply is now over 11 trillion dollars.
That means that if you were given the same license to print money that the bankers gave themselves in 1913 you would be collecting the interest on 11 trillion dollars.
You could transfer all wealth from those poor devils who had to work for a living to your family because you have the license to print their money. That is why I have always said that the goal of the Federal Reserve Bank is to transfer all wealth from us to Wall Street.
Money is a commodity that measures the value of all other commodities and goods and services for sale. Prices are a ratio of money to everything for sale. For example, if we doubled the money supply but did not increase our output of goods and services we might expect prices to also double.
Please note that when I say money I am not just talking about Federal Reserve Notes. The total money supply also includes checking account money which bankers create when you ask for a loan.
When you ask for a ten thousand dollar loan, they are not loaning you money from an old lady's deposits. They are adding ten thousand dollars to the money supply. They are counterfeiting money.
One reason why the Federal Reserve Act was passed in 1913 was that Wall Street wanted us to enter World War I so the war would last longer.
If your family business were counterfeiting, you would want a war to run a huge deficit so you could create billions of dollars and enter them into circulation by loaning them to the governments so they get their young men killed.
And you could accomplish other worthy goals. The Great War as it was called did not end until General Allenby secured Palestine as a British colony which after just one more war was to become the state of Israel.
World War I also bankrupted our allies in England and France making New York the world's financial capitol. It bankrupted the Russians and enabled the Jewish Communists to take over.
That they killed 350,000 priests in the first two years and over 64,000,000 other Russians before the collapse of the Soviet Union is not even a footnote in the history books.
There were people who wanted to stop World War II before it started. But the counterfeiters would have nothing to do with them. The German General Staff sent two officers to London in March of 1939 to negotiate a peace.
They even offered to arrest Hitler. Previously, the Emperor of Japan had offered to break his alliance with the Nazis, to pull out of China and even to become an ally of the United States against the Soviet Union which at that time had been killing millions of Christians every year since 1918.
The Counterfeiters said no to peace again and yes to war. 58,000,000 people like you and me died. They were real life and blood people.
After the Second World War, the Counterfeiters gave northern Korea to Joe Stalin even though he was never an ally against Japan until the war was over. This enabled the Counterfeiters to train an army in the north and to create the Korean War just five years after the cessation of hostilities.
Millions more died. But fortunately for the Counterfeiters they were able to draft lots of young anti-Communist men and send them to Asia to die before they could start a resistance at home.
But in 1960 something startling happened in America. John Fitzgerald Kennedy was elected. He dared to issue Executive Order 11110 which directed the Treasurer of the United States to replace Federal Reserve Notes with Treasury Silver Certificates.
This would have led to the end of legalized counterfeiting in the USA. JFK also opposed the nuclear arms race in the Mideast. He demanded the right to inspect the Israeli nuclear works at Dimona.
Something had to be done and it was. The Zapruder film of the assassination of President Kennedy clearly showed the President's body being thrown backwards by the force of bullets coming from his front.
CBS radio had Dan Rather go on the air and tell the American people that the Zapruder film showed JFK being shot from behind.
Life magazine followed up by publishing photos taken in the order 1- 2 -3 and publishing them in the order 3-2-1 so their readers would mistakenly conclude that their young President who had attempted to save them from the Counterfeiters has been killed by a lone assassin shooting from the Texas School Book Depository.
Through their banks the Counterfeiters currently launder about a trillion dollars a year in drug money plus up to 400 billion dollars a year in illegal weapons sales.
They also launder 500 billion dollars a year in bribes. Some have theorized about the role of the Mafia in the JFK assassination but have failed to mention Meyer Lansky and the Counterfeiters, The Counterfeiters have flooded the world with drugs. They do not care that millions of lives have been ruined. They do not care that they are destroying America one family at a time.
They do not care that they are destroying American cities block by block and neighborhood by neighborhood. The Counterfeiters are making money and that is all that matters.
Others have the quaint notion that the Pentagon wanted JFK to go into the Vietnam War and to win a war against the Communists. To those I would say that Vietnam was a minor motive.
The goal was to get us into the the war so the Counterfeiters could kill another generation of anti-communists. Wall Street wanted to send a whole generation of young men to die in jungles of Asia.
That millions of Asians also died in the Korean and Vietnam wars was of no concern to them.
That million of American soldiers and Vietnamese civilians were exposed to Agent Orange making their children susceptible to birth defects was of no concern to the Counterfeiters. As you may suspect by now, Counterfeiters are not real human beings.
It seems like long ago but Lyndon Johnson was the first president to submit a budget that exceeded one hundred billion dollars a year. George W Bush just left office with a 1.2 trillion dollar deficit or 100 billion dollars a month. Times might be changing. Things might be getting worse for us. But business is great for the Counterfeiters.
To the two or three people who still think Bush was a great President I would say that 911 was an inside job and Dick Cheney knew it even if the village idiot from Crawford Texas did not.
I say to them one more time go to www.WTC7.net and look at the collapse videos of World Trade Center Tower 7. Please look at the intact glass in the building as it collapses.
Glass melts between 800 and 900 degrees Fahrenheit. A carbon based fire, such as, jet fuel burning in the open air without the benefit of added oxygen will not burn above 900 degrees.
So we know that the steel girders which required 2,200 degrees to melt were taken out within two seconds of each other simultaneously on 47 floors and that there must have been a source of oxygen inside WTC 7 that was adjacent to the girders but not the exterior glass.
There is a powdered substance called thermate which you can look up on Wikipedia. It uses a combination of aluminum, iron oxide, magnesium and other substances to generate an intense controlled heat and is capable of easily melting through steel girders with 4,800 degree temperatures in seconds.
For those of you who are not mathematically challenged I would point out that a few fires on several floors would not have brought down a 47 story building in 6.5 seconds. WTC 7 was not hit by a plane on 9-11-2001.
The Pentagon was also attacked on 9-11-2001. On 9-10-2001 Secretary of Defense Donald Rumsfeld admitted that neither he nor rabbi Dov Zakheim, the Comptroller of the Department of Defense (DOD), could adequately trace 2.3 trillion dollars in military spending from the previous Clinton and Bush I administrations.
It would seem that the Counterfeiters were not satisfied with their profits from counterfeiting and from laundering drug money. They have been stealing money from unaudited federal spending for decades under both political parties.
On the morning of 9-11-2001 at 09:32 hours, Robert Andrews, a former Green Beret, was Acting Assistant Secretary of Defense for Special Operations.
He was entering the Counter Terrorism Center when it was destroyed by a bomb that had been centered in the auditing center next door. That bomb killed more than forty auditors who were attempting to trace that missing 2.3 trillion dollars.
The official story given by the government and the media, which must be apparent to you by now, are wholly owned by the Counterfeiters, is that Flight 77, a Boeing 757, alone was responsible for the deaths of the auditors and there was no bomb despite the testimony of April Gallop, a third generation soldier, Lt Colonel Karen Kwiatowski, Robert Andrews and Per Stig Moller, the Danish Foreign Secretary, that there was a bomb.
The aftermath photos of the Pentagon revealed that there was no wreckage from a Boeing 757 in front of the building nor was there a whole in the front of the building large enough for a passenger liner to enter inside.
Besides extensive testing bu the Armed Forces Institute of Pathology (AFIP) has revealed that what the Pentagon claimed was Flight 77 had no Arab DNA. Are we to believe that the hijackers were bodily resurrected into Heaven?
CNN listed the names of the flight crews and passengers who were on the four planes alleged to have been hijacked on 9-11. But none of the 19 alleged Arab hijackers were were on the lists.
Neither the media nor the government including the FBI has asked how 19 men boarded a total of 4 planes without tickets and boarding passes and without being recorded on surveillance videos.
What are the odds that you personally could board a plane without either a boarding pass or a ticket? What are the odds that an immigrant with a foreign passport could do the same?
Multiply those odds times itelf 19 times to determine the possibility that the government, the media and both political parties through the bi-partisan 911 Commission have been telling you the truth about the “War on Terror.”
So what has been happening since 9-11? We have invaded two countries that Richard Perle, a dual citizen of the United States and Israel, told the Likud party in 1996in a paper called A Clean Break A New Strategy For Securing The Realm where the Realm to be secured refers to Israel and not to America.
So lets review what happened on 9-11 and since then. Men were allowed to use thermate to take down World Trade Center Towers 1, 2 an 7 using thermate and explosives.
Men were also allowed to blow up the Pentagon offices of the men and women who had been asked to trace 2.3 trillion dollars in taxpayer funds stolen by associates of the Counterfeiters.
Then we invaded two nations that had nothing to do with 9-11 Before anyone protests and says that Osama bin Laden was behind 9-11 please go to the FBI and ask them why he is not wanted for that crime. He denied he had anything to do with it.
Benazir Bhutto the former Prime Minister of Pakistan said he was murdered in December of 2001 by Omar Sheikh who was recruited by MI6 while he was a student at the London School of Economics.
All of those Osama videos telling us to vote for Bush in 2004, threatening to blow up Washington DC in 2007 and touting the “War on Terror” were made by an “actor” who does not even look like the original character he is playing.
The Counterfeiters blew up WTC Towers 1, 2, and 7 and the Pentagon on 9-11-2001. They killed the auditors tracing the 2.3 trillion dollars in missing money.
They have instilled sufficient terror in the politicians and the media that we have had no serious attempt to recover lost taxpayer money. Once a Counterfeiter has stolen your money it belongs to him forever or so he thinks. And the media has continued to allow the Counterfeiters to pull off other “terrorist events.”
On 7-7-2005 the Counterfeiters blew up the London subways and blamed it on four young Pakistani immigrants.
No matter that the London subway schedules made it impossible for thealleged bombers to get to the location of the train stations that were attacked. No matter that the trains were blown from underneath the cars and not by suicide bombers sitting inside.
The Counterfeiters have used the “War on Terror” to set up a National Security State. They have been working for a century for what I have called That Glorious Day when all wealth will belong to them.
They have stolen billions of dollars every week from unaudited federal government spending. They have sent the money overseas along with the gold they stole from Fort Knox.
It has joined their profits from the drug trade. When, not if. the dollar collapses, everything will belong to the Counterfeiters or at least according to their plans.
They will buy America for pennies on the dollar. They would hope to own the government and to eliminate excessive democracy so you will no longer be allowed to criticize bankers.
You have heard of the New World Order. I have interpreted it to mean a One World government with One Bank One Vote as the rule. Those of you who don't own a bank will have no vote.
We have entered the final stages. The dollar will soon die. The US debt is a fiction. The US debt ceiling is now 11.3 trillion dollars. It will soon be 15 trillion and after that 20 trillion if the United States lasts that long.
We will choke under the burden of the debt. Even at ten percent interest on 20 trillion we will have to triple the amount of income tax we paid long before the 2012 elections.
The Counterfeiters created wars for us and counterfeited money and debts to enslave us.
The Counterfeiters stole money from unaudited government contracts and counterfeited money and debts to enslave us, The Counterfeiters stole trillions of dollars from our largest banks and corporations and are now busily counterfeiting money and debts to complete our enslavement.
All of our pensions and savings are to be taken from us the Day The Dollar Dies, And the day after those of us who still have a job will see at least a fifty percent paycut that will be permanent.
The Counterfeiters have devised an exit strategy to save them, their investments and their ownership of the government and the media from the wrath of an enraged citizenry.
The plan requires an end to democracy and sovereignty. They have been busy working on the merger of the United States, Canada and Mexico which further down the road will be merged with the European Union.
There has been much talk of another war in the Mideast. War is a price those of us who work for a living have to pay to maintain the Counterfeiters in the style to which they believe they were divinely appointed.
I had a vision of World War III when I was a child. It is one of the two visions that have guided my entire life. That vision will only come true if we fail to act and fail to get control of the banking system, the government and the media.
The Counterfeiters will fail. Let me repeat, The Counterfeiters will fail. The Glorious Day where all real wealth, the government and the media are belong to them will never arrive.
They will fail because Counterfeiters are not real people. They understand lying and manipulation. They know how to strike fear into men and women.
But they do not understand the human spirit because they are not real human beings. They do not understand that the Spirit of Man will rebel at the dismal future they have planned for us. I have called this the Rebellion of the Spirit.
If the Counterfeiters cannot win, does that mean we will triumph? Not necessarily. We could all die in World War III though even in my vision there was a remnant left to start the next age of mankind.
If you hesitate to join the resistance against Evil, please consider this: After the Counterfeiters have taken tour last dollar you will no longer be an asset to them. In fact you and several billion other people will become liabilities when people get angry and ask for their money and their jobs back.
To understand how Counterfeiters think and to predict their behavior you must understand banking. So now ask yourself this question: What does a banker do when he encounters a non-performing asset has become a dangerous liability? That's right. He liquidates it. That is why I conclude we are about to enter a war unlike any we have ever seen if we do not resist.
To stop the next war and to get control of the banking system and the government we need some better propaganda.
We need to tell people that billions of dollars are being stolen each week from unaudited government contracts by Wall Street.
We need to tell people that the Federal Reserve Bank is designed to transfer wealth from us to Wall Street.
We need to tell people that those four planes on 9-11-2001 were hijacked electronically and that there were no Arabs on board.
We need to tell people that we cannot allow the government to put us into debtor's slavery to cover trillions of dollars stolen by Wall Street.
We need to tell people that neither Iraq nor Afghanistan attacked us on 9-11 and that we need to apologize and leave both of those nations now.
Of course we do need to help then rebuild.
We destroyed their nations and killed millions of their people because we believed lies.
We need to tell people that if Israel had not killed President Kennedy there would never have been a nuclear arms race in the Mideast and we therefore are under no obligation to attack Iran.
If Israelis want to feel safe, then they will have to learn to make others feel safe.
Discovery Of Massive Volcanic CO2 Emissions Puts Damper On Global Warming Theory& Climate Change Hoax Collapses As New Science Finds Human Activity Has Virtually Zero Impact On Global Temperatures July 14 2019 | From: ClimateChangeDispatch / NaturalNews / Various Recent research shows that the volume of volcanic CO2 currently being emitted into Earth’s atmosphere is far greater than previously calculated, challenging the validity of the man-made global warming theory.
Volcanic gas emissions breakthrough overlying fractured and partially melted glacial ice sheet
The cornerstone principle of the global warming theory, anthropogenic global warming (AGW), is built on the premise that significant increases of modern era human-induced CO2 emissions have acted to unnaturally warm Earth’s atmosphere.
A warmed atmosphere that directly, or in some cases indirectly fuels anomalous environmental disasters such as ocean warming, alteration of ocean chemistry, polar ice sheet melting, global sea level rise, coral bleaching and most importantly dramatic changes in climate.
There are numerous major problems with the AGW principle.
Identification of Volcanic vs. Man-made CO2
Natural volcanic and man-made CO2 emissions have the exact same and very distinctive carbon isotopic fingerprint.
It is therefore scientifically impossible to distinguish the difference between volcanic CO2 and human-induced CO2 from the burning of fossil fuels (see here).
This major problem with the AGW principle has been rationalized away by consensus climate scientists who insist, based supposedly reliable research, that volcanic emissions are minuscule in comparison to human-induced CO2 emissions (Gerlach 1991).
Terrance Gerlach’s volcanic CO2 calculation was based on just 7 actively erupting land volcanoes and three actively erupting ocean floor hydrothermal vents (seafloor hot geysers).
Utilizing gas emission data from this very limited number of volcanic features, Gerlach estimated that the volume of natural volcanic CO2 emissions is 100 to 150 times less than the volume of man-made CO2 emissions from the burning of fossil fuels and therefore of no consequence.
To put this calculation process into perspective, the Earth is home to 1,500 land volcanoes and 900,000 seafloor volcanoes/hydrothermal vents.
By sampling just an extremely small percent of these volcanic features it is impossible to imagine that the calculation is correct.
Especially knowing that volcanic activity varies greatly from area to area, volcano to volcano, and through time. Utilizing just 0.001 percent (10/901,500) of Earth’s volcanic features to calculate volcanic CO2 emissions does not inspire confidence in the resulting value.
Non-Erupting Volcanoes Can Emit Massive Amounts of CO2 into Earth’s Atmosphere
Recent geological research by the University of Leeds and others proves that non-erupting volcanoes can emit massive amounts of CO2 into Earth’s atmosphere and oceans.
The Gerlach calculation and all follow-up calculations utilized volcanic CO2 rates from actively erupting volcanoes.
Lost in the numerous recent media articles concerning the argument of when, or if Iceland’s Katla Volcanowill erupt is the discovery that this non-erupting subglacial volcano is currently emitting staggering amounts of CO2 into Earth’s atmosphere!
Researchers from the University of Leeds who studied the Katla Volcano said this:
“We discovered that Katla volcano in Iceland is a globally important source of atmospheric carbon dioxide (CO2) in spite of being previously assumed to be a minor gas emitter.
Volcanoes are a key natural source of atmospheric CO2 but estimates of the total global amount of CO2 that volcanoes emit are based on only a small number of active volcanoes.
Very few volcanoes which are covered by glacial ice have been measured for gas emissions, probably because they tend to be difficult to access and often do not have obvious degassing vents.
Through high‐precision airborne measurements and atmospheric dispersion modeling, we show that Katla, a highly hazardous subglacial volcano which last erupted 100 years ago, is one of the largest volcanic sources of CO2 on Earth, releasing up to 5% of total global volcanic emissions.
This is significant in the context of a growing awareness that natural CO2 sources have to be more accurately quantified in climate assessments and we recommend urgent investigations of other subglacial volcanoes worldwide.”
The Number of Volcanoes Emitting CO2 into the Atmosphere at Any One Time
The calculation of the total yearly volume of volcanic CO2 emitted into the atmosphere is based on the presumption that very few volcanoes are erupting at any one time.
Scientists from various worldwide volcano research institutions, most notably the United States Geological Survey, have estimated this number to be 20.
This very low number has been challenged by many scientists including those at NASA.
World-Renowned Doctor Addresses Climate Engineering Dangers
How do we retain our health in an increasingly contaminated environment? Though there are countless forms of contamination from human activities, the climate engineering fallout is the most widespread and unavoidable of all.
In this interview world-renowned physician Dr. Dietrich Klinghardt discusses the extreme dangers posed to our health and the health of the planet from the ongoing climate engineering operations.
Geoengineered skies are occurring all over the globe. More and more are complaining about the resulting health effects. We face a rapidly darkening horizon on countless fronts, but it is not yet too late to make a difference. Share credible data from a credible source, make your voice heard, make every day count.
A multinational team led by NASA has initiated a high-resolution satellite CO2 monitoring project (see here). This project is focused on determining how many geological features are emitting CO2 at any one time.
This project may eventually give scientists a better idea of how many land volcanoes are emitting CO2 at any one time.
However, it is doubtful the project will properly record ocean CO2 emissions from Earth’s 900,000 deep ocean floor and very difficult to monitor volcanic features.
In any case, this project is certainly a step forward towards achieving a better understanding of the climate influence of volcanic CO2 emissions.
The Amount of CO2 and Heat Infused into Earth’s Oceans by Seafloor Geological Features
About 71% of Earth’s surface is covered by oceans making it a water, not land, planet.
For many years now, scientists have contended that the nearly one million geological features present in these vast ocean regions have played a minimal role in heating and chemically charging ocean seawater.
Instead of contending that man-made atmospheric CO2 was the root cause of changes to our oceans.
An underwater volcanic erupts in the Pacific Ocean
Recent research has proven that the contentions of these scientists are far from 100% proven. To the contrary, it has become clear that geological heat flow and chemically charged heated fluid flow into our oceans is far more influential than previously thought and possibly the root cause of changes to our oceans.
One example is that geological features are warming Earth’s oceans and causing El Nino’s and La Nina’s (see here, here, and here). Warmed seawater is not capable of holding as much CO2 as cold water.
So, the geologically warming of seawater indirectly leads to a large amount of CO2 being released from oceans and emitted into the atmosphere.
Recent research shows that seafloor geological features also directly emit large amounts of CO2 into our oceans and atmosphere(see here, andhere, and Figure 2).
In summary, the volume of volcanic CO2 being emitted into the Earth’s atmosphere has not been accurately assessed.
Numerous research studies and articles conducted/written by qualified scientists concur with this contention (see here, here, and here).
In a geological time frame, Earth has gone through many periods of increased volcanism. These volcanic periods resulted in; major plant and animal extinction events (see here, here, and here), the end of glacial eras (see here) and the dramatic alteration of Earth’s climate.
All indications are that Earth is currently experiencing another period of strong volcanic activity which is acting to infuse CO2 into our atmosphere thereby challenging the validity of the global warming theory.
Clearly, its time to put on hold all environmental action plans based on the cornerstone AGW principle of the global warming theory until additional geological CO2 emission research is conducted.
Climate Change Hoax Collapses As New Science Finds Human Activity Has Virtually Zero Impact On Global Temperatures The climate change hoax has collapsed. A devastating series of research papers has just been published, revealing that human activity can account for no more than a .01°C rise in global temperatures, meaning that all the human activity targeted by radical climate change alarmists - combustion engines, airplane flights, diesel tractors - has virtually no measurable impact on the temperature of the planet.
The paper explains that IPCC analysis of global temperatures suffers from a glaring error - namely, failure to account for “influences of low cloud cover” and how it impacts global temperatures.
Natural variations in low cloud cover, which are strongly influenced by cosmic radiation’s ability to penetrate Earth’s atmosphere due to variations in the strength of our planet’s magnetosphere, account for nearly all changes in global temperature, the researchers explain.
As this chart reveals, more cloud cover is inversely related to temperature. In other words, clouds shield the surface of the Earth from the sun, providing shade cover cooling, while a lack of clouds results in more warming:
Cloud Cover Accounts for the Real Changes in Global Temperatures
This is further supported by researchers at Kobe University in Japan who published a nearly simultaneous paper that reveals how changes in our planet’s magnetic field govern the intensity of solar radiation that reaches the lower atmosphere, causing cloud formation that alters global temperatures.
“Records of suborbital-scale climate variation during the last glacial and Holocene periods can be used to elucidate the mechanisms of rapid climate changes…
At least one event was associated with a decrease in the strength of the Earth’s magnetic field.
Thus, climate records from the MIS 19 interglacial can be used to elucidate the mechanisms of a variety of climate changes, including testing the effect of changes in geomagnetic dipole field strength on climate through galactic cosmic ray (GCR)-induced cloud formation…”
In effect, cosmic rays which are normally deflected via the magnetosphere are, in times of weak or changing magnetic fields emanating from Earth itself, able to penetrate further into Earth’s atmosphere, causing the formation of low-level clouds which cover the land in a kind of “umbrella effect” that shades the land from the sun, allowing cooling to take place.
But a lack of clouds makes the surface hotter, as would be expected.
This natural phenomenon is now documented to be the primary driver of global temperatures and climate, not human activity.
Burn all the oil you want, in other words, and it’s still just a drop in the bucket compared to the power of the sun and other cosmic influences. All the fossil fuel consumption in the world barely contributes anything to actual global temperatures, the researchers confirmed.
As they explain, the IPCC’s climate models are wildly overestimating the influence of carbon dioxide on global temperatures:
“…the [IPCC] models fail to derive the influences of low cloud cover fraction on the global temperature. A too small natural component results in a too large portion for the contribution of the greenhouse gases like carbon dioxide.
That is why J. KAUPPINEN AND P. MALMI IPCC represents the climate sensitivity more than one order of magnitude larger than our sensitivity 0.24°C.
Because the anthropogenic portion in the increased CO2 is less than 10%, we have practically no anthropogenic climate change. The low clouds control mainly the global temperature.”
The Entire “Climate Change” Hoax is a Fraud
Carbon dioxide, in other words, isn’t the “pollutant” that climate change alarmists have long claimed it to be.
CO2 won’t destroy the planet and barely has any effect on global temperatures (the IPCC’s estimate of its effect is, according to Finnish researchers, about one order of magnitude too large, or ten times the actual amount).
In fact, NASA was forced to recently admit that carbon dioxide is re-greening the Earth on a massive scale by supporting the growth of rainforests, trees and grasslands.
See these maps showing the increase in green plant life, thanks to rising CO2:
Importantly, reducing our global consumption of fossil fuels will have virtually no impact on global temperatures.
The far bigger governor of climate and temperatures is the strength and configuration of Earth’s magnetosphere, which has always been in flux since the formation of the planet billions of years ago.
The weaker the magnetosphere, the more cosmic rays penetrate the atmosphere, resulting in the generation of clouds, which shield the planet’s surface from the sun.
Thus, a weaker magnetosphere causes global cooling, while a stronger magnetosphere results in global warming, according to this research. This phenomenon is called the “Svensmark Effect.”
“This suggests that the increase in cosmic rays was accompanied by an increase in low-cloud cover, the umbrella effect of the clouds cooled the continent, and Siberian high atmospheric pressure became stronger.
Added to other phenomena during the geomagnetic reversal - evidence of an annual average temperature drop of 2-3 degrees Celsius, and an increase in annual temperature ranges from the sediment in Osaka Bay - this new discovery about winter monsoons provides further proof that the climate changes are caused by the cloud umbrella effect..”
The “War on Carbon” is Derived from Sheer Stupidity, Arrogance and Scientific Illiteracy
The extreme alarmism of climate change lunatics - best personified by Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez’ insistence that humanity will be destroyed in 12 years if we don’t stop burning fossil fuels - is all based on nothing but fearmongering media propaganda and faked science. (The IPCC and NOAA both routinely fudge temperature data to try to create a warming “trend” where none exists.)
It’s all a massive, coordinated fraud, and the mainstream media deliberately lies to the public about climate change to push anti-free market schemes that would destroy the U.S. economy while transferring literally trillions of dollars into the pockets of wealthy globalists as part of a “carbon tax” scheme.
Yet carbon isn’t the problem at all. And the “war on carbon” is a stupid, senseless policy created by idiots, given that humans are carbon-based lifeforms, meaning that any “war on carbon” is a war on humanity.
'Rulers', 'Foolers', & 'Shooters': They're Closing The Cage In Plain Sight November 30 2021 | From: Zerohedge / Various
A picture that has been around a while depicts Homo sapiens society at its finest... as it truly is.
There are four “tiers,” so to speak, with the politicians, royalty, and rulers occupying the uppermost level, followed by the clergymen and religious swamis on tier two, and then the gendarmes/police/soldiers on tier three.
The bottom tier is occupied by the people, supporting the other three tiers upon their back. The caption is “We rule you [Leaders], we fool you [Religious Heads], we shoot you [the “Enforcer” class].
These “tiers” are to be found in every nation, among every people and tongue. It is not a new concept: these three levels of nabobs have existed ever since man formed social communities that encompassed more than the nuclear family.
The difference between the past and now: for the first time, these tiers will soon be interconnected regardless of location and mutually supportive of one another to obtain global totalitarian rule.
They already have so much in place, as outlined in previous articles: cell phones for most of the populations that transmit user location along with biometrics (in the latest models), interconnected CCTV (Closed Circuit Television) cameras that coordinate and fix your position with the phones, and a record of all that you buy or sell at a POS (Point of Sale) in the happy big-box stores.
They have laws to make you pay taxes on income, property, and they will come to seize your property and/or you if you don’t pay it…with force.
The laws are increasing in number, tightening the corral around you in your daily life…controlling where you can live, what type of home you can build, how you can communicate on the Internet, how you conduct business. Every business has a corresponding government inspector or regulator.
The death of cash is coming soon, as governments replace it with EFT (Electronic Funds Transfer) completely: they will then be able to keep track of every dime you earn or spend, keep track of what they can tax you (overt theft) and what they can pilfer (covert theft, in the case of an electronic “glitch,” a “matter of national security,” or some other nonsensical operation).
Many people do not realize the depth…the lengths these people are going to in order to achieve global totalitarian rule over all mankind. Recently Bill Gates announced a decision to invest with corporations to place 500 satellites in orbit to be able to monitor every inch of the globe in real-time surveillance.
Last week he announced his intentions to develop a “super vaccine” in order to “safeguard” the health of the planet from an outbreak that could kill tens of millions of people.
There is one “biggie” that must be “taken care of” before all this control can be finalized: They must first confiscate all firearms.
The most recent news headlines show their intent to do just that. Let’s take it by “category” of the three tiers:
1.
Rulers:
The United States’ very own Representative Eric Swalwell, (D-CA) is the one representing the first big push toward totalitarian takeover via gun seizures.
On Thursday, 5/3/18, Swalwell (as reported by NBC News on an interview with Swalwell by USA Today) proposed a complete ban of what he describes as “military-style semiautomatic assault weapons,” along with a government “buy-back” of these rifles…and pursuit of those who refuse it.
Swalwell describes this last part as “criminally prosecute any who choose to defy [the buyback] by keeping their weapons.” Swalwell cited the Australian mandatory gun buyback laws and as an example used the “unprompted” walkout and demonstrations of Parkland High School students after that school’s shooting. Here’s what Swalwell had to say:
"There’s something new and different about the surviving Parkland high schoolers’ demands. They dismiss the moral equivalence we’ve made for far too long regarding the Second Amendment.
I’ve been guilty of it myself, telling constituents and reporters that ‘we can protect the Second Amendment and protect lives.’ The right to live is supreme over any other. Australia got it right.”
2. Foolers:
On Sunday, 5/6/18, the Pope came out and said that all firearms must be confiscated and taken away, and that the only firearms must be in the hands of the UN (United Nations).
This is not a new thought, as it was John F. Kennedy who proposed a ban of all nuclear weapons and firearms, with the UN “peacekeepers” being the only ones who retained any weapons.
That “clarion call” has been echoed by the UN Small Arms Treaty (the one that Bolton…current Secretary of State…refused to sign when he was UN ambassador under Bush Jr.). Sure, many may try to disregard what the Pope is saying…but you can’t completely discount anyone who has a billion people under his dominion, spiritually and economically.
In “tier 1” of the “Rulers,” we have a sitting Representative of Congress who openly advocates bypassing the 2nd Amendment of the Constitution of the United States by banning a specific type of rifle; he also proposes the governmental “buying” of those semiautomatic rifles.
It would do well here to remember the words of Alexis DeTocqueville in “Democracy in America,” [para.] “The end of the Republic [America] will come when the government can buy the people with their own money.”
Then(so-called) Representative Swalwell suggested the government follow (in the event weapons owners do not submit) a violation of due process, as well as the supreme law of the land to illegally confiscate any weapons not submitted under a proposed government buyback…a clear violation of the 2nd Amendment.
It runs deeper, as we can see how the “Parkland Students” cited as an example by Swalwell are the new mantra, the new paradigm to enforce social consciousness and supplant Constitutional law with the law of the mob…the “tyranny of the majority” (a phrase of DeTocqueville) inflicting its wishes.
Then there’s the “Australia got it right” grammatical eyesore of Swalwell’s populist jargon, a phony attempt to appear “grass roots” and an average guy…jargon that also pushes the “groupthink” (Australia’s doing it, why shouldn’t we?) so necessary to obtain global governance.
In “tier 2” we have a Marxist who is the leader of one of the world’s largest religions openly calling for a confiscation of the guns, with only the UN holding them. As mentioned, this guy has more than a billion people under his control, and he’s clearly in the “pocket” of those moving toward global governance.
Standard Alinsky principle in “Rules for Radicals” is “organizing the organized.” His loyal followers will follow his lead. Don’t worry: Protestants, Jews, Mormons, and all the others are also “subjected” to the same playbook, perhaps not under one “figurehead” but with their own “Master of Puppets” enforcing their submittal to his/her authority and then compliance with outside directives of the governments.
In “tier 3,” when you read these articles, you will come to see how there is no more “Officer Friendly.” The police are duty-bound to protect the taxpaying corporate entities, businesses, and politico-oligarchy, and nothing more. They are our jailers, not our protectors.
They ensure the continuity of the establishment: the existing social, political, religious, and economic order of things, nothing more. Those who mistakenly believe in the law (as police officers) will eventually be marginalized and drummed out of the force.
Recently it was reported in Austin, TX that trainees/police cadets were informed by their instructors that the public are nothing more than cockroaches. In truth, the public pays for their funding…and they are under governmental control and direction: to obtain ad valorem for the municipal and state coffers while keeping the beeves moving, “tagging” the strays with tickets for the quotas and ensuring the docility of the herd.
The rulers, “foolers,” and shooters are tightening their grasp by the day, aided by the ever-increasing technology that allows for more surveillance and control, along with the stultified and complacent mentality of the public.
There is a conspiracy, but it is not a theory: it is a fact. It is no longer a hidden agenda, but openly being pursued in plain sight. The goal is global governance and the complete abrogation of all rights. We’re seeing it today, and it becomes worse with the passage of time.
No End To Coverups November 29 2021 | From: PaulCraigRoberts / Various Craig Roberts (yes, there are two of us) is a former US Marine and a 27-year veteran of the Tulsa, Oklahoma, police force. He is a capable and committed person.
Since 1989 he has written 13 books. His latest, just published, Medusa File II, consists essentially of his voluminous files of the investigation of the bombing of the Alfred P. Murrah Federal Building in Oklahoma City on April 19th, 1995, known as “the Oklahoma City Bombing.”
The FBI, appreciative of Roberts’ capabilities, requested his service in the investigation. As officially part of the investigation, he took the investigation seriously. The investigation proceeded rapidly, developing many leads.
Numerous witnesses saw Timothy McVeigh with many dark complexioned men prior to and just after the bombing. Leads were also developed to militias in Elohim City, to the German, Strassmeir, and others.
Before any of these leads could be developed, the investigation was taken over by President Bill Clinton’s Attorney General, Janet Reno.
Once Washington took over, the investigation stopped. In its place was Washington’s theory that it was Tim McVeigh’s lonely protest.
The volumnious evidence of McVeigh’s accomplices or controllers, as might have been the case, was in the way of the official story that imposed itself on the investigation. Many people resisted the coverup that descended on the case, including local journalists who eventually lost their jobs or moved on.
Roberts stuck it out to the end. So did black Oklahoma City Police sgt. Terrance Yeakey. For resisting the official story Yeakey paid with his life. Roberts provides the reasons he believes Yeakey had definitive evidence that the official story was a coverup. The OCPD was called off once the official story was in place, but Yeakey wouldn’t quit and became a problem.
The official OCPD report says it was suicide, but Roberts recognizes homicide when he sees it. There was no autopsy and the police refused to release the police report to Yeakey’s family. Being black, they had little recourse.
Remaining skeptics were dismissed as “conspiracy theorists,” and that was the end of the case.
One of the striking details that Roberts provides is that in the immediate aftermath of the bombing with rescue workers removing dead and wounded from the rubble, numerous federal agents appeared, ordered the rescue workers out of the building on the grounds that there were still unexploded bombs in the building.
Then with the trapped still under the rubble, all rescue efforts halted until the federal agents had removed file cabinets from the building.
Roberts speculates that the cabinets contained the files of the Mena drug running operation that many believe involved Arkansas governor Bill Clinton, and that President Clinton and Janet Reno didn’t want these files to see the light of day.
For an official explanation of the case that relies solely on McVeigh’s “truck bomb,” the federal agents’ statement that unexploded bombs remained in the building is a conundrum.
If there were unexploded bombs remaining in the building, how could it be that McVeigh was the lone wolf perpetrator?
It reminded me of General Benton Partin, a US Air Force explosive expert, who produced a detailed report proving that the Murrah building blew up from the inside out, not from the outside in. Of course, by the time Gen. Partin got his study completed, the fix was in, and there was to be no challenge to, or reconsidering of, the official cover story.
Roberts doesn’t know who did the bombing or why. All he knows is that leads were not followed and the case was solved by Washington and not by an investigation.
Just like the assassination of JFK.
Just like the assassination of RFK.
Just like the assassination of Martin Luther King.
Just like 9/11.
Just like Saddam Hussein’s “weapons of mass destruction.”
The Transhumanist Agenda And The [Attempted] Future Of Humanity November 28 2021 | From: NaturalBlaze / Various The Transhumanist agenda is more than just Artificial Intelligence (AI), or robots taking over jobs, or transgender restrooms at public facilities to accommodate an ever growing push for uniformity among the masses.
Transhumanism is Posthumanism. It is humanism with the optimism taken out, a movement that advocates for the transformation and the “advancement of humanity through technology” that runs the gamut from nanotechnology to AI.
Transhumanism began taking shape in the 1930s under Social Engineers like Edward Bernays whose book Propaganda revealed the method of mind control for anyone curious enough to pay attention:
“The conscious and intelligent manipulation of the organized habits and opinions of the masses is an important element in democratic society.
Those who manipulate this unseen mechanism of society constitute an invisible government which is the true ruling power of our country. … We are governed, our minds are molded, our tastes formed, our ideas suggested, largely by men we have never heard of.
This is a logical result of the way in which our democratic society is organized. Vast numbers of human beings must cooperate in this manner if they are to live together as a smoothly functioning society.…
In almost every act of our daily lives, whether in the sphere of politics or business, in our social conduct or our ethical thinking, we are dominated by the relatively small number of persons… who understand the mental processes and social patterns of the masses.
It is they who pull the wires which control the public mind."
- Edward L. Bernays, Master Propagandist
These messages and themes are blatant for anyone to see, if the eyes are open.
They represent a form of consent, which individuals must give for the agenda to be carried out.
Social engineers have informed us through fiction, non-fiction, film, media, the educational system, politics, religion, sports, Hollywood celebrities, and rigged elections throughout the centuries. And each time we have consented.
Aldous Huxley’s novel Brave New World informed us of a world of bio and social engineering in black and white. He described a future that had already begun to take shape under his pen.
To grasp the Huxleyesque nature of current culture we only need to look at one of his personal quotes:
“There will be, in the next generation or so, a pharmacological method of making people love their servitude, and producing dictatorship without tears, so to speak, producing a kind of painless concentration camp for entire societies, so that people will in fact have their liberties taken away from them, but will rather enjoy it, because they will be distracted from any desire to rebel by propaganda or brainwashing, or brainwashing enhanced by pharmacological methods. And this seems to be the final revolution."
Transhumanism is mind control to shift perception to a hybrid society. As perception shifts, the individual is homogenized into an amorphous “public persona.”
The term “Public Health” is, itself a public relations term, created in 1913 when the Rockefeller Institute of Medical Research (RIMR) to convince individuals to give up their power to an outside, unseen authority.
“Public Health” dilutes the power of individuals. An individual is real. A ‘public’ is a concept. Therefore, Public Opinion, Public Safety, Public Body, and Public Perception are myths used to justify a transfer of power to a higher authority.
There is no power in the group. As each human is born an individual, there is only individual perception, individual opinion, individual bodies, and individual safety.
Once you are convinced to do things for the good of the “public,” such as implanting tracking chips to keep your job, or merging yourself to a machine to enhance your memory, or taking nano-chipped pharmaceutical drugs to ensure compliance, or agreeing to public checkpoints, you lose individual identity.
You are part of the blob. And how do you measure the success of “the public?”
Has the nation become stronger as a result of handing over individual power to an outside authority?
“We now live in a nation where doctors destroy health, lawyers destroy justice, universities destroy knowledge, governments destroy freedom, the press destroys information, religion destroys morals, and our banks destroy the economy."
- Chris Hedges
Inversion Reality
Transhumanism is Inversion Reality to create order out of chaos, where up is down, black is white, sickness is health, male is female, abnormal is normal, and uniformity is unity.
It is a reality of a perfect “controllable race.” The Transhumanist movement is not new or out-of-the-box.
It has been playing out before our eyes under the deception of politics and Hollywood make-up and glamour for more than a century.
Transgendered actors are now coming out to be recognized as separate from male or female; non-gendered.
Like Caitlyn Jenner, anyone has a right to reshape themselves and choose a different identify. However, what happens when true identity is concealed and used for deception?
How many Hollywood actors, mainstream news anchors, super models, politicians, are disguised behind wigs, false eyelashes, or beards to create the Great Deception?
What deeper meaning rests behind celebrity worship, the golden idols actors give themselves, or the pentagrams they bow down to on the Hollywood Walk of Fame?
Have people been measuring themselves against a standard of beauty and worth based in illusion? Do New Age teachings go back to the Freemasons? Back to Babylon and the Gnostic teachings?
With more questions than answers, is it time to look behind the curtain of the Media Industrial Complex?
The Transhumanist-Posthuman agenda is not about the equality of the sexes since the sexes are meant to merge into an androgynous blob.
Under the Trans Agenda, an era of social and ecologic inequities are the new standard where nature is unnecessary and human relationships are replaced by sexbots that cook, clean, converse (or not), and provide for physical needs.
What if the deeper agenda is to weaken the male energy as “protector and defender,” subvert the female essence, and neutralize the divine through technologies such as CRISPR?
CRISPR genetically modifies DNA to redesign gender at the level of the human embryo to create an androgyne that cannot reproduce.
The Transhumanist agenda offers a radical upgrade of humanity to something smarter, bigger, better. It suggests we are entering a virtual reality without a discussion of morals or spiritual matters, where we can transcend our biological limitations with implants and injections.
Is this the wet dream of a robot or the musings of a madman? Do we extend life, prevent death, or bring the dead back to life even if life is no longer worth living?
As TV and films try to convince us that vampires are sexy, do we leave the light behind because the darkness brings a different type of eternity? Do we accept that the Transgender agenda has infiltrated the classroom to indoctrinate children from Kindergarten?
Human 2.0 Is Almost Here: The Transhumanism Agenda Just Went Mainstream
In agreeing to the Trans Agenda, we need to know the consequences of our actions instead of rushing headlong over a cliff. What are the risks?
Were the risks knowable when corporations introduced new technology that promised to feed the world with genetically-modified foods or connect the world through electro-magnetic frequencies?
Now that GMO foods are not enough to feed the world, the message has shifted to taking a shot in the arm to feed the world: “For every flu shot given at our Pharmacy or The Little Clinic, we’ll donate a meal to Feeding America.”
Are the negative health effects of these previous untested technologies the real reason humanity needs to preserve itself in new ways?
Are GMO foods and vaccines just part of the agenda to bioengineer humans to prevent procreation? Will babies be made-to-order to maintain order?
The Transhumanist Agenda will declare that humanity will go extinct or permanently destroy itself unless transhumanistic technologies are realized. Are we repeating an extinction that happened once before in Atlantis?
Yet, they will never suggest that there is meaning to living an imperfect life or dying a natural death because nature and God are no longer part of the equation.
Never Rush to Decision
“While you’ll feel compelled to charge forward it’s often a gentle step back that will reveal to you where you and what you truly seek."
But are the risks of Transhumanism clear? Does the original personality remain the same? Does the soul remain intact?
Can a posthuman being with increased life expectancy, intelligence, health, memory cease to exist on a higher level? Are we sacrificing divinity to worship androgyny?
Is policy guidance written by a hidden government enough to forge ahead to a Brave New World? What happens to peace, love, caring, and cooperation?
Those who “believe” in the Trans religion have a right, as long as it does not infringe upon another’s Rights. And those who choose not to?
Their Rights must be preserved too. Informed-consent means no deception from the inside-out.
In fact, it is more likely that sea levels will decline, not rise, explained Dr. Nils-Axel Mörner, the retired head of the paleogeophysics and geodynamics at Stockholm University.
A new solar-driven cooling period is not far off, he said. But when Mörner tried to warn the UN IPCC that it was publishing false information that would inevitably be discredited, they simply ignored him.
And so, dismayed, he resigned in disgust and decided to blow the whistle.
Asked if coastal cities such as Miami would be flooding due to sea-level rise caused by alleged man-made global warming, Mörner was unequivocal:
“Absolutely not.” “There is no rapid sea-level rise going on today, and there will not be,” he said, citing observable data.
“On the contrary, if anything happens, the sea will go down a little.”
The widely respected scientist, who has been tracking sea levels in various parts of the globe for some 50 years, blasted those who use incorrect “correction factors” in their data to make it appear that seas are rising worldwide.
Indeed, even speaking of something called “global sea level” is highly misleading, the expert explained.
“It is different in different parts of the world,” Mörner said, noting that sea levels can rise in one part of the world and decline in another depending on a variety of factors.
For instance, the interview took place right next to an 18th-century Baltic sea-level marker in Saltsjöbaden near Stockholm that showed the Baltic sea level at the time it was made.
Because the ground is rising, the marking is now higher up from sea level than it was when it was made.
Mörner has personally been measuring and tracking sea levels in equatorial regions of the world - Bangladesh, the Maldives, Southern India, New Caledonia, Fiji, and beyond.
Mörner's conclusion is that solar activity and its effects on the globe have been the “dominant factor” in what happens to both the climate and the seas.
Meanwhile, the UN claims the current changes in climate and sea level are attributable to human emissions of carbon dioxide (CO2).
Man’s emissions of this essential gas, required by plants and exhaled by people, makes up a fraction of one percent of all so-called greenhouse gases present naturally in the atmosphere.
“Absolutely not,”Mörner said about the CO2 argument, noting there was“something basically sick” in the blame-CO2 hypothesis. “CO2, if it has any effect, it is minute - it does not matter. What has a big effect is the sun.”
Obviously, while he was serving on the UN IPCC, Mörner tried to warn his colleagues on the UN body that the politically backed hypothesis about CO2 driving temperature changes, and the subsequent claims regarding dangerous sea-level rise, were totally incorrect.
“They just ignored what I was saying,”he recounted.
“If they were clever - if they had facts on their hands - they could show that, 'no, you're wrong.' But that is not the case. They just will not discuss it. I will try to discuss it.
I will show with their own data that they are wrong. Because in science, we discuss. We don't forbid or neglect.”
“Why does anybody say something when it is not correct?” he asked.
“They say it because they have applied excellent lobbyists. They are working with lobbyists in their hand; 'say this, do that.' We don't do that.”
In the field of physics, Mörner estimated that 80 to 90 percent of physicists know the hypothesis is wrong. And among geologists and astronomers, he said probably 80 percent know it is wrong.
“They claim that there are 97 percent who are for it,”Mörner said.
“I claim that it is 97 percent of scientific facts against them.”
Quoting Galileo, the 80-year-old Swedish scientist also slammed the shady tactics used by climate alarmists and the lobbyists they work with to suppress the real facts and demonize those who contradict their alarmist narrative.
“If you write an excellent paper in a peer-reviewed journal, but they don't like it, they write to the journal and tell them they cannot write things like that, it's against the general consensus,” said Mörner, who has published hundreds of peer-reviewed papers on a wide range of scientific subjects.
“They even put those journals on a black list. This is a shady thing going on. We don't work like that in real science.”
Instead of science, Mörner suspects that the behind-the-scenes promoters of the man-made warming hypothesis have dark, ulterior motives.
“I think the ultimate thing is that they want a government for the whole globe, and that is a weird idea,” Mörner said, criticizing the Rockefeller dynasty and global efforts to keep developing countries from developing under the guise of saving the climate.
“This is the hope of controlling everything. It is autocracy. It is really bad. Nobody should rule like that. But everybody has had these strange dreams - small countries of being larger, and empires wanting to be super-empires, and then they collapse. We have a whole history full of that. This globalism is a dangerous thing.”
By putting so much emphasis on climate alarmism and the alleged dangers of CO2, meanwhile, Mörner said the UN has diverted resources and attention away from “all the real problems” of the world that really do exist.
“This is a terrible thing, this is the terrible thing,” he said. It is especially sad because “the world is full of real problems” such as hunger, starvation, killings, natural disasters, diseases, and so much more, he said.
Yet because of the incessant focus on demonizing CO2 and trying to control “climate,” those very real problems get ignored.
He urged the Trump administration to “forget about” the whole UN climate agenda:
“Because that is nonsense, and you have very carefully and cleverly understood that.”
However, he also urged Trump to be empathetic and willing to discuss the climate issue.
“It is very simple for us to discuss it, because we really have the facts, they have their models,” Mörner said.
“And facts are better than models.”
Dr. William Happer, a world-renown physicist from Princeton University who has advised President Trump on climate issues, also denounced warming alarmism and the demonization of CO2.
In an interview with The New American at a climate-skeptic summit put together by Freedom Force International, Professor Happer said there was nothing to worry about from alleged man-made global warming or human emissions of the gas of life.
“CO2 will be good for the Earth,” Happer said, adding that CO2 levels were unusually and extremely low by historical standards.
“More would be a very good thing.”
Mörner, meanwhile, cautioned promoters of the man-made warming hypothesis that they were going to ultimately be exposed, with catastrophic consequences for the scientific community.
“This is so unscientific,” he said, condemning climatologists for ignoring facts that contradict their climate models.
“And that is a terrible thing, this unscientific part of it. Because one day, it will all be revealed as nonsense. And then we lose our trustworthiness.”
The data will not change, he said. And it is clear. If nothing else, when the next cooling phase begins -
“Everything points to that we are going into a new so-called grand solar minimum and that is in the middle of this century, maybe even as early as 2030”
- then everybody will realize how wrong the warmists have been.
That is when the “rats will leave the sinking ship,” he said.
But Mörner still expressed sympathy with those who have been duped into believing they are saving the planet by fighting CO2.
“Of course, everybody wants to believe in something,” he said.
“All those people who don't know what they are talking about, but they believe that they are saving the world. We don't save the world, the world will keep on going.”
It is even worse than that, though.
“This is the most dangerous and frightening part of it: How such a lobbyist group has been able to fool the whole world,” he concluded, comparing it to how National Socialists in Germany and communists in both Russia and China were able to deceive the populations and seize power.
Blasting the “autocratic process,” he said these organized and deceitful forces were “so dangerous.”
“What do they know? They are very nice, all of them, but they should be out playing, not talking at the United Nations,” he said, criticizing as “a little evil” that children would be used as propaganda props.
“That is an insult to science.”
Despite the warnings of Mörner and numerous other highly respected scientists around the world, including others who have served on the UN IPCC, the UN IPCC and the broader UN continue to sound the alarm over allegedly looming temperature increases and sea-level rises that will flood coastal cities around the world.
They typically refuse to debate, too. The New American reached out to the IPCC for comment repeatedly during the recent UN COP24 “climate” summit in Katowice, Poland.
However, the organization did not respond to e-mails, phone calls, or visits to the IPCC booth at the climate summit seeking comment.
The One-Eye Sign: Its Origins And Occult Meaning November 26 2021 | From: VigilantCitizen / Various Why are there so many pictures of celebrities hiding one eye? It is definitely not random. In fact, the One-Eye sign has a profound meaning and proves an important fact about the powers that be. This article looks at the origins and the meaning of the unescapable One-Eye sign.
The One-Eye sign is one of the most recurrent themes on The Vigilant Citizen because it is also one of the most recurrent themes in mass media. Throughout the years, this site has highlighted hundreds upon hundreds of clear instances where major artists, models, celebrities, politicians and public figures posed with one eye hidden.
The sign is everywhere: In music videos, on magazine covers, on movie posters, in advertisement and so forth. The sheer number of these pictures is simply staggering.
Considering these facts, the repeated occurrence of the One-Eye sign simply cannot be the result of coincidence. Indeed, there is a clear effort to have this sign displayed everywhere.
So, why is this sign everywhere and what does it mean? Here’s a look at the timeless and transcendental symbol of the Eye.
A Turkish “nazar” amulet used to repel “evil eye” curses. Similar charms can be found in Portugal, Brazil, Armenia, Azerbaijan, Albania, Algeria, Tunisia, Lebanon, Turkey, Greece, Israel, Egypt, Saudi Arabia, Jordan, Bangladesh, Iran, Iraq, Pakistan, parts of North India, Palestine, Morocco, southern Spain, Italy, Malta, Romania, the Balkans, the Levant, Afghanistan, Syria, and Mexico.
The human eye has been used as a symbol since the dawn of civilization. It can be found across all ages and cultures. Carl Jung identified the eye as a classic “archetypal symbol” – an image that is embedded in humanity’s “collective unconscious”.
According to his theory, humans instinctively respond to archetypal symbols and unconsciously assign to them a specific meaning.
“Eyes are probably the most important symbolic sensory organ. They can represent clairvoyance, omniscience, and/or a gateway into the soul.
Other qualities that eyes are commonly associated with are: intelligence, light, vigilance, moral conscience, and truth. Looking someone in the eye is a western custom of honesty.
In this way covering of the eyes, by wearing a helmet, sunglasses, etc. can mean mystery, not seeing the complete truth, or deceit. The eye often means judgment and authority.”
- Dictionnary of Symbolism, University of Michigan
In nearly all cultures, the symbol of the eye is associated with spiritual concepts such as divinity (the Eye of Providence), spiritual illumination (the Third Eye) or magic (the evil eye).
“The eye symbolizes seeing and light, and therefore consciousness itself. The eye is the part of us that beholds the universe and sees our place in it. It is knowledge, awareness and wisdom. The eye takes in light, the pure energy of the universe, and presents it to the inner spirit. It is the gateway, indeed the very union, between the self and the cosmos.”
- Peter Patrick Barreda, Archetype of Wholeness – Jung and the Mandala
In the Bible, Jesus referred to the eye as the “lamp of the body”.
“The eye is the lamp of the body; so then if your eye is clear, your whole body will be full of light. But if your eye is bad, your whole body will be full of darkness. If then the light that is in you is darkness, how great is the darkness!”
- Matthew 6:22-23
The symbol of the eye always had a mystical and spiritual dimension assigned to it. As the popular saying goes: Eyes are the windows to the soul. For this reason, the symbol of the eye is particularly important in occult circles and Mystery schools.
Sun God
Since the dawn of civilization, the symbol of the eye and the sun (aka the “eye in the sky”) are associated with divinity. In Ancient Egypt, the symbols of the Wadjet, the Eye of Horus and the Eye of Ra are all associated with the solar god.
A classic depiction of the Egyptian Eye of Ra and Eye of Horus
The archetype of the all-seeing one-eyed sun god can also be found in other ancient cultures.
In Persia, Ahura Mazda was considered to be the creator of Earth, the heavens, and humankind, as well as the source of all goodness and happiness on earth. He was said to have “the sun for an eye”.
“The supreme god Ahura Mazda also has one Eye, or else it is said that ‘with his eyes, the sun, moon and stars, he sees everything.”
- Manly P. Hall, The Secret Teachings of All Ages
In Norse mythology, Odin was known as the ‘Allfather’ (or father of the gods). He was represented as an old man with one eye.
Odin is yet another representation of a one-eyed creator sun god.
“The Supreme, invisible Creator of all things was called All-Father. His regent in Nature was Odin, the one-eyed god. The Norwegians regarded Balder the Beautiful as a solar deity, and Odin is often connected with the celestial orb, especially because of his one eye.”
- Ibid
Western Occultism
Considering the fact that Western occultism was greatly influenced by the esoteric teachings of the civilizations above, the symbol of the All-Seeing Eye made its way into orders such as the Rosicrucians, the Illuminati, and the Freemasons.
“Albert Mackey writes that the All Seeing Eye is “an important symbol of the Supreme Being, borrowed by the Freemasons from the nations of antiquity.”
The All Seeing Eye is a symbol representing the watchful gaze of God.
It reminds us that every thought and action is to be recorded by the Grand Architect of the Universe, and that we are bound to our obligations in spirit as well as in blood.”
- James E Frey, 32°, Midnight Freemasons
Due to the heavy influence of Freemasonry on the historical events of the past centuries, the symbol of the All-Seeing Eye was included on prominent documents such as the reverse of the Great Seal of the United States and the Declaration of Human Rights.
Left: The reverse of the Great Seal of the United States. Right: The Declaration of Human Rights
“If any one doubts the presence of Masonic and occult influences at the time the Great Seal was designed, he should give due consideration to the comments of Professor Charles Eliot Norton of Harvard, who wrote concerning the unfinished pyramid and the All-Seeing Eye which adorned the reverse of the seal, as follows:
“The device adopted by Congress is practically incapable of effective treatment; it can hardly (however artistically treated by the designer) look otherwise than as a dull emblem of a Masonic fraternity.”
- Hall, op. cit.
The symbol of the eye was also adopted by several powerful secret societies such as the O.T.O.
That being said, does the symbol of the All-Seeing Eye actually represent God – as in the Judeo-Christian God?
Well, this is where things get … occult (occult means hidden).
The prominent American Freemason Albert Pike wrote that the true meaning of occult symbols is only revealed to high-level initiates.
“It is in its antique symbols and their occult meaning that the true secrets of Freemasonry consist. But these have no value if we see nothing in the symbols of the blue lodge beyond the imbecile pretenses of interpretations of them contained in our monitors.
People have overlooked the truth that the symbols of antiquity were not used to reveal but to conceal. Each symbol is an enigma to be solved, and not a lesson to be read.
How can the intelligent Mason fail to see that the blue degrees are but preparatory, to enlist and band together the rank and file Masonic army for purposes undisclosed to them, that they are the lesser mysteries in which the symbols are used to conceal the truth?”
- Albert Pike, Legenda and Readings of the Ancient and Accepted Scottish Rite of Freemasonry
Manly P. Hall, another prominent Freemason wrote that the All-Seeing Eye esoterically represents the ultimate goal of occultism:
To attain divinity through one’s own means. This is done through the activation of the pineal gland – the Third Eye.
“Operative Masonry, in the fullest meaning of that term, signifies the process by which the Eye of Horus is opened. In the human brain there is a tiny gland called the pineal body, which is the sacred eye of the ancients, and corresponds to the third eye of the Cyclops.”
- Hall, Op. Cit.
In Islam
In Islamic eschatology, the end-times figure named Al-Masīḥ ad-Dajjal (“the false messiah, liar, the deceiver”) is said to be blind in his right eye.
By pretending to be the Messiah, the Dajjal would deceive and take over the world. For these reasons, the Dajjal bears great similarities with the Antichrist in Christianity.
The coming of the Dajjal would be preceded by several signs such as: People will stop offering the prayers; dishonesty will be the way of life; falsehood will become a virtue; people will mortgage their faith for worldly gain; usury and bribery will become legitimate; there will be acute famine at the time; there will be no shame amongst people; many people will worship Satan; there will be no respect for elderly people and people will start killing each other without any reason.
Considering the fact that the world today is ruled by what we call the “occult elite” (because of its ties with occult orders), it is no surprise that its main symbol is found everywhere.
However, it is all done in a deceitful way. Today’s entertainment industry thrives on control, manipulation, and distortion.
While the All-Seeing Eye is esoterically associated with the opening of the Third Eye to attain spiritual illumination, the One-Eye sign made by celebrities is about the exact opposite: Hiding and incapacitating an eye.
The symbolism of this gesture is powerful.
Katy Perry hiding one eye with the Eye of Horus in her video Dark Horse
Known by many as project MKULTRA, mind control aims to turn humans into slaves through abuse, trauma, and programming.
There is an actual culture revolving around Monarch mind control, complete with its own universe of symbols.
And the One-Eye sign is part of it.
This is a painting by Kim Noble, a survivor of trauma-based mind control. This painting is called The Naming and relates to the naming of an alter persona
The omnipresence of the One-Eye sign in mass media also serves another purpose: It proves that all outlets of mass media are owned by a very small, elite group.
Indeed, in order to have the same exact sign appear consistently and repeatedly across all media platforms and across the world, there needs to be a centralized source of power that forcibly makes this happen.
Think about the amount of money, power, and influence that is required to have all of these celebrities perform this specific gesture in videos and photoshoots.
Now, ponder on the amount money, power, and influence that is required to have this specific sign plastered across magazine covers, movie posters, music videos and anything else that might reach the eyes of the masses.
In short, this symbol represents the global elite and all of its agenda:
The debasing of the human psyche, the promotion of satanism, the normalization mind control, the normalization of transhumanism, the blurring of genders and more.
The ultimate goal: Straying the masses as far away as possible from Truth, health, and balance.
In Conclusion
The symbol of the eye is an archetype that transcends time and space. Perhaps because humans instinctually respond to gazing eyes, there is something about that symbol that is jarring yet fascinating.
While, in ancient times, the symbol of the All-Seeing Eye was often equated with the sun god, it gradually became a symbol of the power of the secret societies that shaped history in the last centuries.
Nowadays, the entertainment industry revels in the twisting and corruption of powerful symbols in the pursuit of its debasing agenda.
The omnipresence of the One-Eye sign now symbolizes the omnipresence of the occult elite. It is them saying: “Look at who we control”.
That being said, there is a silver lining here. The One-Eye sign is a convenient way of identifying media to avoid because it is most likely drenched in the occult elite’s debasing agenda.
Eliminating Free Speech The Smart Way November 25 2021 | From: InternationalMan / Various Left-wing activists have recently been increasingly active in seeking to limit opposing political viewpoints, in order to create a more ubiquitous “groupthink.”
One effort in accomplishing this has been to propose the creation of a “Human Rights Committee” in order to monitor the economic transactions of “white supremacist groups and anti-Islam activists.”
This should not be surprising, as, throughout the former Free World, collectivists are, increasingly, coming out of the closet and seeking to eliminate any and all opposition to their cause.
And this should not, in itself, be alarming, as it should be both predictable and understandable that any politically driven group, be it left-leaning or right-leaning, would seek to gain an advantage over its opposite number.
What may be a real cause for alarm, however, is that those whom they are trying to rope into their effort are banks and corporations… and that they’re succeeding without a shot being fired.
It might be hoped that those champions of industry and commerce would at least put up a perfunctory fight, but clearly, this is not the case. They’re not only caving in; they’re entirely on board.
As an example, MasterCard is considering the selective restriction of individuals from their services and funds. Those individuals would be the ones that held unacceptable political views.
But they’re not the first in the queue to economically force people to have “correct” views. PayPal and Patreon have barred selected individuals from receiving payments through their services when those individuals have been identified as holding “extreme views.” More alarmingly, they’ve been supported in this decision by the US Securities and Exchange Commission.
Journalist Ben Swann has commented that this means that the US government has granted “big corporations the ability to control what voices are heard.”
The reader will already be familiar with the fact that major corporations that are led by liberally aligned executives, such as Facebook, Twitter and Amazon, have already proudly stated that they wish to do their part to freeze out those whose opinions they disagree with.
Of course, in a free world, the head of a privately held corporation should be free to do business with only those individuals he approves of. Although that might make him discriminating, he should have the right to be discriminating.
The concern here, though, is that there’s nothing on the horizon that’s aimed at limiting collectivist notions. All the restrictions are being applied to those who are conservative, libertarian, or in fact, anything but collectivist.
There’s clearly an all-encompassing effort to not only silence non-collectivists in the media (including social media), but to silence them through the loss of economic freedom.
And the campaign is unfolding dramatically, on many fronts, at the same time. It would not be rash to suggest that, by 2020, it may not be safe for an individual to express any non-collectivist position by that time, for fear of being cut out of the economic structure.
Back in the early part of the twentieth century, the Bolsheviks did a wonderful job of eliminating the existence of views that opposed collectivism, through the use of concentration camps and execution.
Later in the century, the Nazi (abbreviation for Nationalsozialistische, or National Socialist Party) also did a bang-up job of disappearing dissent against their rhetoric.
But Lenin, Stalin, Hitler and Goebbels would all have their hats off to the new American version of collectivist propaganda, which is not only attacking freedom of speech in the media, but using economic warfare to ensure that, in the future, the only propaganda will be collectivist propaganda.
This is a tactic these past collectivist leaders would have envied, as the results of economic pressure can be so immediate and permanent.
And clearly, large banks, corporations and the US government are fully on board.
Additional:Read about the Alliance that
has
been working behind
the scenes for decades to take down the 'Cabal' within the work of David Wilcock.
Some of those reading this may be confused because the cabal-controlled mainstream media is doing
everything within it's
power to denigrate Trump - as he is part of the effort to take the
Illuminati down once and for
all.
And the Alliance effort operates beyond the bounds of countries - out of neccessity; as that is how the Luciferian Cabal
does.
Do you think you can trust the mainstream media? Look at whom they target. One must wonder why 'they' also do not like
Putin?
This latter fact informs us that the move to a collectivist society in the US is not merely the work of some extremist groups; it is, indeed, the intended “New America.”
One hundred years ago, the US began a decline into corporatism, with the introduction of the Federal Reserve as the overlord of US banking. Since that time, there has been a steady decline in freedoms in the US, interrupted only by the capitalist boom years that were brought on by World War II.
And we now see the culmination of that long-sought-after objective. The American public are not only being phased into the fuller conversion to a collectivist society; they’re being forced into it through economic punishment, should they take any other view.
There can be no question that virtually all of the restrictions of free speech are intended to limit any thought other than collectivist thought.
But the more important take-away here is that this is not a mere ploy by a political group. It has the support of the financial industry, corporate America and the government (through the US Securities and Exchange Commission).
This tells us that the Deep State – that collective body that actually rules the US above the political structure – is on board for a conversion of the US into a fully collectivist state.
This objective should not be surprising, as rulers always wish, first and foremost, to rule. And as such, they will always seek to obtain total control, if possible. Collectivism is the key to that goal. The greater the degree of collectivism, the greater the level of totalitarianism.
In limiting free speech through economics, they’re now going about it the smart way. But this in itself should not be too surprising. What may be surprising is that the changes necessary to bring that about are happening so quickly.
For the US, this is much like Russia, circa 1917, or Germany, circa 1937. The question is no longer whether the government intends to institute totalitarianism. The question is how much time remains before the transition is complete.
This question should give us pause. Its answer would define the remaining shelf-life of the US, as a country that’s desirable as a place to reside.
Editor’s Note: The wave of political correctness and liberal group-think has taken the US by storm. The effort to silence opposing viewpoints and free speech will continue to accelerate. That’s why Doug Casey has prepared a timely video on surviving this modern American trend. In it Doug exposes the lies and mainstream bias that’s poisoning America.
Julian Assange On The War On Free Speech: “Everyone Else Must Take My Place”
& Julian Assange Is Guilty Only Of Revealing The Evil Soul Of US Imperialism November 24 2021 | From: TheWashingtonStandard / RT / StrategicCulture / Various
As Wikileaks co-founder, Julian Assange’s health is deteriorating in a British prison, but the journalist was able to get a letter out to the public.
In the war on freedom of speech, Assange is asking everyone else who stands against corruption to take his place and keep speaking truth to power.
“Julian’s case is of major historic significance. It will be remembered as the worst attack on press freedom in our time,” said WikiLeaks editor-in-chief Kristinn Hrafnsson, urging people everywhere to oppose their politicians, courts, police, and prisons from being abused to “leave this black stain on history.”
In a handwritten letter from Belmarsh prison, Assange says he is being denied a chance to defend himself and that elements (government officials) in the United States that “hate truth, liberty, and justice.”
Assange says that the U.S. government wants him extradited and dead for telling the public the horrifying truth about their government.
The letter was sent to independent British journalist Gordon Dimmack, according to an article by RT. It was dated May 13 – ten days before the U.S. announced 17 additional charges under the Espionage Act against the jailed whistleblower.
In light of the new indictment, Dimmack read out the letter in a YouTube video. A photo of the handwritten note was soon posted online as well.
Assange’s situation shines a light on the lengths the U.S. government will go to in order to prevent the truth from getting out.
“I have been isolated from all ability to prepare to defend myself: no laptop, no internet, ever, no computer, no library, so far, but even if I get access, it will just be for a half an hour, with everyone else, once a week,” Assange wrote.
“The other side? A superpower that has been preparing for 9 years, with hundreds of people and untold millions spent on the case.”
I am defenseless. I am unbroken, albeit literally surrounded by murderers, but, the days where I could read and speak and organize to defend myself, my ideals, and my people are over until I am free! Everyone else must take my place.
"The US government, or rather, those regrettable elements in it that hate truth, liberty and justice, want to cheat their way into my extradition and death, rather than letting the public hear the truth, for which I have won the highest awards in journalism and have been nominated 7 times for the Nobel Peace Prize. Truth, ultimately, is all we have."
Assange’s well being has been diminished during his time in prison. Even before his arrest, his health was faltering.
“The decision of prison authorities to move [Assange] to the health ward speaks for itself,” said WikiLeaks, adding that Assange has lost a lot of weight and was barely able to speak to his Swedish lawyer last week.
“Assange’s health situation on Friday was such that it was not possible to conduct a normal conversation with him,”
his lawyer Per Samuelson told reporters after visiting Belmarsh.
The quote was barely reported on in Sweden, let alone elsewhere. The media has already taken sides and it’s against free speech.
Julian Assange Is Guilty Only Of Revealing The Evil Soul Of US Imperialism
Arresting a journalist, who is an Australian citizen, in an embassy, then extraditing him to a third country, to be tried in secret, without seeing the evidence, where he is accused of espionage, is is a new low even for Washington.
Julian Assange was bundled away by British police after Lenin Moreno, the president of Ecuador, gave the green light for the expulsion of the Wikileaks publisher from the Ecuadorian embassy in London.
Assange’s arrest represents an abuse of power, highlighting not only how true journalism has now been banished in the West, but also how politicians, journalists, news agencies and think-tanks collude with each other to silence people like Julian Assange and his Wikileaks foundation who are a nuisance to US imperialism.
Assange is “guilty” of two “cardinal sins”: revealing US war crimes committed in Iraq and committing the unpardonable sin of publishing the emails of Clinton, Podesta and the Democratic National Committee, thereby revealing such chicanery in US domestic politics as the fraud committed against Bernie Sanders in the 2016 Democratic primaries.
These revelations among the many (Vault 7, Torture, Diplomatic cablograms), by Assange’s Wikileaks, these transgressions in the eyes of the US ruling elite, struck at the very foundations on which the edifice of “American exceptionalism” is built, namely, the democracy that is meant to be a light unto the world, and the “just wars” that flow from a missionary zeal to make the world safe for democracy.
The media and politicians accordingly crow about the “beautiful missiles” and other high-tech weaponry that will be employed in the ensuing humanitarian interventions, while omitting to mention that the military-industrial complex that benefits so much from endless wars may be the very donors who fund the warmongering politicians into office, and that the warmongering editorial line of newspapers may be influenced by share portfolios of the editors themselves.
Releasing footage of US military personal laughing as they slaughter dozens of clearly unarmed Iraqis civilians from the distant safety of an Apache helicopter is one of the strongest ways of showing how false, artificial and propagandistic the concept of “humanitarian war” and “responsibility to protect” (R2P) is.
In today’s communication age, that footage, those images, that laughter, are a very powerful antidote against the lies we are daily fed by our media corporations.
The mainstream media will never tell us that the reason why Washington has been at war for half of the last two centuries is because of US imperialism.
Donald Trump Versus the Deep State that Killed JFK
They will never tell us that the ceaseless interventions are driven by an insatiable greed for resources, or often enough by the simple desire to plunge a country into chaos if its recalcitrant leaders refuse to genuflect appropriately and show due respect.
That footage straightforwardly debunked all the thousands of accumulated hours of media propaganda that had been built up to convince us that Washington beneficently bombs countries in order to bring democracy and free the oppressed.
In the same way, by pulling back the curtain to show how the Democratic primaries were a farce, Wikileaks revealed how the concept of democracy in the United States is worn out and in fact now non-existent.
The political parties are fed and controlled by donor money, and the accompanying media coverage can be bought, allowing for tens of millions of Americans to be fed on a steady diet of false news, lies and promises that will never be kept.
It becomes clear, reading the revelations published over the years by Wikileaks, that terms such as democracy and R2P are nothing more than excuses and justifications for the US to bomb whomever it wishes.
The moneyed interests ensure the election into office of those who can be relied upon to look after the interests of the 1% at the expense of the 99%, all the while giving moral lectures to the rest of the world while ignoring the inherent double standards.
The mainstream media are tasked by the powers that be with marketing war in order to advance US foreign-policy objectives. Without the moral justification for war, it becomes more difficult to convince Americans and Europeans to send their sons to die thousands of miles away from home.
It is straightforward Brainwashing 101: repeat a lie long enough, and people will start to believe it.
The only way the US sees to fix the problem is to silence the source and ignoring the consequences, even when we are talking about a journalist of international fame who has sought asylum in an embassy and has been confined there for seven years.
This Australian has succeeded in simultaneously becoming the number one enemy of the military-industrial complex, the Democrats, and therefore for all American Russophobes.
He did his job so well that he managed to become a target of practically all of the Washington establishment, which is determined to lock away the likes of Assange and Snowden (if only they could) and throw away the key.
His destiny seems marked, with a probable extradition to the US, where a secret trial based on false accusations awaits him, without him even being able to examine the evidence with a lawyer.
They would have sent him to Guantanamo at an earlier time, but the effect is the same. Of course this is not bad news for everyone, with many rejoicing at the news of his arrest.
All the #MeToo crowd and groups related to human rights applaud Lenin Morero’s decision to kick Assange out of the embassy and his arrest by the British police.
Those who would be expected to make their voices heard reveal themselves to be agents of imperialism by their shameful silence.
Print and broadcast media outside the US play their role in contributing to a wave of disinformation, omissions and lies in the interests of US propaganda.
They may be divided over US presidents and their preference for Democrats or Republicans, but they are firmly united in the belief that that Washington (and Tel Aviv) is always in the right.
In the meantime, we see more and more wars caused by the US, whether directly or indirectly and regardless of who sits in the White House.
True, authentic journalism disappears under the waves of censorship. In the West, lies and fake news runs rampant, and the three-year Mueller hoax will be remembered in history as a prime example of how the elite can program the minds of tens of millions of citizens by simply repeating again and again a complete and utter falsehood without any supporting evidence.
Assange’s arrest and those of Meng Wanzhou, chief financial officer of Chinese technology company Huawei, and Marzieh Hashemi, anchorwoman for Iran’s English- language Press TV, leads us to pause for a moment to reflect on the changes taking place and on how the US empire is reacting aggressively to the ongoing transformation from a unipolar to a multipolar world.
The loss of prestige, respect, dignity, loyalty and honesty are all consequences that the US now faces, partly as a result of the excellent journalistic work of Wikileaks over the last 15 years.
Arresting a journalist, who is an Australian citizen, in an embassy, then extraditing him to a third country, to be tried in secret, without seeing the evidence (because classified top secret), where he is accused of espionage, is is a new low even for Washington, which should worry anyone who still cares about freedom of information.
The flaccid response of Assange’s journalistic colleagues can best be explained by the words of the late Udo Ulfkotte, a German journalist who revealed that he had published fake material fed to him by the CIA, claiming that this was common amongst mainstream journalists:
“Non-official cover occurs when a journalist is essentially working for the CIA, but it’s not in an official capacity. This allows you to create a partnership between your partner and your partner. The CIA will find young journalists and mentor them.
Suddenly doors will open up, rewards will be given, and you know it, you owe your entire career to them. That’s essentially how it works.
I was publishing articles under my own name written by agents of the CIA and other intelligence services, especially the German secret service. I was taught to lie, to betray and not to tell the truth to the public.”
“This perversion of principles * twisting information to fit a desired conclusion * became the modus vivendi of American politics and journalism.
And those of us who insisted on defending journalistic principles of skepticism and even-handedness were more shunned by our colleagues, to hostility that first emerged on the right and by neoconservatives but eventually sucked into the progressive world as well….
The demonization of Russian President Vladimir Putin and Russia is just the most dangerous feature of this propaganda process - and this is where the neocons and the liberal interventionists most significantly are together. The US media approach to Russia is now virtually 100 percent propaganda.”
Basically, Assange’s major fault lies in having revealed the true face of US imperialism through images, news, emails, cablograms and videos, an imperialism that has for decades brought wars, death and destruction around the world for its own political and economic gain, using illegitimate justifications that are backed up by self-proclaimed experts and amplified and repeated endlessly by the mainstream media.
Whose Work Was The Inspiration For The First [Supposedly] Nuke-Free Country? November 23 2021 | From: HelenCaldicott / GregHallett
New Zealand was the first country in the world to pass national nuclear-free legislation. Marilyn Waring reflects on how Dr. Helen Caldicott’s influence culminated in the passage of the cornerstone of New Zealand’s foreign policy.
If you were growing up in New Zealand and Australia post World War II, there’s a chance you knew about the United States using the Marshall Islands as a nuclear testing site from 1947 until 1962.
In an agreement signed with the United Nations, the U.S. government held the Marshall Islands as a “trust territory” and detonated nuclear devices in this pristine area of the Pacific Ocean - leading, in some instances, to huge levels of radiation fall-out, health effects, and the permanent displacement of many island people.
In all, the U.S. government conducted 105 underwater and atmospheric tests. You would have also known that the British conducted seven atmospheric tests between 1956 and 1963 on traditional Aboriginal land, in Maralinga, Australia.
It may be that you read Neville Shute’s 1957 novel On the Beach, in which people in Melbourne, Australia wait for deadly radiation to spread from a Northern Hemisphere nuclear war.
This book made a memorable impact on Helen when she read it as a teenager. When I was a teenager, some years later, I read Bertrand Russell’s 1959 classic, Common Sense and Nuclear Warfare.
Both Helen and I saw Peter Watkin’s The War Game, a BBC documentary drama about nuclear war and the consequences in an English city. In New Zealand the film was restricted for children unless accompanied by an adult, so I had to get my father to take me. The War Game won the Oscar for the best documentary in 1965.
France began its series of over 175 nuclear tests at Mururoa, in the South Pacific, in 1966. At least 140 of these tests were above ground.
In 1973, the New Zealand and Australian governments took France to the World Court for continued atmospheric testing, and forced the last tests underground.
In New Zealand the U.S. Navy made regular visits between 1976 and 1983 with nuclear-powered and, most likely, nuclear-armed, ships.
These visits produced spectacular protest fleets in the Auckland and Wellington harbours, when hundreds of New Zealanders - in yachts of all sizes, in motor boats and canoes, even on surf boards - surrounded the vessels and tried to bring them to a complete stop.
By 1978, a campaign began in New Zealand to declare borough and city council areas nuclear-free and, by the early 1980s, this symbolic movement had quickly gained momentum, covering more than two-thirds of the New Zealand population.
Helen Caldicott and I had not met up to this point, but these were shared parts of our history and consciousness when Helen visited New Zealand in 1983.
Helen Caldicott graduated with a medical degree from University of Adelaide Medical School in 1961. She moved to the United States, becoming an Instructor in paediatrics at Harvard Medical School and was on the staff of the Children’s Hospital Medical Centre in Boston, Massachusetts.
In the late 1970s, Helen became the President of Physicians for Social Responsibility. This group was founded when Helen was finishing medical school, quickly making its mark by documenting the presence of Strontium-90, a highly radioactive waste product of atmospheric nuclear testing, in children’s teeth.
The landmark finding eventually led to the Limited Nuclear Test Ban treaty, which ended atmospheric nuclear testing.
But it was the Three Mile Island accident that changed Helen’s life. An equipment failure resulted in a loss of cooling water to the core of a reactor at the Three Mile Island Nuclear Generating Station in Pennsylvania, causing a partial meltdown.
Operator failure meant that 700,000 gallons of radioactive cooling water ended up in the basement of the reactor building.
It was the most serious nuclear accident to that date in the U.S. Helen published Nuclear Madness the same year. In it she wrote:
“As a physician, I contend that nuclear technology threatens life on our planet with extinction. If present trends continue, the air we breathe, the food we eat, and the water we drink will soon be contaminated with enough radioactive pollutants to pose a potential health hazard far greater than any plague humanity has ever experienced.”
In 1980, Helen resigned from her paid work positions to work full time on the prevention of nuclear war.
In 1982, Canadian director Terre Nash filmed a lecture given by Helen Caldicott to a New York state student audience. Nash’s consequent National Film Board of Canada documentary If You Love this Planet was released during the term of U.S. President Ronald Reagan, at the height of Cold War nuclear tensions between the United States and the Soviet Union.
The U.S. Department of Justice moved quickly to designate the film “foreign propaganda,” bringing a great deal of attention to the film. It went on to win the 1982 Academy Award for Documentary Short Subject. That same year, Helen addressed about 750,000 people in Central Park, New York in the biggest anti-nuke rally in the United States to that date.
In 1983, I was serving as a member of the New Zealand parliament, having been elected eight years earlier at the age of 23.
Our parliament established a Disarmament and Arms Control Select Committee to conduct hearings on the possibility of making New Zealand a nuclear-free zone.
During this critically important time, Helen was invited to New Zealand on a lecture tour. The documentary If You Love This Planet was shown at her speaking engagements. I did not get to meet her, nor hear any of her lectures in person, as I was working in parliament every night. But I did follow the media coverage.
Helen told the magazine the Listener about having observed five-star generals in U.S. congressional and senate committees complaining that the Russian missiles were bigger than the American ones.
“The Russian missiles are very big (and) inaccurate and clumsy. America has very small, very accurate missiles, which are better at killing people and destroying targets,” she explained.
A frequent message in her talks to New Zealand audiences was the redundant overkill capacity of both superpowers. Caldicott noted to her audiences that “[T]he U.S. has 30,000 bombs and Russia 20,000.”
I had sat in a New Zealand parliamentary committee hearing some months earlier, when a government colleague, brandishing a centrefold of a Russian submarine, excitedly called for us to “Look at how big it is.”
I had thought that no one would believe me if I had repeated such an inane banality - when an adult male was more impressed by the size of the submarine than its capacity to destroy life on this planet.
Helen’s public addresses were grounded in the potential impact of nuclear weapons. “Imagine a 20-megaton bomb targeted on Auckland,” she told audiences in New Zealand.
“The explosion, five times the collective energy of all the bombs dropped in the Second World War, digs a hole three-quarters of a mile wide by 800 feet deep and turns people, buildings and dirt into radioactive dust.
Everyone up to six miles will be vaporised, and up to 20 miles they will be dead or lethally injured. People will be instantly blinded looking at the blast within 40 miles. Many will be asphyxiated in the fire storm.”
Helen did not hold back, explaining that nuclear war means “blindness, burning, starvation, disease, lacerations, haemorrhaging, millions of corpses and an epidemic of disease.” Helen’s dramatic and blunt style reduced many in her audiences to tears.
She always ended her talks with a call to action - especially to parents - as she strongly believes that nuclear disarmament is “the ultimate medical and parenting issue of our time.”
To those who would claim New Zealand was not a target she had a short reply:
“Trident submarines in ports are targeted. They are a first strike target. It is much easier to destroy subs when they are in dock than it is when they are submerged in the ocean.”
In 2015, I asked Helen how she managed to deliver such bad news and yet keep her audiences with her. “Being a doctor helps because you have to learn to negotiate with a patient and with language they can understand,” she explained.
“You have to convert the medical diagnosis and treatment to lay language. I also have to keep them awake sometimes by letting them laugh because it relieves their tension and because the stuff I say is pretty awful.” Helen told me that she practices “global preventative medicine.”
Helen’s tour through New Zealand in 1983 had a huge, and lasting, impact. At one stop, Helen addressed over 2,000 people at a public event in Auckland. The librarian with whom I corresponded looking for old newspaper reports of Helen’s visit, wrote to me:
“Her chillingly detailed description of the effects of a nuclear device detonated over the hall in which we were sitting remains rooted in my psyche to this day! …
The other message I most recall is the dichotomy she evoked between the destructive drive of ‘old men’ rulers, the instigators of war, versus the procreative energy of mothers most impelled to oppose them - which, however reductive, retains the compelling logic of a truism!”
Helen’s approach was transformative in New Zealand. Helen’s speaking events packed auditoriums, and overflows of audiences had to be accommodated using loud speaker systems.
People responded strongly to this woman, whose life work involved caring for children, speaking about medical effects of fallout, and speaking without the use of the clichéd military and defence ideological rhetoric that treated people as if they were simpletons who couldn’t understand.
Her speeches inspired people to act. After Helen spoke, the volume of mail delivered to my parliamentary office increased - particularly from women.
On May 24, 1983, 20,000 women wearing white flowers and armbands and holding banners with peace signs marched quietly up a main street in Auckland to hold a huge rally and call for New Zealand to be nuke-free. It was one of the largest women’s demonstrations in New Zealand’s history.
In her book, Peace, Power and Politics – How New Zealand Became Nuclear Free, Maire Leadbetter writes:
“I am one of many activists who think of Helen Caldicott’s visit as the point when the peace movement began to grow exponentially… Helen had a magical ability to motivate previously passive citizens to become activists.”
Shortly after Helen’s visit to New Zealand, in 1984, I advised that I intended to vote for the opposition-sponsored nuclear-free New Zealand legislation. This prompted conservative Prime Minister Rob Muldoon to call a snap election. Muldoon told media that my “feminist anti-nuclear stance” threatened his ability to govern.
The new Labour Government of 1984 passed the New Zealand Nuclear Free Zone, Disarmament and Arms Control Act in 1987, the world’s first national nuclear-free legislation. Dr. Helen Caldicott’s influence had culminated in the passage of the cornerstone of New Zealand’s foreign policy.
New Zealand's Nuclear History?
Unfortunately, technically speaking, New Zealand is NOT nuclear free. We have food-irradiating facilities (sounds super healthy) and according to researcher Greg Hallett - a whole lot more in our past...
According to Hallett, "The Wairakei Geothermal Power Station was not for the production of power, but was built by the British Atomic Energy Commission to produce heavy water for the manufacture of nuclear weapons."
“The Wairakei Geothermal Power Station was a front for heavy water production to be used for nuclear power and the production of deuterium and tritium for hydrogen bombs. These were a thousand times more powerful than the first atom bomb and were first tested in at least three different locations."
...
“During the nuclear scare, Kiwis were buying houses in Taupo to be away from a nuclear blast, which they thought would be aimed at Auckland and Wellington.
The funny thing was, Taupo was the only nuclear target the Russians had in New Zealand. At least one nuclear weapon was aimed squarely at the Wairakei Geothermal ‘heavy water’ power station which produced much of the heavy water for the Western world.”
...
“But more importantly, New Zealand took over the production of nuclear detonators from Norway in 1961. Norway was producing detonators for nuclear bombs during and after World War Two and they paid quite a heavy price in casualties. After World War Two the Norwegians said, ‘A plague on both of your houses. Take this shit away’, and they stopped production."
“The Americans didn’t want the job as they’d be under attack, so New Zealand held its hand up highest and produced nuclear detonators in secret.
That’s Walter Nash’s duplicitous Labour government for you [1957–60]. He was charged with sedition while fronting as ‘a man of peace’ and producing nuclear detonators. No doubt he on-sold any secrets gained to the Russians. But this also has a more recent history to it.”
...
“If you went up the hill towards Eastbourne then took the alternative route through the gorse-covered hills to Wainuiomata at the back of Gracefield, there was a sign saying ‘Nuclear Research Facility’. This is where the firing devices for the nuclear blast at Mururoa were made.
New Zealand supplied the nuclear detonation gear to the French via the British. Yes, it was New Zealand that provided the detonation gear for the atmospheric nuclear tests at Mururoa Atoll from July 1966, and for the underground tests from 1975. "
...
“There was a big stink in the armed forces about the anti-nuclear protests because they violated secret military pacts that went back years. Labour wanted the military to act against the pacts and that’s why the military decided to take part in the killing of Prime Minister Norman Kirk."
...
“In 1981, the known gay and child sex abuser Colin Moyle was re-elected to Labour and became the Minister of Agriculture and Fisheries from 1984–90. He assisted the Russians in placing submarine locator beacons for Russian nuclear-powered submarines for a nuclear strike against America."
...
“Helen Clark’s anti-nuclear policy only applied to ‘American ships’. Russian nuclear-armed vessels were never questioned. Such duplicity is consistent with those converted to an agenda-driven ideology from a foreign country for non-national purposes, in exchange for hiding their sexuality. This results in treasonous activities tantamount to war – and that’s what we got so very close to – nuclear war from NZ.”
...
"New Zealand is the only ‘Nuclear-Free State’ that fails to put to print it’s history of manufacturing nuclear material. As well as ‘heavy water’, New Zealand also manufactured detonators for nuclear bombs and Prime Minister Muldoon was set on testing a nuclear power station in at least three different locations."
Archbishop Carlo Maria Viganò Calls On People Of Faith To Unite In A Worldwide Anti-Globalist Alliance To Free Humanity From The Totalitarian Regime & WEF Founder Klaus Schwab Announces ‘Great Narrative’ Project November 22 2021 | From: TheGatewayPundit / Infowars / Various
Archbishop Carlo Maria Viganò appealed to Catholics, Christians, and people of Faith to unite against the dark forces of globalism.
Archbishop Viganò sent The Gateway Pundit his video and Appeal for an Anti-Globalist Alliance.
Archbishop Viganò shared this moving text and video with us last Wednesday.
The video and text are an international call for the creation of an anti-globalist alliance to defeat the evil elites who wish to enslave free men and women and promote a “Religion of Humanity that cancels Faith in Christ.”
From Archbishop Viganò:
"This Anti-Globalist Alliance will have to bring together the Nations that intend to escape the infernal yoke of tyranny and affirm their own sovereignty, forming agreements of mutual collaboration with Nations and peoples who share their principles and the common yearning for freedom, justice, and goodness.
It will have to denounce the crimes of the elite, identify those responsible, denounce them to international tribunals, and limit their excessive power and harmful influence.
It will have to prevent the action of the lobbies, above all by fighting against the corruption of state officials and those who work in the information industry, and by freezing the capital used to destabilize the social order.”
The whole pandemic issue is instrumental to the Great Reset, and it is the latter that we must fight.
I think that, at this moment, it is most appropriate to create a movement of the people that calls together, in an Anti-globalist Alliance, Catholics, Christians, and people of goodwill.
This is the first appeal I make to that effect.
… If the attack is global. The defense must also be global."
WEF Founder Klaus Schwab Announces ‘Great Narrative’ Project
Social engineering initiative will serve as a blueprint for governments to accelerate their propaganda and target news organizations and journalists who defy their official narratives.
World Economic Forum founder Klaus Schwab announced a new globalist initiative called the Great Narrative during a summit in Dubai last week.
“We are here to develop the Great Narrative, a story for the future,” said Schwab on Thursday, joined by United Arab Emirates Minister of Cabinet Affairs Mohammad Abdullah Al-Gergawi.
“In order to shape the future, you have first to imagine the future, you have to design the future, and then you have to execute it.”
“Here, I think the next two days, we will look [to] how we imagine, how we design, how we execute the great narrative, how we define the story of our world for the future,” he added.
Schwab blamed “self-centered” people and the “complexity of the world” for the globalists’ inability to completely control mankind’s future.
“People have become much more self-centered, and to a certain extent, egoistic. In such a situation it is much more difficult to create a compromise because shaping the future, designing the future usually needs a common will of the people,” he told the audience.
“The world has become so complex. Simple solutions to complex problems do not suffice anymore.”
“You have today, not anymore separation between social, political, technological, ecological - it’s all interwoven,” he added.
Describing the WEF’s history, Scwhab also claimed the organization’s “fourth industrial revolution” will “benefit” humanity, referring to his Great Reset initiative to deindustrialize the West in the name of fighting climate change.
How Do Mohammad Al Gergawi and Klaus Schwab View the Future Narrative of the World?
“We felt it’s very important that we really work together on a global level to make sure that we use the potential of the fourth industrial revolution for the benefit of mankind because technology also has certain pitfalls and can be used to the detriment of humankind,” he said.
“I think what we are doing here is very important because you can cooperate if you define the common interests which we have, and if we show all the politicians that at the end, sometimes to make short-term compromises is in the long-term interest of every party involved.”
"The Great Narrative meeting is a linchpin of the Great Narrative initiative, a collaborative effort of the world’s leading thinkers to fashion longer-term perspectives and co-create a narrative that can help guide the creation of a more resilient, inclusive and sustainable vision for our collective future.
Top thinkers from a variety of geographies and disciplines – including futurists, scientists and philosophers – will contribute fresh ideas for the future.
Their reflections will be shared in a forthcoming book, The Great Narrative, expected for publication in January 2022"
Of course, any kind of information that counters the so-called Great Narrative will be targeted as disinformation and censored or worse.
This is just a continuation of the Great Reset agenda and a signal that the globalists are taking the information war against humanity to the next level.
Global Exclusive: General Michael T. Flynn Lays Out Plan To Save America And The World
General Michael Flynn joins Alex Jones and Infowars to deliver an emergency plan that identifies and brings to justice the globalists entrenched in America’s government.
During this exclusive interview, Flynn breaks down how America is under attack by bad actors across the world who are aided by traitors within the country.
Also, Flynn stresses the importance for informed Americans to collectively inspire mass awareness to the globalist operation via The Great Awakening.
Watch & share this emergency plea for all good men and women to come together to stop evil and save our children's future! You can find out more about General Flynn's Plan at AmericaProject.com
The Ongoing Destruction Of The Minds Of Children & The Mass Dumbing Down Of Humanity Is Now Confirmed By Scientists November 21 2021 | From: FFF / NaturalNews "There can be no greater stretch of arbitrary power than to seize children from their parents, teach them whatever the authorities decree they shall be taught, and expropriate from the parents the funds to pay for the procedure." - Isabel Paterson
Compulsory schooling is a travesty. To call it education is absurd.
Real education is lifelong learning as an individual, while compulsory public schooling is the indoctrination of children as a collective exercise to bring all down to the lowest level.
Prisons called schools are simply the forced means to stifle individual brilliance while promoting sameness and monotony. The result of this brainwashing is meant to teach children to obey orders, and to be satisfied spending their lives in a virtual cage of ignorance, to never become entrepreneurs and dissenters.
With the recent death of the great John Taylor Gatto, the loss of a giant is evident. He was not only a pioneer in real education, but he discovered the true nature and genius that exists in so many children.
The controllers who use the government school system as a way to dumb down the masses fully understand this potential genius.
They are very fearful of it. So fearful in fact, that more than 100 years ago, they designed a mandatory school system as a way to control the common people.
By training them to be good citizens and members of a collective society instead of individuals, the few could continue to control the many.
The experiment called compulsory schooling, now referred to as “public education,” began in Massachusetts in 1852, and became widespread just after the turn of the twentieth century.
By 1910 the majority of children were in public schools.
Since that time “education” as administered by the state has been a horrible failure, if learning was the desired end. But learning and knowledge were never the goals of forced schooling; training the young to honor authority, discipline, and nationalism were the true goals sought.
In that regard, public schooling has been completely successful. These institutions became the vehicle used to teach children to be managed instead of managing themselves. They have produced a soft society consumed by doubt and incompetence, and one that can function only as a mass.
In order to change this dynamic, a real education is necessary, but so long as parents continue to shirk their responsibility by allowing unknown state employees to raise and train their children, things can only get worse.
John Gatto knew that teaching reading, writing, and arithmetic could be accomplished in as few as 100 hours.
The improvement of those skills would be self-taught at the appropriate time and place, as self-taught persons are far more advanced than those subject to and dependent on mass schooling. Any real study of most kids educated at home will expose this truth. As I see it, it is up to parents to save their own children. That will not be an easy task, as most parents are products of the same state-schooling system that exists today, and were taught long ago not to rock the boat or question authority.
Everything should be questioned, and everything should be scrutinized. Questioning authority is the bane of the state apparatus, which is the reason compulsory schooling was implemented in the first place. It continues unabated as the dominant training discipline of this country’s young.
Take a look around and you may be shocked.
How many have lost their imagination? How many seek counseling? How many feel inadequate and consider suicide? How many do you know who manage their lives by taking prescription drugs? How many are bored, emotionally wrecked, and afraid?
Most of those people, a very large portion of the population, can no longer function as individuals. Such behavior should be expected, as the product turned out by the mandatory government school system has little ability to think and act without guidance.
That is a direct result of being a prisoner of state-sponsored indoctrination centers from infancy to adulthood. That is why public schooling is anathema to free-thinking, self-reliant, and responsible individuals.
Mass schooling guarantees a weak and compliant population, one that has lost the ability to think critically. It is an all-consuming addiction to mediocrity, and an escape from excellence.
No society can continue to be free and prosper under such conditions. Why, as John Gatto asked, are we turning our kids over to total strangers who can mold their minds with state propaganda for twelve years?
It is time for parents to take back their children, and rescue them from a life of dependency.
The Mass Dumbing Down Of Humanity Is Now Confirmed By Scientists
Some mainstream media pundits are finally beginning to notice a disturbing trend that we’ve been warning about here at Natural News for quite some time now: the trend towards dumbness and idiocracy throughout the West.
In one recent op-ed published by NBC News, author Evan Horowitz pegs this trend as a widespread IQ decline, indicating that intelligence levels are now trending downwards after many decades of moving upwards.
He surmises that the reasons for this decline remain largely unknown, even though there are actually many elephants in the room that remain untouchable within the context of political correctness.
Take artificial water fluoridation, for instance. As we reported, scientific research out of Harvard University found that fluoride chemicals in drinking water lower IQ levels in children.
But did Horowitz mention fluoride as even just a possible factor in the IQ slide? Nope. He similarly avoided talking about crop chemicals that persist on food, which are also associated with decreasing IQ levels among school children.
There’s also the great untouchable: vaccination. No fake news writer or correspondent has thus far indicated a willingness to even suggest that vaccines and the chemicals they contain might be harming children’s brains – but the truth is that they are.
Back in 2015, Natural News released an extensive compilation of scientific studies and data showing that vaccine chemicals like aluminum, mercury (Thimerosal), and other chemical adjuvants are basically destroying children’s brains. But does Horowitz care? Apparently not.
And let’s not forget about the growing litany of pharmaceutical drugs that’s constantly hitting the market, as many of these chemical concoctions contain substances that are known to impair childhood development.
For related news, be sure to check out Stupid.news.
“Diversity” and Multiculturalism Linked to Falling IQs Throughout the West
There’s yet another elephant in the room that Horowitz actually does mention, but subsequently denies as being a legitimate factor in plunging IQ rates, and that’s third-world immigration.
Though it’s extremely politically incorrect to suggest such, the continued onslaught of “migrants,” “refugees,” and “undocumented” peoples into Western countries is, in fact, having a detrimental effect on the collective state of intelligence in such nations.
Since, as President Trump revealed while still on the campaign trail, countries south of the U.S. border aren’t “sending their best,” the general level of societal intelligence is on a perpetual slide downwards – with no end in sight.
As explained by Anatoly Karlin, writing for The Unz Review, the “low base” of poorly-educated immigrants that’s flooding the U.S. and much of Western Europe is having a net-negative effect on IQ averages, as indicated by quantitative data collected from PISA (Programme for International Student Assessment) tests.
Though such data are sure to be dubbed by the Left as “racist,” it speaks for itself: Wherever third-world immigrants are flooding first-world countries, intelligence levels on the whole are noticeably decreasing.
"Given the strong dependence between national IQ and economic prosperity, the globalist open borders project presents a serious challenge to the long-term viability of the First World cognitive engines that drive the vast bulk of technological progress – progress that is already threatened by the dysgenic trends embedded in post-Malthusian society and the banal fact that problems tend to get harder, not easier, as you ascend the technological ladder,” Karlin writes.
“This is not to even mention the risk of ‘institutional contagion’ from newcomers who are culturally and perhaps biologically incompatible with that unique blend of individualism and commitment to the commonwealth that facilitated the rise of European civilization.”
Karlin’s full article is available for your educational enrichment at The Unz Report.
To learn more about how the vaccination scam is damaging children and also contributing to the decline of intelligence, be sure visit VaccineHolocaust.org.
The Hypnotic Symbols Of Modern Medicine November 20 2021 | From: JonRappoport/ Various
There are four major symbols I want to take up here.The important thing to remember is: these symbols conspire to produce a “view of self” in the patient.
The patient comes to see himself in a certain way, and this way implies a reduction of his own power. Reducing his own power, he literally sees himself as smaller.
The cascade of effects continues. Seeing himself as smaller, he comes to believe he has no significant role in his own health and well-being.
And armed with that conviction, he comes to believe he is gradually deteriorating.
This belief is a perception, a view of self. This view, like a magnet, attracts and interprets events as further evidence of weakening and deterioration…
This reality is far from the only possible one, but it is the one the patient chooses.
The first symbol is SYMPTOM
The person sees and experiences feelings and physical manifestations, and in the doctor’s office, he learns these are symptoms that collectively MEAN SOMETHING. He has symptoms. These are not random, he is told.
They are not transient. They cannot be ignored. They will not go away on their own. They are serious.
The doctor’s diagnosis of the symptoms makes it clear that the patient has a disease, an illness, a disorder.
A label is applied. A name. There is no doubt that the patient has this named disease. This is a THING. An entity.
It is not a passing phenomenon. It is solid and stable. It is singular.
The third symbol is TREATMENT
This is what the doctor tells the patient he must do. Take a medicine. Have surgery. The treatment will get rid of the condition.
The treatment is specific. It is geared to address the condition. It is the solution to the problem.
The fourth symbol is the DOCTOR
He knows. Nobody else knows. He is the authority. He is in charge of recognizing the symptoms, which lead him to make the diagnosis of the condition, which is turn leads him to prescribe the treatment.
This progression is lock-step. There no other factors to consider. The doctor has effectively ruled out all other possibilities.
These four symbols lead the patient into a state of obedience. And in that state, he realizes his own power is beside the point and is irrelevant.
Of course, this is not the first time he has been to the doctor’s office. This is not the first time he has been put through this progression of the four symbols. Therefore, the effect on him, over time, is magnified.
Each successive visit to the doctor confirms he can and does develop new sets of symptoms - and each set implies a new condition. As the conditions pile up, the patient is more convinced than ever that he is composed of diseases that appear “out of nowhere.”
He views himself as a set of symptoms which indicate a condition and imply a treatment. This is, in a sense, who and what he is.
Over time, his conditions tend to be more serious.
He never imagines that the toxic treatments he is taking are contributing to, or causing these more serous conditions - because each disease has a separate name, as if it exists in a vacuum.
The doctor handles each diagnosis in that fashion. “Now you have this…and now you have that.”
When the patient reaches a point where he views himself as BEING these symptoms and conditions and very little else, he simply waits for the next arrival of the next set of symptoms and the next condition.
This is how powerful symbols can be. In a better world, people would be educated in the use and effects of symbols, before succumbing to them.
Some would say, “What do you mean, symbols? The doctor is real, I do have physical problems, the doctor really does make a diagnosis, and I do take real medicines. Why are you talking about symbols?”
Because what locks a person in is what happens in his mind. And what happens in his mind is this parade of symbols.
That’s what forms the basis of HIS VIEW OF HIMSELF. He rolls these symbols around in his mind and accepts them and locks himself in, and he sees himself as deteriorating.
“I am a deteriorating person. That’s who I am. That’s what I am. I’m waiting for the next round of symptoms and the diagnosis and treatment from the doctor.
Any other ideas about what I am and what I can do are beside the point. No reason to entertain them. I have the potential to be more than a deteriorating person? What does that even mean? It makes no sense.”
The person doesn’t understand symbols, doesn’t understand how he is dealing with them, and so he closes the book on his life and future. This process is not necessary, but he doesn’t grasp that.
Am I claiming that everything is in the mind? Nothing else possibly matters? No one ever really gets sick?
No. But I am saying a shocking amount of what turns out to be a person’s future or non-future flows from how he recognizes, or doesn’t recognize, symbols and how he reads them and interprets them, how he accepts or rejects them, how he choose to surpass them or succumb to them.
Yes, there is a doctor. Yes, there is such a thing as physical illness. Yes, the doctor is delivering a diagnosis and calling it a condition. But these factors are not in the mind, unless the physical doctor can squeeze himself into the patient’s head.
In the mind, there are symbols of these elements - and that is what the patient is dealing with, for better or for worse.
And over the long-term, for most patients, it’s worse.
Studies Show What Happens To The Human Body When We Walk Barefoot On Earth November 19 2021 | From: EducateInspireChange
Walking barefoot, also known as grounding or earthing, involves placing your feet directly on the ground without shoes or socks as a barrier.
Earthing was a common practice in the past, but today people would stare at somebody walking barefoot in public. However, many studies published over the years have proved that the practice has enormous health benefits.
The Earth contains negative charge, and when somebody earths, it supply the person with antioxidants, as well as free-radical destroying electrons. This means putting your feet on the ground enables you to absorb large amounts of negative electrons through the soles of your feet which, in turn, can help to maintain your body at the same negatively charged electrical potential as the Earth.
Dr. James Oschman, a PhD in biology from the University of Pittsburgh and an expert in the field of energy medicine, notes:
A study titled “Earthing: Health Implications of Reconnecting the Human Body to the Earth’s Surface Electrons” postulates that earthing could represent a potential treatment or solution to a variety of chronic degenerative diseases.
It could also serve as a natural and “profoundly effective environmental strategy” against chronic stress, ANS dysfunction, inflammation, pain, poor sleep, disturbed HRV, hyper-coagulable blood, and many common health disorders, including cardiovascular disease.
Another study, conducted by the Department of Neurosurgery from the Military Clinical Hospital in Powstancow Warszawy, found that blood urea concentrations are lower in subjects who are earthed during physical exercise, and that earthing during exercise resulted in improved exercise recovery.
“This simple process of grounding is one of the most potent antioxidants we know of. Grounding has been shown to relieve pain, reduce inflammation, improve sleep, enhance well being, and much, much more. Unfortunately, many living in developed countries are rarely grounded anymore.”
‘Cultural Schizophrenia’: Media Shift To Feelings Over Facts Tearing US [West] Apart & You Are Being Bombarded By Fake News, Fake News “Filters,” Fake People, Fake Food, And Fake Medicine November 18 2021 | From: RT / NaturalNews / Various Over the past several decades, US [Western] news media have shifted towards advocacy and emotional appeals, according to a RAND Corporation study.
This is sowing discord in American society, award-winning journalist Chris Hedges tells RT.
The study, released by RAND earlier this week, cautiously argues that between 1987 and 2017, news content has shifted from event-and context-based reporting to coverage that is “more subjective, relies more heavily on argumentation and advocacy, and includes more emotional appeals.”
While prime-time cable news shows and online journalism lead the way in this shift, it has been noticed in print journalism as well, the government-funded think tank concluded.
This is contributing to what RAND termed “Truth Decay,” described as a shift away from facts and analysis in public discourse.
“Cable news networks – CNN, MSNBC, Fox – have given up on journalism,”Hedges told RT, commenting on the RAND report.
“They replaced it with reality-show news programs centered around [US President] Donald Trump and his tweets and the Russiagate. There has been a complete walking away from journalism.”
The award-winning international correspondent for several major newspapers who now hosts On Contact, a weekly interview show on RT America, Hedges argued that the deterioration of the American media landscape is “far worse” than the RAND report suggests.
“Commercial structure that created the old media is gone and it has eviscerated journalism within the country, because it is not sustainable. We saw it with the collapse of the classified advertising, which was 40 percent of the newspapers’ revenues. It is not sustainable economically anymore,”Hedges said.
This has led to the demise of newspapers, both local broadsheets and major powerhouses like the Philadelphia Enquirer.
Meanwhile, the internet media has created a “free-for-all space, where people are ghettoized into [groups] with particular belief systems or conspiracy theories they happen to have embraced or support.”
It is difficult to tell apart facts and opinion now, and people believe whatever they want to believe, Hedges explained.
“We spent years watching CNN and MSNBC promoting this conspiracy theory that Trump was a Kremlin agent… It was all garbage but it attracted viewers.”hich was 40 percent of the newspapers’ revenues. It is not sustainable economically anymore,” Hedges said.
When journalism is no longer based on facts, it becomes near impossible for the public to untangle what is true and what is false.
“It creates cultural schizophrenia,” Hedges said, noting that he observed this during the collapse of Yugoslavia in the 1990s, when media drove antagonisms and hatreds between ethnic groups.
Similar things are happening in the US right now, as “right-wing media are demonizing Bernie Sanders and Barack Obama by comparing them to Hitler and the left-wing media label all Trump supporters as racists and deplorables.”
“It all creates societal fragmentation and discord,”Hedges told RT.
"These schisms could lead to civil unrest – that is what happens here."
You Are Being Bombarded By Fake News, Fake News “Filters,” Fake People, Fake Food, And Fake Medicine
The most important things in life are your family, your safety, and your health. These are irreplaceable. Some people, as of late, are wrecking theirs, all while believing that the mass media, the FDA, the AMA, and the CDC have their best interests in mind, but it’s just the opposite way around.
By mass media, we mean all newspapers, television news shows, most major websites, and social media. Did you know that more than 90 percent of all news, food, and medicine is “fake” and literally damages your mind and body?
Fake news is meant to hide the truth from you, by any means necessary. The less you know about what’s really happening around you, to your rights, to your health, to your belief of which medicines actually work, well, the less you can do anything about it.
That’s why there’s fluoride in the tap water. That’s why every prescription medication and vaccination doled out by the AMA, CDC, and FDA do way more harm than good, if they do any good at all.
Why keep Americans [Westerners] sick and living in a brain fog? If you’re still reading this, you already know the answer.
So now, in this technological era we are so privileged to experience, the “Kings” of fake news, fake food, and fake medicine are working very hard to bury the truth about what will make you the sickest and put you at the most risk (think GMOs, chemo, illegal (criminal) immigrants, flu shots, CNN lies, Roundup, and the list goes on).
Another “Fake News” Filter Organization – Meet the Hucksters and Con Artists at the Poynter Institute of Lies and Deception
Just in from the “fake news filter” world: The shilling Poynter Institute recently walked back an entire list of what they declare to be “unreliable” news websites, after being heavily scrutinized.
Just like the latest “fake news filter” NewsGuard, Poynter Institute bans and mislabels any website that tells the truth about natural health, common sense safety, medical choice, sustainable living, prepping for disasters, or Constitutional rights being exercised in this country, while promoting any website that threatens those humane and inherent rights.
These news “filters” are completely one-sided, run by globalists, extreme Leftists, communists and socialists, Bayer / Monsanto, and the tech giants.
Yes, at the top of that criminal racket sits Bill Gates, George Soros, Mark Zuckerberg, Jeff Bezos, and of course, the insidious Jack Dorsey, CEO of Twitter.
Nearly all conservative, critical-thinking, truth-wielding media outlets are banned and flagged by NewsGuard, Poynter, Google, YouTube, Facebook, Twitter, and Instagram. Nearly all newscasters are fake and just actors reading from the same exact script at all levels.
Even “Flickr” deletes accounts of Natural News writers if they post anything honest about the serious dangers of American vaccines.
Poynter recently listed the Washington Free Beacon and TheWashington Examiner as “unreliable” publications without a shred of evidence to justify condemning them. Why?
They don’t bow down to the daily MSM narrative, in other words. And now the tech giants are using algorithms to ban, delete, and bankrupt any person or business who challenges their big lies.
Take a big guess who’s behind the fake “journalism institute” called Poynter, that’s blacklisting all media outfits that function in conservative ways.
Yep, you guessed right – George Soros – the billionaire Nazi sympathizer who funds all things “hate Trump,” including Antifa, AOC, the Clintons, Obama, and mass illegal immigration into the USA.
Nazi-Style “News-Guard” Software Filter Flags All Real News as Fake While Promoting Lying, Narrative-Worshipping News as Real
Now, NewsGuard represents his massive news “filter” racket that censors all independent media while parroting the worst fake news of all, including CNN, Washington Post, Boston Globe, and the New York Times.
Don’t believe it? It’s already taken over all public libraries in Hawaii. Next is every university in America, including all libraries, then all public schools. It’s the biggest book burning event in history, and everything you know as true right now isn’t just history, it’s history, meaning extinct. Gone. Burned. Obliterated.
No, you won’t find out the truth about the Holocaust by Googling it. No, you won’t find out chemotherapy fails 97 percent of the time via Bill Gates’ installed search engines or software “add ons.”
That’s why so many Americans [Westerners] are brainwashed into fake news, toxic food, and chemical medicine. They’re hooked from birth ’til early, expensive death.
Keep your weapons close, your food organic, and your medicine natural. Know your rights to free speech and free press. Tune in to Censored.News daily for all the news they don’t want you to see.
The Broken Presidential Destiny Of JFK, Jr. November 17 2021 | From: UNZ / Various
Israel's "Kennedy Curse"? On July 16, 1999, John Fitzgerald Kennedy Junior was flying his private Piper Saratoga II, with his wife Carolyn Bessette and his sister-in-law Lauren Bessette.
He was to drop Lauren off at Martha’s Vineyard, then fly on with Carolyn to Hyannis Port for the wedding of his cousin, Rory Kennedy, the following day. At 9:39, as he was approaching Martha’s Vineyard airport, John radioed the control tower for landing instructions, giving no sign of difficulty. At 9:41 p.m., witnesses heard and saw an explosion in the sky, at the precise moment when John’s plane suddenly plummeted into the ocean at the radar-recorded speed of 4,700 feet per minute.
The next day, pieces of luggage from the plane were found floating nearly two miles away from the point of last radar contact.
The search and recovery operations were conducted by the Air Force and the Navy under national security conditions, with news reporting controlled from the Pentagon.
The National Transportation Safety Board (NTSB) concluded its investigation eleven months later, and announced as “probable cause” of the plane crash “the pilot’s failure to maintain control of the airplane”, with “haze and the dark night” being possible factors.
The corporate media amplified the implication that John was an inexperienced and reckless pilot who ignored the dangerous weather conditions and who is to blame for his own death and the death of his wife and sister-in-law.
But many facts and testimonies inconsistent with that story have been concealed, while some convenient ones seem to have been fabricated. Independent investigators have found enough omissions and contradictions in the official and mainstream narrative to ask the questions:
Was he killed by the same cabal that had killed his father 36 years earlier, and for the same motive as his uncle Bobby 5 years later: his plans to conquer the White House and bring his father’s murderers to justice? (On JFK’s and RFK’s assassinations, read my article “Did Israel kill the Kennedys?” on unz.com).
I will examine the evidence of foul play and cover-up in JFK Jr.’s death in the second part of this two-part article. In this first part, let’s see if we can establish the following two things:
1. At age 39, John had made up his mind to launch his political career by seeking an electoral mandate in New York State, and he was about to announce it publicly.
He had also expressed to his friends his ambition to ultimately reach for the presidency. Given his personality and his popularity, he had high chances to make it in less than 20 years. He might realistically have become U.S. president in 2008 or 2016.
2. Brought up in the worship of his father, John had taken a keen interest in “conspiracy theories” about his death at least since his late teens. His knowledge deepened in his thirties, made him aware of State and media cover-ups in other affairs, and motivated him to publish, eight months before his death, a cover article by Oliver Stone, director of the groundbreaking film JFK, titled “Our Counterfeit History”.
If those two things can be proven - and they will - they must be connected. John’s quest for the truth about President Kennedy’s assassination cannot be separated from his political ambition to reclaim the White House, anymore than it could be in the case of his uncle Bobby, who, as David Talbot has shown (Brothers: The Hidden History of the Kennedy Years, Simon & Schuster, 2007), was planning to reopen the investigation on the Dallas coup as he was campaigning for the presidency in 1968.
These are two sides of the same destiny. The heir and the avenger are one and the same person. Therefore, the deep power network that had decided to eliminate Bobby on the threshold of the White House had every reason to make the same decision about John Junior.
True, John Junior was probably not yet ready for the presidency - although some, like Pierre Salinger, believed he would have run for president in 2000. But on the other hand, for many reasons, he was a more natural candidate than RFK, with more potential.
If he had to be stopped, didn’t it make sense to stop him before he made his political ambitions public? July 1999 was the right time; after that, the motive would be harder to conceal.
Even for media-brainwashed Americans, a second heir to JFK killed on the road to the White House would be hard to swallow.
Not to mention the fact that to let JFK Jr. live longer would be taking the risk of having a JFK III coming into this world: more trouble in perspective. Indeed, Carolyn may have been pregnant when she died with her husband.
Part I: The Heir and Would-be Avenger
JFK Jr. and the Camelot legacy
John Junior was literally born with the Kennedy presidency, precisely 17 days after his dad won the election. From the minute he came into this world, he had been in the national spotlight.
As Americans watched him grow up in the White House, they developed a strong affection for him, which did not displease his father.
While Jackie was trying to keep the photographers away from her children, “JFK had another view,” recalls Pierre Salinger, President Kennedy’s Press Secretary.
Whenever Jackie was away, “he was in touch with me and told me that now it was time for the media to get some wonderful pictures of John Jr. and Caroline in his office in the White House. I arranged for Jacques Lowe, who had been hired as the photographer of the Kennedys, to do those photos.”
Little “John John” turned three the day of his father’s funeral, and he broke the world’s heart when he solemnly saluted his father’s coffin. That iconic image encapsulated a nation’s grief, and impressed on millions of Americans the dream of seeing him reclaim the Oval Office one day.
For in the American collective psyche, the Kennedys represented royalty, and JFK Jr. was the legitimate heir to the throne. He was, wrote the New York Daily News the day after his death, the “charismatic crown prince of America’s royal family.” “He was the closest thing we had to a crown prince,” says Chris Cuomo in I am JFK Jr.
Little “John John” saluting his father’s coffin, on his third birthday
The Kennedys didn’t attain that royal status by just buying media coverage. It was conquered by the patriarch Joe Kennedy, whose philosophy Laurence Leamer has well captured in his great book Sons of Camelot: The Fate of an American Dynasty (2005). Joe Kennedy, he writes
“Believed that in each generation a few powerful men were the rightful leaders of their generation. He thought that he and his sons were part of this natural aristocracy. …
Joseph P. Kennedy created one great thing in his life, and that was his family. With acumen as great as his wealth, and limitless purpose, he built a family of sons who sought to reach the peak of American political life.
… Joe knew that he had achieved so much in America because of the liberty and opportunities. He believed that sons of privilege and wealth had an obligation to serve their country and to return something of the bounty that they had inherited.
Joe taught that blood ruled and that they must trust each other and venture out into a dangerous world full of betrayals and uncertainty, always returning to the sanctuary of family.
His sons took on part of Joe’s psychological makeup, the sense of lives without boundaries and ambitions without restrictions.”
After their father’s death, their uncle Bobby played the role of surrogate father for John Jr. and his sister Caroline.
When Bobby was assassinated in his turn in June 1968, Jackie said: “If they are killing Kennedys, my kids are the number one targets. I want to get out of this country.”
She married shipping magnate Aristotle Onassis, whose assets included a seventy-five-member, machine-gun-equipped security force.
Jackie wanted her son to grow up knowing who his father was. As early as 1967, writes biographer Christopher Andersen in The Good Son,
“Jackie made sure that John was constantly exposed to the people who knew John [President Kennedy] best - from longtime pals like Red Fay, Chuck Spalding, Oleg Cassini, Bill Walton, and his ubiquitous sidekick Dave Powers to such New Frontier stalwarts as Pierre Salinger, Theodore Sorensen, and Arthur Schlesinger Jr.
These were the folks ‘who knew Jack well and the things Jack liked to do.’ As long as they were around, she reasoned, ‘each day John will be getting to know his father.’”
And so, although John could hardly have kept real personal memories of his father, he was constantly, so to speak, steeped in the memory of him: “Whenever another child was visiting,” writes Andersen, “he would inevitably ask, ‘Would you like to hear my father?’
"Then he turned to a small stack of records and selected one to play.”
In 1972, Jackie asked Pierre Salinger to join her and her children for a month: “I want you to spend an hour or an hour and a half a day with John Jr. and Caroline and explain everything about what their father did.” And so Salinger did.
John’s craving for information about his father was never quenched. His friend and French biographer Olivier Royant reports that, when running his magazine George, John hired Jacques Lowe, JFK’s official photographer, and kept questioning him about his father for hours.
John John awaiting his father’s return to the White House
Even John’s irresistible yearning for flying, despite his mother’s plea not to do so, can possibly be traced back to his childhood, “when he and his mother watched as Daddy’s helicopter took off from the South Lawn in 1962,” or watched him reappear from the sky.
When Nanny Shaw announced to little John in the morning of November 23, 1963, “John, your father has gone to heaven to take care of Patrick [JFK and Jackie’s third child, who did not survive his first month],” John asked, “Did Daddy take his big plane with him?”
“Yes,” she answered. “I wonder,” John said, “when he’s coming back.”
Significantly, John gave his first private plane the registration number N529JK, a reference to his father’s May 29 birthday.
Did John intend to follow his father’s footsteps in politics? John Quinn, a pioneer researcher on his mysterious death, writes:
"Committed to the legacy of his compelling father, there was never any question about where John F. Kennedy Jr. was heading.
Is there any doubt about the fact that it was only a matter of time before he claimed his father’s legacy?
Anybody who claims that we will never really know, does not know anything about John F. Kennedy Jr.”
We don’t know at what stage in his life John fully endorsed that responsibility. But the thought had certainly been in his mind for many years already when he introduced his uncle Teddy at the 1988 Democratic convention. Like millions of Americans, Salinger was “very excited about that speech”:
“I took John Jr. to meet alone with me for several hours. I was telling him that this speech showed strongly that he should start thinking about going into politics.
He said he was interested, but he was still too young. He told me that he had an idea that he should go into politics in the next century.”
Jackie, the guiding spirit in John’s life, definitely saw her son as Camelot’s standard-bearer. In her last letter to him before dying to lymphoma in 1994, she wrote: “You, especially, have a place in history.”
According to presidential historian Doug Wead, interviewed in the film I am JFK Jr., Jackie “knew in her heart that, some day, the stars are gonna line up, and he’s gonna be president.”
“My mom sort of pressured me to get into politics,” John told Lloyd Howard in 1997. “She expected me to follow in my father’s footsteps, and of course I will. But I don’t think the time is right just yet.”
In 1995, John launched his political magazine George. Under the appearance of superficiality, it engaged in controversial issues of deep politics that reflected John’s interests.
After all, his father had also pursued a career in journalism before entering politics. George was also a means for John to interact with political actors and thinkers.
John didn’t avoid letting people know his interest for his father’s legacy. The September 1996 cover of George features Drew Barrymore grimed as Marilyn Monroe with the caption: “Happy Birthday, Mister President,” an obvious - and, to some, indecent - reference to Marilyn’ serenade in front of JFK at the Madison Square Garden in 1962.
In October 1997, for the 35th anniversary of the Cuban Missile Crisis, John travelled to Cuba to meet Fidel Castro (the interview he had wished didn’t materialize, but Castro invited him for dinner and for a swim in the Bay of Pigs, and rumor has that Castro gave him his view on his father’s death).
John’s interest for the presidency also transpired heavily in George, particularly in the recurrent section “If I were president,” in which various personalities were asked for suggestions. For the October 1998 issue, for example, Tony Brown, author of Empower the People: A 7-Step Plan to Overthrow the Conspiracy That Is Stealing Your Money and Freedom, declared that, if he were president, he would repeal the Federal Reserve Act of 1913.
In 1999, at age 39, John was trying to sell his magazine. He had new plans. According to Gary Ginsberg, a close collaborator who was with John the night before he died, “That last night he was very focused on two things: finding a buyer for George and his political future.” Christopher Andersen writes in his biography The Good Son:
“There seemed little doubt in the minds of those who knew him that John was on the brink of a bright political future.
‘He was probably a more natural politician than any of the other Kennedys,’ David Halberstam said, ‘and that includes his father. John had all the makings of a political superstar - once he decided that’s what he wanted.’”
In July 1999, his decision was made. His closest friends have testified that he was preparing to enter an election contest. Pierre Salinger, who knew him well, declared on French radio Europe 1, on July 19, 1999:
“I felt that in the coming year John Junior would also become a politician. It’s my point of view. And with other people, we thought he was going to be a Democratic candidate for the next presidential election.”
John Junior and Pierre Salinger in 1997
More plausibly, John Jr. would have started by seeking a political office in New York State, where he had lived since 1963. He loved New York, and New York loved him. A 1997 private poll ranked JFK Jr. as New York’s “most popular Democrat,” giving him 65 percent approval rating among fellow Democrats.
John had several options. One he excluded was mayor of New York City. His assistant at George, RoseMarie Terenzio, recounts that when New York Senator Al D’Amato suggested he should run for mayor, John laughed it off. When Terenzio asked him afterward if he would ever consider it,
“He said ‘Well, Rosie, how many mayors do you know that became President?’ I was so shocked I didn’t say anything. Then he smirked as if to say ‘That’s not the road you go down - we’ll see what happens.’”
Terenzio also made the following comment to the news website TheWrap:
“I think he would’ve run for president. I thought he would’ve run in 2008. I had dinner with a friend from George last night who thought for some reason he would’ve waited for 2016. He would be 56.”
Donald Trump and John Kennedy Jr. in 1999: Were they up to something?
According to Gary Ginsberg, JFK Jr.’s close collaborator at George,
“He had been thinking about running for the N.Y. Senate seat - he even had meetings about it that spring - but by July had concluded he would focus his attention on running for governor of N.Y. in 2003.
By temperament and interest, John, I think, realized he was far more suited to being a governor than a legislator.
He knew from running George that he could be an inspiring, strong chief executive of a state, setting the tone for government and successfully running a complex operation.
That idea became very appealing to him at some point that summer. Had the stars aligned over the next couple of years, I’m pretty convinced that’s what he would have pursued.”
Others around John believed he was about to enter the race for the Senate seat that Daniel Moynihan, a former assistant to President Kennedy, was going leave vacant in 2000.
This is the seat that Bobby Kennedy had occupied from 1964 to 1968. On July 19, 1999, New York Daily News reporter Joel Siegel interviewed two unnamed friends of JFK Jr., who said “they believed he would have run for office some day. Earlier this year, in one of the best-kept secrets in state politics, Kennedy considered seeking the seat of retiring Sen. Daniel Moynihan (D-N.Y.) in 2000, friends confirmed yesterday.”
Democratic Chairman John Marino, also quoted in Siegel’s article, did not believe he would have run for the Senate seat, but had little doubt that, if he did, “It would have been ‘Goodbye, anyone else. This is a guy who everybody recognized who would have had any nomination for the asking.’”
Christopher Andersen supports the view that, after consulting with Democratic leaders, John had made up his mind for the Senate. It clashed with Hillary Clinton’s plan.
The Clintons, who were to leave the White House in January 2001, were about to purchase a home in Chappaqua, N.Y., and Hillary was gearing up to run for the Senate as a stepping-stone to the presidency.
“In the end, John was still convinced his best shot was at running for Moynihan’s Senate seat. Hillary Clinton had hesitated to enter the race largely because she feared John, who was being touted behind the scenes as her principal rival for the nomination, would be a formidable foe.
John was both heir to the Kennedy magic and People’s ‘Sexiest Man Alive,’ as well as the consummate New Yorker, a resident of the city since the age of three.
Although New York had no residency requirements, Hillary, who had never spent more than a few days at a time in New York, would almost certainly be branded a carpetbagger. …
As late as the summer of 1999, Hillary actively worried about JFK Jr. and sought assurances from state party officials that he would not be a last-minute entry into the race.
… In early July, Hillary finally made her move and formally announced her candidacy.
But she was still concerned about the possibility that John might decide to toss his hat into the ring. As it turned out, she was right. John was now more confident than ever that he could easily beat her at the polls.
He believed Hillary was vulnerable not only because of the Monica Lewinsky affair, her husband’s subsequent impeachment, and a slew of brewing scandals in the Clinton White House, but mainly because she simply had no connection to the state he loved.
As Hillary had feared, young Kennedy planned on making much of Hillary’s carpetbagger status. ‘Wait until she gets here,’ John told his friend Billy Noonan.
‘She’s gonna get her head handed to her.’
He was going to fill Noonan in on the details of his upcoming campaign for the U.S. Senate - how and when he intended to make the announcement, what advice he was getting from Uncle Teddy, the endorsements and backing he was already lining up - when they all got together on Nantucket to celebrate Noonan’s fifth wedding anniversary on July 16.
Then they’d be off to attend his cousin Rory’s wedding in Hyannis Port. If, of course, all went according to plan.”
Christopher Andersen’s interview on Eyewitness News
Andersen relies on the testimony of John’s longtime friend Billy Noonan, who authored in 2006 Forever Young: My Friendship with John F. Kennedy, Jr. (Viking Press).
Here is what Noonan writes precisely, referring to the last phone conversation he had with John, whom he was supposed to meet on July 16:
“He had been making vague references on the phone about shutting things down, and starting things up.
During the week before our anniversary dinner, he told me that he had something pressing to talk about, but with curious ears in the office, John was cautious.
‘We’ll talk about it this weekend.’ … I asked him now what was up with that [1997] poll, to rib him about how the press was pushing for Hillary Clinton to replace Moynihan.
‘Wait until she gets here,’ John said. ‘She’s gonna get her head handed to her.’ He was in.”
This is the only mention by Noonan of John’s intention to run for the Senate. On one hand, it is not much. On the other, it should be taken very seriously, coming from one of John’s most intimate friends.
Given the importance of the issue, there can be no doubt that Noonan weighed every word he wrote.
One gets the impression that he wanted to say what he knew for the record, yet felt restrained from saying it too clearly, even when hinting at John’s awareness that his telephone conversations were tapped the day before he died.
In his 2009 article, Wayne Madsen quotes an unnamed “close friend of the late John F. Kennedy, Jr.” (who may be Billy Noonan), who said JFK Jr. “was about ready to announce his run for the U.S. Senate from New York. Kennedy was acutely aware of his vulnerability and hired on a personal security team just prior to his announcing for the Senate.”
Noonan and Andersen are not the only ones to think that John was upsetting Hillary’s plans. Andrew Collins writes:
“Approaching the end of two terms in the White House, the Clintons began preparing for their political future. They focused their attention on developing Hillary as a politician (even though she had no actual experience), and selling influence while they had it - buy now, pay later - payable to what would become ‘The Clinton Foundation’.
Hillary refused to return to Arkansas, and suggested the purchase of a home in New York which would allow her to run for the Senate in the upcoming election.
There was just one obstacle…. JFK Jr. had entered the political scene. New York was electric with word of JFK Jr. reclaiming his father’s legacy!
A piece of Camelot was still alive in America, and donors began to line up. She knew she could never defeat the son of JFK in New England.”
After reviewing all those testimonies, I feel that no certainty can be reached about John’s immediate plan, other that he was at the dawn of a bright political future and that he had several options in New York State.
If we believe Noonan - and why shouldn’t we - then Laurence Leamer, author of Sons of Camelot: The Fate of an American Dynasty (HarperCollins, 2011) is right when writing that “John watched with growing dismay as Hillary subtly insinuated herself into what he considered his state.”
April 1999: “Why Hillary won’t be senator”
It is easy to guess that, in return, Hillary saw John as a serious rival, on the state level in the short term, and on the national level in the long term. She stood no chance if John ever stepped across her way, and that was sure to happen sooner or later.
It is true, as some authors object, that John never frontally attacked the Clintons in his magazine George, perhaps out of Democratic loyalty.
But one of the very last issues of George that he oversaw himself (April 1999) was hostile to Hillary’s bid on the Senate seat, posting on the front-page: “Why Hillary won’t be senator.”
November 1999: “Hillary Comes Clean”
In April 1996, the cover had: “Why Women Will Dump Hillary.” But with John out of the way, Hillary did win the seat and, disturbingly, the November 1999 issue of George contained an exclusive interview of her, together with - in tragic irony - an article on “How Bobby Kennedy Seduced New York.”
JFK Jr. As a Conspiracy Theorist
Let’s move on to the next question: how dedicated was John to getting to the bottom of his father’s assassination?
According to testimonies from his friends, John Junior was haunted by the death of his father and quite knowledgeable about independant investigations contradicting the Warren Report. In 1999, he was not a newcomer to JFK conspiracy theories; his quest for truth had started as early as the late 1970s.
His old high school girlfriend Meg Azzoni, in her self-published book, 11 Letters and a Poem: John F. Kennedy, Jr., and Meg Azzoni (2007), writes that as a teenager, JFK, Jr. was questioning the official version of his father’s death: “His heartfelt quest was to expose and bring to trial who killed his father, and covered it up.”
Don Jeffries, author of Hidden History, claimed that “another friend of JFK, Jr.’s adult inner circle, who very adamantly requested to remain anonymous, verified that he was indeed quite knowledgeable about the assassination and often spoke of it in private.”
JFK Jr., said Jeffries in a radio interview, was on “a Shakespearian quest,” “to avenge his father’s death,” like young Hamlet.
October 1998 “Conspiracy Issue” with an article by Oliver Stone
John is the only Kennedy to have shown a serious determination to pursue this truth, besides his uncle Bobby. And he took the risk of making his interest public in October 1998, when he released a special “Conspiracy Issue” of George magazine , which included an article by Oliver Stone titled “Our Counterfeit History,” introduced on the cover as “Paranoid and Proud of It!”
In an article published in 2009, journalist Wayne Madsen claimed that, two weeks after John’s death, “I was scheduled to meet with Kennedy at his magazine’s offices in Washington, DC to discuss hiring on as one of a few investigative journalists Kennedy wanted to dig deep into a number of cases, but most importantly that of his father’s assassination.” (There is no confirmation of Madsen’s claim.)
As many truth seekers who had started with the Kennedy assassination, John had developed an awareness that other events of great historical consequence were the subject of State-orchestrated lies and cover-ups, with corporate media complicity.
And so the JFK assassination was not the only “conspiracy issue” explored by George. It is worth taking a look at two others, for they may inform us on the direction John Jr. was taking in his quest for truth.
In December 1996, George delved into the theory claiming that TWA Flight 800, which had exploded on July 17, 1996, soon after leaving JFK International, had been downed by a missile, rather than as the result of an short-circuit near the central fuel tank, as the National Transportation Safety Board concluded.
Although I have not been able to read the George article on TWA 800 (I will appreciate a comment from anyone who has), I assume it supported Pierre Salinger, who had been the most prominent journalist arguing that TWA 800 was shot down by a missile fired from a US Navy ship.
Salinger was severely attacked by his peers, and his notoriety suffered permanent damage. But in May 27, 1999, he reaffirmed his belief and asked to be vindicated in a Georgetowner column, based on new research confirming his views.
In this piece, Salinger mentions that “retired Navy commander William Donaldson has also come out with a new view: TWA 800 was shot down by a missile - fired not from a Navy ship but a terrorist group.”
That could explain the presence of a mysterious ship caught on radar while speeding away near where the plane exploded.
“‘Radar data collected during the last minute of the T.W.A. flight revealed the two closest objects to the plane, both between three and four miles away, as a Navy P-3 airplane and what the exhibit called simply a ‘30-knot target.’
Radar data for the next 20 minutes showed the mystery boat heading on a beeline out to sea, on a south-southwest course, even as other boats rushed to the crash to try to help out.
It was nearly 9 o’clock at night, not the usual time for an excursion. … [FBI officer] Lewis Schiliro acknowledged the presence of the mystery boat, which he said was at least 25 to 30 feet long and reached speeds of 35 knots, close to 40 miles per hour.
‘Despite extensive efforts, the F.B.I. has been unable to identify this vessel,’ he said. / The response is somewhat alarming given the F.B.I.’s assurances that it had turned over every stone.”
Alarming, but understandable if the mystery boat was in fact Israeli. Israel’s LAP (LohammaPsichologit, the Mossad’s department of psychological warfare) had been busy blaming Iran from the day of the crash, and “thousands of media stories perpetuated the fiction,” recounts Gordon Thomas in Gideon’s Spies: The Secret History of the Mossad (2009), with the London Times claiming that land-air Stinger missile systems had been smuggled across the Canadian border into the United States by Islamic terrorists.
A year later, the FBI’s chief investigator, James K. Kallstrom, would tell his colleagues: “If there was a way to nail those bastards in Tel Aviv for time wasting, I sure would like to see it happen. We had to check every item they slipped into the media.”
Some researchers into JFK Jr.’s plane crash have suggested a connection to the TWA 800 crash, which happened three years earlier almost to the day, and in the same vicinity. Jackie Jura, author of Orwell Today website, wrote:
“I remember when TWA 800 exploded and Salinger was going to give a press conference in Paris to expose the truth. But then he cancelled it.
The rumour on the net at the time was that the powers-that-be told him that if he gave the press conference they’d kill John-John, and so he backed down.”
Back down he did, but in May 27, 1999, he reiterated his claim, and John Jr. would die 50 days later. I don’t subscribe to that theory, but it is worth mentioning.
“TWA Conspiracy Theories” (December 1996)
In March 1997, three months after the issue featuring the “TWA Conspiracy Theories” cover article, George magazine published a 13-page article by the mother of Yigal Amir, the man convicted of assassinating Israeli Prime Minister Yitzhak Rabin. Rabin had offended the Israeli far-right by wanting to trade land for peace.
Amir’s mother revealed that her son had operated under the tutelage and training of a Shin Bet agent, Avishai Raviv, working for forces seeking to halt the peace process.
“Who was behind the killing of Yitzhak Rabin?” (March 1997)
Canadian-Israeli journalist Barry Chamish, who investigated the Rabin assassination in his book Who Murdered Yitzhak Rabin? (1988), agrees.
He also believes that JFK Jr. was determined to “get the full story on the Rabin assassination,” and finds support in several news release following JFK Jr.’s death:
“Catherine Crier of Fox TV’s The Crier Report, announcing that JFK Jr. was about to meet high ranking Mossad officers.
Then the German newspaper, Frankfurter Allgemeine Zeitung, reported that Kennedy had met with the deputy chief of the Mossad, Amiram Levine, to get the full story on the Rabin assassination two days before his plane went down.
Then Maariv ran an interview with JFK’s chauffeur, who happens to be Israeli. Then people started noting that Ehud Barak was in Washington at the time of Kennedy’s finale in life.”
Barak’s visit to the U.S. around July 16, 1999 - with a battalion of Intelligence and security agents - is a fact, but I have not been able to verify Chamish’ sources in the Crier Report, the Frankfurter Allgemeine or the Maariv. Chamish concluded:
“Yes, I’m sure he [John] was murdered. And yes, the Israeli political establishment had a motive for involvement.
The latest Kennedy to die violently was the only American editor to expose (in the March 1997 issue of his magazine George) the conspiracy behind Rabin’s assassination.
And he had every intention of continuing his exposes until he got to the bottom of the matter. We don’t know what drove him to stand alone in seeking the truth, but it may have had much to do with the information contained within Final Judgment.”
There is no confirmation that John Junior read Michael Piper’s book Final Judgment blaming Israel for the Kennedy assassination, and released in 1993. But it is in the realm of possibility, given his personal quest for the truth on his father’s death, and his consideration for the theory that Rabin was assassinated by the Israeli Deep State, rather than by a lone nut.
So, was JFK Jr. himself assassinated?
Here is man whose road to the presidency seemed traced. No other man of his age had better chances to reach the White House one day. And no other man in the world had more reasons to want the 1963 Kennedy assassination reinvestigated.
He was already trying to educate the public through his magazine, at the risk of exposing his own beliefs, something no other Kennedy had ever done (even RFK had kept his doubt on the Warren report private, and his plan to reopen the case secret).
And this man, his best friend Noonan believes, was just about to announce his candidacy for a New York Senate seat, which everyone would have understood as the first step toward the White House.
Pierre Salinger and others even believe he would have run for president in 2000.
What are the odds that he would die at this precise moment by accident?
How lucky for his enemies to be spared the trouble of eliminating him, as they had his uncle in 1968! If that was an accident, then that alone deserves to be called a “Kennedy curse,” doesn’t it! If it was an accident, then the Devil caused it. Or was it Yahweh?
As I have argued in “Did Israel kill the Kennedys?”, John’s uncle Bobby had been assassinated because he was, in his own eyes and in the eyes of most Americans - and therefore also in the eyes of his brother’s killers -, the continuation of his brother, his heir and avenger.
Even before David Talbot, Laurence Leamer has shown how close Jack and Bobby had been. He writes in Sons of Camelot:
“Bobby had been the president’s alter ego and protector. He could finish his brother’s sentences and complete a task that Jack signaled with no more than a nod or a gesture.
He had loved his brother so intensely and served him so well that within the administration it was hard to tell where one man ended and the other began.”
A bond of blood and spirit of a comparable nature existed between John F. Kennedy and the son that bore his name.
Although John Junior could not speak with his father, nor even remember speaking with him, his love and loyalty to his father, nurtured by his mother, was the driving force in his life.
From the point of view of JFK’s murderers, JFK Jr. was JFK redivivus, and RFK redivivus at the same time. All three were like one man who had to be killed three times.
Part II: Evidence of Assassination and Cover-Up
Was JFK Jr. assassinated? As we are going to see, the evidence may not be absolutely compelling, but what can be proven beyond a reasonable doubt is that federal authorities and corporate media engaged in a massive cover-up of any facts that contradicted the theory of the accident due to the pilot’s error.
And that is enough, I think, to decide between accident and assassination. The transgenerational cabal who had the motive, means and opportunity to murder JFK and RFK (and the power to get away with it) had the same motive, means and opportunity to murder JFK Jr. (and the power to get away with it).
We know for sure that, in 1968, RFK had both the ambition to win the White House and the determination to reopen the investigation on the death of his brother (read my article “Did Israel Kill the Kennedys?”). I have now shown that the same can be ascertained about JFK Jr. in 1999. Obviously, that made him a target, the next Kennedy on the list.
The 9:39 Call and the Explosion
According to Wayne Madsen, “JFK Jr.’s Plane Crash Was Originally Treated As Murder Investigation” (the title of his 2009 article):
“The FBI had discovered that there was ‘suspicious boating activity’ in an area of Martha’s Vineyard where Kennedy’s plane was descending to 2000 feet for its final approach to the airport.
The ‘suspicious’ boaters claimed to be fishing for striped bass. … after the plane’s wreckage was discovered, investigators found, according to Kennedy’s friend, that every light bulb, including that in the emergency flashlight, had been blown out on the plane and every circuit board, including those in the engine sensors and other electronic equipment, had been literally ‘melted.’
FBI agents on the scene preliminarily concluded that a ‘massive electromagnetic event’ caused Kennedy’s plane to crash. … Before the FBI could begin examining the ocean floor for any ‘special equipment’ that may have been thrown overboard from the fishing boat, their ‘murder’ investigation was abruptly called off by FBI headquarters in Washington.”
Unfortunately, I have found no source supporting Madsen’s claim about an aborted FBI investigation (that’s always the problem with Madsen). But the fact that no news of a criminal investigation ever reached the public is in itself very puzzling, given the history of Kennedy assassinations and the natural assumption that JFK Jr. could be a target.
That JFK Jr. had powerful enemies was well-known to the whole world, and the lack of a criminal investigation may be taken as confirmation of their power.
Independent investigators have gathered a fair amount of evidence that JFK Jr.’s death was a criminal act.
I will summarize what I hold to be the most solid evidence, based on my reading of all the relevant articles I could find on the Net (including those by early researchers such as John Quinn), and of the following two books: first, chapter 7 of Donald Jeffries’s book Hidden History: An Expose of Modern Crimes, Conspiracies, and Cover-Ups in American Politics (Skyhorse publishing, 2016), which I recommend (you may also want to listen to Jeffries’s one-hour interview); second, John Koerner, Exploding the Truth: The JFK Jr., Assassination (Chronos Books, 2018), which adds little.
In addition, John Hankey’s video “Dark Legacy II: the Assassination of JFK Jr” is very useful. However, I advise to skip Koerner’s Part I, meant to exonerate the Clintons and blame the Bushs; for the same reason, I recommend to start Hankey’s video at 15 minutes.
The basic fact that seems firmly established by radar data is that JFK Jr.’s plane suddenly nose-dived into the Ocean at 9:41. That cannot be explained simply by an engine failure, as the Boston Globe correctly asserted:
“Even if the engine died, a federal aviation source said, it is unlikely that the plane would reach such a high rate of descent, because the plane is designed to glide without power at a much slower rate for several miles.
And if Kennedy had run out of fuel, it is likely he would have made a distress call.”
The most likely explanation, apart from suicide, is that the plane suffered a structural damage, possibly by explosive, making it impossible to maintain in the air; blowing off a part of a wing or the tail would have been enough, and would have required only a very small device fixed to the plane.
The next element to consider is that, from the early hours of July 17, it was reported that JFK Jr. had made a call to Martha’s Vineyard airport at 9:39 pm, asking for landing instructions in a perfectly calm tone, less than two minutes before his plane suddenly dropped and disappeared from radar. That information was broadcast on Boston WCVB-TV and was relayed by ABC News. A United Press International article dated July 17 said:
“At 9:39 p.m. Friday, Kennedy radioed the airport and said he was 13 miles from the airport and 10 miles from the coast, according to WCVB-TV news in Boston.
He reportedly said he was making his final approach. … In his final approach message, WCVB-TV said Kennedy told controllers at the airport that he planned to drop off his wife’s sister and then take off again between 11 p.m. and 11:30 p.m. for Hyannis Airport.”
WCVB-TV repeated that information continuously during their first two days of reporting on the story. They broadcast, at 12:35 p.m. on July 17, a phone interview by anchor Susan Wornick of U.S. Coast Guard Petty Officer Todd Burgun, who confirmed the information. Here is a transcript of the footage, which Hankey has included in his valuable film (19:40):
Wornick: “We have been told by the Coast Guard that in fact there is now evidence of a last communication last night with JFK Jr.’s plane as he was making an approach to Martha’s Vineyard airport.
Petty officer Todd Burgun joins us from the Coast Guard Base in Boston. He is a Petty officer, and a public information officer. Thank you for being with us, sir. What can you tell us about this last communication with JFK Jr.’s plane?”
Burgun: “All I really know at this time is that it was at 9:39 p.m. and it was with the FAA. And he was on his final approach to Martha’s Vineyard.”
Wornick: “So at 9:39, to the best of your information, JFK Jr. made a contact with the airport, with the flight controllers that he was on his final descent.”
Burgun: “That is correct.”
That is all that remained of WCVB-TV’s report on the subject, when researchers later obtained archive copies; “hours of time on the tape archive of WCVB’s July 17 broadcast, during which information on Kennedy’s radio contact was continually reported, have been intentionally cut,” complained John Quinn.
According to Jeffries, the original interview of Burgun was much longer:
"On the uncut tape, Burgun went on to delineate all the points from the UPI’s article: Kennedy was calm, on approach to the airport, had provided his position and trajectory, and had even made a comment about dropping Lauren Bessette off at the airport. Some five hours of coverage was edited out.”
This crucial information was reported by news services on Saturday July 17 and early Sunday, July 18. By Monday morning, the FAA claimed that there was never a communication from Kennedy to the tower.
Todd Burgun became utterly unreachable. According to the Boston Globe, Martin Wyatt, a controller at the Martha’s Vineyard Airport tower the night of Kennedy’s flight “declined comment on whether he had radio contact with Kennedy’s plane.”
Simultaneously, on July 18, FAA and NTSB officials produced some “newly found” radar “evidence” which supposedly showed Kennedy’s flight exhibiting signs of difficulties and irregularities long before 9:39; obviously, Kennedy’s perfectly normal call at 9:39 did not fit with that new version of events.
Of course, it is not inconceivable that the crucial piece of information of JFK Jr.’s 9:39 radio call was mistaken, false, or fake.
Yet it seems highly implausible that the Coast Guard would charge their spokesman Todd Burgun - whose identity is not in question - to release it to the public without double-checking it.
The fact that the news was originally broadcast by a Boston TV station is perhaps significant, as is the fact that, among major newspapers, the Boston Globe was the most critical of the official story (I’ll mention other cases along the way).
Since Boston is the Kennedys’ historical stronghold, we can conjecture that an information war of some sort was going on between Boston and Washington, Boston trying to resist the disinformation assault from federal agencies.
The only available photo believed to be of the wreckage of JFK Jr.’s plane
The second element to consider is the testimony of Victor Pribanic, a trial lawyer from White Oak, Pennsylvania, who was fishing for striped bass off Squibnocket Point that night.
He gave an interview to The Martha’s Vineyard Times, cited in the New York Daily News, July 21, 1999: “I heard an explosion over my right shoulder. It sounded like an explosion. There was no shock wave, but it was a large bang.”
He also said, according to the Daily News,“that just before hearing the noise, he noticed a small aircraft flying low over the water toward the island.” Pribanic repeated his story to filmmaker Anthony Hilder of the Free World Alliance: “I heard a loud impact like a bomb.”
The next day, when Pribanic heard the news of the Kennedy crash, he gave his information to Hank Myer of the West Tilsbury Police Department.
Myer accompanied Pribanic to the site where he’d heard the explosion, which would turn out exactly where the plane went missing. Police, he was told, forwarded his information to the investigators.
Pribanic was apparently not the only witness of the explosion. The July 17 UPI article mentions:
"A reporter for the Vineyard Gazette newspaper told WCVB-TV in Boston that he was out walking Friday night about the time of the crash and saw ‘big white flash in the sky’ off Philbin Beach.”
When John DiNardo contacted the Vineyard Gazette in an attempt to talk with this reporter, a few days later, he was told that the “whole thing” was a mix-up due to some fireworks having been set off at “Falmouth”, and, when he insisted, he was told that the reporter was no longer employed by the paper.
Like the 9:39 radio call, the ear- and eye-witnesses disappeared from news reports from July 18 on. The National Transportation Safety Board initial report, released on July 30, 1999 makes no mention of them.
It states that there was no “in-flight break-up or fire, and no indication of pre-impact failure to the airframe,” which excludes an explosion damaging the plane. On June 7, 2000, eleven months after the plane crash, the NTSB released its final report.
That report was announced to the press by a short official NTSB news release which included the following statement: “The probable cause of the accident, as stated in the accident report, is: ‘The pilot’s failure to maintain control of the airplane during a descent over water at night, which was a result of spatial disorientation.
Factors in the accident were haze and the dark night.’” A first problem must be pointed out: that statement from the NTSB news release which is supposedly taken from the final report does not appear in the final report.
In fact, as I will show, it is hard to see how the full report supports the conclusion of that news release. One gets the impression that the person who wrote the news release didn’t even read the full report.
For example, the sudden drop of altitude from 2,200 feet to 1,100 feet in 14 seconds, stated in the full report, is hard to reconcile with the news release statement.
Disorientation implies that the pilot was not aware that he was flying straight into the ocean. But that is impossible, as the NTSB Investigator-in-Charge, Robert Pearce, had admitted as early as July 20, 1999: “They were aware they were going down. With that kind of descent rate, it is going to be noisier than hell in the cockpit.”
Jeb Burnside, commercial pilot and editor-in-chief of Aviation Safety Magazine, did a careful analysis of the NTSB report and radar data and confirms that weather conditions and pilot experience (or lack of) fail to explain the crash:
"On paper, this accident shouldn’t have happened. Despite most of his time being in a training environment, a typical 310-hour instrument-rating student in a well-equipped airplane should have had no problem with this flight.”
The mainstream media hardly paid attention to the full report, and focused on the short news release. But they even distorted it to make its hesitant conclusion (“probable cause”) more assertive and dramatic.
“Haze and the dark night,” which are mentioned as “factors in the accident,” were exaggerated and declared totally unsafe for flying. “The pilot’s failure to maintain control … as a result of spatial disorientation,” became proof that JFK Jr. was incompetent to fly in such terrible weather at night. And the implication was that JFK Jr. was reckless and irresponsible to fly that night, especially with his wife and sister-in-law on board.
So, after the first step of crucial omissions in the NTSB report (JFK Jr.’s 9:39 call to the airport and Pribanic’s report of an explosion), the disinformation process continued in two more steps: first, a NTSB news release about the “probable cause” of the “accident” is falsely presented as “stated” in the NTSB final report, whereas it is in reality a far cry from the picture presented in the report; second, that relatively prudent statement is exaggerated and dramatized in mainstream news, while all contradictory details in the full report are ignored.
Let’s see out that works for the two following crucial points: 1) weather conditions and visibility, 2) the pilot’s experience and cautiousness.
My point is not so much to determine exactly the visibility and the level of JFK Jr.’s skill, but rather to demonstrate a concerted effort to distort credible reports on these matters, with the obvious intention to convince the public that the lack of visibility and John’s inexperience are sufficient explanations for his plane crash, although in fact, they are not.
"At about 6:30 on the night of the accident, the pilot received an Internet weather forecast for flight from Teterboro, New Jersey, to Hyannis, Massachusetts. The report was for VFR (visual flight rules) weather, visibility 6 to 8 miles.”
So two hours before taking off, JFK Jr. received a forecast of very good flying conditions. The NTSB final report also quotes the Martha’s Vineyard tower manager as stating:
"The visibility, present weather, and sky condition at the approximate time of the accident was probably a little better than what was being reported. I say this because I remember aircraft on visual approaches saying they had the airport in sight between 10 and 12 miles out. I do recall being able to see those aircraft and I do remember seeing the stars out that night.”
This tower manager must be Marvin Wyatt, interviewed for the Boston Globe: “Marvin Wyatt, a controller at the Martha’s Vineyard Airport tower the night of Kennedy’s flight, said visibility was good at the airport at Kennedy’s expected arrival time.”
Wayne Madsen quotes an unnamed close friend of JFK Jr. (probably Billy Noonan, who was supposed to meet him that night) who said “that visibility around the Vineyard was clear at 9:41 p.m. when the plane disappeared from the sky.”
Mainstream news outlet, however, repeated over and over again, in contradiction even to the NTSB report, that the weather was so bad, the fog so thick, that John should have cancelled his plan to fly, had he been a responsible man.
FAA Flight Specialist Edward Meyer, who had prepared for the NTSB the FAA’s official report of weather conditions over Martha’s Vineyard on July 16, 1999, and had determined that they were “at least very good,” was disturbed by the way his conclusions were distorted, and released a public statement:
"Nothing of what I have heard on mainstream media makes any sense to me… The weather along his flight was just fine. A little haze over eastern Connecticut. … I don’t know why the airplane crashed, but what I heard on the media was nothing but garbage.”
One of the most dubious witnesses brought forward by the corporate media to support their claim of fatal visibility was Kyle Bailey. Here is how the Washington Post introduced him on July 21st:
"Kyle Bailey, 25, a pilot with more than a decade of flying experience who also keeps his plane at Essex County Airport and who frequently flies the same route as Kennedy - Fairfield to the Vineyard - took special note of Kennedy that night because Bailey had just decided against making the flight.
Bailey said he feared the combination of darkness and haze could be treacherous, causing him to lose sight of the horizon, lose his bearings, maybe even lose control of his plane.
Visibility was four to five miles in Fairfield due to haze, near the margin for flying by visual rules, as opposed to instruments.”
According to the NY Daily News of the same day, Bailey said:
"I saw him taxi [drive the plane on ground to prepare for take off], and I saw him take off.
I [later] told my family, ‘I can’t believe he’s going up in this weather.’ At night, you don’t know where the sky ends and the ocean begins.
You have no sight of the horizon. It can give you a false sense of flying level.”
“Bailey,” commented the Daily News,“was staggered by what he feared was another ghastly Kennedy tragedy. ‘It never seems to end for this family,’ he said. ‘He’s so young, with a life full of promise.’”
How moving! But who is Kyle Bailey, “the last man to see Kennedy alive at the Fairfield airport”? I had no difficulty to find the answer to that question: it happens that Kyle Bailey later became an aviation analyst regularly working for major network and cable televisions such as Fox News, CBS, ABC, NBC, BBC. Bailey even appeared in the documentary Curse on the Kennedys? and very recently in the ABC documentary The Last Days of JFK Jr., aired in January 2019, in which he repeats his story. Can you swallow that blue pill?
In the same documentary The Last Days of JFK Jr. appears another private pilot by the name of Bob Arnot, who claims to have flown the same night along the same route as John. He declares there was no visibility, to the point that, when approaching Martha’s Vineyard, he could not see any lights at all.
Unlike Bailey, who somehow escapted the attention of NTSB investigators, this Bob Arnot is most probably the unnamed pilot mentioned in the NTSB report as follows: “when his global positioning system (GPS) receiver indicated that he was over Martha’s Vineyard, he looked down and ‘…there was nothing to see.
There was no horizon and no light. … I turned left toward Martha’s Vineyard to see if it was visible but could see no lights of any kind nor any evidence of the island. … I thought the island might [have] suffered a power failure.’”
That testimony completely contradicts Martha’s Vineyard tower manager (Marvin Wyatt), who is quoted in the NTSB report as saying visibility was great. Which shows that the NTSB report is self-contradictory in some areas.
Now, it is a very small world. You can find on Wikipedia that “Dr. Bob Arnot is a journalist, author, former host of the Dr. Danger reality TV series, and previously medical and foreign correspondent for NBC and CBS.” Can you swallow that too? Or do you start to smell a media conspiracy?
Was JFK Jr. Reckless and Inexperienced?
Let’s now talk about JFK Jr.’s flying experience and skill. Kyle Bailey’s testimony implies that JFK Jr.’s is solely to blame for his own death and for the deaths of his wife and her sister.
That view was reinforced by hundreds of comments on air about how inexperienced JFK Jr. was. Just like on weather conditions, the mainstream media gave a grossly negative view of JFK Jr.’s flying experience and skill, unrelated to the NTSB report and to the real testimonies of flight instructors who knew him.
The NTSB report reckoned that JFK Jr. had a flight experience of “about 310 hours, of which 55 hours were at night.” During the last fifteen months, he had made 35 flights between Fairfield airport, N.J., and Martha’s Vineyard, including five at night.
Three certified flight instructors (CFI) quoted in the report describe John as an “excellent”, “methodical” and “very cautious” pilot. In the early days, some newspapers echoed that view with their own research. John McColgan, JFK Jr.’s federal licensing instructor from Vero Beach, Florida, was interviewed for the Orlando Sentinel, July 18, 1999, and said: “He was an excellent pilot. … In fact, by now he probably has enough hours to be a commercial pilot.”
One the same day, the New York Daily News quoted flight instructors Ralph and Chris describing John as a careful pilot, always checking meticulously “every nut and bolt on the airplane. … He was very safety oriented. … John was a natural in flying.”
On July 21, USA Today published an article titled “Pilot Kennedy was ‘conscientious guy,’” whose lead paragraph said: “John F. Kennedy Jr. attended the Harvard of flight schools, may have had far more flight experience than has been reported and was known at his New Jersey airport for prudence in the cockpit.” The article quoted other people who knew Kennedy as a good pilot.
But as days passed, major TV channels and newspapers gave a more and more negative assessment of John’s flying skills and of the weather conditions. They emphasized that he didn’t have the proper license to fly with instruments only, as the absence of visibility would have required.
It is true that John’s license was for visual flight only, meaning visibility of at least 4 miles. But although John had not yet obtained the license allowing him to fly by instruments only, he had passed the written test and completed the training for the inflight test. According to the flight instructor who trained him, as quoted in the NTSB report, “the pilot’s basic instrument flying skills and simulator work were excellent.”
So even if the visibility had been very bad - which it was not - John could have guided his plane safety to the airport, using his autopilot if necessary. According to Scott Meyers, a foremost expert on the death of JFK Jr. who was interviewed for the program “Encounters with the Unexplained: The Kennedy Curse, JFK, Jr.’s, Death – Accident or Assassination?” aired February 15, 2002:
"The fact that Kennedy knew how to use his plane’s navigational instruments casts serious doubt on the official explanation for the crash, because even if he had gotten lost, his knowledge of the plane’s instruments would have allowed him to flip a switch and allow the autopilot to guide him to a short distance from his runway destination.
A little haze should have never stopped him from landing safely.”
One question has been the focus of much attention from independent researchers: was there a flight instructor as co-pilot in the plane?
Officially, there wasn’t. No fourth body was recovered in the wreckage.
But strangely enough, one seat was also missing, and conspiracy theorists such as John Hankey have speculated that it might have had a flight instructor’s body seat-belted on it, which might have been spirited away for the sake of building up the story of an incompetent and reckless John.
For if John had flown with a flight instructor, then the whole argument of his recklessness falls.
Again, I am mentioning this issue here, not to make any definite conclusion, but mainly to point out evidence of a concerted effort to close the case and satisfy the public that JFK Jr. died - and killed his wife and sister-in-law - by his own recklessness.
JFK Jr. had owned his Piper Saratoga for a little more than two months, and he had never flown it without a flight instructor. He had flown to Martha’s Vineyard 8 times in the previous month with that plane, always with a flight instructor.
Since he had his wife and her sister on board, it doesn’t seem like him to fly without an instructor, especially at night. According to Donald Jeffries, “Early reports, such as the one that appeared in the New York Times on July 17, 1999, indicated that a flight instructor was on the plane. JFK Jr.’s George magazine coeditor Richard Blow recounted that Kennedy had told him he was taking a flight instructor with him during their last lunch together."
Then, from the next day on, any mention of a flight instructor on board disappeared. Different explanations were offered for the fact that John flew without a flight instructor that particular night, for the first time on his new plane. His biographer Christopher Andersen writes:
"On today’s trip up from New Jersey, Jay Biederman, the flight instructor who had recently helped John pass his written instrument test and was preparing him for his instrument flight test, was scheduled to go along as he had several times before.
But when Biederman canceled to join his parents on a hiking trip in Switzerland, John made the fateful decision not to find a replacement.”
Curiously, that explanation contradicts a key testimony included in the NTSB final report, of which John Hankey provides a good critical analysis at the end of his film. I quote here the shorter presentation from Donald Jeffries:
"One of Kennedy’s flight instructors, Robert Merena, told the NTSB, some six months after the crash, that JFK Jr. had turned down his request to fly with him by saying he wanted to “do it alone.”
These dramatic, ironic words were reported widely in the establishment press and solidified the image of JFK Jr. as an irresponsible daredevil. Merena’s own lawyer would deny he’d ever made such a statement, and the memorandum produced by the NTSB regarding it was suspiciously irregular, with no date, location, or signature on it.
Most crucially, Merena had been interviewed five days after the crash by the NTSB, and he never mentioned anything about this, which would certainly seem to have been a pertinent fact. Merena did tell the NTSB in this early interview, however, that he’d never seen JFK Jr. fly without an instructor.”
The damning story of John rejecting the offer of a flight instructor and stubbornly insisting to pilot alone was included in the NTSB’s final report and became widely quoted.
Here it is from ABC News on July 7, 2000: “John F. Kennedy Jr. turned down an offer by one of his flying instructors to accompany him the night of his fatal flight to Martha’s Vineyard, saying he ‘wanted to do it alone,’ federal investigators say.” The same could be read in the Los Angeles Times on the same day, and in TheNew York Times.
I personally feel that the question of whether there was a co-pilot in the plane or not cannot be conclusively answered either way. But the important thing here is the strong probability that Robert Merena’s testimony was fabricated or forced, to hammer in the point that there was no co-pilot and that JFK Jr. acted irresponsibly.
In this whole affair, we cannot prove directly that JFK Jr. was murdered. What we can prove, however, is that federal agencies and mainstream media conspired in a massive fraud, including the concealment of key evidence (the 9:39 call and reports of an explosion), the distortion of facts (visibility and pilot’s ability) and false testimonies (Kyle Bailey and Bob Arnot being the most likely).
That can be taken as indirect proof that JFK Jr. was murdered.
Eight hours of video footage taken by recovery divers might have helped to solve the mystery, but the Navy preferred to destroyed them (Sidney Morning Herald, February 13, 2001)
The National Security Protocol
Truth seekers such as Donald Jeffries, John Koerner or John Hankey have raised important questions concerning the 10 hours (they say 15 hours) it took for a search to begin after the plane was reported missing by Bessette and Kennedy relatives, at 10 p.m. on July 16th, and for the 4 or 5 days it took to locate and retrieve the wreckage and the bodies.
The plane was equipped with an Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT), which sends out a beacon signal in the event of a crash. According to the original UPI article mentioned earlier, “the beacon was heard by the Coast Guard in Long Island, N.Y., at 3:40 a.m. But as the search went on, authorities seemed to discount the relevance of the beacon signal.”
Was the search intentionally directed away from the crash site during three days, in order for the perpetrators to secretly destroy the evidence from the cockpit voice recorder (the NTSB report says that “its backup battery was missing, and it had retained no data”), remove the log book which John kept in a waterproof box and, more importantly in Hankey’s view, remove the body of the co-pilot (together with the missing seat reported by the NTSB)?
That is a possibility that finds support in the testimony of Lieutenant Colonel Richard Stanley of the Civil Air Patrol, who “would report seeing what he thought were Coast Guard helicopters around the crash site at about 7 a.m., hours before the Coast Guard or anyone else arrived.”
For lack of space, I will not dwell on those issues, which are thoroughly discussed by the above-mentioned researchers.
Rather, let’s focus on the tight military control of all procedures following the tragedy, from the search and rescue missions to the news reporting, all conducted under national security standards.
The search was done by military planes and vessels. According to John Koerner, “the military immediately instituted in the hours after the crash a 17-nautical mile no-fly zone, and no entry zone, around the crash site.
No civilians or media were allowed in this area until the bodies and wreckage were recovered.”
On July 20, 1999, we read in the NTSB report, “the airplane wreckage was located by U.S. Navy divers from the recovery ship, USS Grasp.”
Why was the Navy, rather than civilian rescue craft, tasked with the retrieval of JFK Jr.’s crashed airplane?
More disturbing still, why did the Pentagon take control of news reporting from July 18?
Pentagon Press conference, from Hankey’s Dark Legacy II (24:08)
There are issues also with the autopsies. Joanna Weiss and Matthew Brelis of the Boston Globe wrote on July 23, 1999, in an article headlined “JFK Autopsy Rushed”:
"The autopsies in the Kennedy case were performed especially quickly, pathologists said. The remains were taken to a Bourne hospital at about 7:15 p.m.
Wednesday night and released to the victims’ families at 11 p.m., according to the medical examiner’s office and the Cape and Islands district attorney’s office. /
Many jurisdictions refuse to perform autopsies at night, said Robert Kirschner, a former deputy chief medical examiner for Cook County, Ill. The haste in this case, he said, could lead to questions about the investigation’s thoroughness. …
The timing of the Kennedy investigation, Kirschner said, makes it unlikely that pathologists performed autopsies on Carolyn Bessette Kennedy or Lauren Bessette. ‘You can’t possibly do three investigations in four hours,’ he said.”
But, to me, the most suspicious thing of all is the way the bodies were disposed of after their rushed autopsies: they were cremated in Duxbury’s cemetery crematorium. Then their remains were taken aboard the Navy destroyer Briscoe, and scattered into the sea, near the place where they had found their death.
Why? “The burial for the 35th president’s son,” noted local Duxbury journalist Paula Maxwell, “was reportedly carried out in keeping with his expressed wishes.”
The Boston Globe reported on July 22 , “Kennedy’s family requested a burial at sea, and the Pentagon granted that request.”
But, the next day, the same newspaper expressed surprise:
"The cremated remains of John F. Kennedy Jr., his wife, and her sister were cast from a warship to the ocean currents in a manner not favored by the Catholic Church and in a ceremony that occurred only after the intercession of Pentagon brass.
The Roman Catholic Church prefers the presence of a body at its funeral rites. And the Defense Department rarely accords the honor of burial at sea to civilians.”
Moreover, no other Kennedy had ever been cremated. The reasons given for cremating JFK Jr. body do not make any sense and are contradictory.
The New York Times wrote: “Kennedy family members, citing his wishes and hoping to avoid having a spectacle made of Mr. Kennedy’s final resting place, have decided to have his body cremated and his ashes scattered at sea in a Navy ceremony, a family adviser said.”
Can we believe that the Kennedy family, who had always showed respect for Catholic traditions, wanted no grave for JFK Jr., by fear that his grave might become a pilgrimage site?
And can we believe that John, at age 39, had expressed “his wish” to be cremated? CNN added more bizarre explanations to that already incredible story:
"Sen. Kennedy, D-Massachusetts, had requested the burial at sea, saying it was his nephew’s wish to be cremated and his ashes spread on the waves.
The request was approved by Defense Secretary William Cohen. / The family of the Bessette sisters requested that the two women be buried in the same ceremony, the Pentagon said. / John Jr., like his father, the late President John F. Kennedy, had a love of the sea.
He spent many summers sailing and kayaking the waters where his plane crashed. / Pentagon officials tell CNN there are two grounds for granting permission for a naval burial at sea. First, there is a provision allowing for such burials for people providing “notable service or outstanding contributions to the United States. /
Also, protocol allows sea burials for the children of decorated Navy veterans. President Kennedy was a naval officer wounded and cited for heroism in World War II.”
How ridiculous! JFK was a decorated Navy veteran, and he surely loved sailing, yet he was buried in Arlington. It seems to me unconceivable that JFK Jr. would not have wished to be buried near his father.
Even Pierre Salinger asked to be buried at Arlington Cemetery, not far from JFK. It is just as unbelievable that the Bessettes, who are said to hold John responsible for their daughters’ death, and to have received 10 million dollars in compensation from the Kennedys, would decide just the same.
According to information found in RFK Jr.’s diary, published by the New York Post, Ann Freeman, Carolyn and Lauren Bessette’s mother, “began asking that her two daughters be buried near her home in Greenwich, Connecticut.”
It was Edwin Schlossberg, Caroline Kennedy’s wife, who convinced her to have her two daughters cremated and their ashes spread in the ocean. “He bullied, bullied, bullied the shattered grieving mother,” writes RFK Jr., also commenting: “All the Bessette family knows that Ed hated Carolyn and did everything in his power to make her life miserable.”
After Carole Radziwill, the wife of Anthony Radziwill, JFK Jr.’s cousin and close friend, complained to RFK Jr. about Schlossberg, RFK Jr. wrote in his diary: “She says she wants to start an ‘I hate Ed Club.’ There would be many, many members. John & Carolyn would have certainly applied.”
That surely makes us wonder about Edwin Schlossberg’s interest in the whole affair.
Navy destroyer USS Biscoe, where the funeral ceremony took place
Who Did It?
So, have we proven without a reasonable doubt that JFK Jr. was assassinated? Admittedly, no. None of the elements analyzed above is entirely conclusive by itself.
Perhaps, after all, Todd Burgun was mistaken about John’s radio call to Martha’s Vineyard airport at 9:39 (but why didn’t he come forward to retract his statement?). Perhaps Victor Pribanic lied, or mistook he sound of John’s plane crashing into the Ocean for an airborn explosion (but what about the other witnesses?).
Perhaps, among the conflicting reports about the visibility, we should give the benefit of the doubt to the worst reports. Perhaps Kyle Bailey, the last man to see JFK Jr. alive, was really there, before becoming an aviation analyst expert regularly appearing on Fox News Channel, Fox Business Network, MSNBC, CNBC, The Weather Channel, CBS, ABC, NBC, BBC, CTV, I24 News, and HLN, as his LinkedIn account says.
Perhaps flight instructor Robert Merena did suddenly remember in January 2000 that JFK Jr. had rejected his offer to fly with him because “he wanted to do it alone.” Perhaps John Junior, at age 39, did ask to be cremated and his ashes spread into the ocean he loved so much. And so on.
It is the accumulation of such doubtful elements that is hard to accept. It is also the military control over the operations, right down to news reporting from the Pentagon, which is odd.
Add the fact that the regional director of the NTSB in charge of the investigation, Robert Pearce, according to his official profile, later “briefed State Department officials and the Egyptian Ambassador in the wake of the EgyptAir Flight 990 crash [the jet plane that crashed into the Atlantic Ocean after leaving JFK airport, with 33 high ranking Egyptian military officers on board, allegedly by the fault of a suicidal Egyptian co-pilot] as well as supported the FBI on scene at the World Trade Center in the aftermath of the events of September 11, 2001.” I sure wouldn’t trust Robert Pearce to investigate my own plane crash.
In the final analysis, it is the explanation of the crash that is strikingly implausible. As Anthony Hilder put it:
"A finely-tuned, well-kept first-class airplane doesn’t just drop out of the sky and head straight down into the ocean unless it’s blown out of the sky or the pilot deliberately sends it into a dive to kill himself and his passengers.”
There is evidence of an accumulation of deliberate omissions, lies and false testimonies from the NTSB investigation to mainstream reporting, in order to blame the plane crash on the pilot alone, regardless of inconsistencies.
And so, between accident and assassination, I lean strongly toward assassination.
Who orchestrated the plot, then? Behind every Kennedy assassination, John Hankey sees the Bushs, heirs to the Nazis, he insists. Hankey belongs to the category of half-truthers who would rather see the hands of Nazis than of the Mossad.
He believes JFK Jr. named his magazine George as a way to “tell everyone who he thought killed his father, by hiding the answer in plain sight.”
Hankey doesn’t suspect the Clintons at all. Neither does John Koerner, who starts his book Exploding the Truth by a chapter for “exonerating the Clintons”: the Clintons loved the Kennedys so much they would never have done them harm, he wants us to believe.
Donald Jeffries is more rational when suggesting to add John F. Kennedy Jr. to the list of the notorious “Clinton Body Count”, which already includes quite many deaths by plane crash: Victor Raiser, the Clinton presidential campaign’s national finance cochairman (July 30, 1992), Dr. Stanley Heard, a member of Clinton’s health-care advisory committee (September 10, 1993), Hershel Friday, Clinton’s Finance Committee chairman (March 1, 1994).
After all, the Navy takeover of the rescue and recovery missions, and the whole national security protocol around the case, can only have been ordered by President Clinton.
Roger Stone, a longtime aide to President Richard Nixon and investigator into JFK’s death, believes the Clintons ordered the murder of JFK Jr.’s because he was planning to run for the Senate seat that Hillary coveted.
Yet the Clintons certainly had nothing to do with JFK or RFK’s assassinations. So whatever role they played in the case of JFK Jr.’s assassination, they must have been part of a larger scheme.
Even if Hillary had a motive to eliminate JFK Jr. from the New York Senate race, I don’t think she would have gotten away with it without higher protections.
Let us not forget also that, in all Kennedy assassinations, the key factor for success is the complicity of the mainstream media for more 50 years. The Clintons don’t own the media.
Like Michael Collins Piper long before me, and like Ron Unz more recently, I believe that Israel assassinated both JFK and RFK. From there follows naturally the hypothesis that Israel also killed JFK Jr., and for the very same reason as they killed RFK: to prevent him from ever reaching the White House and reopening the investigation on his father’s death.
When I say “Israel”, I mean it in the broad sense, as including all the Machiavellian crypto-Zionists infiltrated in all layers of the U.S. power structure, including corporate media.
Israel not just assassinated Kennedys. They keep assassinating their memory, through a constant flow of anti-Kennedy books attacking their character and vilifying their family.
This is what JFK researcher James DiEugenio calls “the posthumous assassination of JFK,” the obsession to “smother any legacy that might linger”; for “assassination is futile if a man’s ideas live on through others.”
Take for example pseudo-biographer C. David Heymann, who after working for the Mossad in Israel (from his own admission), returned to the U.S. only to write Kennedy biographies, including the salacious Bobby and Jackie: A Love Story, and went on, after JFK Jr.’s death, to claim a ten-year secret acquaintance with him in order to fill the media with rubbish.
Why do publishers and mainstream media keep taking Heymann seriously?
Why does the New York Post give a positive review of his latest book, American Legacy: The Story of John and Caroline Kennedy (2007), which portrays John Junior as a “novice pilot” who boarded his plane half-drunk and under heavy medication (“Vicodin to relieve the pain of a recently broken ankle, plus Ritalin for attention-deficit disorder and medication for a thyroid problem”), who took off while “the haze had already grown thick and viscous,” and who spent the last 30 seconds of his life “not knowing up from down, frantically pulling at his plane’s controls in a panicked attempt to right its deadly spiral,” “with whirling instruments sending him messages he couldn’t read”?
The Jewish elites have hated the Kennedys ever since Joseph Kennedy, as U.S. ambassador in London, tried to prevent Roosevelt from entering World War II, resigned when he did, and then complained that “the Jews have won the war.”
Kennedys must pay for “the sins of the father,” as Ronald Kessler titled his book (The Sins of the Father: Joseph P. Kennedy and the Dynasty He Founded, 1996), a not-so-subtle reference to Exodus 20:5 asserting Yahweh’s right of vengeance on three generations.
The Jewish elites also hated the Kennedys for everything they represented, including a very strong sense of blood kinship that Jews prefer Gentiles not to have.
Paradoxically, in a nation founded on the rejection of monarchy, the Kennedys embodied the idea of royalty, the highest form of a dynastic aristocracy founded not just on the accumulation of wealth and power, but on a patriotic dedication to civil service.
It is as if the archetype of royalty had crystallized in the United States on this family, to the point that the name of King Arthur’s court, Camelot, has stuck to their legend.
The Kennedys also embodied the Irish Catholic root of the American people, with its deep-seated antagonism to British puritanism, the more Israel-friendly branch of Christianity, which has come to dominate American politics since Lyndon Johnson (“Our First Jewish President” as one American Jewish newspaper calls him).
From this point of view, the triple assassination of President Kennedy, his younger brother and his only son are the equivalent in Western Christendom of the extermination of the Romanov family in Orthodox Russia.
And I believe that, just like Russia with the Tsar family, America will only be great again when it opens the archives and honors the Kennedys as national martyrs of a foreign power.
But wait: there is still one male heir to John F. Kennedy: Jack Schlossberg, son of Caroline Kennedy and Edwin Schlossberg. Will he become “our first Jewish president,” asks Rabbi Jeffrey Salkin?
I don’t know, but I’m pretty sure he won’t be assassinated.
Western Culture Has Died A Politically Correct Death November 16 2021 | From: PaulCraigRoberts / Various
It is amazing the power that politically correct kooks have acquired over language, art, and literature. It is a sign that the West is culturally dead.
When high museums rename paintings because some emotional weakling declares the name to be offensive, it becomes obvious that the custodians of Western culture have lost their belief in Western culture.
When a people are afraid to use the words and terms of their forefathers, you know they have been intimidated to abandon even their own language and ways of speaking.
Western culture today consists of pornography, sexual deviants, whining wimps devastated by mere words, self-hatred, and craven cowards afraid to stand up for themselves against the onslaught of hate directed toward them by political correctness freaks.
The political correctness people are the most alienated and emotionally weak element in the society. Yet they dominate in the media, entertainment, universities, and art world.
How is it possible that the Washingtonians are prepared to take us to war with real people - Russians, Chinese and North Koreans - two countries that have already whipped us once - and Persians, an ancient race that even the Romans had a hard time with?
Do the fools in Washington really think that our homosexualized, feminized, transgenderized military can take on Russians, Chinese, and Persians?
Hollywood can make all the movies it wants with female superheroes, but superheroes are the last thing whining American feminists are.
The real questions for the politically correct crowd are: (1) why isn’t war politically incorrect, and (2) why isn’t it politically incorrect for the politically correct arbiters of language to call the rest of us names?
The real racists in America [the West] are those who call white people racist.
What Your Sons and Daughters Will Learn at University
Universities in the 20th century were dedicated to the advancement of knowledge. Scholarship and research were pursued, and diverse opinions were exchanged and argued in the “marketplace of ideas.”
This is no longer the case. Particularly in the social sciences, humanities, education, social work, and law, a single political ideology has replaced scholarship and research, because the ideology presents fixed answers to all questions.
And, although the most important thing in universities today is the diversity of race, gender, sexual practice, ethnicity, economic class, and physical and mental capability, there is no longer diversity of opinion.
Only those committed to the ideology are admitted to academic staff or administration.
Universities have been transformed by the near-universal adoption of three interrelated theories: postmodernism, postcolonialism, and social justice. These theories and their implications will be explored here.
There Is No Truth; Nothing Is Good or Bad
Postmodernism: In the past, academics were trained to seek truth. Today, academics deny that there is such a thing as objective Truth.
Instead, they argue that no one can be objective, that everyone is inevitably subjective, and consequently everyone has their own truth.
The correct point of view, they urge, is relativism.
This means not only that truth is relative to the subjectivity of each individual, but also that ethics and morality are relative to the individual and the culture, so there is no such thing as Good and Evil, or even Right and Wrong.
So too with the ways of knowing; your children will learn that there is no objective basis for preferring chemistry over alchemy, astronomy over astrology, or medical doctors over witch doctors.
They will learn that facts do not exist; only interpretations do.
All Cultures Are Equally Good; Diversity Is Our Strength
Our social understanding has also been transformed by postmodern relativism. Because moral and ethical principles are deemed to be no more than the collective subjectivity of our culture, it is now regarded as inappropriate to judge the principles and actions of other cultures.
This doctrine is called “cultural relativism.”
For example, while racism is held to be the highest sin in the West, and slavery the greatest of our historical sins, your children will learn that we are not allowed to criticize contemporary racism and slavery in Africa, the Middle East, and the equivalents in South Asia.
The political manifestation of cultural relativism is multiculturalism, an incoherent concept that projects the integration of multiple incompatible cultures.
Diversity is lauded as a virtue in itself. Imagine a country with fifty different languages, each derived from a different culture. That would not be a society, but a tower of babble.
How would it work if there were multiple codes of law requiring and forbidding contrary behaviors: driving on the left and driving on the right; monogamy and polygamy; male dominance and gender equality; arranged marriage and individual choice?
Your children will learn that our culture is nothing special and that other cultures are awesome.
The West Is Evil; The Rest Are Virtuous
Postcolonialism, the dominant theory in the social sciences today, is inspired by the Marxist-Leninist theory of imperialism, in which the conflict between the capitalist and proletariat classes is allegedly exported to the exploitation of colonized countries.
By this means, the theory goes, oppression and poverty take place in colonies instead of in relation to the metropolitan working class.
Postcolonialism posits that all of the problems in societies around the world today are the result of the relatively short Western imperial dominance and colonization.
For example, British imperialism is blamed for what are in fact indigenous cultures, such as the South Asian caste system and the African tribal system.
So too, problems of backwardness and corruption in countries once, decades ago, colonies continue to be blamed on past Western imperialism.
The West is thus the continuing focus on anti-imperialist and anti-colonialist sentiment.
Your children will learn that our society is evil, and the cause of all the evil in the wider world.
Only the West Was Imperialist and Colonialist
This ahistorical approach of postcolonialism ignores the hundreds of empires and their colonies throughout history, as well as ignoring contemporary empires, such as the Arab Muslim Empire that conquered all of the central Middle East, North Africa, southern Europe, Persia, Central Asia, and northern India, and occupied them minimally for hundreds of years, but 1400 years in the central Middle East and North Africa, and occupy them today.
China, once the Communists took power, invaded Inner Mongolia to the north, Chinese Turkestan to the west, and Tibet to the south. Once in control, the government flooded these colonies with Han Chinese, in effect ethnically cleansing them.
Postcolonialists have nothing to say about any of this; they wish to condemn exclusively the West.
Your children will learn to reject history and comparisons with other societies, lest the claimed unique sins of the West be challenged.
Western Imperialism Was a Racist Project
Postcolonialists like to stress the racial dimension of Western imperialism: as an illustration of racism.
But postmodernists are not interested in Arab slave raiding in “black” Africa, or Ottoman slaving among the whites in the Balkans, or the North Africans slave raiding of whites in Europe, from Ireland through Italy and beyond.
Your children will learn that only whites are racist.
Social justice theory teaches that the world is divided between oppressors and victims.
Some categories of people are oppressors and other are victims: males are oppressors, and females are victims; whites are oppressors, and people of color are victims; heterosexuals are oppressors, and gays, lesbians, bisexual, etc. are victims; Christians are oppressors, and Muslims are victims.
Your sons will learn that they are stigmatized by their toxic masculinity.
Individuals Are Not Important; Only Category Membership Is
Social justice theory has taken university life by storm. It is the result of the relentless working of Marxist theory, adopted by youngsters during the American cultural revolution of the 1960s, then brought to universities as many of those youngsters became college professors.
Marxism as an academic theory was explicitly followed by some in the 1970s and 1980s, but it did not sweep everything else away, because the idea economic class conflict was not popular in the prosperous general North American population.
The cultural Marxist innovation that brought social justice theory to dominance was the extension of class conflict from economics to gender, race, sexual practice, ethnicity, religion, and other mass categories.
We see this in sociology, which is no longer defined as the study of society but has for decades been defined as the study of inequality.
“He.” “She.” “They.” Have you ever given a moment’s thought to your everyday use of these pronouns? It has probably never occurred to you that those words could be misused.
Or that doing so could cost you your business or your job – or even your freedom. Journalist Abigail Shrier explains how this happened and why it's become a major free speech issue.
For social justice theory, equality is not the equality of opportunity that is the partner of merit, but rather equality of result, which ensures the members of each category at equality of representation irrespective of merit.
Your sons will learn that they should “step aside” to give more space and power to females. Your daughters, if white, will learn that they must defer to members of racial minorities.
Justice Is Equal Representation According to Percentages of the Population
As there is allegedly structural discrimination against all members of victim categories, in order for equality of result to prevail, representation according to percentages of populations must be mandated in all organizations, in all books assigned or references cited, in all awards and benefits.
Ideas such as merit and excellence are dismissed as white-male supremacist dog whistles; they are to be replaced by “diversity” of gender, race, sexual preference, ethnicity, economic class, religion, and so on.
(Note that “diversity” does not include “diversity of opinion”; for only social justice ideology is acceptable. Any criticism or opposition is regarded as “hate speech.”)
Academic committees now twist themselves into pretzels trying to explain that “diversity is excellence.”
Members of Oppressor Categories Must Be Suppressed
Of course, the requirement of representation according to population applies only one way: to members of victim classes. If whites, men, heterosexuals, Christians, etc. are underrepresented, that is fine; the fewer the better.
For example, females now make up 60% of university graduates, although in the general age cohort males are 51%. There is no social justice clamoring for males to be fully represented.
Members of disfavored oppressor categories are disparaged. The classics of Western civilization should be ignored because they are the work, almost exclusively, of “dead white men.”
“This is a PSA (Progressive Service Announcement). JoyCamp has compiled a comprehensive list of words, phrases and “microaggressions” you’re NOT allowed to say anymore.
Watch the video to ensure that you are able to protect yourself from saying the wrong thing! Then share it with your friends to keep them out of trouble as well.”
“Censorship helps to promote tolerance and thus, diversity, while simultaneously protecting us from hate speech and bigotry, therefore creating a safer, less offensive world for all.”
Only works of females, people of color and non-Western authors should be considered virtuous. So too in political history. The American Constitution should be discarded because its writers were slaveholders.
Victims of The World Unite!
“Intersectionality” is an idea invented by a feminist law professor. It argues that some individuals fall into several victim categories, for example, black, female lesbians have three points in the victim stakes, as opposed to male members of the First Nations who receive only one point.
Further, on the action front, members of each victim category are urged to unite and ally with members of other victim categories, because sharing the victim designation is the most important status in the world.
This leads to some anomalies. Black victims of racism are urged to unite with Arab victims of colonialism, even though Arabs have been and still are holders of black slaves.
As Karl Marx said, “The philosophers have only interpreted the world in various ways. The point, however, is to change it.”
The objective of a university education today is to ensure that students chose “the right side” in changing the world.
The idea that it probably makes sense to try to understand the world before attempting to change it, is rejected as outmoded, modernist empiricism and realism, now superseded by postmodernism and social justice.
If there is no Truth, and whatever one feels or believes is one’s truth, then trying to gain an objective understanding of the world is futile.
Open Letter From Outdoors & Freedom Party To Prime Minister November 15 2021 | From: OutdoorsParty / CounterspinMedia / Various
Dear Prime Minister, Attorney General, Solicitor General and Minister of Covid 19 Response and DG Health.
I write to formally put you on notice of unlawful conduct by the Ministry of Health, various DHBs, the NZ Medical Council, the Nursing Council and others which is causing serious harm to a large number of New Zealanders and which appears to meet the threshold of a conspiracy to pervert the course of justice.
Clause 7A of the Covid-19 Public Health Response Vaccinations Order 2021, as amended on 22 October 2021, creates an exemption from the requirement for vaccination for specified affected workers who have a medical certificate.
This clause appears to have been added to the Vaccinations Order after the legality of that Order was challenged in the High Court (in the Four Aviation Security Workers case) for breaching the NZ Bill of Rights.
The challenge alleges the undermining of fundamental rights and freedoms protected by the NZ Bill of Rights Act, including the s11 right to refuse medical treatment, and the S10 right to be free from being included in a medical or scientific experiment without Informed consent (which requires the absence of duress or coercion).
During the hearing, the Crown accepted that the requirement to receive the Pfizer Vaccine under threat of loss of employment ( ie No Jab No Job) is coercion, and is accordingly in breach of the NZ Bill of Rights, unless the Crown could prove that undermining these fundamental rights and freedoms was demonstrably justified in a free and democratic society.
Kelvyn Alp reflects on the week that was & remembers those freedom fighters who left our earth too soon.
Our Chief Medical Correspondent, Shane Chafin comments on the media blunder as NZ COVID-19 narrative finally confirms what many of "conspiracy theorists" already knew.
Kelvyn also talks to Storm, the partner of the woman who was treated in the dusty, spider ridden garage of her doctors clinic, all because she wasn't jabbed.
In the High Court, the Minister's legal advisors accepted the requirement for vaccination under threat of loss of employment is coercion which undermines fundamental rights and freedoms protected by the NZ Bill of Rights.
The affidavit evidence before the court and other documentation obtained under the OIA shows these concerns are shared (and were raised by) the Minister of Justice in advice to the Minister of Covid and that exemptions should be available on medical and religious grounds.
The court is currently considering the evidence including that the harm from Covid is now considerably reduced from early concerns (and is the correct death rate from the delta variant is estimated around 0.15% which is similar as a nasty flu), the safety concerns about the PfizerVax (which still has only Provisional Consent from Medsafe) and whether the Crown could prove the Pfizer jab prevents or even significantly reduces transmission of the Delta depending on the outcome part or all of the Vaccinations Order may be quashed.
The Clause 7A exemption was apparently added to the latest iteration of the Vaccinations Order that day (22 October) in recognition of these fundamental rights and freedoms.
The Covid Public Health Response Vaccinations Amendment Order No3 was published later the same day 22 October 2021.
It is part of the law. Affected employees face imminent dismissal unless that obtain a clause 7A exemption. It is not for the Ministry of Health or any other entity to purport to defer or superimpose additional obligations on the important Clause 7A exemption.
It is apparent from the extraordinary amount of correspondence I am receiving, and from public protests, that a large number of New Zealanders do not want to receive the PfizerVax. They have an array of medical, health and safety and religious reasons.
Their concerns are supported by the contraindications and uncertainties identified on Pfizer's Data Safety Sheet and Risk Management Plan, outstanding clinical trials which are not due for completion until at least May 2023, the recent decision of the government's own regulatory agency Medsafe to decline full consent for the second time due to outstanding concerns about safety, efficacy and product integrity and grant only Provisional Consent and personal observations of family, friends and colleagues who have suffered injuries or death after receiving the Pfizer Jab.
The public concerns are exacerbated by the on going propaganda, government denial and attempts to fob off affected families.
There are now well over 200 New Zealanders on the Community Initiated Public Register of Post Pfizer Jab deaths (which has been provided to Medsafe and various officials), and many more New Zealanders have suffered severe adverse effects.
Only yesterday I spoke to a young Auckland woman who has suffered debilitating neurological effects since receiving the Pfizer Jab. Sadly she is one of many.
The Prime Minister, Minister Hipkins and some government propaganda continues to claim that this novel Jab is safe and effective despite the expert advice being to the contrary.
The serial extension of the No JabNoJob law to an every increasing array of affected workers, and related assertions from various employers, education institutions and residential facilities breaches fundamental rights and freedoms.
The exemption in Clause 7A of the amended Vaccinations Order creates some relief. It is both unlawful and cruel for the Ministry of Health or other entities to try to prevent affected persons from using this exemption.
I urge you all to reflect on your responsibilities to uphold the rule of law and fundamental rights and freedoms, put aside your assumptions and prejudices, take time consider the ever increasing body of evidence that the Pfizer Jab is neither safe nor effective and meet and support affected individuals and families, and start to act in the public interest of New Zealanders as you were elected to do.
Warning: If Vaccine Passports Are Needed to Go On Chrismas Holiday the People Will Break Out
Press Release From the NZ Outdoors & Freedom Party.
Over 20,000 people marched upon Parliament on Tuesday 9 November. We were there. The vibe was relaxed and caring, but passionate. All the mainstream media could come up with was that there were 3,000 people and the whole thing was driven by violence and racism. All of the onlookers in the Wellington CBD now know in their own experience that the controlled legacy media are a pack of sold-out lying cunts. Harsh language? Man the fuck up. Remember - they want you dead.
In the last week or so it has been hinted at several times by Government ministers that you will not be able to leave Auckland this Xmas without a vaccine passport.
Ardern herself said in a TV interview that she was creating a two class society.
She indicated that those who have chosen to be jabbed will be able to go to the beach, holiday home or share Xmas with families and those not jabbed will have to stay confined.
"The NZ Outdoors & Freedom Party wish to make it abundantly clear to Ardern and her ministers that those who do not qualify for her vaccine passport will not sit idly by and accept such nonsense designed to punish those who have alternative health views and to divide the country."said Alan Simmons, co leader of the NZ Outdoors & Freedom Party.
Already plans are in place to forge a separate economy within the country with summer concerts for un vaccinated, new airlines and other services.
Let this be a warning to Ardern that she is tearing this country apart and yesterdays protests in Whanganui are just an inkling of what is coming" Simmons continued "she needs to step down now and let others try and heal what is already a fractured society.
When tens of thousands walk off the job next week she will understand the chaos and depth of feeling she has created.
Simmons said:
"Of extreme concern is that evidence revealed in the recent high court case exposed ministerial documents and briefing papers that the minister had no evidence that the vaccine stops transmission or is safe and the ever increasing infections of vaccinated front line staff is beginning to expose that to the alarm of those who vaccinated in good faith."
- Alan Simmons. President and co leader NZ Outdoors & Freedom Party
Central Banking Exposed: Central Banks Only Care About Debt, Profit And Control November 14 2021 | From: FinalWakeUpCall / Various
The Crime is Money That No One Ever Earned is Used to Capture People’s Real Wealth.
The Bank for International Settlements: Meet The Secretive Group That Runs The World
Why people are put into debt and how paper money ruins society.
In 1815, Nathan Rothschild, one of five sons of Mayer Amschel Bauer, pulled off one of the most devious financial schemes in history.
This was the origin of today’s economic problems.
What followed clearly shows that history has not been a random series of events, but rather a carefully planned and executed ‘design’ of land, wealth, and resource-grabbing by a small number of wealthy and privileged individuals bent on world domination.
These procedures have been executed on such a massive scale that it is almost incomprehensible, not to mention that it seems impossible, but as the old saying goes; “The best kept secrets are the ones hidden in plain sight.”
During the Battle of Waterloo in 1815, Nathan Rothschild ‘purchased’ England, but his scheme was also historically significant for another reason: It showed how ‘fabricating’ a disaster can lead to massive financial gains.
He bought the Bank of England (BoE), which is the central bank of the United Kingdom and the model on which most other central banks in the entire world have been constructed.
The means by which the Deep State was able to pull the populace into debt enslavement has been achieved through hidden dictatorship that moves as follows:
By way of the Rothschild’s control through their central banks, with the issuing of ‘money’ based on credit, by which they control the entire world economy.
Subsequently, by having control over the creation of money out of nothing and charging interest over that money, the Rothschilds have been accumulating virtual ownership across the globe, by engineering booms and busts for centuries to advance their agenda.
The difference between booms and busts is quite simply, the amount of ‘money’ in circulation and its perceived value. The Rothschilds dictate both.
Central Banks Only Care About Debt, Profit and Control
Doing away with all Central Banks is the most important goal for humanity as a way out of our debt-enslavement.
The tip of this iceberg are the traitors, treasonous individuals, and those committing crimes, but the real crime is against humanity with the creation of a fiat currency out of thin air, through the collaboration of numerous corporations around the world managing entire countries’ finances.
All the while, these criminals attach interest to the fake money that they are lending to governments and their citizens, enslaving each and every individual to the central bank system.
Presently, the Q-PLAN is getting rid of the whole Central Banking system. Because the Central Banks are not for the people, they have no allegiance to countries and their citizens.
Additional:Read about the Alliance that
has
been working behind
the scenes for decades to take down the 'Cabal' within the work of David Wilcock.
Some of those reading this may be confused because the cabal-controlled mainstream media is doing
everything within it's
power to denigrate Trump - as he is part of the effort to take the
Illuminati down once and for
all.
And the Alliance effort operates beyond the bounds of countries - out of neccessity; as that is how the Luciferian Cabal
does.
Do you think you can trust the mainstream media? Look at whom they target. One must wonder why 'they' also do not like
Putin?
The Central Banks only care about debt, profit and control.
But, by reading between the lines, it is evident that President Trump is setting up the Federal Reserve – the US Central Bank, by contradicting the Fed at every turn.
In this way, he is making sure that every citizen understands that the Central Banks are the ones that are responsible for our financial malaise, the economic crisis and the looming financial crash.
The rich are becoming richer, and the middle class poorer, thanks to the bribed government puppets, who have implemented laws stating that this credit money is legal tender and must be used and accepted to buy valuables, while it is in essence worthless paper money.
Power and Fake Money Corrupts
Power and fake money corrupts. It is a lethal combination that not only destroys people but also nations.
Sadly, it has now reached a point in history, where the unlimited amounts of fiat money that have been created will eventually destroy whole continents, ultimately destroying the world’s monetary paper system completely.
The destruction of currencies has been the norm throughout history, as no paper or fiat currency has ever survived.
Therefore, it is to no avail to constantly introduce monetary systems that are not backed by value, these can never be sound and will not withstand the test of time.
Power, coupled with fiat money seems to have such a corrupting effect on everyone who enters politics, as the urge to print and spend money that doesn’t exist, proves time and time again to be totally irresistible.
Why People Are Put Into Debt
No one is immune to debt, and the majority of us are in some form of financial debt. Not having enough money, and especially being in debt, causes serious physical and mental distress.
This is why banks put people into debt, while a world without any debt is possible. The world’s central banks have criminally and deviously stolen the sovereign power of control from almost every government.
Privately-owned Central Banks create the nation’s ‘official money’, called legal tender, or Promissory Notes, better known as fiat money without intrinsic value, only backed by faith, but not by gold or silver.
Then they loan it out to the nation’s government, where the people pay back the government’s debt via income tax on wages, as well as the interest the government incurs when it borrows the money from the central bank, that they themselves could have issued interest free.
Governments’ debt is then expanded through fractional reserve expansion by commercial banks through loans to the public with further interest attached.
Central banks need to keep creating more money since extra money is needed to pay back all this interest, which is deliberately not created with the original money supply, thus the money to pay for this interest does not exist.
This causes inflation, as the value of each individual bank note decreases, as prices go up, forcing people to work even more hours – not just to pay all the interest back, but also to buy the things they could afford before.
Inflation decreases the purchasing power of money, resulting in increased prices.
In a free market, the value of precious metals would also increase, so its purchasing power would be maintained. – Higher prices generate higher taxes, offering governments yet another incentive to profit from currency debasement.
Paper Money Ruins Society
The secret of the Central Banks was already known by the founding fathers of America.
They knew that once a Central Bank was established in the country, the country would not survive. It would become corrupt to the core and major problems would occur.
George Washington wrote in a letter in 1786 to Andrew Jefferson;
"Paper money has the effect of ruining commerce, obliterating honesty and opening the door to every manifestation of fraud, and injustice conceivable.”
Paper money is poverty, Jefferson observed, it is only the ghost of money but not money itself. In 1817, it was stated that paper money abuses are also inevitable, and by breaking up the measure of value, it makes it a lottery of all private properties.
Paper money was unjustly declared to be money, concluded James Madison (1751-1836), who served as the 4th President of America. It is unconstitutional, he added, for it effects the rights of property as it takes away equal value in land.
The founding fathers recognised the perils of ‘legal tender’ paper money, which coerces people to accept something that may be inherently worthless, which is precisely the case with today’s fiat money.
The founding fathers knew that paper money corrupts, as it creates a wealth effect that destroys the nation.
They knew exactly the secret of the central bank system.
They concluded; We need to have a standard that is accepted around the world. The next best thing, though it may be not perfect, is gold.
The only stable value for a currency is its convertibility into gold. As a result, the US became the most successful country in the world from 1789 – 1971. This was already foreseen by James Madison prior to 1789.
Gold is the only universal currency. It is the only commodity, along with silver that people have historically agreed upon to use as money. This allows fixed exchange rates between countries.
That simplifies trade and investment. But what followed was disastrous for the economy of the world, as the private Central Bankers didn’t like this. Central Bankers don’t like a stable system that they don’t control.
They like a system in which they can promote corruption, create wars, and they can profit off of the warring countries and off of the people that are forced to go into debt to make ends meet.
This is the reason why they have steered the populace away from what the founding fathers intended for them, which is gold-backed money.
They steer people to other things like the stock market, derivatives, paper contracts on gold and silver, convincing them that gold and silver are worthless, that they are not really significant or valuable.
They are shiny, but that is about it. For the rest they are simply insignificant, barbarous relics People really don’t need to hold gold or silver.
The Central Bankers began to indoctrinate everyone into thinking that their system is the only one. – In 1913, the indoctrination began in the education system, brainwashing everyone into believing that their system is the only system.
To accomplish this, in 1913 all economic books were completely changed, introducing their economic indoctrination to the public, educating them that the Central Bank is exceptional and important, as it helps the people to live a better and more prosperous life.
Over the course of a few generations, people lost sight of the importance of gold and silver and the knowledge of what sound money really was.
They even lost sight of what an economic system without a Central Bank really was.
In the meantime, behind the scenes, the Central Bank initiators started corrupting certain individuals, and from that time onwards, corruption has become widespread.
A manifestation of this corruption is the very name of the central bank in America, which is called The Federal Reserve Bank. This institution is not Federal, has no Reserves and is not a Bank either.
Waking Up
Fortunately, many of us are now waking up. Trump and the patriots are once again echoing to everyone that the Central Bank is the problem, as was the case in the era of Andrew Jackson.
This time, people are going to be educated en masse about the true nature of the Central Bank.
They will learn how Central Banks have destroyed the nations in which we live, how they have corrupted politicians and everyone else in positions of power in government.
The world has arrived at the beginning stage of this transition process, the education has just begun through the public revelations of the treason committed by the traitors.
Once this becomes public knowledge, the populace at large will rise up against the Central Bank and we will learn how, we and the next generations will have to fight to prevent the Central Banks from ever setting foot in the door again in the future.
History has revealed that they always attempt to come back again when people aren’t paying attention. Just because they go, does not mean they are gone forever.
They are corrupt, and will try to sneak in again. Henceforth, people will have to fight and keep fighting for sound money.
There is no necessity for a private corporation that controls the issuance of money. It has to be a system of ‘we, the people’ who create the currency, so we, the people can use it without interest attached.
Then everyone will be shown how great an economy can really be without a Central bank. This is where the patriots want to take us, while the awake are together already headed in that direction.
Synchronicity Happens For A Reason -There Are No Accidents And No Coincidences November 13 2021 | From: TheMindsJournal / Various
Have you stumbled upon an old friend? Seeing someone doing the same thing or speaking the same words as you? Or maybe experienced an accident? Are you thinking ‘Oh! What a coincidence!’ or ‘I could skip accidents like this…’
Well, you shouldn’t, because every single coincidence brings a message to you.
In fact, there are no coincidences and accidents - there’s only synchronicity, and everything happens for a reason.
Revealing Synchronicity - The Science Behind Coincidence
The truth is, everything in our life is linked. From the past, to the present and future - every single coincidence or accident we stumble upon is linked. No matter how small or big of a movement is, it is all about synchronicity.
Whether you feel like you are having a perfect day and everything goes smoothly, or experience a bad period in which ‘a lot of coincidences happen,’ the universe is sending you a message. People and things happening in an exact moment is nothing but synchronicity and, fortunately, there is a way to accept it.
Do you know the saying “When the student is ready, the master appears”?
That is exactly how synchronicity is explained. Whenever you are synchronized with something you truly want, you are more likely to meet that thing, which is why similar people meet ‘accidentally’. The thing is, they are tuned in to the exact same frequency, and synchronicity does its best to match them.
Yes, There Is A Way To Create Synchronicity
Now that you understand how the spiritual sync works, it’s time to tell you that…
YOU CAN CREATE SYNCHRONICITY.
‘How on Earth do I do that?,’ you may be asking yourself.
Well, synchronicity works best for people who believe it to be true. So, for starters, you should believe in it and stop saying that every event is an accident or a coincidence.
The thing is, if you are saying this, you are sending a weak spiritual signal to the universe, as opposed to the strong signal that the universe sends you by syncing everything around you.
By understanding synchronicity and seeing things not as an ordinary, but a committed person, you are able to connect more deeply with your inner sync, and actually don’t work hard to make the things you want happen. Instead, you will just believe in them and let them happen, without any force whatsoever.
So, let’s face it… Synchronicity is just like a mirror and whatever you commit to and believe in, will reflect back to you.
That being said, if you agree with the law of syncing, you will be able to connect deeply and send strong messages on a spiritual level. Aside from this, you will be a better person, more confident and committed towards every action you bring.
In a nutshell, understanding synchronicity translates to establishing harmony in everything that you seek - and being ‘consciously aware’ of everything happening around you.
Turning The Tide - And See Chances Work For You instead Of Against You
If you have ever heard of the Murphy’s Law and believe in it, you are on a good way to understanding synchronicity. Yes, it’s a common fact that when something goes wrong, it may just continue going wrong over time.
The idea behind this is that synchronicity can also work against you. However, if you expect bad things to happen and continue believing in the Murphy’s Law, you are syncing with your inner negativity.
The Science Behind The Chance Meeting - Not A ‘Coincidence’
Bumped into someone somewhere? Thinking it’s a coincidence, luck or chance? The real answer in this ‘accident’ is the science of chance meeting.
Moreover, it is the reason for something to happen. There is always a reason and a connection to see someone and experience something. Coincidence is only an illusion.
Our past, present and future are all linked. And although we may not understand everything that happens to us, there is always a reason - and that reason becomes apparent at some point in time.
A Final Word
"Synchronicity is an ever present reality for those who have the eyes to see."
You can start notice synchronicities with people, numbers, events etc. Remember to accept synchronicity in its real form, as a way of spiritual and universal intelligence constantly trying to teach us, reach us and share love, support and guidance.
Learn to be open to synchronicity and start living a meaningful life!
Sharyl Attkisson: How Media Narratives Became More Important Than Facts
& Every Nation Must Declare War Against Big Tech
November 12 2021 | From: Zerohedge / NaturalNews / Various The day that I told CBS News I wished to leave my job as investigative correspondent ahead of my contract, I didn’t give a reason. I didn’t see the point because the problem wasn’t fixable. Nor was it isolated to CBS News.
My own take is that - as our industry has changed in ways that have become undeniable to most - I was a bit of the canary in the coal mine.
By that, I mean I believe I was among the first to really pay attention to the increasingly effective operations to shape and censor news - the movements to establish narratives rather than follow facts - and to see the growing influence of smear operations, political interests, and corporate interests on the news.
It’s not that I’m smarter than my peers, and I’m surely far less smart than many, but my particular brand of off-narrative reporting happened to draw the intense attention of the smear operators and propagandists, so I began to study it.
A case in point: the smear that was promulgated when I left CBS. It was often incorrectly reported that I told CBS management I was quitting due to liberal media bias.
That false story turned out to be convenient for both political sides, and largely survives today. It simply wasn’t rooted in fact. And I don’t recall reporters even asking me whether it was true.
Once a few articles reported that it was, others simply copied the claim and adopted it as if established fact, eventually without attribution. Now there would be no point in trying to clarify it.
After all, Wikipedia says it’s true. No going back from that.
Powerful smear groups and certain interests - including some within CBS at the time - started the narrative that I was “conservative,” not because they necessarily believed it, but as a tool to “controversialize” the reporting I was doing that was contrary to powerful interests.
The idea is that if I can be portrayed as a partisan, then my reporting can be more easily dismissed.
The Narrative Requires
In fact, prior to the operation to push the narrative that I was “conservative,” my reporting had been lauded by a diverse group of observers, including the likes of Rachel Maddow, who once delivered an entire monologue on an investigative expose I did on the “charity” of then-Rep. Stephen Buyer (R- Ind.).
My most recent Emmy award was for an undercover investigation into Republican fundraising.
But the narrative requests - nay, requires - that we forget all that. We must focus on the supposed miraculous metamorphosis. Depending on who’s spinning, they may insist I was a rational journalist who went crazy one day and flew to the dark side of conservatism.
Or they may say I used to be a devoted liberal, but decided the big money was in pandering to Republicans, so I sold out. The details aren’t important. You are simply to come away with the notion that my reporting is now politically conflicted.
Another example of this narrative: Many news reports comment that I work for the “conservative” Sinclair Broadcast Group. Fair enough - Sinclair is run by a family that’s made no secret of their conservative political leanings.
But the reporters who note this political connection apparently fail to recognize the inherent conflict in the fact that they eagerly label the conservative group; yet I don’t think they reported that I worked for the “liberal” CNN, the “liberal” PBS, or the “liberal” CBS.
Some reporters lack the self-awareness and objectivity to understand they are revealing themselves when they selectively apply labels in a one-sided fashion. They are servicing a narrative, even if unintentionally.
When I worked at CNN, it was owned by a billionaire Democrat donor (Ted Turner) - a good boss, by the way. When I worked for CBS, the management (Sumner Redstone, Les Moonves) were rich Democrat donors - also, a great company to work for during most of my 20 years there.
Sinclair has likewise been a terrific employer to date. They haven’t forced editorial biases in the reporting on my program. The program is mostly apolitical, addressing topics such as the underreported dangers of MRI dye or how American farmers are suffering under the current trade war with China.
When we address politics, you are as likely to see an interview with Rep. Eric Swalwell, a Democrat, as you are to see Sen. Lindsey Graham, a Republican.
Improvements
But there’s the narrative...
When a national print media reporter wrote about my program a couple of years ago, he incorrectly referred to it as “conservative.”
Later, when asked if he’d ever actually seen the program, he admitted he hadn’t.
It’s not that it would be difficult to - well - actually do a little bit of reporting rather than repeat a narrative: My weekly program is on at least a half-dozen times each week in the city where this reporter is based, and it’s posted online.
As easy as it was for him to do some first-hand reporting, he chose to repeat the narrative.
Lara Logan, who recently left CBS News, has also been speaking out about her observations regarding the decline of fair and objective journalism.
She’s likewise been attacking the narratives. As such, she has been subjected to them. That’s how it works. Obviously (says the narrative), she is a disgruntled conservative who is not to be believed.
Or (says the narrative), she’s perhaps a little unbalanced. (You know, all that war reporting and stress. Poor Lara.)
The truth is, Lara is extremely clear-eyed on these issues. And she and I are far from alone in our views on the state of the media.
We agree there is terrific journalism being committed on a daily basis at organizations from The New York Times to local news stations.
However, we agree that national media has also largely become co-opted by powerful interests who understand how to direct the news landscape in a way that services certain narratives and agendas.
I have heard support from hundreds of journalists, college professors, and media observers during the last several years. I have been reached out to by reporters in print and on TV, by national and local news, by students and a Pulitzer Prize winner.
The effort to expose flaws and conflicts in media reporting is growing stronger, not weaker, despite the narratives.
The desire to affect improvements is building. Make no mistake: Not all of us are free to speak publicly, but there are a lot of us.
We have reached a precarious tipping point for humanity… a moment in history where humanity must either rise up and defeat the scourge or Big Tech or be enslaved by all-out techno-fascism.
The techno-fascist organizations like Google, Apple, Facebook, Twitter, YouTube and even Wikipedia have becomea clear and present danger to humanity.
In fact, as I explain in this uncensored video, below, the aggressive censorship, thought control and election meddling of the tech giants is flat-out incompatible with civil society.
Techno-fascists like Mark Zuckerberg and Jack Dorsey are un-elected and answer to no one, yet they now solely determine what thoughts, views and opinions you are allowed to speak or read.
This is incompatible with human freedom and must be halted.
As I explain in this 37-minute artistic expression “rap beats” video with lyrics, it is time for President Trump to declare war on the techno-fascists and for America to rise up and defeat, dismantle and disable the scourge of techno-fascism in the same way we worked together to defeat the Third Reich.
If some of the words are not easy to follow, that’s because this is an artistic expression rap song, not a simple audio lecture.
Read more news about techno-fascism censorship at Censorship.news.
Lindsay Perigo: New Zealand Is A Police State
November 11 2021 | From: BreakingViews / Various There is now apparently a police-compiled Enemies List circulating among New Zealand's totalitarian Globalist elite, such as Comrade Ardern, Comrade Andrew Little, Comrade Winston Peters and Human Wrongs Commissar Comrade Paul Hunt, a lackey of raving anti-Semite and hard-core socialist Comrade Jeremy Corbyn, all advancing the agenda of the most evil man on the planet, George Soros.
(Why was this Islamo-Marxist fascist Paul Hunt brought over to destroy our Bill of Rights?! At whose expense?!)
From many accounts police are actively harassing people on this list.
Freedom of Expression
Everyone has the right to freedom of expression, including the freedom to seek, receive, and impart information and opinions of any kind in any form.
That's what NZ and UK Labour want to destroy, Section 14 of our Bill of Rights (lifted from the UN Declaration of Universal Human Rights), and anything resembling it, in all countries hitherto free or semi-free.
Freedom-lovers are on notice: you may be about to be arrested for what in 1984 are called Thought Crimes. Come on then, Thought Police: arrest me for my thoughts.
It doesn't get any worse than:
“I disagree with what you say but defend to the death your right to say it," now does it?!
Seditious and revolutionary stuff in the Land of Political Correctness!
What you could consider doing instead, though, Thought Police, is gathering signatures on my Citizens' Pledge.
If everyone signed up to this, understood it and meant it, we wouldn't have to worry about a thing, now would we?! It goes as follows:
“Just as I reserve the right to hold and express my opinions on any matter whatsoever, I promise to respect the right of all others to do the same. I renounce unreservedly the use of coercion and violence in the promotion of my opinions."
It shouldn't be hard to get signatures.
A recent poll on Stuff, quickly removed when the results were so decisively un-PC, showed 90% of respondents saying that while Israel Folau's anti-gay tweets were offensive, they certainly shouldn't be illegal.
New Zealanders get it that there's no such thing as a right not to be offended; snowflakes who don't get it should consider migrating to Iran or North Korea.
The ANZAC heroes whom we've just been re-commemorating would surely be appalled to think that the single most precious thing for which they died is about to be extinguished.
Dancing On The Crumbling Precipice: Jim Quinn Explains Why The Deep State Is The True Enemy Of Human Civilization May 4 2019 | From: NaturalNews / Various
If you’re not yet familiar with the writing of Jim Quinn from The Burning Platform, he’s an author you may want to consider adding to your “must-read” list. Quinn’s articles are insightful and daring, and his grasp of history is spot-on.
The title is apparently borrowed from a song called “The Violence” by a band known as “Rise Against,” whose lead singer believes that humanity will ultimately destroy itself with violence. (He’s not wrong on that point, by the way.)
In this article, Quinn convincingly argues that humanity must declare war on the deep state and destroy it in order to survive. If we do not destroy the deep state, it will destroy the world, Quinn explains.
Here’s Quinn’s article, with extraneous quotes removed:
Dancing on a Crumbling Precipice
This recent song by Rise Against, inspired by the turmoil since the 2016 election of Donald Trump, captures the feeling of angst and uncertainty engulfing the world today.
This Fourth Turning is entering its most violent stage, where blood will be spilled in vast quantities as an epic conflict between good and evil plays out across the globe.
Eighty years ago, the bloodiest conflict in human history began, as the social mood turned dark and compromise was no longer a viable option.
It wasn’t a coincidence World War II began exactly eighty years after the onset of the American Civil War, which began as compromisers died off and hearts hardened on both sides.
We are now eighty years gone since the outset of World War II and a global mood of impending doom overshadows our daily lives.
The inevitability of conflict, domestically and internationally, eclipses all efforts to bridge the ideological differences of competing interests around the world.
The cycles of history will not be denied and this Fourth Turning will play out as those before, with clear victors and clear losers.
Tim McIlrath, the lead singer of Rise Against, observing the violent conflict raging in our country in the press, social media, in the streets, and on battlefields across the Middle East wondered whether violence is an inevitability of the human condition, or whether we can make a choice to reject it. In an interview with Kerrang!, McIlrath stated:
“As we were watching the news and seeing all the different things [unfold] around the planet, I realized that violence has such a role in a lot of what we see when the world is falling apart.
The violence is a reflection of whether our [aggression] is in our nature, our DNA, or whether we have a choice to be part of it.
And it is a choice that we make – a conscious one – to use violence as a means to an end. Aren’t we better than this? Aren’t we the apex of the animal kingdom?
Aren’t we the only ones on the planet that have the capacity for compassion? Aren’t we good enough or brave enough to not sink to violence?”
I hate to break the bad news to Tim, but human nature never changes.
We aren’t better or worse than the billions of people who have proceeded us on this earth. We are all susceptible to the vices which have plagued mankind for eternity: pride, greed, anger, envy, lust, gluttony and laziness.
We are also capable of elevating our society through exercising displays of courage, applying justice fairly, prudently managing our affairs, treating others with respect, and acting charitably towards mankind.
As Solzhenitsyn noted in his masterpiece, Gulag Archipelago, “the line dividing good and evil cuts through the heart of every human being”. The violence in our nature is ingrained in our makeup as human beings. The Bible details our violent nature in the Garden of Eden, with the murder of Abel by Cain, his brother.
The ability to use violence against others is most certainly in everyone’s nature, but average hard-working folks trying to survive in this dog eat dog world are not prone to violence or conflict.
They are too busy working, living, raising kids, buying shit they don’t need, paying the credit card bills for shit they don’t need, being entertained by modern day techno bread and circuses, and being propagandized by their government and their mouthpieces in the corporate media.
The overwhelming amount of gun violence occurs in the Democrat run urban ghettos with the strongest gun laws. The violence is not a function of being poor.
Poor folks in rural communities (aka flyover country) own firearms, but are not killing each other in large numbers, if at all. Extreme levels of violence are a function of morality, culture, and lack of family and community cohesiveness.
The legally armed “deplorables” are family oriented and law abiding. They will only resort to violence when pushed too far.
The extremist left wing politicians bloviating on a daily basis, inciting their sycophant followers towards aggression have lit the fuse for the coming civil war.
“There’s never been a true war that wasn’t fought between two sets of people who were certain they were in the right. The really dangerous people believe they are doing whatever they are doing solely and only because it is without question the right thing to do. And that is what makes them dangerous.” ?
- Neil Gaiman, American Gods
The violence in our inner cities is insignificant when compared to the violence exported across the globe by the sociopaths at the highest levels of our government and their co-conspirators in the military industrial complex.
It is naïve to think the violence engulfing the world is primarily the result of the average person’s nature.
It’s the result of dangerous men inflicting their warped worldview, blood lust ambition, thirst for power, and hubristic arrogance upon the unsuspecting dupes inhabiting their countries.
Sociopaths like Bolton and Pompeo have risen to positions of immense power, believing global disorder and war are beneficial to a bankrupt declining empire flailing about trying to preserve its superpower stature.
The Deep State elevates power hungry conscienceless men into positions where they can promote the agendas of the Deep State with no remorse or restraint.
The export of military hardware to Middle East countries that hate us is a prime example of how a flailing empire will do anything for a buck, while its corrupt politicians are fellated by the corporate war industry.
Pro-longed warfare has never benefited a nation over the long-term. The American empire had a national debt of $5.7 trillion, with the annual budget virtually balanced in 2000 when our leaders began a pro-longed period of non-stop warfare.
We’ve added $16.3 trillion of debt and are running $1.2 trillion annual deficits as our out of control war mongering has put the country on a path to destruction. Both feckless political parties vote for more war spending, more arms sales to Middle Eastern countries, and continued provocation of nuclear powers – Russia and China.
As trillions are wasted on the violent overthrow of countries who refuse to buckle to American power, our basic infrastructure crumbles, our government-controlled healthcare system is an expensive joke, our educational system is a disaster, and the rich get richer while the poor die fighting for empire.
Dwight D. Eisenhower, a military man through and through, warned the nation what would happen if we allowed the unholy alliance of government and the military industrial complex to dominate our society.
We didn’t heed his warning and allowed our country [The West] to be taken over by evil Deep State oligarchs who realized war is good for their bottom line.
They use faux displays of patriotism, create enemies when there are none, lure easily manipulated young men as cannon fodder, spread the war machine factories across congressional districts to ensure votes for more war spending, and compensate the corporate media to support war and spread propaganda.
Whenever the government and media are in lockstep regarding an issue, like Russia throwing our elections or Julian Assange being a traitor, you know it’s a false narrative designed to misinform the public.
War is a racket designed to enrich the Deep State and their pliable acolytes. It’s only the average person who suffers.
The question Tim McIlrath wants answered is whether we as a people can end the violence and war. The truth is the only way to put an end to the never-ending global war is through a violent overthrow of the Deep State who firmly control the levers of power over our government, financial systems, corporations, and media.
Ironically, violence initiated by the good law-abiding people of this country against the corrupt, powerful, rich, deceitful oligarchs is the only chance for reversing the downward moral spiral we currently face.
Believing change will be achieved through the ballot box is a fool’s errand. Just observe the extremists, imbeciles, and craven narcissists we are currently stuck with in Washington D.C. by falsely believing change can be achieved through the ballot box.
We are being manipulated and managed, just as Edward Bernays taught his disciples, and how Ray Bradbury described in his dystopian novel about the future.
“If you don’t want a man unhappy politically, don’t give him two sides to a question to worry him; give him one. Better yet, give him none. Let him forget there is such a thing as war.
If the government is inefficient, top-heavy, and tax-mad, better it be all those than that people worry over it. Peace, Montag.
Give the people contests they win by remembering the words to more popular songs or the names of state capitals or how much corn Iowa grew last year. Cram them full of noncombustible data, chock them so damned full of ‘facts’ they feel stuffed, but absolutely ‘brilliant’ with information.
Then they’ll feel they’re thinking, they’ll get a sense of motion without moving. And they’ll be happy, because facts of that sort don’t change.”
Our overlords have been successful in creating generations of non-thinking automatons who have been socially engineered through government education and TV programming to feel (not think critically) and be easily manipulated through their techno-gadgets, the boob tube, and now social media.
We are drowning in trivialities, mindless entertainment, gossip, and propaganda, unable to decipher truth from falsehood. The “truth” is whatever suits the purposes of those in power. Observe how the Deep State promotes their war machine through sporting events and the local news.
You have Air Force flyovers at every football game. The military uses your tax dollars to pay the professional sports leagues for those “touching” tributes to military personnel during every sporting event.
Those “heart-warming” stories of military personnel surprising their kids at school are nothing but propaganda narrative fed to the public to support never ending war. How many millions of your tax dollars are used on those flashy recruiting commercials promoting the lie our military is protecting us by blowing up brown people in distant countries.
Hemingway recognized the truth about the war machine, decades ago.
“They wrote in the old days that it is sweet and fitting to die for one’s country. But in modern war, there is nothing sweet nor fitting in your dying. You will die like a dog for no good reason.”
- Ernest Hemingway
As this Fourth Turning has reached its midway point, it has become evident to those awoken to the truth of a world run and controlled by a relatively small cadre of powerful men and their paid off disciples, a reckoning is at hand, with violence and bloodshed an inevitable outcome.
The election of Donald Trump has functioned as the catalyst, forcing those in the shadows to reveal their true purpose and nature.
The Deep State attempted coup of a sitting president based upon a false Russian narrative has blown up in their faces, but they will not admit defeat, because to do so would mean loss of their power, wealth and control.
They will be willing to risk world war with nuclear powers or create the atmosphere for a civil war rather than cease their sociopathic thirst for controlling the world. With the arrest of Julian Assange on bogus charges, they push the country ever closer to civil chaos. Truth is treason in an empire of lies.
It appears the oligarchs are losing control of the narrative and are reacting in a desperate manner to retain their ill-gotten riches and unconstitutional control over the levers of government power.
We have entered an era of extremism which will surely lead to more violence. We have elected politicians pushing extreme positions like open borders, socialism for all, infanticide, going to war with Russia and China, prosecuting patriots who revealed misdeeds by our government, cheering for terrorists, and supporting a surveillance state coup of a sitting president.
We have a president promoting a stock market bubble, vilifying the money printers at the Federal Reserve for being too tight when they have kept real interest rates at zero or negative for the last ten years, encouraging coups in other countries while fighting off a coup against himself, and running deficits of $1.2 trillion after campaigning on balancing the budget.
Additional:Read about the Alliance that
has
been working behind
the scenes for decades to take down the 'Cabal' within the work of David Wilcock.
Some of those reading this may be confused because the cabal-controlled mainstream media is doing
everything within it's
power to denigrate Trump - as he is part of the effort to take the
Illuminati down once and for
all.
And the Alliance effort operates beyond the bounds of countries - out of neccessity; as that is how the Luciferian Cabal
does.
Do you think you can trust the mainstream media? Look at whom they target. One must wonder why 'they' also do not like
Putin?
The magnitude of extreme positions, policies, proposals, and politicians is off the charts, making me feel like I’m living in a new country called Extreme-istan.
Our daily existence is nothing more than a frustrating crusade through a blizzard of lies, in search of the truth. Extremism dominates our financial markets, our foreign policy, our politics, our media, and interaction on social media platforms.
Extreme positions are not met with calls for moderation, but contrary extreme positions. This is how it rolls during Fourth Turnings. There will be no compromise solutions domestically or internationally. As the extreme positions solidify and become entrenched, violent conflict becomes the only form of resolution, with clear victors and losers.
When the extreme multiple financial bubbles burst simultaneously and create the global financial crisis to end all financial crises, the anger and vengeance likely to be doled out against those identified as being responsible for the trillions in losses and collapse of debt laden corporations and governments will be blood curdling.
With desperate politicians trying to pacify their angry constituents, they will go to their old standby – start a war and try to appeal to the patriotism of an ignorant populace who they have successfully manipulated in the past.
This is when the “deplorables” are likely to push back. This is when the true enemies will be identified and those firearms they have been trying to confiscate will be put to use.
Joseph Heller understood generals and politicians supposedly on our side could be the enemy. The Deep State is our enemy. Until they are violently defeated, they will continue to treat us as nothing more than cattle and cannon fodder.
Steinbeck thought war was a failure of thinking men; while Hemingway thought all war was a crime; Voltaire thought war was murder and those declaring war were the murderers; and Smedley Butler thought war was a racket.
They were all right. Rich old men send young poor men to their deaths to feed the coffers of corporate arms dealers. War is a means for arrogant hubristic men to wield power in a violent display of egotistical criminality, using innocent citizens as cannon fodder in their vain endeavor at historical glory.
Tim McIlrath’s final lyrics capture the essence of human history. We are a book without an end because human history is cyclical and we start at chapter 1 every eighty years or so.
He calls for something new, but he doesn’t grasp that the existing social order is always overturned during a Fourth Turning and something new arises.
Whether that is good or bad is up to the victors. But, sadly, the elimination of violence is not in the cards and is likely to be ratcheted up to new highs during the next ten years.
Violence is in our nature, but good men and women only resort to it when pushed to their breaking point. That point is rapidly approaching.
The hubris of the ruling class has led them to brazenly reveal their true purpose in pillaging the wealth of the nation, while impoverishing the middle class, creating global disorder, promoting civic decay and ensuring global financial chaos through creating trillions of unpayable debt.
The attempted coup of Trump, the arrest of Assange, rigging of financial markets and the continued provocation of Russia have pushed the country to the brink.
The two captured political parties are bereft of courageous patriots, while being infested with corrupt extremist imbeciles. Sworn enemies, domestically and internationally, are standing waist deep in gasoline striking matches.
Anyone not realizing the direness of our situation is either dependent upon the Deep State for their sustenance, a lackey for the establishment, choosing to be willfully ignorant, or is too dumbed down and distracted by their techno-gadgets to care.
The war has begun and the storm gathers, but nobody knows when the conflagration will erupt. The Deep State is already at war with average Americans, but they haven’t acknowledged that fact.
When they do, things will get interesting. Get ready.
“The war had begun and nobody saw it. The storm was lowering and nobody knew it.”
How Society Kills Our Creativity – In A Breathtaking Award-Winning Short Film November 9 2021 | From: UpliftedLife
If you relate with a sense of having your true self shunned by the society we live in, this one’s for you! And if you have kids on top of that, it will really hit home.
Madrid based animators, Daniel Martinez Lara and Rafa Cano Mendez created this touching 7 minute short film that perfectly demonstrates what happens when we let external influences dim our inner light, and how it affects the lives of those we love most. Enjoy! And go grab some tissues, you might need ’em!
Are We In A Pseudopandemic? & It All Makes Sense Once You Realize They Want To Kill Us November 8 2021 | From: ThePulse / TheBFD / UNZ / Various
Iain Davis’s Pseudopandemic: The New Normal Technocracy (free download available) proposes that COVID-19 was not an actual emergency but an orchestrated “pseudopandemic” designed to establish a new form of technocratic, anti-democratic global government.
Considering the level of threat it actually posed, Covid-19 did not merit the overwhelming global response it has received, Davis argues.
As we know, this response has included forced lockdowns, massive social and economic dislocation (leading to mental health epidemics), undemocratic emergency decrees, new invasive forms of censorship, and restrictions of previously guaranteed freedoms, as well as essentially mandated vaccinations - plus, if we continue along this path, enforced booster shots (as Israel has already introduced) and biometric IDs or vaccine passports (as hundreds of thousands in Italy are now protesting against).
Davis writes the book as if he were a lawyer building a criminal case. His research is extensive and includes links to a vast number of science papers, think tank presentations, and supporting articles.
He argues, for example, that Covid death rates were inflated to amplify fear and compliance. Unfortunately his rhetorical style is quite heavy-handed, and in many cases, he pushes the logic of his argument too far.
Even so, while reading it, a lot of puzzle pieces fell into place for me. While I still consider the idea that this was an intentionally engineered pseudopandemic to be a hypothesis, I find it a compelling and viable one.
In what follows, I first want to review the book sympathetically and then explore where I disagree or find myself unsure.
"The pseudopandemic was a psychological operation used to control billions through fear. By looking at this evidence we can identify those who had the means, opportunity and motive to commit the greatest fraud ever perpetrated on humanity."
Davis believes that the virus was pounced on as an opportunity by a conspiracy of super-wealthy, politically powerful interests focused on a particular agenda.
They continue to use this fake, or highly exaggerated, emergency to drive global civilization toward the outcome they desire:
Davis explores how such a conspiracy could be orchestrated with only a tiny number of “core conspirators” knowingly aware of the plot as a whole.
Such a project requires a system of “compartmentalized authority,” with networks of “informed influencers” and “deceived influencers.” Many of that latter group - the “Covidiots,” in Peter Limborg’s term - are people who tend to believe in official structures of authority and try to do the right thing.
Due to the continuous bombardment of propaganda, a kind of “group-think,” a reduction in the capacity for critical thought, became a widespread phenomenon.
Psychological Warfare During COVID? Yuri Bezmenov's Stark Warning
Yuri Bezmenov escaped the KGB and Soviet Union when he realized where it was headed. In 1984, he gave Americans a stark warning about what was happening in their country.
Now, the whole world can learn something from his statements.
This is due to the psychological mechanism of “mass formation,” a precursor to totalitarian movements, as Mattias Desmet, a Professor of Clinial Psychology in Belgium explores in this excellent interview.
This tendency toward “mass formation” may infect political leaders as much as ordinary people, leading to blind, unthinking conformity.
I believe we must allow ourselves to explore the possibility that Covid-19 is, indeed, an engineered “pseudopandemic,” devised as a mechanism for establishing a new system of undemocratic control.
This needs to be brought fully into consciousness, named, and publicly discussed among many sectors of society, without people being dismissed, marginalized, censored, or mocked for thinking about it (and perhaps organizing against it).
This doesn’t mean, of course, that there isn’t an actual virus that has hurt and killed many people. It means that the appearance of this particular virus was seized upon to provide the means to transition society to a new regime of global control:
A “biosecurity” complex (what the WHO calls Global Health Governance or GNG), a kind of transnational super-state, based on the framework of Global Public Private Partnerships (GPPP - something I didn’t know about before reading Davis’ book), outlined by the World Economic Forum’s “Great Reset”, operating beyond existing legal frameworks.
A team of over 1,000 lawyers and over 10,000 medical experts lead by Dr. Reiner Fullmich have begun legal proceedings over the CDC, WHO, the Davos Group for crimes against humanity.
Fullmich and his team present the faulty PCR test and the order for doctors to label any comorbidity death as a Covid death as fraud. The PCR test was never designed to detect pathogens and is 100% faulty at 35 cycles.
All the PCR tests issued by the CDC are rated at 37 to 45 cycles. The CDC admits that any test over 28 cycles are not admissible for any positive reliable result.
This alone invalidates over 90% of the alleged covid infections tracked by the use of this faulty test.
The anarcho-primitivist Darren Allen makes a distinction between two approaches to Covid conspiracy: “soft strategy” and “hard conspiracy.”
According to the soft strategy approach, “bungling governments, motivated by their usual venality, put together biofascism more or less by accident.”
Those who follow the “hard conspiracy” thesis, like Davis, believe “that the entire thing was meticulously planned from the start” by a cabal of intelligence operatives and billionaires.
“It should be obvious, to anyone with an understanding of how the world actually works, that neither of these things are wholly true, and, crucially, even if they are, it doesn’t matter,” Allen writes.
“Everything that has happened is entirely and completely consonant a) with ordinary self-interest and b) with the goals and motives of a civilised, technocratic system, ten millennia in the making, which was built from a).”
Allen’s point is that “the system” follows its own inexorable logic, and it therefore doesn’t make sense to assign agency to particular factions or individuals.
He may be correct, but I still appreciate Davis’ righteous fury, and feel it is crucial that we understand the underlying forces and dynamics behind this.
Mass, enforced vaccinations were one of the main goals of the conspiracy, according to Davis:
"Among the motives for the pseudopandemic was behavior change to accustom the public to “very, very draconian” public health orders.
The broad acceptance of a requirement to produce your biometric ID upon demand, which had hitherto been fiercely opposed, was accepted by the majority.
In addition the public’s acclimatization to reliance upon state subsidies, initially through furlough and eventually to be rolled out as UBI, was planned and achieved.
The pseudopandemic has been largely successful so far. With the population wide acceptance of vaccines, unnecessary for the vast majority, the nascent biosecurity state has been established.
The core conspirators and their informed influencers have constructed the systems they need for totalitarian technocratic control. Just as they had extensively planned and prepared to do."
It is proving very difficult to assess the efficacy of the “vaccines” over the long term.
Some nations that have vaccinated the vast majority of their population and imposed stringent lockdowns are experiencing a resurgence of COVID-19, while other countries with a far lesser percentage of vaccinated people and no lock downs are not experiencing surges at all (Latvia versus Sweden, for example).
The initial assertions that the vaccines would be 99 or 97% effective at preventing infection or transmission have proved utterly false. Such statements made by public health officials were, most probably, intentional deceptions.
We now know that vaccine protection wanes quickly, going down to less that 50% after a number of months. The vaccines also have significant health risks, such as causing myocarditis and blood clots in younger people.
The injuries and deaths caused by vaccines have been systemically under-reported by the MSM, which seems to have intentionally over-reported COVID-19 deaths and injuries.
The MSM is underwritten by pharmaceutical companies to a great degree.
The extraordinarily powerful Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation provides a great deal of funding to media companies, which influence their coverage, along with stewarding development of vaccines, and shaping global health policy via lavish donations to the World Health Organization (WHO).
There is some evidence which suggests that vaccinated people, after the waning of protection, may be at higher risk of severe reinfection.
A number of virologists and experts in respiratory disease have been warning the public about these long-term dangers.
If the vaccines turn out to cause long-term health conditions in some percentage of people, this will benefit the pharmaceutical companies, who will be making the new drugs to treat these conditions.
It is conceivable that the virus was deliberately made and released into the human population intentionally. Or it could be the case that conditions were created that allowed this to happen passively, without a deliberately inciting action.
If this seems farfetched to you, you probably haven’t been following The Intercept’s ongoing coverage of the mindbogglingly bizarre “gain of function” research on bat Coronaviruses performed by EcoHealth, collaborating with the Chinese Government, with funding from the US Government, approved by Anthony Fauci.
This research included, apparently, a plan to infect bats with an engineered Coronavirus that is more transmissible to humans, and then putting the diseased bats back into the wild.
"Yesterday, the NIH provided that missing report for the period ending May 2019, which was inexplicably dated August 2021.
That summary of the group’s work includes a description of an experiment the EcoHealth Alliance conducted involving infectious clones of MERS-CoV, the virus that caused a deadly outbreak of Middle East respiratory syndrome in 2012.
MERS has a case-fatality rate as high as 35 percent, much higher than Covid-19’s. The scientists swapped out the virus’s receptor-binding domain, or RBD, a part of the spike protein that enables it to enter a host’s cells, according to the report.
“We constructed the full-length infectious clone of MERS-CoV, and replaced the RBD of MERS-CoV with the RBDs of various strains of HKU4-related coronaviruses previously identified in bats from different provinces in southern China,” the scientists wrote.
“Changing the receptor binding site on MERS is sort of crazy,” wrote Jack Nunberg, a virologist and director of the Montana Biotechnology Center at the University of Montana, in an email to The Intercept after reviewing the documents.
“Although these new chimeric viruses may retain properties of the MERS-CoV genetic backbone, engineering of a known human pathogen raises new and unpredictable risks beyond those posed by their previously reported studies using a non-pathogenic bat virus backbone.”
The researchers’ intent, which some scientists consider integral to defining gain-of-function, remains unclear."
EcoHealth diligently tried to hide this information. Peter Daszak, Director of EcoHealth, has been one of the main proponents of the theory that COVID-19 was a naturally occurring virus, despite his obvious conflict of interest.
Davis thinks that an aim of the core conspirators - which would include not only those with political power and control of money-creation, but unknown agents of military intelligence working together in China and the West - is, eventually, depopulation.
This idea will seem, to some, to be utter paranoia drawn from dystopian science fiction (Soylent Green comes to mind). Personally, I do not find it entirely farfetched.
Over and over again, we have seen the ease with which governments and corporations disregard human life on a vast scale.
Multiple studies have found that many adverse reactions to prescription drugs are not reported, or are under-reported. The amount of under-reporting is very significant.
We are entering a time when automation can easily replace most forms of labor, meaning that the large populations required for the previous phase of industrialization are no longer needed to perpetuate the system.
At the same time, the world’s governmental and financial elites know that we have unleashed an ecological holocaust on the planet which will cause massive droughts, famines, and flooding in the next decades.
Is it impossible to imagine there may be a “compartmentalized” enterprise to engineer viruses that might be used to reduce the human population significantly?
I recently wrote about Peter Frase’s Four Futures, which models four scenarios: Communism (equality and abundance); Socialism (equality and scarcity); Rentism (inequality and abundance); and lastly, Exterminism (hierarchy and scarcity).
From where we are now, “hierarchy plus scarcity” seems a likely outcome.
"The great danger posed by the automation of production, in the context of a world of hierarchy and scarce resources, is that it makes the great mass of people superfluous from the standpoint of the ruling elite, so what happens if the masses are dangerous but are no longer a working class, and hence of no value to the rulers?
Someone will eventually get the idea that it would be better to get rid of them.”
- Peter Frase, Four Futures
In future editions of this newsletter, I will look at paths we can take to preferable outcomes that do not require depopulation. I also propose such an alternative in my 2016 book, How Soon Is Now.
Many progressive intellectuals in the alternative media circles - such as David Fuller and the Rebel Wisdom crowd - will talk around conspiracy theories from an anthropological or social psychology perspective, while refusing to engage with what Fuller calls the “truth content” of conspiratorial claims.
I find this to be a dodge that, ultimately, supports the hegemonic discourse of the MSM, which is anti-conspiratorial.
Alternative / progressive thinkers build an intellectual defense structure in which the idea of “conspiracy” can be introduced or problematized rhetorically, while they remain above the fray, neither defending nor rejecting its likelihood.
The term “conspiracy” is, in itself, a bit reductive. We will probably never have access to those inner circles where certain agreements may have been made and plots may have been hatched.
We can’t know the nuances of how communication occurs in such settings, where things like “plausible deniability” and “on a need to know basis” must be core principles.
Terms such as “collusion” and “complicity” may be more accurate, if more vague. When used dismissively, the term “conspiracy theory” allows writers and podcasters to nod toward subcultural currents while keeping their distance from claims that could be dismissed as ungrounded or paranoiac, hence they can maintain a detached stance of superiority.
Meanwhile, massive protests are happening in Europe, across Italy and in Switzerland, as well as in the US, rejecting vaccine passports, lock downs, and further mechanisms of control.
At times, those who dismiss certain ideas as “conspiracy theory” ignore things that have been stated quite openly.
For example, as Harris explores in his book, Klaus Schwab, director of the influential World Economic Forum, has clearly described the plan devised by a subset of the global elite to use the Covid-19 pandemic as an opportunity to bring about a profound level of irreversible social transformation.
In The Great Reset, co-written with Thierry Malleret, Schwab describes COVID-19 as:
"One of the least deadly pandemics the world has experienced over the last 2000 years…
It does not constitute an existential threat, or a shock that will leave its imprint on the world’s population for decades.” At the same time, this “mild” outbreak provides the catalyst to reshape society forever.
“Nothing will ever return to the “broken” sense of normalcy that prevailed prior to the crisis because the coronavirus pandemic marks a fundamental inflection point in our global trajectory.”
Rapid changes will shape a “new normal” radically different from the one we will be leaving behind.”
There are many parallels between 9/11 and the Coronavirus pandemic. In both cases, a nonstop media barrage created a sense of collective existential terror, providing the opportunity for anti-democratic maneuvers that were prepared and planned long in advance.
9/11 was used as the pretext to remove citizen’s rights with the Patriot Act; to launch the useless, yet, for military contractors, incredibly lucrative War on Terror; and start the catastrophic Iraq War which left one million Iraqi civilians dead along with 70,000 US soldiers.
The pseudo-pandemic has, similarly, allowed governments, in collaboration with international bodies, to establish new legal frameworks and precedents for monitoring and controlling their populations, such as the UK Coronavirus Act 2020.
One head of one state in Australia has been forced to resign because her and her cronies took $65m in bribes from Pfizer and AZ. So are we supposed to believe this was an isolated incident and all leaders weren’t bribed/coerced?
This turns out to be a far more effective tool for totalitarian control than the incessant pursuit of terrorist evil-doers, as the danger is no longer outside, but within each of us:
"We are all bio-hazards in the new biosecurity State,” Davis writes.
“We are the threat, each of us a danger to each other. As the biosecurity State claims the authority to keep us safe, all bio-hazards must be controlled. Therefore we must be controlled.”
It has been fascinating to see Liberals and Progressives, in particular, embrace the mass media and state propaganda, as well as all of the restrictions of this new biosecurity paradigm, as if it answered some unaddressed psychological need.
Davis wrote a very long and exhaustive tome, covering many subjects, including the history of the banking system, the Trilateral Commission, and so on. I can’t go through the detailed evidence he provides in this review; I recommend people explore the book, while I understand his tendency to push his argument too far may push many people away.
One primary motive for the pseudopandemic, according to Davis and other chroniclers, is to address the systemic collapse of the global financial system, which entered a terminal phase with the 2008 failure of the subprime mortgage market.
With the pandemic, all fiscal restraints were removed as governments created trillions of dollars of debt-based “free money,” giving it out to subsidize their out-of-work populations and closed businesses.
Davis asks if this is being done now because the controlling political and financial elite know that the current economic system is irretrievably broken.
Rather than maintain the pretense, they have decided to hasten its demise in order to force the transition to a new financial system that will maintain and even strengthen their hegemonic control of global resources.
This new financial system will utilize blockchain-based Centralized Digital Currencies that function more like “credits on the company store” than money as we know it now.
Because such a transition requires an absolutely massive level of deception, it can only be implemented when the global populace is thoroughly demoralized, terrorized, and deprived of basic rights such as freedom of speech and freedom of assembly.
Hence the need for a pseudopandemic, which has accomplished those objectives.
Corbett and Davis both seem convinced that anthropogenic climate change is a fraud or myth concocted by the global elite in order to justify the establishment of an ecological dictatorship based on a new ethos of “sustainability.”
For me, this creates a level of cognitive dissonance that I find troubling.
Davis and Corbett seem to be Libertarians. This ideology involves a hatred of government and blanket rejection of authoritarian structures.
This philosophical bias can lead to the presumption that virtually anything being promoted via governments and the financial elites at places like Davos must be entirely wrong, aimed only at extending social controls.
“In the entire history of mankind there has never been a political elite sincerely concerned about the wellbeing of regular people. What makes any of us think that it is different now. - Christine Anderson European Parliament.”
EU Parliamentarian warns EU citizens - Do not Accept the C-19 Vaccine
This is very dichotomous, black-and-white thinking, which rejects ambiguity and complexity. Such dichotomous thinking can help to clarify and identify certain tendencies in a very complex, constantly changing situation. Beyond that, it has its drawbacks.
It seems reasonable to state that, whether COVID-19 was accidentally or intentionally unleashed, once it started to spread, it was utilized as a pretext to push global society in a direction that had already been determined and agreed upon by certain groups within the corporate, financial and political elites (who, we know, assemble each year at Davos for the World Economic Forum, where this future trajectory is discussed and shaped). Whether one considers this a “hard” or “soft” conspiracy, the results are the same.
We can identify a number of reasons why the global elite seek a profoundly anti-democratic restructuring of civilization at this time. It has nothing to do with public health.
One of these motives is the rapid convergence of technologies which allows for a level of absolutely unprecedented social control on a planetary scale.
Another of these motives is the increasingly fictional nature of the hyper-leveraged global financial system, which at this point is based on mountains of debt that can never be repaid.
A third motive is the reality of a global ecological emergency brought on by a century of industrialization with its ever-increasing fossil fuel emissions and ecosystemic destruction.
Considering such factors, it only makes sense that those who have gained control of the lion’s share of the world’s financial capital and the Earth’s finite resources would work together - even a bit frantically - to devise a new system that maintains and, if possible, extends their power.
This might not be such an easy thing to accomplish. It may even be impossible.
This helps to explain the WEF’s hideously tone-deaf marketing campaign for The Great Reset, which includes their infamous “You will own nothing and you will be happy” promotional video.
The video debuted at their January 2021 conference in which Chinese Premier Xi Jinping gave the frightening opening address.
Saying:
"You will own nothing and you will be happy” is not quite the same as saying, “We will own nothing and we will all be happy.”
The message is clear: A small group will own everything, and everyone else will own nothing.
The Great Reset advocates for what Frase in Four Futures calls “Rentism” (hierarchy plus abundance), where a tiny group controls the entirety of global resources, renting it out to the rest of us who are their serfs.
It seems likely that other, darker outcomes are under consideration. The video also predicts a billion climate refugees by 2030.
As I intend to explore more in future essays, our ruling financial and political elites have caught themselves in a trap of their own making.
Capitalism promoted the collective belief in endless progress toward a paradise of limitless material abundance.
This is its only rationale for making everyone’s lives so miserable in the short term. If the ecological crisis exposes the entire enterprise of material progress as a fraud that must be abandoned, then the neoliberal and technocratic establishment will confront a severe crisis of legitimacy.
If the people continue to awaken and reject the current direction in increasingly large numbers, then the future will be up for grabs.
A Mandate or a Choice?
Mandates, Minor Inconveniences, and a Tragedy in the Making.
The current Government and their media lapdogs maintain that COVID vaccination is a choice, and all choices come with consequences. Others claim it is essentially a mandate. Either way, for some vaccine decliners the repercussions are a minor inconvenience but for others they are utterly devastating.
Being several years past the half-century mark, the author has reached the point where he no longer understands current popular music and listens to talkback radio while driving. I find the ranting exchanges equal parts entertaining and infuriating, particularly in this New Normal where every conversation leads insidiously down a winding path into the dark realm of COVID.
One talkback caller rang in to discuss “the mandatory vaccine”. The host corrected him. There is a choice. Not for teachers, midwives, and an increasing number of other sectors there isn’t, argued the caller.
The retort from the host was that of course, it’s a choice, and every choice has consequences, some of them very bad.
Now, this is true. However, the consequences being argued here have nothing to do with whether or not one contracts or spreads COVID and everything to do with a proof-of-vaccination certificate, a get-out-of-jail-free card without which one is unable to engage in a variety of activities that could previously be accessed by all.
And that could include working in one’s profession of choice, a profession in which one has probably been trained exclusively and earned qualifications for.
Panelists on a Talkradio TV show in the UK have awarded prime minister Jacinda Ardern Plank of the Week after an hour-long debate that included contenders such as UK prime minister Boris Johnson.
One of the panelists described Ardern as ‘creepy’, joked about her telling the people of New Zealand not to talk to their neighbours – described as a “low moment” in the country’s history by panelist Laura Dodsworth.
Show host Mike Graham also chided Ardern for saying the only source of truth when it came to covid was from her government “Oh, really”, he smirked.
“She’s been reading too much Chinese politics,” said panelist Russell Quirk.
In other words, there is a manufactured consequence. Punishment for failure to comply. Very different from a laws-of-physics action-reaction type of consequence.
This all goes against what our ‘Dear Leader’ promised us in September last year, when she stated that there would be “no penalties” for those opting out of the jab-a-thon.
"Not only will there be no forced vaccinations, but those who choos to opt-out won't face any penalties at all.”
- Jacinda Ardern, September 20, 2020
Sanctions for the Unvaxxed in New Zealand? Then (Sep 2020) . . . and Now (Oct 2021)
Mind you, Ardern has some strange concepts about what constitutes penalty and reward. She recently referred to the temporary freedom that those with a current jab-pass can look forward to as “a reward”.
Funny, I recall these freedoms as being just that: Basic freedoms to which all law-abiding citizens were entitled, regardless of what viruses they may or may not be inoculated against. That was back in the Old Normal.
The excuse for this impending draconianism is limp. As is increasingly the case with so many limitations of freedom these days, the magic catch-all of “safety” is invoked.
Those teachers and healthcare workers who decline Doctor Pfizer’s Elixir could infect your precious loved ones. They must be jabbed for everyone’s safety, not just their own.
One hardly needs to invoke the example of Israel and the startling revelation, to us mere uninformed mortals at least, that the mRNA jab’s effect wears off rather rapidly, resulting in the magical manifestation of a third “booster” shot.
No doubt to be followed by many more.
PM's Question Time with Shane Chafin
It's been a big fortnight for Counterspin Media which has culminated in our Chief Medical Correspondent, Shane Chafin, asking the NZ PM Jacinda Ardern the questions MSM should be.
In this episode Kelvyn is joined by Shane for a debrief and analysis of the national and international coverage we got after going internationally viral.
See the full, behind the scenes footage of the now, infamous Kawakawa press conference, the PM will be wishing never happened. We are also joined by brave mama bear, Te Otinga Rogers, who sung to the PM at the same event and also shared her thoughts on the PM's failure.
How else will Pfizer make a dollar? The very fact that these revelations are taking place in the field, the public domain, long after the horse has bolted, only seem to highlight the long-term uncertainty associated with these new-fangled mRNA medications.
This leads to the question of how often one will be required to renew one’s Vax-cert in order to continue the illusion of freedom.
The scenario is chillingly like the arcade games of yore:
‘To Continue Game play, Insert Another Jab in Arm… Sorry. Time Up: Game Over.’
For most of us, the penalties of declining vaccination are a minor inconvenience. Who needs the movie theatre when one has Netflix?
Who needs to visit a local event or go on an airplane ride when one can stroll around The Pomona Swap Meet on YouTube or fly over the Swiss Alps on Google Earth?
Retail shopping? Who wants to engage in the Battle of the Car Parks and jostle with the masked and jabbed hordes shuffling down the aisles like the zombies in Dawn of the Dead when one can browse online and enjoy deliver-to-your-door service?
A trio of scientists at Pfizer were recorded speaking to undercover reporters about the existence of natural immunity to the virus that causes COVID-19, with one saying employees had been told not to discuss the protection publicly.
Chris Croce, another scientist at Pfizer, told an undercover reporter that people are “probably more” protected by natural immunity when compared with vaccination.
“You’re protected most likely for longer since there was a natural response,” he said.
A different and terrifying scenario exists, however, for those whose “choice” means walking away from a job that may be more than simply a source of income, but a vocation, a passion, a natural talent and a way of life.
For these people, the penalty is no mere inconvenience.
No Jab, No Job? That sounds like a mandate to me.
The consequence of a refusal to comply with this mandate is a cruel punishment and may result in a greater strain on the already over-burdened Mental Health sector in which, ironically, Labour has failed to support and invest.
It All Makes Sense Once You Realize They Want to Kill Us
“It is now apparent that these products in the blood stream are toxic to humans. An immediate halt to the vaccination programme is required while an independent safety analysis is undertaken to investigate the full extent of the harms, which the UK Yellow Card data suggest includes thromboembolism, multi-system inflammatory disease, immune suppression, autoimmunity and anaphylaxis, as well as Antibody Dependent Enhancement (ADE).” - Tess Lawrie, Evidence-Based Medicine Consultancy
“For we wrestle not against flesh and blood, but against the rulers of the darkness of this world, against spiritual wickedness in high places.” - Ephesians 6:12
Question: Have the mRNA vaccines been tested on animals?
Answer: Yes, they have.
Question: Were the animal trials successful?
Answer: Yes and no.
Yes, the experiments on mice showed that a low dose of the vaccine induces a robust antibody response to the infection.
But, no, the antibodies were not able to attack the spike protein from a different strain of the virus.
Question: I’m not sure what that means? Do you mean that the vaccine DOES provide some limited protection from the original (Wuhan) virus, but does not necessarily provide protection from the variants?
Answer: That’s right, but it’s a bit more complicated than that because - as the virus changes - the antibodies that helped to fight the original virus can actually enhance the “infectivity” of the variant. In other words, vaccine-generated antibodies can switch-sides and increase the severity of the illness.
High Recorded Mortality in Countries Categorized as “Covid-19 Vaccine Champions.” The Vaccinated Suffer from Increased Risk of Mortality compared to the Non-vaccinated.
If you are unvaccinated with the Covid “vaccine” and value your health and life, remain unvaccinated. If you are vaccinated and have so far survived the double-jab do not take a booster if you value your health and your life.
The alleged “vaccine” does not protect you. It makes you more susceptible to the virus and to its variants and it also causes serious and deadly side effects.
Those who trusted Fauci, the presstitutes, the medical establishment and the Democrats have paid for it with their health and with increased vulnerability.
Simply put, they can make you sicker or kill you. Scientists have known this for a long time. Check out this clip from a 2005 research paper:
"A jab against one strain might worsen infection with others….
In the.. study, Gary Nabel of the National Institute of Allergy and Infectious Diseases.. injected mice with spike protein from a SARS virus taken from a human patient infected in early 2003. They then collected the antibodies the animals produced.
In lab experiments, they showed that these antibodies were unable to attack spike protein from a different strain of SARS, isolated from a patient infected in late 2003….
The team next tested whether the antibodies would attack spike proteins from two SARS strains isolated from civets, from which the virus is thought to have originally jumped into humans. In this case, they found hints that the antibodies actually boosted the ability of the virus to infect cells.…
The results show that the virus changes over time, so that a strain that crops up in one outbreak might be quite different from that in a later outbreak. “This virus is not standing still and we need to take this into account,” Nabel says.
This raises the prospect that a vaccine against one strain of SARS virus could prove ineffective against others. Worse, a jab against one strain might even aggravate an infection with SARS virus from civets or another species. “It’s obviously a concern,” Nabel says..
This would not be the first case where exposure to one strain of a virus can worsen infection with another.”
Question: I’m still confused. Can you summarize what they’re saying?
Answer: Sure. They’re saying that scientists have known for nearly two decades that vaccines narrowly aimed at just one protein are bound to fail.
They’re saying that the spike protein is highly-adaptable and capable of changing its shape to survive. They’re saying that vaccines aimed at the spike protein will inevitably produce variants that evade vaccine-generated antibodies.
They’re saying that by narrowing the vaccine’s focus to the spike protein alone, the drug companies have ensured that previously helpful antibodies will do an about-face, allow the virus to enter healthy cells, replicate at will, and cause sickness or death.
This incisive article published by Global Research on June 5, 2015 outlines what we are living now, with the introduction of the mRNA vaccine which modifies the human genome.
They are saying that the current crop of vaccines is in fact perpetuating the pandemic. And - since the science has been clear for the last 16 years – we can add one more observation to the list, that is, that the current approach to mass vaccination is neither haphazard, slapdash or random.
It is intentional. The vaccination campaign managers are deliberately ignoring the science in order to sustain a permanent state of crisis. Science is being manipulated to achieve a political objective.
Question: I think you’re exaggerating, but I’d like to get back to the animal trials instead of arguing politics.
As you probably know, the reports in the media do not square with your analysis, in fact, all of the articles in the MSM say the animal trials were a rousing success.
Here’s a short blurb that I found today that confirms what I’ve been saying:
"…vaccination of nonhuman primates with the mRNA vaccine induced robust SARS-CoV-2 neutralizing activity and notably, rapid protection in the upper and lower airways….”
Question: Are you suggesting the authors are lying?
Answer: No, they are not lying. They’re just not telling you the whole truth, and you need to know the whole truth so you can make an informed decision.
The vaccines DO provide some (temporary) protection. We don’t dispute that. They also trigger a strong immune response. We don’t dispute that either. But what difference does it make?
Let me explain: Let’s say, you have a really bad head cold so you take a new medication that you think will relieve the pain.
And - sure enough – an hour after taking the pills – Presto - your congestion and headache are completely gone. That’s fantastic, right?
Wrong, because what you fail to realize is that the medication is laced with slow-acting strychnine that kills you three days later. Do you still think it was a good idea to take the medication?
Of course, not. And the same rule applies to these vaccines which do, in fact, boost your antibodies and provide some fleeting “immunity”. But they can also kill you.
Neither is there a case for coercive or restrictive measures affecting those who are unvaccinated for the COVID-19 vaccines. It is a case of all risk with zero benefit.
Don’t you think that should be factored in to your decision? Keep in mind, people have died 3, 4, 5 weeks after inoculation without any prior warning.
Many of them might have even been bursting with antibodies, but they’re still dead. Can you see the problem?
Question: Okay, but there’s still this matter about the animal trials. The media says that the drug companies performed the animal trials and they were successful. Do you disagree with that?
Answer: They were not successful and the “fact checkers” that were hired to discredit vaccine critics like me, have deliberately mischaracterized what happened in the trials.
"Posts claiming that COVID-19 vaccine producers skipped animal trials due to the animals in those trials dying are false.
Pfizer-BioNTech, Moderna and Johnson & Johnson, which have been granted emergency authorization use by the Food and Drug Administration (FDA) in the United States, all conducted animal trials and had no significant safety concerns to report.”
Sounds reassuring, right? But then they say:
"Due to time constraints and the urgency to find a vaccine for COVID-19, Moderna and Pfizer did receive approval to run animal testing and early trials on humans at the same time, as opposed to fully completing animal trials before moving on to human trials.
This, however, does not mean animal trials were skipped or that the safety of the vaccines were compromised.”
Let me see if I got this straight:
The drug companies were in such a hurry that they conducted their minimalist animal trials at the same time as their human trials (which is unprecedented) and then rushed the results to the FDA so they could be rubber stamped and waved through under the Emergency Use Authority?
Prior to facemask mandates as an alleged preventive for Covid infection and transmission, such masks were infrequently worn in hospitals and other medical facilities.
They were only used in operating theatres or for visiting seriously ill patients in order to prevent infection from spit or droplets into open wounds or to partially protect visitors from acquiring and transmitting pathogens more dangerous than Covid.
But if they were rushed through in a couple months, then the “fact checkers” are tacitly admitting that there is no long-term safety data.
And there IS no long-term safety data, nor is there any attempt to disprove the research from the earlier trials where the ferrets, mice and other animals died following injection of mRNA vaccines.
They don’t deny it, they just ignore it as if sweeping it under the rug will make it all go away. Here’s a clip from the research paper that Reuters refers to in its article:
"We demonstrate that the candidate vaccines… respectively - induce strong antigen-specific immune responses in mice and macaques…
Both (vaccines) protected 2 - 4-year-old macaques from challenge with infectious SARS-CoV-2, and there was reduced detection of viral RNA in immunized macaques as compared to those that received saline.”
(Note - We’ve already acknowledged that the vaccines do produce a strong immune response. Here’s more:)
“Neutralizing GMTs declined by day 56 (35 days after dose 2), consistent with the contraction phase; however, they remained well above the GMT of the human sera panel.
The duration of the study was not long enough to assess the rate of decline during the plateau phase of the antibody response.”
Can you see what’s going on? The trial was only 56 days-long, in fact, none of the animal trials exceeded 56 days. Think about that for a minute.
The reason the animals died in prior trials is because they were exposed to a mutated version of the (wild) virus that eventually killed them.
That’s how ADE (antibody-dependent enhancement) works. It doesn’t happen overnight and it doesn’t happen in 56 days. It takes much longer than that for a mutated version of the virus to emerge and reinfect the host.
The drug companies know that. They’re not stupid. So the fact that the animals mounted a strong immune response is completely irrelevant. We KNOW they mounted a strong immune response.
We also know they died some months later when a different strain of the virus emerged. Bottom line: The production of antibodies does not mean a drug is safe.
In 1996, Dr. Gary Null interviewed the late Nobel Laureate Dr. Kary B. Mullis, the inventor of the PCR test. He stated that no infection or illness can be accurately diagnosed with PCR. He also discussed his thoughts regarding Dr. Fauci and the scientific and medical establishments.
The obvious purpose of the trials was to get the vaccines over the finish-line before anyone figured out what was going on.
It’s the same reason why the drug companies “unblinded” their human trials after the vaccines got the green light from the FDA. Shortly after the trials were concluded, the people in the placebo arm were allowed to get vaccinated.
Why would they do that? Why would they vaccinate the people who willingly allowed themselves to be guinea pigs for the sake of public health, only to vaccinate them shortly after, thus, eliminating any chance of finding out what the long-term safety issues might be?
It makes no sense, does it?
Take a look at this short clip from the British Medical Journal whose scientists are equally bewildered:
"The (drug) companies say they have an ethical obligation to unblind volunteers so they can receive the vaccine. But some experts are concerned about a “disastrous” loss of critical information if volunteers on a trial’s placebo arm are unblinded…
Although the FDA has granted the vaccines emergency use authorization, to get full license approval two years of follow-up data are needed. The data are now likely to be scanty and less reliable given that the trials are effectively being unblinded.
Consumer representative Sheldon Toubman, a lawyer and FDA advisory panel member, said that Pfizer and BioNTech had not proved that their vaccine prevents severe covid-19.
“The FDA says all we can do is suggest protection from severe covid disease; we need to know that it does that,” he said.
He countered claims, based on experience with other vaccines, six weeks of follow-up was long enough to detect safety signals. Six weeks may not be long enough for this entirely new type of “untested” [mRNA] vaccine, Toubman said.
Goodman wants all companies to be held to the same standard and says they should not be allowed to make up their own rules about unblinding.
He told The BMJ that, while he was “very optimistic” about the vaccines, “blowing up the trials” by allowing unblinding “will set a de facto standard for all vaccine trials to come.” And that, he said, “is dangerous.”
Do you like his choice of words: “blowing up the trials”? Do you think it is a fair description of what the drug companies did?
Yes, it is.
And what possible motive would the drug companies have to blow up the trials? I can see only two possibilities:
1.
They think their vaccine is so terrific, it will save the lives of many of the people in the placebo group.
2.
They expect a high percentage of the people in the vaccine group to get either severely sick or die, so they want to hide the evidence of vaccine-linked injury.
Which is it?
You know the answer. Everyone watching this farce knows the answer.
Question: Okay, so let’s cut to the chase: Are the vaccines are safe or not?
No, they are not safe. The way we decide whether a drug is safe or not is by putting it through a rigorous process of testing and clinical trials.
After the testing, the data is passed on to physicians, statisticians, chemists, pharmacologists, and other scientists who review the data and make their recommendations or criticisms.
That didn’t happen with the Covid vaccines, in fact, all the normal standards and protocols were suspended in the name of “urgency”.
But many believe that the “urgency” was manufactured to push through vaccines that would never have been approved on their own merits.
All you have to do is look through the vaccine injury data (VAERS) and you’ll see this is the most lethal medical intervention of all time and, yet, the public health experts, the media and the government keep crowing that they’re “safe and effective”.
It’s nonsense and the drug companies know it’s nonsense which is why they reject all liability for the people that are going to be killed by these “poison-death shots.”
Do you know what goes on inside your body after you are injected with one of these “gene based” vaccines?
Once the vaccine enters the bloodstream it penetrates the cells that line the blood vessels forcing them to produce spike proteins that protrude into the bloodstream like millions of microscopic thorns.
Bill Gates speech about “vaccines could reduce unsustainable population growth”: Many now question how it is possible that one of the richest men in the world has come to dominate the WHO, leading NGOs and function as mentor to Prime Ministers and nation leaders.
Billionaire and vaccine investor, Bill Gates, who is massively profiting economically from the Covid-19 world wide lockdown and vaccine programs, has openly advocated for abortion as a measure of population control and questioned what we should do with the rapid population growth in the world.
These thorns activate blood platelets which trigger blood clotting followed shortly after by an immune response that destroys the infected cells thus weakening the vascular system while draining the supply of killer lymphocytes.
In this way, the vaccine launches a dual attack on the body’s critical infrastructure causing widespread tissue damage throughout the circulatory system while leaving the immune system less able to fend off future infection.
Now if you think you can have a long-and-happy without a functioning circulatory system, then none of this matters.
But if you’re bright enough to realize that wreaking havoc on your vascular system is the fast-track to the graveyard, then you’ll probably understand that injecting these “poison-death shots” is a particularly bad idea.
By the way, it’s a real stretch to call these hybrid injections, “vaccines”. They have about as much in common with a traditional vaccine as a python does with a coffee table. Nothing.
The “vaccine” moniker was chosen in order to shore-up public confidence, that’s all. It’s part of a marketing strategy.
There is no real similarity. The majority of people trust vaccines and see them as a shining example of medical achievement. The drug companies wanted to tap into that trust and use it for their own purposes.
That’s why they called it a “vaccine” instead of “gene therapy” which more accurately describes ‘what it does.’ But – like we said – it’s just a marketing strategy.
A “Physicians’ Declaration” produced by an international alliance of physicians and medical scientists strongly condemns the global strategy to treat COVID, accusing policy-makers of potential “crimes against humanity” for preventing physicians from providing life-saving treatments for their patients and suppressing open scientific discussion.
The document states that “one size fits all” treatment recommendations have resulted in needless illness and death.
Dr. Robert Malone reads Rome COVID Summit “Declaration” signed by over 3,000 doctors and scientists accusing Covid policy-makers of potential “crimes against humanity”https://t.co/bIosbeYsZs
Have you ever wondered how the drug companies were able to roll out their own-individual vaccines just weeks apart from each other?
That’s a pretty good trick, don’t you think; especially since vaccine development typically takes from 10 to 15 years. How do you think they managed that?
Here’s an excerpt from an article which provides a little background on the topic:
"The virus behind the outbreak that began in Wuhan, China, was identified on Jan. 7.
Less than a week later - on Jan. 13 - researchers at Moderna and the NIH had a proposed sequence for an mRNA vaccine against it, and, as the company wrote in government documents, “we mobilized toward clinical manufacture.”
By Feb. 24, the team was shipping vials from a plant in Norwood, Mass., to the National Institute of Allergy and Infectious Diseases, in Bethesda, Md., for a planned clinical trial to test its safety.”
Got that? The virus broke out in Wuhan… on Jan. 7, and less than a week later Moderna had a proposed sequence for an mRNA vaccine against it?
Really? Is that the same Moderna that had been playing-around with mRNA for over a decade but was never able to successfully bring a vaccine to market?
Yep, the very same company. Here’s more:
“And by Feb. 24, the team was shipping vials from a plant in Norwood, Mass?”
Wow! Another Covid miracle! You almost get whiplash watching these companies crank out their “wonder drugs” at record-breaking speed.
Keep in mind, there’s a very high probability that the virus was man-made, (In other words, it’s a bioweapon.) and the people who have been implicated in the funding and creation of that bioweapon are also closely aligned with the big drug companies that have produced the antidote in record time that has already netted tens of billions of dollars in profits for a drug for which there was no reliable animal testing, no long-term safety data, and no formal regulatory approval.
So I’ll ask you again: Doesn’t that all sound a bit suspicious?
Is it really that hard to see the outline of a political agenda here?
After all, aren’t the drug companies working with the regulatory agencies that are working with the public health officials that are working with the media that are working with the corrupted politicians that are working with the Intel agencies that are working with the meddling globalist billionaires that are working with the giant private equity firms that oversee the entire operation pulling the appropriate strings whenever needed?
It sure looks like it.
And, don’t the tectonic social changes we’ve seen in the last year have more to do with a broader scorched-earth campaign launched by the “parasite class” against the rest of humanity than they do with a fairly-mild virus that kills mainly old and frail people with multiple underlying health conditions?
A CNN medical doctor on a podcast released this week acknowledged the network should not have referred to ivermectin as a “horse dewormer” when reporting on Joe Rogan using it after contracting COVID-19.
In fact, many have noticed the cracks in the pandemic artifice from the very beginning, just as many have pointed out that the virus-meme is just the mask behind which parasites continue to conduct their global restructuring project.
In short, it’s all about politics; bare-knuckle, take-no-prisoners NWO politics.
Answer: You’ve asked a number of questions about the animal trials, but none about the biodistribution and the pharmacokinetics studies that were done at the same time. Why is that? (Note--Pharmacokinetics; “the branch of pharmacology concerned with the movement of drugs within the body.”)
Question: I didn’t know there were any. Did the media report on them?
Answer: No, they didn’t. They completely ignored them, even though they were produced by Pfizer and provide essential information about where the substance in the vaccine goes in the body, in what amounts, and for how long.
By knowing how the drug is distributed, it is possible to make educated assumptions about its effect on the organs and other tissue. In other words, these studies are invaluable.
The Doctors for Covid Ethics have done extensive research on the studies and written a report titled “The Pfizer mRNA vaccine: pharmacokinetics and toxicity”.
Here’s a few excerpts that help to illustrate the dangers of the vaccines:
"As with any drug, a key consideration for the toxicity of the COVID mRNA vaccines is where exactly in the body they end up, and for how long they will stay there.
Such questions, which are the subject of pharmacokinetics, are usually thoroughly investigated during drug development.
Initial studies on pharmacokinetics and also on toxicity are carried out in animals… this document has rather far-reaching implications:
It shows that Pfizer - as well as the authorities that were apprised of these data - must have recognized the grave risks of adverse events after vaccination even before the onset of clinical trials.
Nevertheless, Pfizer’s own clinical trials failed to monitor any of the clinical risks that were clearly evident from these data, and the regulatory authorities failed to enforce proper standards of oversight.
This dual failure has caused the most grievous harm to the public….
What do Pfizer’s animal data presage for biological effects in humans?
Rapid appearance of spike protein in the circulation.
Toxicity to organs with expected high rates of uptake, in particular placenta and
lactating breast glands
Penetration of some organs might be higher with the real vaccine than with this
luciferase model…The rapid entry of the model vaccine into the circulation means that we must expect the spike protein to be expressed within the circulation, particularly by endothelial cells. ( Endothelial- The thin layer of cells lining the blood vessels) We have seen before that this will lead to activation of blood clotting through direct activation of platelets and also, probably more importantly, through immune attack on the endothelial cells….
Summary
Pfizer’s animal data clearly presaged the following risks and dangers:
Blood clotting shortly after vaccination, potentially leading to heart attacks, stroke, and venous thrombosis
Grave harm to female fertility
Grave harm to breastfed infants
Cumulative toxicity after multiple injections
With the exception of female fertility, which can simply not be evaluated within the short period of time for which the vaccines have been in use, all of the above risks have been substantiated since the vaccines have been rolled out - all are manifest in the reports to the various adverse event registries.
Those registries also contain a very considerable number of reports on abortions and stillbirths shortly after vaccination, which should have prompted urgent investigation.
….
Of particularly grave concern is the very slow elimination of the toxic cationic lipids. In persons repeatedly injected with mRNA vaccines containing these lipids… this would result in cumulative toxicity.
There is a real possibility that cationic lipids will accumulate in the ovaries. The implied grave risk to female fertility demands the most urgent attention of the public and of the health authorities.
Since the so-called clinical trials were carried out with such negligence, the real trials are occurring only now - on a massive scale, and with devastating results. …
Calling off this failed experiment is long overdue. Continuing or even mandating the use of this poisonous vaccine, and the apparently imminent issuance of full approval for it are crimes against humanity.”
They are an attack on personal liberty, the foundation of our constitutional system. It’s a principle worth dying for.
As for the mass vaccination campaign, it is the most maniacally-genocidal project ever concocted by man.
There’s simply no way to calculate the amount of suffering and death we are about to face for trusting people whose policies were obviously shaped by their undiluted hatred of humanity.
As German microbiologist Dr. Sucharit Bhakdi said:
"In the end, we’re going to see mass illness and deaths among people who normally would have had wonderful lives ahead of them.”
Maori Artifacts Point To Early Polynesian Settlement In New Zealand November 7 2021 | From: LiveScience
Archeologists in New Zealand are starting to unravel the mysteries of an early settlement near the northern tip of the islands that may have been founded by some of the first Polynesians to arrive in the region around 700 years ago.
The dig was a joint project between archaeologists from New Zealand government agencies and Otago University, and local Maori groups The artifacts from Moturua Island include a pendant made from shell that appears to have originated in tropical Pacific waters, which may have been brought by the earliest generations of Polynesian settlers, who developed New Zealand's indigenous Maori culture in the centuries that followed, say the researchers.
The archaeological site, located beside a beach at Mangahawea Bay on Moturua island, about 124 miles (200 kilometers) north of the city of Auckland, was first excavated by archaeologists from the University of Auckland in 1981. [See Photos of the Early Maori Site in New Zealand]
Although some research on the bones of Polynesian dogs ("kuri" in Maori) found at the site was published a few years later, details of the excavation itself were not formally written up, and the bulk of the archaeological work from the site remains unpublished almost 40 years later.
"Everyone's known about it, everyone knows that it's potentially important, but no one's actually been able to do any work on it,” said Andrew Blanshard, a ranger for New Zealand’s Department of Conservation, who initiated the project that led to the latest dig at Moturua Island in February of this year.
Now, some of the artifacts from the 1981 dig, along with bone fish hooks, shell fragments and the bones of animals found in a stone-lined underground oven, or hangi, on the site will undergo scientific testing for the first time, Blanshard said.
This is part of an effort to determine if the site may have once been home to some of the first Polynesians to settle in New Zealand, which is thought to have been in the late 13th century, he added.
Among the key findings at the site during the latest excavations are the cooked remains of seals, shellfish and moa - New Zealand's largest flightless bird, now extinct. Moa disappeared from the region due to predation soon after the first humans settled in New Zealand, Blanshard told Live Science.
The researchers are also focusing attention on the type of shell used in a pendant found at the site in 1981, which appears to be a species of pearl oyster - tropical shellfish that are not found in cold New Zealand waters, he said.
If the shell in the pendant is confirmed to be mother-of-pearl, then it may have been brought to New Zealand by some of the very earliest settlers from tropical parts of Polynesia: "But at this stage, it's still very much a wish, rather than something we can prove," Blanshard said.
The archaeological site on Moturua Island in New Zealand's Bay of Islands may prove be one of the earliest Maori settlements ever found
Blanshard became interested in this archeological "cold case" when he helped build a walking track around the island in 2006.
After being told that the results from the 1981 dig were never written up and published, and that the artifacts from the site remained undated, “I decided that we probably needed to think about doing something a little bit better than that,” he said. [The 25 Most Mysterious Archaeological Finds on Earth]
Blanshard spent nine years locating the artifacts, field notebooks and other research from the 1981 dig to prepare for this year's excavations. Many of the items were found in the archives of universities and government departments in different cities around New Zealand, he said.
The notebooks, in particular, enabled the new team of archeologists to make sense of the field work that was carried out in 1981.
"We were able to redig one of their holes, and have a look at the sides of the hole - what we would call the profile - and that allows us to better understand the samples and artifacts that we've got from the 1981 excavation," Blanshard said, "so it starts to fill in the blanks of the jigsaw."
Maori Partnership
The excavation at Moturua Island earlier this year was a partnership between New Zealand's Department of Conservation, the government agency Heritage New Zealand, archeologists from the University of Otago at Dunedin in the South Island, and two local Maori clans: Ngati Kuta and Patu Keha.
Heritage New Zealand archaeologist James Robinson, who led the latest dig on Moturua Island, said the involvement of the local Maori was important in helping the researchers to understand the various functional areas of the site, such as the structures of buried storage pits for sweet potatoes, or "kumara," of a type still being used in Maori communities in the area in the 1950s.
Although carbon dating on various items recovered during the latest dig will not be completed for several months, Robinson told Live Science that "we're happy at this stage to say that we're dealing with what's sometimes referred to as an archaic [Maori] or an early Polynesian site."
The latest dig has also revealed signs of archeological layers that indicate the site was occupied successively during different periods of Maori cultural development - an unusual find in New Zealand, where many early sites were often abandoned when some key local resource became scarce, Robinson said.
Initial research from the latest Moturua Island dig was presented at an archaeological conference in New Zealand earlier this year, and scientific papers about the findings, combining the work done by the 1981 and 2017 dig teams, are currently being prepared for publication, he said.
"It's an interesting site - it's one that deserved the attention that led to it being excavated in 1981, but it's really important that these things do get published and analyzed properly," Robinson said.
Why Anti-Authoritarians Are Diagnosed As Mentally Ill November 6 2021 | From: MadInAmerica
In my career as a psychologist, I have talked with hundreds of people previously diagnosed by other professionals with oppositional defiant disorder, attention deficit hyperactive disorder, anxiety disorder and other psychiatric illnesses, and I am struck by (1) how many of those diagnosed are essentially anti-authoritarians, and (2) how those professionals who have diagnosed them are not.
Anti-authoritarians question whether an authority is a legitimate one before taking that authority seriously.
Evaluating the legitimacy of authorities includes assessing whether or not authorities actually know what they are talking about, are honest, and care about those people who are respecting their authority.
And when anti-authoritarians assess an authority to be illegitimate, they challenge and resist that authority - sometimes aggressively and sometimes passive-aggressively, sometimes wisely and sometimes not.
Some activists lament how few anti-authoritarians there appear to be in the United States. One reason could be that many natural anti-authoritarians are now psychopathologized and medicated before they achieve political consciousness of society’s most oppressive authorities.
Why Mental Health Professionals Diagnose Anti-Authoritarians with Mental Illness
Gaining acceptance into graduate school or medical school and achieving a PhD or MD and becoming a psychologist or psychiatrist means jumping through many hoops, all of which require much behavioral and attentional compliance to authorities, even to those authorities that one lacks respect for.
The selection and socialization of mental health professionals tends to breed out many anti-authoritarians. Having steered the higher-education terrain for a decade of my life, I know that degrees and credentials are primarily badges of compliance.
Those with extended schooling have lived for many years in a world where one routinely conforms to the demands of authorities. Thus for many MDs and PhDs, people different from them who reject this attentional and behavioral compliance appear to be from another world - a diagnosable one.
I have found that most psychologists, psychiatrists, and other mental health professionals are not only extraordinarily compliant with authorities but also unaware of the magnitude of their obedience.
And it also has become clear to me that the anti-authoritarianism of their patients creates enormous anxiety for these professionals, and their anxiety fuels diagnoses and treatments.
In graduate school, I discovered that all it took to be labeled as having “issues with authority” was to not kiss up to a director of clinical training whose personality was a combination of Donald Trump, Newt Gingrich, and Howard Cosell.
When I was told by some faculty that I had “issues with authority,” I had mixed feelings about being so labeled. On the one hand, I found it quite amusing, because among the working-class kids whom I had grown up with, I was considered relatively compliant with authorities.
After all, I had done my homework, studied, and received good grades. However, while my new “issues with authority” label made me grin because I was now being seen as a “bad boy,” it also very much concerned me about just what kind of a profession that I had entered.
Specifically, if somebody such as myself was being labeled with “issues with authority,” what were they calling the kids I grew up with who paid attention to many things that they cared about but didn’t care enough about school to comply there? Well, the answer soon became clear.
Mental Illness Diagnoses for Anti-Authoritarians
A 2009 Psychiatric Times article titled “ADHD & ODD: Confronting the Challenges of Disruptive Behavior” reports that “disruptive disorders,” which include attention deficit hyperactivity disorder (ADHD) and opposition defiant disorder (ODD), are the most common mental health problem of children and teenagers.
ADHD is defined by poor attention and distractibility, poor self-control and impulsivity, and hyperactivity. ODD is defined as a “a pattern of negativistic, hostile, and defiant behavior without the more serious violations of the basic rights of others that are seen in conduct disorder”; and ODD symptoms include “often actively defies or refuses to comply with adult requests or rules” and “often argues with adults.”
Psychologist Russell Barkley, one of mainstream mental health’s leading authorities on ADHD, says that those afflicted with ADHD have deficits in what he calls “rule-governed behavior,” as they are less responsive to rules of established authorities and less sensitive to positive or negative consequences.
ODD young people, according to mainstream mental health authorities, also have these so-called deficits in rule-governed behavior, and so it is extremely common for young people to have a “duel diagnosis” of AHDH and ODD.
Do we really want to diagnose and medicate everyone with “deficits in rule-governed behavior”?
Albert Einstein, as a youth, would have likely received an ADHD diagnosis, and maybe an ODD one as well. Albert didn’t pay attention to his teachers, failed his college entrance examinations twice, and had difficulty holding jobs.
However, Einstein biographer Ronald Clark (Einstein: The Life and Times) asserts that Albert’s problems did not stem from attention deficits but rather from his hatred of authoritarian, Prussian discipline in his schools.
Einstein said, “The teachers in the elementary school appeared to me like sergeants and in the Gymnasium the teachers were like lieutenants.”
At age 13, Einstein read Kant’s difficult Critique of Pure Reason - because Albert was interested in it. Clark also tells us Einstein refused to prepare himself for his college admissions as a rebellion against his father’s “unbearable” path of a “practical profession.”
After he did enter college, one professor told Einstein, “You have one fault; one can’t tell you anything.” The very characteristics of Einstein that upset authorities so much were exactly the ones that allowed him to excel.
By today’s standards, Saul Alinsky, the legendary organizer and author of Reveille for Radicals and Rules for Radicals, would have certainly been diagnosed with one or more disruptive disorders.
Recalling his childhood, Alinsky said, “I never thought of walking on the grass until I saw a sign saying ‘Keep off the grass.’ Then I would stomp all over it.” Alinsky also recalls a time when he was ten or eleven and his rabbi was tutoring him in Hebrew:
"One particular day I read three pages in a row without any errors in pronunciation, and suddenly a penny fell onto the Bible . . .
Then the next day the rabbi turned up and he told me to start reading. And I wouldn’t; I just sat there in silence, refusing to read. He asked me why I was so quiet, and I said, “This time it’s a nickel or nothing.”
He threw back his arm and slammed me across the room."
Many people with severe anxiety and/or depression are also anti-authoritarians.
Often a major pain of their lives that fuels their anxiety and/or depression is fear that their contempt for illegitimate authorities will cause them to be financially and socially marginalized; but they fear that compliance with such illegitimate authorities will cause them existential death.
I have also spent a great deal of time with people who had at one time in their lives had thoughts and behavior that were so bizarre that they were extremely frightening for their families and even themselves; they were diagnosed with schizophrenia and other psychoses, but have fully recovered and have been, for many years, leading productive lives.
Among this population, I have not met one person whom I would not consider a major anti-authoritarian. Once recovered, they have learned to channel their anti-authoritarianism into more constructive political ends, including reforming mental health treatment.
Many anti-authoritarians who earlier in their lives were diagnosed with mental illness tell me that once they were labeled with a psychiatric diagnosis, they got caught in a dilemma.
Authoritarians, by definition, demand unquestioning obedience, and so any resistance to their diagnosis and treatment created enormous anxiety for authoritarian mental health professionals; and professionals, feeling out of control, labeled them “noncompliant with treatment,” increased the severity of their diagnosis, and jacked up their medications.
This was enraging for these anti-authoritarians, sometimes so much so that they reacted in ways that made them appear even more frightening to their families.
There are anti-authoritarians who use psychiatric drugs to help them function, but they often reject psychiatric authorities’ explanations for why they have difficulty functioning.
So, for example, they may take Adderall (an amphetamine prescribed for ADHD), but they know that their attentional problem is not a result of a biochemical brain imbalance but rather caused by a boring job.
And similarly, many anti-authoritarians in highly stressful environments will occasionally take prescribed benzodiazepines such as Xanax even though they believe it would be safer to occasionally use marijuana but can’t because of drug testing on their job
It has been my experience that many anti-authoritarians labeled with psychiatric diagnoses usually don’t reject all authorities, simply those they’ve assessed to be illegitimate ones, which just happens to be a great deal of society’s authorities.
Maintaining the Societal Status Quo
Americans [Westerners] have been increasingly socialized to equate inattention, anger, anxiety, and immobilizing despair with a medical condition, and to seek medical treatment rather than political remedies.
What better way to maintain the status quo than to view inattention, anger, anxiety, and depression as biochemical problems of those who are mentally ill rather than normal reactions to an increasingly authoritarian society.
The reality is that depression is highly associated with societal and financial pains. One is much more likely to be depressed if one is unemployed, underemployed, on public assistance, or in debt (for documentation, see “400% Rise in Anti-Depressant Pill Use”).
And ADHD labeled kids do pay attention when they are getting paid, or when an activity is novel, interests them, or is chosen by them (documented in my book Commonsense Rebellion).
In an earlier dark age, authoritarian monarchies partnered with authoritarian religious institutions. When the world exited from this dark age and entered the Enlightenment, there was a burst of energy.
Much of this revitalization had to do with risking skepticism about authoritarian and corrupt institutions and regaining confidence in one’s own mind.
We are now in another dark age, only the institutions have changed. Americans [Westerners] desperately need anti-authoritarians to question, challenge, and resist new illegitimate authorities and regain confidence in their own common sense.
In every generation there will be authoritarians and anti-authoritarians. While it is unusual in American history for anti-authoritarians to take the kind of effective action that inspires others to successfully revolt, every once in a while a Tom Paine, Crazy Horse, or Malcolm X come along.
So authoritarians financially marginalize those who buck the system, they criminalize anti-authoritarianism, they psychopathologize anti-authoritarians, and they market drugs for their “cure.”
Three Waters: Ideological Government Indulging Sectional Political Constituency November 5 2021 | From: NZCPR / Various
Tim Hunter’s excellent piece in NBR, 20 August, The flaw at the heart of water reform called attention to the disjunction between councils’ 100% ownership of the infrastructure with their 50% control of the oversight boards.
This understates the impact of the three waters proposal.
Councils now own drinking water, wastewater and stormwater assets, directly or indirectly. That will change.
Only iwi/Māori will have ownership rights. Directly in some respects, indirectly in others. Local authorities will have none.
Legal scholars argue about what is meant by ownership, but it is certain that if one has no rights in relation to a thing - e.g., no right to use it, to enjoy it, to gain a return from it, to dispose of it, to destroy it, to control it or to control its use - one does not own the thing.
The government whilst claiming that the new entities would be publicly owned did not say how. Under pressure, by the end of June the Minister, Nanaia Mahuta, was saying they would be owned by local authorities, by being listed as owners in the legislation.
Crowdfund the Three Waters TV Advert
The Government have proposed to take billions of dollars' worth of drinking water, waste water, and storm water assets off the hands of local councils and put them under the control of four new unelected, co-governed entities. Learn more at www.stopthreewaters.nz
As the proposal deprives local authorities of all the rights of ownership, this “ownership” is a fiction. It is “spin” on a grand scale. Listing in the legislation does not confer ownership if it does not confer ownership rights.
Three Waters to be Dominated by “Rights and Iinterests of iwi/Māori”
Tim Hunter referred to a Cabinet paper, under Mahuta’s name, titled “Protecting and Promoting iwi/Māori rights and Interests in the New Zealand Three Waters Service Delivery Model: Paper Three.”
At least the Minister is sort-of upfront about what she is doing. As you can see, the title is premised on iwi/Maori already having rights and interests in what councils now own.
Analysis of the Cabinet paper shows a clear intention to establish a system dominated by the “rights and interests of iwi/Māori”.
It commences with a preamble from Michael Webster, Secretary of the Cabinet, setting out what has previously been agreed and what will be agreed at the Cabinet meeting.
The first paragraph of Webster’s preamble asks that it be noted that government has ambitions to improve the safety, quality, resilience, accessibility, and performance of the three water services, in a manner that is efficient and affordable for New Zealanders “and which protects and promotes the rights and interests of iwi/Māori in the proposed new three Waters service delivery system.”
Following Webster’s preamble is Minister Mahuta’s Cabinet paper itself. It is a turgid read. Paragraph 8, in the executive summary, comes closest to summarising iwi/Maori rights and interests: water, it says:
"Can be a taonga of particular significance and importance to Maori and the Crown has a duty to protect iwi/Maori rights and interests under the Treaty …, and existing and subsequent Treaty settlements…
The Crown has responsibilities under the principles of Te Tiriti to protect such a relationship and allow for an appropriate exercise of tino rangatiratanga alongside kāwanatanga.”
Note the sleight of hand. Water can be a taonga for Māori. Perhaps it can be, but the question is, is it in this case?
Specifically, is drinking water in a Council dam, reservoir or pipes taonga? Wastewater in sewers and sewage ponds? Stormwater channelled from the streets to the sea?
Sue Grey & Alan Simmons Water Services Bill Select Committee Submission
Sue Grey and Alan Simmons from the NZ Outdoors Party submitting on 22 March 2021 on the Water Services Bill to Parliament's Health Select Committee and the Magna Carta and fundamental rights that must be protected.
"Treasure, anything prized - applied to anything considered to be of value including socially or culturally valuable objects, resources, phenomenon, ideas and techniques.”
Drinking water is vital for life. Without it we die.
It is not just of value; it is essential for everyone. Proper disposal of wastewater is hygiene and disease prevention for all. Proper disposal of stormwater is needed by everyone. Not just Māori.
If taonga is to be the basis for an alleged right or interest, the Cabinet paper should explain why these specific waters have that status, and why iwi/Māori are being singled out as the only ones within the country who have the right or interest.
Paragraph 8 also referred to the Crown’s duty to protect iwi/Maori rights and interests under the Treaty.
Appendix B purports to be an analysis of iwi/Maori rights and interests, but it does not analyse relevant rights and interests.
The analysis should have been directed to Council provided drinking water, wastewater and stormwater systems and the associated Council (not Crown) owned assets (“council services”).
It’s the old trick of asserting something without proof, and then moving quickly on in the hope that no one notices that an unarticulated foundation has never been proved.
The classic example is: “when did you stop beating your wife,” incorporating the assumption that at some stage you started beating your wife.
The first item in Appendix B notes Article two Treaty right to make decisions over resources and taonga which Māori wish to retain and assumes, without proof, that this applies to Council services.
Council services were created by councils using ratepayer funds. Māori cannot “retain” something Māori never had. This is a confidence trick.
It is not retention of rights; what the Minister proposed, and Cabinet agreed to was acquisition of rights.
The second item relies on Article 3 and states “Implicit assurance that rights will be enjoyed equally by Māori with all New Zealanders. This may warrant special measures to attain that equal enjoyment of benefits.”
Another confidence trick. Equality for all is translated into special considerations for some.
Litigation Risk to be Created
Tim Hunter referred to the litigation risk justification for the proposals. Paragraph 22 of the Paper says Crown Law advice was that there are two significant applicable Treaty principles: partnership (requiring the treaty partners to act reasonably and with good faith to each other) and active protection.
It is not in doubt that the Court of Appeal decided in 1987 that those obligations exist.
The Cabinet paper asserts in paragraph 23 that “Failure to meet those obligations would undermine the Māori/Crown relationship and would create a litigation risk for the Crown,” noting that the risk is greater in the Waitangi Tribunal which “would likely deal with a claim about the three waters in its National Freshwater and Geothermal Resources Inquiry.”
No doubt the three waters will now be raised in that Inquiry, but unless and until the Tribunal has identified exactly how iwi/Māori have a right or interest in Council services any different to the right or interest of every New Zealander, there is no possibility of examining the legitimacy of the claim.
In fact, of course, paragraphs 22 and 23 are political, not legal statements.
The Treaty is not part of New Zealand’s domestic law. The principles identified by the Court of Appeal require consideration and implementation only if legislation requires this to happen.
The 1987 decision arose because the State-Owned Enterprises Act provided that the Act must not to be implemented in a manner inconsistent with the principles of the Treaty.
This meant that the Court of Appeal had to ascertain what those principles were and then to decide whether the way in which the Crown was proposing to pass assets over to the enterprises was consistent with the principles.
As the Treaty principles have not been incorporated in legislation relating to the three waters, it can be expected that an attempt to rely on the Treaty in the ordinary courts would need to overcome that argument.
No doubt this explains why the Paper describes the risk before the Tribunal as greater - to imply that there is still a risk before the ordinary courts, when without a departure from current precedent no such risk exists.
Whilst there is no real risk today, this will change if the Minister gets her way.
She proposed that the legislation require the new entities to conduct themselves in accordance with Treaty principles and be a good Treaty partner: paragraph 82.
And she did get her way. Cabinet agreed the legislation would contain a reference to the principles of the Treaty requiring the new entities to maintain systems and processes to ensure they have the capability and capacity to give effect to the principles of the Treaty and to engage with Māori and to understand perspectives of Māori: Webster’s preamble, paragraph 7.
Litigation risk which does not exist now will be deliberately created by the proposed legislation.
Paragraph 7 also recorded agreement for Te Mana o te Wai to be included in legislation.
This means that “water service entities will need the ability to connect governance with delivery on the ground at a hapū/whānau level” (paragraph 16).
The Cabinet paper contains no principled basis for making the provision of the three Waters services subservient to iwi/Māori.
Its impenetrable language is a smokescreen for a political determination to put these assets under effective iwi/Māori governance and control by the structure the legislation will create.
Tim Hunter described the structure. There will be a Regional Representative Group comprising local authority representatives and mana whenua representatives (50% each).
The Group will appoint and monitor an Independent Selection Panel which will in turn appoint and monitor boards of entities which will provide delivery.
Sounds like a good way of choosing directors to make decisions about delivery of water services? Judge for yourselves from what Cabinet agreed.
The board of each water services entity is required to have general collective competence in understanding the principles of the Treaty and mātauranga Maori, tikanga Maori, and te ao Maori, and members with specific expertise in supporting and enabling the exercise of mātauranga Maori, tikanga Maori, kaitiakitanga, and te ao Maori with respect to the delivery of water services.
As noted above, the entities will also need “the ability to connect governance with delivery on the ground at a hapū/whānau level.”
Undemocratic Aims Cearly Revealed
The Minister’s aims are clearly revealed by paragraph 26 where she says, “my reforms of the three Waters system provide the opportunity for a step change in the way iwi/Māori rights and interests are recognised throughout the system.”
The three waters proposal has been deliberately designed to give iwi/Māori the predominating governance influence.
In addition, as Tim Hunter pointed out, it was agreed that the water services entity would fund and support capability and capacity of mana whenua within an entity’s boundary to participate in relation to three waters service delivery.
Bear in mind that getting a return from an asset is a right attributable to an owner.
Therefore, the proposal would confer on iwi/Maori, but no one else, a direct attribute of ownership.
We live in a “free and democratic society”. For example, the rights and freedoms contained in our Bill of Rights may be subject only to such reasonable limits prescribed by law as can be demonstrably justified in such a society.
Yet, the proposals are advanced notwithstanding the “democratic deficit”, as Tim Hunter put it.
This will indicate to many that there is something deeply wrong with the proposal and that it shows that those advancing it are prepared to sacrifice something which should be dear to all.
Unfortunately, it is not dear to all as the manifestly undemocratic nature of the three waters proposal demonstrates.
Philip Joseph in his Constitutional and Administrative Law (5th Ed, p 90) records that at the Constitutional Conference in 2000, “Vocal Māori advocated entrenching the Treaty as supreme law and rejected the Western political ideal of “one person, one vote”. Representative democracy was a Pākehā construct that continued the subjugation of Māori.”
The government has succumbed to sentiments such as those, for if a free and democratic New Zealand were their concern, they could not have gone down this path.
Here we have the Minister recommending and Cabinet agreeing to a section of society being given significant control of assets and substantial influence over the delivery of services which are vital to the health and well-being of all New Zealanders.
This goes well beyond any obligation on the Crown to act reasonably and with good faith to Māori.
If Māori are seeking this - and it is not at all clear they are, for the Paper suggests less than enthusiastic involvement by the Māori who have had to be persuaded to consult and will be paid for their involvement if the system is established - they will hardly be discharging their obligation to act reasonably and with good faith in their dealings with the Crown (taking the Crown to be representing all New Zealanders).
The government has an ideology-driven desire for centralised bureaucratic control.
They do not care if it divorces providers from the communities they are supposed to serve and reduces accountability.
In doing so they are taking the opportunity to indulge a sectional political constituency at the expense of the principles of democracy and the community.
Top New Zealand Scientist Describes “Global Warming” As Pseudo-Science November 4 2021 | From: Stovouno / Various
The widespread obsession with Global-Warming-Climate-Change, in opposition to all factual evidence, is quite incredible. (Dr David Kear)
Dr David Kear is a former Director General of New Zealand’s Department of Scientific and Industrial Research (DSIR) – as such he would have been considered one of New Zealand’s top scientists. He has been publishing on sea levels since the 1950s.
In 2013 Dr Kear prepared a booklet in which he set out his views on the globalist climate project. In the booklet, Dr Kear describes:
His experience with the UN’s International Panel on Climate Change
The corrupted science behind the Global Warming narrative
The corrupted science behind the claims of rising sea-levels
The demonisation by “Global Warmers” of the “essential and innocent gas, carbon dioxide”.
How councils are making zoning & other decisions purely to satisfy a false narrative, with total disregard for the facts
Think globally, act locally (UN catchcry) Dr Kear describes how local councils are ignoring scientific fact in order to satisfy an agenda imposed on them from above.
No matter if scientists, engineers and local observers all indicate that the sea is not rising, even retreating – once a council has decided on a policy that assumes that the sea IS rising, the council is immovable, and makes decisions on zoning and building codes on that basis.
Such policies will be being applied in coastal and non-coastal areas alike, thereby contributing to fulfillment of Agenda 21 goals of eventually eliminating small towns and villages and moving people to “sustainable” megacities.
Dr Kear’s text is reproduced here in its entirety with minimal changes to format.
“Climate Change” has become an important international topic – one might almost say religion. It began life as “Global Warming”.
So very many people, including politicians and “news people”, appear to have been overwhelmed by it, and have led others to believe, and follow the doctrine.
It has sponsored a good deal of international co-operation, which can only have been good.
However, the cost of “Combating Carbon” has been extremely high, and the debt and economic consequences are being passed on to present citizens, and, worse still, to future generations, including all our grandchildren.
This booklet attempts to raise, in citizens’ minds, questions regarding the enormous sums of money and effort being wasted on this topic.
Is it soundly based? Will it “do good” or “do bad” for ordinary citizens? Do those promoting it deserve our attention?
This booklet suggests that Global-Warming-alias-Climate-Change, as proposed by “Global Warmers” makes no sense.
You, as the reader, must judge that for yourself – not to help the writer of this booklet, but to help you and your family.
Do you think after reading all this that the proponents are absolutely reliable?
Should you add your voice to those against it, or at least talk to your councillors and members of parliament and see how they feel?
. The Ancient Acceptable View
Our Earth’s climate is highly variable, and records show clearly that it always has been so. Animals and plants have had no option but to accept what comes, and to adapt life in ways that suit best. Evolution gave some help by introducing “the Survival of the Fittest.”
Humans found early that their discussion and understanding were helped by a belief in some extraneous source being the cause of recorded changes of climate – perhaps with divine power. This booklet uses “Mother Nature” in that role to avoid wordy explanations.
Humans discovered that they could ameliorate climatic effects with buildings, clothing and the rest, and even create “microclimates” through windbreaks, forest clearing, artificial lakes, fossil fuel burning, and the rest.
However, no-one originally thought seriously that man could change the basic influences to our climate – our Sun, our Earth’s rotation, the total quantity of our Planet’s water, and the rest.
Mother Nature is able to change all such things (and has been doing so for some 3,000,000,000 years), but we are not.
The New Belief - The New Problem
Introduction
That ancient and acceptable view was amended in the minds of some people whom I call the “Global Warmers”. I’ve heard nothing convincing about their so-called “Science”; but what they publish convinces me that it’s close to nonsense. The most convincing evidence against it comes mostly from the Global Warmers themselves.
In this booklet, the beliefs of “Global Warming”, and “Climate Change” have initial capital letters. That contrasts with natural warming, or natural changing of climate – indicated by lower case initial letters. The idea of a human cause is much less than 300 years old.
My interest in our changing climate and sea level
During fieldwork for a PhD thesis I found a coastal exposure of soft sandstone at Ohuka Creek, south of Port Waikato. There were Pliocene fossils of marine shellfish below an extensive horizontal bedding plane.
Above that plane were more fossils, but of cool-lovinga plants. A finger could show the exact location of the abrupt change to the cooler climate at the onset of the first of the world-wide Pleistocene glaciations [Ice Ages]. Ice formed widely at the ultimate expense of sea water, so sea level fell.
At Ohuka, sea bed had become land. Such changes are rarely seen in a continuous sequence, so I recorded it in a 1957 scientific paperb. That resulted in my joining an informal world-wide Group researching changing sea levels.
Most interest then was about the rate of sea level rise as the Earth warmed following the “Little Ice Age”. That cool period, from about 1500 to 1700 AD, halted winemaking in England and taro cropping in New Zealand.
Our Group determined the rate of sea level rise in many different World regions, from widely-available readings of tide gauges (less variable than those of thermometers).
The average for us all was 125 mm/century (“125” here). Hence it would take 8 centuries for sea level to rise 1m – no serious threat to us.
Global Warming Dawns
Subsequently, I attended many international science conferences representing DSIR, NZ or Pacific Nations. I noted the words “Global Warming” appearing increasingly in paper titles, and sensed a growing number of adherents.
Those latter arranged a first-ever “Conference on Global Warming” in Vienna in 1985. Unlike most such meetings, where a communiqué summarising achievements was released on the final day, the full results of this one were delayed for over 2 years.
When they did appear (front page NZ Herald, two days before Christmas 1987) a World Declaration included “Overseas scientists have estimated that the seas around New Zealand will rise by up to 1.4 m in the next 40 years”.
That article concentrated on the massive consequent problems, caused by our carbon dioxide (CO2) emissions, but gave no adequate supporting science.
That rate of rise was equivalent to 3,500 mm/century, 28 times faster than our 125. Hence we stupidly ignored it, thinking noone could possibly believe it. But the World did believe, and the Global Warming mirage was born. Had 3,500 been true, sea level should have risen by almost 1 m by today – it hasn’t, not even closely.
This showed unambiguously that those “Overseas Scientists” were not true scientists. They ignored a most important basic rule of true science “Thou shall not publish Science without first checking it.
A check against local tide gauges would have shown how wrong 1.4 m in 40 yrs was; they simply hadn’t bothered to check. That was a First Grave Error.
Australian government scientists were concerned about the effects on Pacific Island nations by any sea level rise of around 3,500 mm/century, and launched a project to determine the correct figure at that time.
They announced the result at the 1992 meeting of SOPAC – a geoscientific organisation of South Pacific nations. Their figure was 122 mm/century, confirming the order of magnitude of our group’s 125 average value.
Fooling the World
The Global Warmers persisted with their use of pseudo-science and made further predictions. Understandably they too all proved wrong.
At conferences I began to hear, regardless of the science involved, when a speaker wished to “rubbish” some scientific idea or research, he/she stated that conclusion firmly, and followed it by “Just like Global Warming”. Clearly the Global Warmers heard that too.
They didn’t change their pseudo-science, but cleverly changed the name to ‘Climate Change”. [One can disprove warming, but the words change of climate can’t be proved wrong].
The United Nations became interested – major sea level rise could cause havoc in low-lying areas or island groups. They established an Intergovernmental Panel for Climate Change (IPCC) and invited nations to send delegates.
Not surprisingly those chosen were almost entirely Global Warmers, because they clearly knew something about it. But to do them credit the Panel members acted a little more like true scientists than those earlier.
They accepted that “1.4 m in 40 yrs” was wrong and re-evaluated it as “0.49 m by 2100”, [roundly a century ahead]. Thus they dropped 3,500 down to 500 mm/century – to 14% of the original.
The cause remained unchanged – our CO2 emissions to the atmosphere. In no other human activity would those involved retain a belief when the most crucial item involved was found to be 86% wrong by themselves. That was a Second Grave Error.
In spite of that, the World was taken in. Politicians were able to promise to save us from the consequences, and the Media had an unending “Field Day”.
It wasn’t that people necessarily believed, but they lacked the courage to risk that it might come true, and that they might have to bear the terrible consequences that had been so forcibly promised.
The New Errors
The new value of “0.49 m by 2100” became widely accepted. In New Zealand, District Councils were instructed by Government Departments, like Conservation and Environment, and by Regional Councils, that they must take full account of the risk that “0.49” implied for a sea level rise by 2100.
Councils had to consider that in the same way as earthquake and volcanic risk. Yet that “0.49” value doesn’t stand up to the most simple scientific scrutiny.
First, the rate is four times faster than the current sea level rise, as indicated by regional, widely-available tide gauges; second, no reason was given for quadrupling the value, and third, good science interprets “0.49” in this sense as being deliberately different from 0.48 and 0.50.
Thus that effectively claims that those who determined that value know, for sure, where sea level will be a century ahead to ±5 mm. That was, and is, patently absurd
These were the Third, Fourth & Fifth Grave Errors.
Further Damning Disclosures
The United Nations appointed me personally to their UNCSTD Committee which assists small countries with their ability regarding Science and Technology Development.
Three or so of us would go to a central city to talk and discuss their options with delegates from regional countries. On one occasion we met in Prague, to assist countries on both sides of the “Iron Curtain”. While there, we were invited to visit the World’s only “Institute for Global Warming”.
It was founded and funded incredibly by the USA and Soviet Union jointly, at the height of their “Cold War”, in an attempt to fund something “for the good of Mankind”, rather than “for armaments”. Some of its staff could have attended the 1985 Conference, and helped create the 1987 World Declaration.
I took the opportunity of asking to see copies of the documents that had been brought to that 1985 Meeting in neutral Austria. Several attendees brought their estimates for sea level rise due to Global Warming.
The values, converted to mm/century, ranged from 500 minimum to 3,500 maximum. There can be no doubt that, to ensure that their 1987 World Declaration made the greatest impact, they published the maximum value – contravening the most sacred rule of acceptable science Thou shall not publish items for monetary, political, or personal gain that are not clear un-biased un-inflated truths.
The fact that “up to” was used, might be allowed in non-scientific areas, but not in Science.
If World Media had distorted the message, the Warmers should immediately have denied what was wrongly claimed, and ensured that the proper statement got equal publicity. Using a maximum value for greatest effect was the Sixth (and Worst) Grave Error.
Old Scientific Conclusions on Climate Ignored
19th Century science posed a important question. Why is our Earth’s average temperature significantly higher than that calculated from the then-recent determinations of our Sun’s distance and its radiation?
Knowing my interests in climate, DSIR librarians found me a publication in German that answered that puzzle early. It had Scandinavian author(s), if I remember correctly.
Its answer was that the CO2 in our atmosphere acts like glass in a glasshouse. Both change the optical physical nature of the Sun’s infra-red rays [that carry the warmth to us] such that they may enter, but cannot then leave. So we are warmed by the heat trapped below our CO2; like the glasshouse below its glass.
I surmise that the Global Warmers, along with Al Gore, noted correctly that CO2 keeps us warm, but thought wrongly that more would make us warmer.
The analogy with glass is important. Horticultural experiments long ago found that more (thicker) glass does not cause more warming, so more CO2 probably doesn’t either. The effect is like that of polarising spectacles, where the change takes place as light begins passing through the lenses.
Thickness makes no difference. Polarisation is either 100%, or not at all. A coincidence timed the Little Ice Age’s end with the Industrial Revolution’s start. The Warmers blamed the undoubted warming on the latter – ignoring the glasshouse evidence.
The New Climate Regime
NIWA The National Institute of Water & Atmospheric Research (NIWA) retains New Zealand climate records. It has a history of persuading successive governments that Global Warming and Climate Change are both real.
It often encouraged media headlines like “We are Getting Warmer”, when any news item suggested any higher temperature. Science progresses by new concepts and ideas being aired freely for scientific scrutiny.
That has sometimes taken centuries to be completed. Although I don’t agree with some of NIWA’s views, it is proper that they should be aired for discussion, as in this booklet.
One announcement (that surely originated from NIWA) was very important to me and all citizens, and was a credit to NIWA itself. At the close of 2007, it stated that the decade just finishing was the warmest since New Zealand records began.
The announcement added that, of those 10 years, 1998 was the warmest ever since records began. I was grateful to NIWA, and concluded that 2007 was no warmer than 1998, and probably cooler.
I could assume therefore that warming at our 125 rate finished in 1998. In the roundest of figures, the Little Ice Age lasted for some 200 years. There would be no conflict with accepting that the following warming should similarly last for some 200 years.
As always in Science one seeks confirmation whenever possible. I have seen many items that lead to that same view of “no warming since 1998”.
The best was a written debate in the Imperial Engineer of autumn 2008. [That scientific journal is produced for engineering graduates of Imperial College, London – arguably UK’s top university in engineering.]
The debate was on whether Humans were to blame for current changes of climate. Prof Joanna Haigh blamed Humans, Lord Monckton blamed Mother Nature.
The only point on which they both agreed was that there had been no warming since 1998. That confirmed NIWA’s statement perfectly, along with several comparable pronouncements.
My conclusion is that warming since the Little Ice Age’s end is now almost certainly finished. That was supported further by NIWA’s release at the end of 2012,concerning the Eastern Bay of Plenty.
Their report was that 2012 had been drier andcolder than 2011. Citizens also notice that warming seems to be over.
Skiing seasons are extended, winter fires are needed earlier, and some of us travelling overseas have been asked by those from Queensland, even Hawaii, whether we in New Zealand feel colder generally – as they do.
I conclude that the New Zealand climate has not been warming since 1998.
The Affects on Citizens
Astronomical Cost of Major Measures to Combat a Non-Existent Threat: Politicians and the Media have listened to the proponents of Global-Warming-Climate-Change, but don’t seem to have made any critical assessment of it all.
Perhaps they were bemused by the Global Warmers constantly naming themselves and associates as “Scientists”. As has been shown, those people disregarded the basic rules of true Science. Their political and media audiences innocently believed the statements – which contained grave errors.
Innocents in politics and the media were badly mis-led. They gladly supported projects to combat the non-existent threat of Global-Warming-Climate-Change.
The projects were unnecessary because there was no threat; extremely costly in money time and effort; full of praise where ridicule was deservedmisleading about benefits & options; and above all diversionary away from today’s real problems.
A huge international bureaucratic industry was born – with Cabinet Ministers, government departments, company sections, travel, conferences, treaties, carbon credits, and carbon trading, and very much more.
The challenge was often heard that we must curb our carbon emissions or sacrifice our grandchildren’s well-being. In truth, those children were being saddled with a gigantic debt to pay for everything encompassed by the Warmers’ “carbon footprints”, including the salaries and expenses of the loudest proponents.
Perhaps the saddest part has been that the essential and innocent gas, carbon dioxide, has been demonised and criminalised. It is essential in creating plant growth using chlorophyll and photo-synthesis.
It is thus essential for our very existence. Crops grow better in a CO2-enriched and warmer atmosphere, when heated by an oldfashioned vertical kerosene heater. It gives off “carbon emissions” that are valuable to us all.
Costs and Dangers of Local Measures to combat the Non-Existent Threat: Local authorities were compelled to adopt measures designed to combat the nonexistent threat.
Typically, maps were drawn showing the coastline’s position now, and in the year 2100 with intermediate zone(s), assuming that sea level would rise 0.49 m in the next 100 years.
Onerous restrictions have been emplaced within the zones that were thus defined.
Many regions have vast quantities of sand transported by rivers to their coast, released by the erosion of hills and mountains, continuously raised by Mother Nature.
Their coastline extends seawards steadily. Citizens in such regions have long noted (with surveys and photos) that the coastline has a net seawards movement. It contrasts with many Councils’ imposed belief in “0.49” which demands landwards movement (“inundation”).
Councils seem unable to accept their citizens’ constant and loud protests about all this. They seem to feel that higher authorities insist that they must ignore such views.
It is not just (a) the absurdity of restrictions about where houses may be erected (only inland of certain lines), etc.; or (b) the increasing costs to those building their first home. At the other end of the scale there are enforced dangers; a requirement for higher floor levels, leading to more steps, with unnecessary risks to elderly folk falling, when using them.
The fact that sea level is no longer rising is a new extra factor for councils to ignore. In the example of Ohope Beach, a Commission of enquiry, set up by Council, backed the Council’s view of landwards inundation.
That rejected all citizens’ factual evidence of seawards net movement for periods ranging from 50 to 5,000 years. Council also rejected the advice, supporting the Citizens, by one who was highly qualified in engineering and science and had had long and successful experience in coastal work.
Much worse, the Council’s own appointed consultants provided an additional report based on every coastal survey for which a record was available.
It showed a“retreatof the sea” [seaward shoreline movement, or accretion] at the only three Ohopesites, of 0.30-0.94 m/yr over 130 years that was still ongoing in 2008. Clearlyneither Council nor Commission had bothered to read that critical report, writtenby highly regarded consultants, who had been appointed for this project by theCouncil itself.
The widespread obsession with Global-Warming-Climate-Change, in opposition to all factual evidence, is quite incredible. It leads to unfair treatment of some citizens, and a massive bill for all, for nothing useful. When will citizens revolt effectively against such callous disregard for their observations and wishes, by those who are essentially their elected employees?
When will the perpetrators examine the basis of their ideology, and realise that it’s based on unfounded unscientific beliefs, not on confirmed, widely-available investigations by real scientists who abide by the moral standards of their profession?
The Deeper Reason For Drug Ads On Television & The Pharmaceutical Industry Is Largely Run By Leftists, Stunning New Research Finds… Vaccine Mandates, Drugging Of Children, Chemotherapy And More November 3 2021 | From: JonRappoport / NaturalNews / Various
Television viewers are inundated with drug ads from Big Pharma. It’s a flood.
Have you ever heard of these drugs? Otezla, Xeljanz, Namzaric, Keytruda, Breo, Cosentyz? Not likely. If you have, do you know what conditions they treat? Highly unlikely. But there they are, splashed in commercials.
Why? Who is going to remember to ask their doctor whether these and other obscure meds are right for them?
What’s going on here?
The answer is: It doesn't matter what drugs are being advertised. If Pharma can pay enough TOTAL money for ads, for ALL drugs, and dominate the allotted TV time for commercials, it can control the news - and that is exactly what it wants to do.
Reporting on them, wall to wall, isn’t good for the drug business. However, as an industry ponying up billions of dollars for TV ads, Pharma can limit exposure and negative publicity. It can (and does) say to television networks: If you give us a hard time on the news, we’ll take our ad money and go somewhere else.
Boom. End of problem.
Face it, the billions of dollars Pharma is paying for TV ads are a drop in the bucket, compared with its profits gained from selling the drugs. The ads are a good investment. As a bribe.
Control the news; There is another reason for the insane flood of TV drug ads:
By their sheer number, they convince viewers that medical drugs (no matter what they are) are absolutely necessary.
Hour by hour, viewers numbly watch drug commercial after commercial.
The overall message is: To keep illness from your door, to cure illness, to alleviate illness, you must take these medicines.
THIS IS LIFE IN THE 21ST CENTURY. You’re all sick, and you need help, and this is the ONLY kind of help there is.
The drug companies could invent names of fake drugs that don’t even exist, advertise them in a cascade on television, with the same intent. DRUGS ARE AS VITAL TO LIFE AS WATER OR AIR.
But what about all those dire warnings of side effects from the drugs? By law, the companies must include them in their commercials.
Well, the companies have calculated that, on balance, the stark, front-line, unending message of DRUGS, DRUGS, AND MORE DRUGS will outweigh the warnings in viewers’ minds.
If the television audience is nailed with the idea that they can’t escape; that their health always hangs in the balance; that dire illnesses are always waiting in the shadows to strike; that the slightest ache or pain could be a precursor to a crippling or fatal disease; and drugs are the only solution and protection - they’re going to overlook the warnings about side effects.
All in all, drug ads are news.
That’s the approach. Pharma is blasting out 24/7 news asserting modern medicine’s central and commanding role in the life of every human.
It’s a gigantic and stupendous piece of mind control, but when did that ever stop tyrants from inventing reality for the masses?
Implicit in “ask your doctor if drug X is right for you,” is the message: “go to your doctor.” That’s the key. If the ads can put a viewer into the system, he will be diagnosed with something, and he’ll be given a drug for it.
So the drug ads are also promotions for doctors, who are the arbiters and the decision makers. Some kind of medical need (drugs) always exists - and the doctor will tell you what it is. And all patients should OBEY. Even if, in the process, they go broke.
Take the case of Opdivo, a drug that treats squamous non-small cell lung cancer. Cost? $12,500 a month. Patients on Medicare will pay $2500 a month out of their own pockets. And the result?
Wall St, Journal: “In the clinical study on which the Opdivo ad bases its claims, the drug extended median patient survival to 9.2 months from the start of treatment…”
The cancer patient pays $22,500 for nine months of survival, during which the suffering continues, and then he dies.
The ad isn’t mentioning THAT.
The ad relies on the doctor to convince the patient to go along with this lunatic program.
The Pharmaceutical Industry Is Largely Run By Leftists, Stunning New Research Finds… Vaccine Mandates, Drugging Of Children, Chemotherapy And More
New research led by Crowdpac, a nonpartisan polling group, has taken a hard look at federal campaign contributions across a number of different industries.
And as it turns out, Big Pharma is largely run by members of the Left-wing - as is the entertainment industry, the news media, academia, tech and other influential industries.
Across the board, liberals are dominating some very powerful arenas, and often are virtually unchallenged by anyone else in their profession.
Ideological echo chambers exist not just on social media but across a variety of industries - it is no wonder leftist ideologies are now running amok. Take a look at Big Tech: As the Crowdpac data indicates, tech is largely a liberal industry.
Some of the biggest tech companies right now are patting each other on the back for censoring conservatives as “hate speech.” They have no foil, and there are no conservative tech companies to take a stand against this blatant abuse of power.
Similarly, Big Pharma is also largely run by leftists - which explains the industry’s continuous attempts at overthrowing personal autonomy by way of vaccine mandates, medical kidnapping and more.
To conduct their research, Crowdpac assigned individual donors a “score” of being more liberal or conservative, based on who they donated money to.
Crowdpac founder and CEO Steve Hilton told Business Insider that the goal of this research is to provide people with “good objective, nonpartisan information about the candidates on their ballot in a simple form that they can understand.”
He added that “research shows that campaign contributions are the best predictor of how a candidate will behave in office.”
Hilton says the hope is that more small donations will reduce the pull of “big money” in politics.
The research led by Crowdpac has also provided insight into the political leanings of major industries here in the United States:
Click on the image above to view a larger version in a new window
The pharmaceutical industry is overwhelmingly liberal with a score of 2.8L - though not quite as liberal as Big Tech, the news media, academia or the entertainment industry, who are admittedly hard to beat when it comes to radical leftism.
As the industry which stands to profit most from vaccine mandates, toxic chemotherapy, medical kidnapping and more, it is no surprise that Big Pharma votes for liberals: A vote for Big Government means a vote for big money for them.
Big Pharma and Big Government Go Hand-in-Hand
The pharmaceutical industry’s campaign donations are just the tip of the iceberg when it come to Big Pharma’s ties to Big Government. For example, Senator Dr. Richard Pan is notorious for his involvement in creating vaccine mandates in California, SB277.
Senator Pan has extensive ties to the pharma industry, having received an estimated $95,000 from Merck alone during the 2010 election cycle.
Reports indicate that Pan received another campaign donation from a pharma company just before diving into SB277. Over the years, pharma companies have donated millions of dollars to California political candidates.
And it’s not just individual politicians, either - the pharma industry has entire federal agencies doing their bidding. Look no further than the CDC for proof of that.
One of the more shocking yet little known details is that the CDC takes money from Big Pharma indirectly through a shadow organization known as The CDC Foundation.
This foundation’s sole purpose is to accept money from Big Pharma and other corporations, and funnel it to a federal agency.
As reported:
"During the 2016 fiscal year alone, the CDC Foundation raised over $42 million.
The donor list for that year includes dozens of corporations, but some of the more notable ones include Bayer Corporation, Cargill, Inc., The Coca Cola Company, Genzyme Corporation, Johnson & Johnson, Merck, Pfizer Foundation, United Industries Corporation, and countless others.”
This is government-sanctioned corruption at its finest. But it gets worse: Medical kidnappings are on the rise, and you can bet that Big Pharma’s ties to Big Government are to blame.
Already in January three leading US digital outlets - BuzzFeed, the Huffington Post, and Vice announced layoffs that have left many accomplished journalists unemployed.
Consolidation of journalism looks set to continue unabated as larger media conglomerates swallow up smaller players globally. We also appear to be witnessing the death throes of the concept of ‘objective’ truth in journalism.
However, perhaps that is not at all as bad as it sounds, and we are just finally waking up to the reality that it never really existed in the first place.
Also, on the positive side, smaller independent players with innovative digital models and a more open approach like our ScoopPro service look likely to be more relevant than ever to their reader communities in this increasingly fractured and homogenised media environment.
When an industry is bleeding, it tends to bring out the sharks - now, it seems even the sharks are being attacked by other sharks. Take the Gannett newspaper chain: one of the largest players in a shrunken industry, it owns dozens of leading papers across the US, including flagships such as USA Today and the Detroit Free Press.
Some see it as a perfect candidate to snap up some of the other players in the market. However, unfortunately for Gannett, competitor Digital First Media has thrown a large wrench into the works, by quietly acquiring 7.5 percent of the chain's stock as a prelude to launching a takeover bid of Gannett.
The Drum notes that since Gannett owns Newsquest, a major UK newspaper publisher, any move to acquire Gannett could set off a consolidation spree in Great Britain as well.
Also in the UK, an independent, government-commissioned report on the state of the media industry warns that closure of local newspapers threatens democracy.
The Cairncross review concluded that many local newspapers are owned by debt-laden publishers which have cut investment and sacked hundreds of journalists in an effort to maintain profit margins.
Here in New Zealand, in 2018, Australian Nine Entertainment took over Stuff’s parent company Fairfax Media. The impact of this merger on the future ownership of Stuff and its New Zealand media holdings remain unknown, but speculation abounds that it will be sold off.
Likely buyers could be Mediaworks or NZME or even TVNZ, in each case, leading to further consolidation (and potentially more commerce commission complications).
Stuff's earnings before interest, tax, depreciation and amortisation shrank 27 per cent to $40.5m in the year ended June 2018.
Revenue fell 7.5 per cent to $301.4m. The NZ print newspaper market also shrunk considerably last year after Stuff closed more than 35% of its print newspapers and announced additional cuts in community papers.
In November 2018, MediaWorks also announced that it had signed a conditional merger agreement with Australian outdoor advertising company QMS.
If the deal goes through, QMS will have a substantial shareholding in MediaWorks, however, current owner Oaktree Capital Management will maintain the majority shareholding in the merged entity.
Stuff's news clout and large digital assets would add another appealing layer to the MediaWorks offering. However, such a deal seems unlikely to get past the Commerce Commission, which has already shown a strong tendency to protect media plurality.
Is all of this talk of mergers and acquisitions and positive outlooks just reshuffling deckchairs on the Titanic? Probably. Both Herald and Stuff, NZ’s biggest digital players, are now essentially making nothing after tax and amortisation etc, and both have now stopped paying dividends.
It appears that they are persisting in fudging their revenue statistics to make things seem rosier than the reality. Why? Because they are denial about how bad things are in the online Media industry.
They are afraid that talking about this will have a further negative impact on their dwindling advertising revenues.
One of the most positive aspects of the ScoopPro revenue model is that we are no longer reliant on these advertising revenues to stay alive, making us more resilient than most.
Looking around the NZ online media, not many other organisations can say this right now. With a few exceptions like NBR and ODT (Paywall) and Newsroom (NewsroomPro although still reliant on sponsorship) and Stuff (Various associated offerings like Fibre and streaming services), the majority of newsrooms seem to be reliant on either advertising revenue or sponsorship market.
In 2018, NZME (the NZ Herald) announced the introduction of digital subscriptions for its premium content, but the exact launch time has not been announced.
Many other publishers will probably follow suit in 2019, however, exactly how much revenue this approach will bring them is yet to be seen.
The End of Objectivity?
The fingers of blame for all these takeovers and layoffs of journalists are of course quick to point at the great bogeymen of our media age - Facebook and Google. Many have rightly warned about the threat to democracy posed by this trend.
Democratic Rep. Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez, for example, has highlighted tech monopolies and concentrated media ownership as the biggest threats to democracy.
There is certainly a lot of truth in that critique, however maybe that is not the end of the story. Antonio García Mar postulates that perhaps American journalism isn’t dying, it’s just returning to its opinionated roots.
Instead, he says, what is dying is that flavor of ‘objective’ journalism that purports (usually without basis) to record an unbiased account of world events:
“We take journalistic objectivity to be as natural and immutable as the stars, but it’s a relatively short-lived artifact of 20th-century America.”
" ‘Objectivity’ is an atavism from the days of studiously inoffensive and circulation-expanding reportage lavishly supported by unquestioning advertiser budgets.
That’s all gone now. And it’s not clear that this studious “objectivity” more closely approximates the truth. Iraq and the WMDs? Madame President?
Those were headlines produced under rigorously “objective” (and wrong) coverage, while those who got it right * and there were some - spoke from less regimented perches.”
More support for this viewpoint comes from The View from Somewhere, a new podcast by Lewis Raven Wallace exploring the fraught history of journalistic objectivity.
“A lot of great journalism in the United States and all over the world has been journalism that stood for something,” says Wallace, who was fired by American Public Media’s Marketplace in 2017 after he refused to delete a blog post questioning the value of traditional objectivity.
“Standing up to power requires standing for something.”
As the US political commentator Michael Parenti once observed: 'Bias in favor of the orthodox is frequently mistaken for "objectivity". Departures from this ideological orthodoxy are themselves dismissed as ideological.'
Looking at the purportedly ‘objective’ mainstream media coverage of the current Venezuela crisis, which is incredibly similar to the ‘consent manufacturing’ narratives of the Iraq and Libya invasions, I am inclined to agree with this view.
The general approach of the supposedly ‘objective’ mainstream media to Venezuela (including the anti-trump self-described ‘resistance’ media) has almost unilaterally fallen in unquestioningly behind the Trump administration’s party line in support for military intervention whilst ignoring the facts, such as the effects of illegal US sanctions and ongoing covert activities to destabilise the country.
If the idea of the mainstream liberal media as the dispenser of ‘objective’ truth is behind such manipulation of the population into support for such abominations, then I want no part in it, and will certainly not shed a tear for its demise.
The highly negative side of this Balkanisation of the US media is of course the increased success of highly partisan journalism such as Fox News and other rabidly neocon news outlets.
Winners in this polarised environment on the left seem to be The Times and the Washington Post, both highly critical of Trump.
It seems that in a polarised society, people are seeking out the news that confirms their existing bias leading to opposing echo chambers and ‘filter bubbles’ and very little compromise or real dialogue.
However, arguably an ‘objective’ journalism environment is exactly what has allowed such ‘news’ providers to have any credibility at all as something other than the opinion of a selection of (mostly white, male and wealthy) editors and shareholders.
Perhaps the time has come more a more nuanced and mature approach to the understanding of ‘truth’ and ‘objectivity’ that is fit for today’s online media environment.
However, a more positive aspect of the movement away from this ‘objective’ journalism is the rise of a particular hybrid of robust investigation and opinion oriented journalism.
The independent and member funded ‘engaged journalism’ approach has been pioneered by De Correspondent in the Netherlands and has been studied extensively by Jay Rosen and team at the Membership Puzzle Project in the USA.
This ‘engaged’ journalism approach “seeks to build a newsroom optimized for trust” and taking into account the needs and views of the community of readers by harnessing the depth of knowledge of the wider community of readers and subject experts.
Call it what you like; ‘engaged journalism’, ‘community centred journalism’ or ‘collaborative journalism’, this approach seems to be resonating with audiences.
Last month, The Correspondent, the English-language expansion of the Dutch news site, smashed through the US$2.5 million target for its launch crowdfunding campaign by more than $100,000 with over 40,000 members joining.
This De Correspondent approach does not censor or force its journalists to pretend to be objective.
Rather De Correspondent allows its journalists scope to form an opinion and take a transparency, usually ‘solutions-focused’, approach to investigations in collaboration with the input of readers.
De Correspondent journalists are expected to offer their readers transparency via access to their train of thought leading up to the definitive story and can be open about any problems they have with truth verification and challenges to interpret what they learn, observe, or experience.
Founder Rob Wijnberg believes this conception of journalism should not be equated with partisan reporting or with the “journalism of assertion” for that matter.
Although subjectivity and personality is embraced, independent truth verification remains at the heart of De Correspondent’s journalism practice.
Yet, by acknowledging the participatory culture and collective intelligence they tone down the universalistic connotation of “the truth” a notch.
This approach recognises our current culture as “an era in which truth is no longer set in stone, but can be constantly updated and subsequently contested in thousands of responses below the article.
Another interesting approach pioneered by Cathrine Gyldensted in Denmark is called ‘constructive journalism’.
Much like ‘solutions journalism,’ this approach focuses on reporting news in a more engaging, constructive way. A central component of such an approach is the “wellbeing model of the world”, in which journalists challenge their default setting of seeing people as victims to also see them as people with strengths and resilience – and report on that too.
Such an approach could attempt to encourage collaboration between politicians or opposing sides of a debate, thus helping to break down silos and promote more understanding and dialogue in online discourse.
Los Alamos Research Explains How 5G Terahertz Waves Tear Apart DNA & Why We Must Stop The 5G Wireless Network November 1 2021 | From: CollectiveEvolution / Sott / Various
What are Terahertz waves? They’re the radiation that fills the spot between microwaves and infrared waves on the electromagnetic spectrum.
These waves can pass through non-conducting materials like clothes, brick, wood, paper, etc.
As a result, they can be utilized within cameras to look inside an enclosed structure, or sealed envelopes, into living rooms in order to “frisk” people at a distance.
In Brief:
The Facts: A model of the way the THz waves interact with DNA explains how DNA damage may occur and why evidence has been so hard to gather. This is simply a model, it's not experimental, but it does raise cause for concern.
Reflect On: Why are so many technologies approved for use without conducting the appropriate safety tests first? Studies have already shown cause for concern, yet too often the research goes ignored.
It’s not just Terahertz waves, it’s multiple sources of electromagnetic radiation. In the past, there were no artificial sources of electromagnetic radiation. Now, we are bombarded with them.
Cell phones, wifi, 5G and numerous other sources are all heavily present in our environment, and the corporations putting out this technology have not done any appropriate safety testing.
The studies that have emerged about this subject are eye-opening and very concerning.
The statement below emphasizes my point, which comes from Dr. Sharon Goldberg, an internal medicine physician. Dr. Goldberg announced this at Michigan’s 5G Small Cell tower legislation hearing.
"Wireless radiation has biological effects. Period. This is no longer a subject for debate when you look at PubMed and the peer-review literature.
These effects are seen in all life forms; plants, animals, insects, microbes. In humans, we have clear evidence of cancer now: there is no question.
We have evidence of DNA damage, cardiomyopathy, which is the precursor of congestive heart failure, neuropsychiatric effects…”
Dr. Martin Blank, Ph.D., from the Department of Physiology and Cellular Biophysics at Colombia University, is one of the leading experts in this area of study. He explained:
"Putting it bluntly they (EMFs) are damaging the living cells in our bodies and killing many of us prematurely.
There are thousands of peer-reviewed studies on this subject, and hundreds of scientists have been petitioning the United Nations to pay attention.
The problem is the industry and how they’ve taken over medical science. Information about harmful technological products that make a very small group of people billions of dollars every year is somehow brushed under the rug. Corporate control over science and government health regulators like the FDA and CDC is completely out of control.
In this article, I’d like to focus on research conducted by Boian S. Alexandrov et.al. at the Center for Nonlinear Studies at Los Alamos National Laboratory in New Mexico.
It revealed that these Terahertz waves could “…unzip double-stranded DNA, creating bubbles that could significantly interfere with processes such as gene expression and DNA replication.”
This is concerning because Terahertz waves are used, as previously mentioned, to peer through things. Airport scanners are a perfect example. That does not mean that airport scanners can rip apart DNA, but it does suggest we need further testing on these instruments.
These Terahertz waves are absorbed and emitted can also be used to determine the chemical composition of a material. Even though they don’t travel far inside the body, there is hope that the waves can be used to spot tumours near the surface of the skin.
The author of the study states;
"With all the potential, it’s no wonder that research on terahertz waves has exploded in the last ten years or so.”
He then asks the question;
"But what of the health effects of terahertz waves?
At first glance, it’s easy to dismiss any notion that they can be damaging.
Terahertz photons are not energetic enough to break chemical bonds or ionise atoms or molecules, the chief reasons why higher energy photons such as x-rays and UV rays are so bad for us. But could there be another mechanism at work?”
Apparently, the evidence that Terahertz radiation (which is different from the wireless and other EMF radiation that’s put out by multiple devices) damages biological systems is mixed. Alexandrov outlines how some studies reported significant damage, while others showed none.
This is concerning, regardless of how many studies have shown no DNA damage. The fact is that there are studies that do show damage. Even if only one study proved that there could be DNA damage, it’s confusing as to why this technology would be approved.
Alexandrov and his team created a model to investigate how the fields interact with double-stranded DNA. What they found was remarkable.
"They say that although the forces generated are tiny, resonant effects allow THz waves to unzip double-stranded DNA, creating bubbles in the double strand that could significantly interfere with processes such as gene expression and DNA replication.
It’s important to note that this particular study was a model, it wasn’t actually experimental. However, the team still presented enough information to suggest this technology could be dangerous to our health, especially given the hazardous biological effects of other waves on the electromagnetic spectrum.
"This should set the cat among the pigeons. Of course, terahertz waves are a natural part of environment, just like visible and infrared light. But a new generation of cameras are set to appear that not only record terahertz waves but also bombard us with them.
And if our exposure is set to increase, the question that urgently needs answering is what level of terahertz exposure is safe.”
The last point made in the quote above is important to note. We’ve never been bombard this much - our exposure has never been so high.
North America also seems to be running behind, as multiple countries have completely banned wifi technology and cell phones in nursing homes and elementary schools because of the dangerous effects these technologies can have on our health.
It’s concerning that we are approving technology that use these types of waves when one of the only studies on this subject outlines how “research in this field has only just begun, both at home and abroad.
In this paper, research progress with respect to THz radiation, including its biological effects, mechanisms and methods of protection, will be reviewed.” (source)
That paper goes on to emphasize that, although many biological effects are unknown, tremendous advancements in medical technology could come from their use.
This wouldn’t be the first time we’ve seen potentially dangerous technologies being used in the healthcare system, such as mammograms.
Who knows! I guess we will have to wait and see until more research emerges. At the end of the day, a lot of technology and pharmaceuticals we use have not gone through appropriate safety testing, and so we may be seeing the same thing here.
If you want to see some of this science, the best place place to start your research is with the Environmental Health Trust.
Although it’s unclear what will happen here, there is still so much electromagnetic radiation in our environment that it’s important to protect yourself.
There are many things you can do to combat electromagnetic radiation. You can have a wired internet connection, unplug all of your devices before you sleep, purchase EMF protective clothing, and even paint your walls with EMF protective paint.
You can live a healthy lifestyle, but I believe the mind body connection is so strong that anything can be mitigated through the deepest levels of healing.
Never forget that this is a 'two way street' in that those countries who control the satellites basically will incredibly control all people on Earth.
The global deployment of the fifth-generation wireless network,(5G) constitutes an experiment on humanity and the environment that is nothing less than a crime under international law.
Yet the subject of the the enormous dangers of the imminent and rapid deployment of 5G technology was not mentioned when world leaders gathered earlier this month in Poland for the UN 'Earth' conference.
An inconvenient truth perhaps that our leaders could argue was not part of the overall subject in Poland of the well being of the Earth and all its inhabitants. Give me a break.
In Poland details of an important scientific report, commissioned by the UN, were released that stated the world has under 12 years to drastically cut emissions to avert catastrophe - that appeared to create a sense of urgency causing this closing statement.
"To waste this opportunity in [Poland] would compromise our last best chance to stop runaway climate change," UN Secretary General Antonio Guterres said. "It would not only be immoral, it will be suicidal."
What is more suicidal, insane is a more appropriate word, is not to address the terrible impact on the Earth of the introduction of 5G.
Some of the world's largest companies, with the support of their governments, are poised, over the next two years, to roll out 5G. This is set to deliver what is acknowledged to be "unprecedented societal change" on a global scale.
As if that will not increase the potential in future for more cyber attacks by States and potentially terrorist organisations as well as further contribute to the ever emerging disturbing social networks consequences of 'people manipulation' by huge corporations and States led by by mainly psychopathic and inept political leaders.
The great writer Aldous Huxley, imagined such forms of 'technological progress' in his famous book Brave New World written nearly a 100 years ago.
The late Stephen Hawkins before he died said the greatest threat to mankind was artificial intelligence (AI) - well 5G is the road that will eventually lead us to AI domination.
5G will bring us "smart" homes, "smart" businesses, "smart" highways, "smart" cities and self-driving "smart" cars. Virtually everything we own and buy, from TVs to refrigerators and washing machines to milk cartons, hairbrushes and infants' nappies, will contain antennas and microchips and will be connected wirelessly to the Internet.
Every person on Earth will have instant access to super-high-speed wireless communications from any point on the planet, even in rainforests, mid-ocean and the Antarctic.
Never forget that this is a 'two way street' in that those countries who control the satellites basically will incredibly control all people on Earth. An almost unimaginable prospect.
This will allow the ultimate potential for the manipulation of the entire world's populace by essentially only 'Super Power' countries, dominated by American corporations who seem led by, what has become the acknowledged term, 'the Deep State' and not by the American President.
Trump cannot get his own Administration to heed his orders; witness the supposed Syrian troop withdrawal as being but one example.
The planned density to achieve global 5G of radio frequency transmitters is unfathomable. In addition to millions of new 5G base stations on Earth and 20,000 new satellites in space, an estimated 200 billion "transmitting objects", will be part of the Internet of "things" by 2020, and one trillion further "things" a few years later.
Commercial 5G at lower frequencies and slower speeds was deployed in Qatar, Finland and Estonia in mid-2018. The rollout of 5G at extremely high (millimetre wave) frequencies has now begun this month making the immediacy to reverse this plan absolutely essential.
Despite widespread denial, the evidence that radio frequency (RF) radiation is harmful to life is already overwhelming. The accumulated clinical evidence of sick and injured human beings, experimental evidence of damage to DNA, cells and organ systems in a wide variety of plants and animals, and epidemiological evidence that the major diseases of modern civilisation; cancer, heart disease and diabetes are in large part caused by electromagnetic pollution, forms a literature base of well over 10,000 peer reviewed studies.
If 5G is implemented, no person, no animal, no bird, no insect and no plant on Earth will be able to avoid exposure, 24 hours a day, 365 days a year, to levels of RF radiation that are tens to hundreds of times greater than what exists today, without any possibility of escape anywhere on the planet.
Each 5G phone will contain dozens of tiny antennas, all working together to track and aim a narrowly focused beam at the nearest cell tower. In America, the US Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has permitted the effective power of those beams to be as much as 20 watts, ten times more powerful than the levels permitted for current phones using 3G and 4G.
At least five international companies, including defense companies like BOEING, are proposing to provide 5G from space from a combined 20,000 satellites in low and medium Earth orbit that will blanket the Earth with powerful, focused, steerable beams.
The alteration of the Earth's electromagnetic environment may be an even greater threat to life than the radiation from ground-based antennas where the harmful effects of radio frequency radiation have already been proven.
The WHO's International Agency for Research on Cancer (IARC) produced recently overwhelming evidence, including the latest studies on cell phone use and brain cancer risks, indicating that RF radiation is proven carcinogenic to humans and should now be classified as a "Group 1 carcinogen" along with tobacco smoke and asbestos.
As dramatic as it sounds, the deployment of 5G satellites and their accompanying earth stations must be stopped now.
This is a last chance situation so people must take to the streets all over the world, as they did in Paris, and force, or change, their governments.
2019 could be the year of revolutions as we the people become ever increasingly disenchanted with our incompetent and, in most cases, corrupt bureaucrats and politicians along with hopeless and useless world institutions like the UN and the EU.
Comment: The dangers of 5G are simply jaw-dropping when looked at in any detail, yet the people seem to be so enamored with the prospects of self-driving cars and refrigerators that order your groceries, that they willingly ignore the serious threat to their health. The world is about to become a lot more dangerous, once 5G is unleashed.
Eighteen Reasons Why I Don’t Celebrate Halloween October 31 2021 | From: EndOfTheAmericanDream
This year, 64 percent of all Americans [and many others in the West] will celebrate Halloween, but I will not be one of them. For me, it is a wretched, horrible holiday that celebrates the darkest side of humanity, and it is deeply rooted in ancient pagan traditions that would get people thrown in prison if they attempted to duplicate them today.
With each passing year, the sexually suggestive costumes being marketed to our young girls become even skankier, the horror movies become darker and even more demonic, and the number of Americans that participate in occult ceremonies just continues to grow.
In fact, it has been estimated that the number of self-identified witches in the United States is doubling every 30 months. Those that are deeply into the occult take this holiday very seriously, and the dark forces that they are dealing with are very real. So no, I don’t want anything to do with this festival of death. In no particular order, the following are 18 reasons why I don’t celebrate Halloween...
1. I don’t want anyone in my family to observe a holiday that celebrates death, witchcraft and the occult. This year, millions of Americans will participate in activities that could potentially open up a door for demonic activity.
2. The average American spends $74.34 on the holiday. I would rather save the money.
3. Millions of women use Halloween as an excuse to dress like street walkers, and millions of men use Halloween as an excuse to act like sexual predators.
4. Even little girls as young as three years old are being dressed up in sexually provocative costumes. What kind of message does this send to them?
5. Dressing up little children as ghosts, demons and vampires is not healthy for them. In recent years, there has been a trend to make costumes for children as hellish as possible.
7. In ancient Britain, the festival known as Samhain was celebrated on October 31st. It was supposedly a day when dead souls would revisit their old homes. Personally, I don’t want anything to do with contacting the souls of the dead.
8. According to the History Channel, Samhain was also the day when the Druids “gathered to burn crops and animals as sacrifices to the Celtic deities”.
10. According to Wiccans, Halloween is the time when the veil between the living and the dead is considered to be the thinnest. They believe that on this day their god “dies” and is reborn every year on the Winter Solstice. This year the winter solstice falls on December 22nd.
11 In ancient times, the resurrection of the sun god required human and animal sacrifice. The following is what occult expert Bill Schnoebelen says that the Druids would do at this time of the year…
Druids worshiped the sun god, called by names like Bel (Ba’al?) or Chrom. On October 31, they believed that he died and went into the kingdom of the dead, Anwynn. The purpose of Samhain was to insure his return. Even witches admit this involved human sacrifice.
Both animal and human blood were believed to be needed to resurrect Bel on Samhain. Human blood was believed to open the gates of Anwynn and released the spirits for a night. Thus, October 31 came to be associated with ghosts. This is not just history. Samhain is still celebrated by Pagans and is the most solemn ceremony on their “religious calendar”.
12. To this day, animal torture and sacrifice is still practiced on Halloween by occultists. Many animal shelters will not adopt out black cats during the month of October for this very reason.
As a result of their efforts to wipe out “pagan” holidays, such as Samhain, the Christians succeeded in effecting major transformations in it. In 601 A.D. Pope Gregory the First issued a now famous edict to his missionaries concerning the native beliefs and customs of the peoples he hoped to convert.
Rather than try to obliterate native peoples’ customs and beliefs, the pope instructed his missionaries to use them: if a group of people worshipped a tree, rather than cut it down, he advised them to consecrate it to Christ and allow its continued worship.
The idea of trick-or-treating is further related to the ghosts of the dead in pagan, and even Catholic, history. For example, among the ancient Druids, “The ghosts that were thought to throng about the houses of the living were greeted with a banquet-laden table.
At the end of the feast, masked and costumed villagers representing the souls of the dead paraded to the outskirts of town leading the ghosts away.”
As already noted, Halloween was thought to be a night when mischievous and evil spirits roamed freely. As in modern poltergeist lore, mischievous spirits could play tricks on the living - so it was advantageous to “hide” from them by wearing costumes. Masks and costumes were worn to either scare away the ghosts or to keep from being recognized by them.
15. The tradition of carving out a “Jack-O-Lantern” also comes from paganism. The following comes from wicca.com…
Turnips were hollowed out and carved to look like protective spirits, for this was a night of magic and chaos. The Wee Folke became very active, pulling pranks on unsuspecting humans. Traveling after dark was not advised.
And as Bill Schnoebelen has noted, pumpkins eventually replaced turnips, but the meaning remained the same…
Here it’s a pumpkin, but in Europe it was often a turnip, or a skull with a candle in it. This serves two symbols, 1) the lord of the Dead, a “god” just like a Buddha – in short, an idol. 2) The fearsome face represented the god, Samhain, who would drive off less powerful demons that night.
The lights in the Jack-o-Lantern symbolize the “faery fires” or “Will’o the Wisps” which were believed to be the lost souls flitting through the night. They also hearken back to the huge Samhain “balefires” which were lit to help conjure back the god from the darkness.
16. On all Satanic holy days, there are children that get ritually abused. This has been documented repeatedly, and yet most people (including most Christians) don’t want to hear about it.
17. For Satanists, Halloween is one of the most important celebrations of the year. On page 96 of the Satanic Bible, Anton LaVey wrote the following…
“After one’s own birthday, the two major Satanic holidays are Walpurgisnacht (May 1st) and Halloween.”
18. The Scriptures are very clear about this sort of thing. Deuteronomy 18:9-13 says the following:
“When you enter the land the Lord your God is giving you, do not learn to imitate the detestable ways of the nations there. Let no one be found among you who sacrifices his son or daughter in the fire, who practices divination or sorcery, interprets omens, engages in witchcraft, or casts spells, or who is a medium or spiritist or who consults with the dead. Anyone who does these things is detestable to the Lord”.
Reaching People & Shifting Attitudes: Do’s And Don’ts In Conversation Regarding Waking Up October 30 2021 | From: ReachingPeople / ActivistsToolbox / Various
When dealing with a highly conditioned person you have to go out of your way not to trigger their fight or flight response or elicit strong resistance to what you have to say.
In order to do so you need to have a few attitude shifts on your own behalf and then follow certain do's and don’ts that are listed below.
It may seem somewhat unfair for the burden to be on your shoulders to make these shifts and for you to make extra effort to connect. You might have every justification to be angry and bitter towards those who are not aware but this in itself will prevent you getting through to them.
Many people have been conditioned since birth and will have trouble accepting what you have to say. Apologies can come later. Be gentle, be compassionate and be as supportive as you can.
By following this principle of changing your approach in order to effect change in others, you give yourself the greatest chance of reaching people and changing the current trajectory to a positive outcome for the world from these events.
Establish a Clear Communication Channel
This is much harder than it sounds and requires you to resolve and release the negative emotions you may feel towards the person/s you are speaking to / debating with.
It may be that you need to use certain healing modalities such as EFT (Emotional Freedom Techniques) to clear these emotions. This is one the author uses to clear his own resentment and anger towards those falling for the mainstream narrative. This is an ongoing process.
This is another mistake the author has made more times than can be counted and resulted in many a lost audience. If we are too forceful with our information dump and attitude the person will shut down immediately.
We all know the experience of having a Jehovah’s Witness at the door, not listening to a single word they say!
This same response will occur if you are too enthusiastic in your approach. Most people are not ready for new information, let alone that which will completely destroy how they see the world. It is the Santa story x1000.
Most of the damning conclusions a person will need to arrive at themselves.
This can be assisted greatly with support from those in the know through a gentle release of information (most of which will often be instigated by the person you are trying to reach).
We have observed that those that do walk through the door will do this in their own time and the quest for truth is so innate in people (but suppressed) that they may collapse their own world view in a short space of time.
Avoid Getting in the Ring (Oppositional Dynamics) - Keep Your Fists Down
If you raise your fists metaphorically (attack), the other person will defend. By the same token, if you get defensive, the other person may attack you or your ideas.
Stay neutral in your approach. You have information that can help the other person but if they choose not to want it, that is their choice.
It seems that the most important principles will be challenging. This item is centred around the divide and conquer manipulation technique.
This will be such a habit for most people you converse with that they will try to get you in the ring constantly for a fight. By getting in the ring, you will be unable to have most people entertain any new ideas.
The goal is not to get in the ring but to be in their corner, truly (which is much harder than it sounds), and can be like trying to tame a wild animal at times! If done successfully the person will respond well.
They often see us as an enemy and refuse to listen but if you are clearly in their corner, they will feel this and the energy will shift substantially.
The author has experienced this numerous times recently by avoiding getting in the ring and found it very enlightening. For instance, when accused of “spreading falsehoods”, the author responded by replying, ‘this is always possible”and asked for the accuser to specify which falsehood the author had stated.
This then led the accuser to try a different accusation and the same response occurred.
After a few turns back and forth the accuser then asked if the author was proud of winning the debate to which the response was, “No, I am on your side and have no intention of winning anything but in having an open conversation.”
It is worth noting it is so important not to be patronising or belittling in any way. There really is no way of faking this, you have to be truly in their corner.
One very important point to make is that you need to adjust your language to remove all derogatory terms about those that have a low awareness of the real issues.
References such as ‘sheep’ elicit a very negative response and create the scene for a conversation that will be a tit for tat of abuse.
If the person you are conversing with uses such terms in relation to your position such as ‘Covidiot’ or ‘Conspiracy Theorist’, it is essential not to take the bait.
It is quite possible that ‘agent provocateurs’ have created these terms to enable division between the two parties.
How to Effectively Wake Up Your Friends & Family
How do we get our friends and family to listen to us? How do we get away from the "Us and Them" scenario?
In this interview with David Charalambous, we dive into the tactics to employ for successfully reaching people with our truth messages.
A famous quote of Ghandi sums this up: “An eye for an eye and the whole world would be blind”.
Rising above this, whilst difficult, can lead to a ceasefire. Once the person returns to a rational state they may see how horrible the terms they used truly are.
Conversational Do's and Don’ts
A number of conversational principles have been identified which when followed will greatly enhance your chance of reaching people and will really help avoid arguments.
Honour Their Experience
This is another very challenging yet essential one. To honour something that we feel is incorrect and unwarranted really tests the boundaries of our compassion. There is a way to establish this without compromising our values.
If someone is experiencing fear, you can honour that which they are experiencing (i.e. ‘fear’) without giving value to that which they are fearing. The fear and other emotions which people are feeling are very real to them. If you do not honour these, you will be resented and attacked.
You will inevitably receive a fair amount of attack even when you follow the principles and, whilst unfair, may be part of the process of reaching people. As the author practices the principles more, there are fewer attacks on his character.
To those indoctrinated in a certain narrative, any data outside of that story will be met with the usual ‘conspiracy theory’ response.
The subject is not part of the person’s reality.
The script – provided by the media and government – allows the person to avoid addressing an uncomfortable subject or to question it with an angry response. The intention is to shut down debate.
Until the person is ready to go off-piste any discussion around population control or other such subjects will have the effect of shutting down the mind further.
Don’t Use Blacklisted References (People or Subjects)
If you use a reference which the media have managed to blacklist successfully, you will receive a message back with a Wiki reference calling the person a conspiracy blah blah.
The person will likely have a smug look on their face as if they won a conversation. By avoiding contentious authors, at least initially, you will help avoid this issue.
Be Aware of Common Ground and Difference in Opinions
This is a key concept in having a productive conversation. There will be a discrepancy between our knowledge and that of the other person. For instance, if we structured knowledge in a hierarchy of level of difficulty to accept, it would be wise to start with the least difficult to accept.
People really struggle with any world-wide conspiracies but are happy to accept business corruption.
It is also important to understand ‘The Curse of Knowledge’. It’s easy to over-estimate hugely how our ideas will be understood by another when we are speaking to them.
You must lay out your concepts and information simplistically and not assume that they have prior knowledge of these.
Respect a Person’s Dignity
Donna Hicks has done incredible work on getting people in conflict to debate openly. She has identified 10 elements of dignity and how, if they are violated, a person will respond negatively or even aggressively towards us.
By respecting these elements, you create an open space to discuss ideas. You can decide that these may be givens that need to be present in any good conversation.
The 10 elements of dignity - Everybody wants:
1. their identity accepted.
2. recognition for their unique qualities and way of life.
3. to be acknowledged when something bad happens to them.
4. safety (physical and psychological).
5. to be free from humiliation.
6. to be included.
7. to be understood.
8. to be treated fairly.
9. to be given the benefit of the doubt.
10. to receive an apology when someone does them wrong.
"I have yet to meet in my life someone who allowed a fact to overwhelm a belief.”
- Dr David Martin
This is an important quote which shows that when we try to challenge someone’s beliefs with a load of information / facts, it will usually just bang against their belief system, much in the same way a fly bangs into a window.
The conscious mind is resisting the new information as it contradicts a current belief held.
You can help the process of updating the belief greatly by skilfully asking questions so the person can see the belief is based on false information OR by telling stories that update the information on which the belief is built.
Do not challenge the belief itself or use sentences such as ‘that is not true’ or ‘you are wrong’ as it will only get into a debate of ‘he said, she said’.
It’s no coincidence that most people get their information through news stories. Since the dawn of time, people have passed information from one generation to the next through stories and metaphors, including the imparting of morals and values to the next generation. The brain is literally structured to absorb information in this way.
Your use of stories and metaphors will reduce resistance from the conscious mind and also provide a more entertaining way to absorb information more easily.
People Arrive at Their Own Conclusions
It has been the author’s experience that telling people one’s conclusions rarely works since they do not yet have the information you have on which your reasoning is based. Once you have managed to navigate the obstacle of a person’s conditioning and have them realise new information, they will arrive at their own conclusions.
This is far more powerful.
Do Not Tell Someone They Are Wrong
This will inevitably get a person’s back up and put them on the defensive. There is no need for this. The person will come to realise this if your approach follows all the principles and is respectful. This is a tough realisation and your response should be to help the person deal with this and not to create any further stress with ‘I told you so’.
Do Not Gas Light
Avoid at all costs emotionally manipulating the person. The government has done a great job of this and each of us needs care and understanding, not further guilt trips or any other such emotional gas lighting.
It is important to see a distinction between the person and the faulty idea. Good people can do bad things if they have a bad idea. Once you can separate the person from the idea, they are free of it. See the person as a friend and the idea as the enemy.
Often No Need for Our Opinions
There is often no need for us to express our opinions. You can stick to facts quoted by experts and other such information. This can allow you to bypass the authority conditioning to which the person is likely vulnerable.
Be Gentle and Kind
Being in the other person’s corner is so important and being kind will really help them feel this.
Being gentle and kind should be the basis of communication from one person to another.
Reminding ourselves of this can really help communication.
This is key when it comes to the point where they either realise cognitive dissonance or know they have been misled.
There will be lots of uncomfortable emotions for them. By being humble and supportive you do not add to this stress but help reduce it. We are essentially advising you not to rub their noses in it or use terms such as ‘I told you so’.
Know Your Audience
If you invited someone round for dinner you might check what preferences of food they had, mightn’t you? This is a similar concept. Know what topics and items will be good for discussion and which items are not wise to discuss.
Practice Listening
"If you are speaking more than them, you are probably doing it wrong.”
- Larkin Rose, Candles in the Dark
By listening we can connect better and also understand how the subjects are affecting the person we are speaking with.
This allows better understanding of where their knowledge might not be accurate.
There will be times when silence is needed, especially if the other person is thinking. Our goal is not to win but to help share important knowledge. When the person is deep in thought or better still saying, “I need to think about this”, allow them silence. Be aware of how they are.
Know When to Stop or Pause
There are natural conclusions of conversations. When the host starts hoovering, it is probably time to leave the party. If you respect each of the do's and don’ts, it is likely you will have a good connection and be welcome back.
Follow Up
If it is appropriate, ask them if they would like further reading or offer to speak to them in future.
Don’t Return the Dignity Violation
There may be times when you have followed all the above and the other person is still rude or obnoxious. In this case, don’t return the dignity violation; leave them to be the only one to be rude.
Often, later they will calm down and apologise.
Again, as Ghandi said, “An eye for an eye and the whole world will be blind”.
Breaking The Shackles Of Social Conditioning October 29 2021 | From: TheUnboundedSpirit
What do a hooligan, a kamikaze, and a racist have in common? None of them use their brain.
What I mean by “they don’t use their brain” is that they don’t think - or, to be more precise, they don’t think critically.
But it’s not only they that don’t. In fact, most people are no different when it comes to this.
Sure, we all have our thoughts, and over the years have formed certain opinions. But how many of those opinions are merely beliefs resulting from social conditioning, and how many of them are based on our own understanding? And, of course, we know a lot of things, but how much of our knowledge comes from personal experience, and how much from parrot-like learning?
You see, from almost the day we were born, we were forced to not think. Take school, for example - an institution that supposedly helps children develop their intellect yet does quite the opposite.
School forces children to stay confined in a classroom for about 8 hours almost every single day for a total of (more or less) 12 years, where they are learning things they don’t enjoy learning, being forced to obey to authority figures, having to unquestionably accept what they’re being taught, not being allowed the freedom to do anything on their own without asking for permission first (even to go to pee).
As Pink Floyd would say, school conditions children to become “another brick in the wall”.
The official 1982 video clip of Pink Floyd’s Another Brick in the Wall.
I know, I’m generalizing here, since not all schools are the same. But the reality is that in most parts of the world school isn’t a place where critical thinking is stimulated - on the contrary, it is suppressed or simply ignored. Naturally, it atrophies and becomes weak, exactly like a muscle does when pressure isn’t exerted upon it.
Observe people around you and you might come to see the consequences of our educational system. They are living unconsciously, not knowing why they think and behave the way they do. They accept and act without second thought on what the media is presenting them as the truth.
They believe in and follow the religious dogmas without having any solid evidence supporting their beliefs. They wholeheartedly support political leaders and obey to the decisions they make without the slight resistance. I could go on forever giving similar examples, but these will suffice for now.
As a result of our social conditioning, corporations exploit our emotional insecurities so they can sell us their products and services, making us compete with our fellow human beings about who has more stuff. So-called journalists are selling us lies by utilizing propaganda tactics through the mainstream media, turning us into mindless puppets.
Priests and religious teachers of all sorts gain power by selling us heaven in the afterlife, dividing us into in-groups and out-groups that fight against one another in the name of god. Politicians gain power by selling us heaven on Earth, also splitting us into opposing groups that fight against each other in the name of ideology. And, again, these, are just a few examples.
Our social conditioning has turned us into mindless, obedient puppets
If we realize these consequences, and are truly willing to change our way of living for the benefit of ourselves and the world, we need to develop the courage to escape the herd mentality and start thinking for ourselves - and the sooner we do, the better.
Of course, that’s easier said than done, since our social conditioning has gone very deep and is affecting us in ways we can’t even recognize. However, with conscious, persistent effort, it’s definitely possible to do so. If you’re interested to know how exactly, here are some basic practical steps you can take right now:
Question Your Beliefs, No Matter How Much You Cherish Them
In order to release yourself from the prison of social conditioning, the first and most crucial thing you need to do is question any beliefs that you unconsciously took on from your parents, teachers, and culture. That’s because beliefs can bring all kinds of limitations in life, such us irrational fear and the sense of having to live according to what’s right for someone else but not for you.
No matter how much you might cherish a belief, ask yourself the following questions:
“Where did this belief come from?”
“Is there any logical reason for holding it?"
“Is it limiting myself in any way or is it elevating the quality of my life?”
Assuming that you consider yourself religious, and you believe that the dogma of your religion is the only true and right one, and that those who hold different belief systems to yours are evil and doomed to go to hell, ask yourself:
“What is the logical basis for holding these beliefs?”
“Did I reach to them using critical thinking, or did I just accept them as truth merely because I was indoctrinated from my early education?”
“Are they serving my happiness or are they contributing to my suffering?”
These are some very important questions that you need to ask about any beliefs that you might hold in dear faith, whether they’re concerning religion, philosophy, politics, economics, or other field of knowledge.
By doing so, you’ll decondition yourself from negative social programming, which will allow you to grow in understanding, take in emerging information and make wiser choices. In addition, you’ll be able to better understand others’ beliefs without judging them based on a fixed mind-set.
Never be afraid to question your beliefs. To doubt what you think you know is a sign of intelligence, and only those who are courageous enough to do so can break free from the shackles of social conditioning and walk on the path of wisdom.
Rebel Against Authority and Accept Responsibility for Your Life
For most of us, it has become a habit to have others tell us what to think and how to behave. We don’t think for ourselves - instead, we let others do it for us and take responsibility for our lives. Not surprisingly, we are intellectually weak and have lost control over our actions.
It seems that we allow others to dictate us how to live because we don’t want to take the burden of responsibility on our shoulders - so we throw it on them. To be responsible for your life can be troublesome, because you have to use your mind a lot, take important decisions and face failure when you make the wrong choices.
To avoid that, most of us choose to let other people - such as politicians and religious leaders - do those things for us, as if they are our saviors.
Then, we blame them entirely for anything that’s going wrong with our lives - it’s only their fault, we claim, without stopping for a second and think that perhaps it’s actually ours.
Are you courageous enough to remove the blindfold of faith?
If you want to escape the matrix of social conditioning and reclaim your freedom, you need to stop letting others control you like a mindless automaton and instead start being responsible for your actions. This might be a difficult thing to do, yet it’s the only way to choose your own path in life.
Seek Truth, Regardless of How Arduous that Might be
If you’ve questioned your beliefs, chances are that you’ve come to the realization that most of them were just imposed on you by society and don’t in fact reflect your personal experiences and understanding.
And although this does wonders to help you develop your critical thinking skills and break down the walls of social conditioning, it doesn’t answer the question of whether those beliefs actually hold any truth or not. To answer that, we need to seek truth by doing research.
Let’s take drug addiction as an example. Our social conditioning has led most of us to believe that drugs are causing addiction.
This is a belief we hold since our early childhood but rarely one of us stops for a second to contemplate why that is so. If we do some basic research on the issue, we’ll come to find out that, although drugs do play a significant role in addiction, there aren’t actually causing it; rather, taking drugs is merely a symptom of addiction.
According to health experts, emotional trauma has been identified as the root cause of addiction, whether that is to pornography, video games, gambling, or drugs. If you weren’t aware of this, and would like to find out more about the nature of addiction, here’s a great Ted talk for you:
‘Everything you think you know about addiction is wrong.’ - Johann Hariss
The problem is that people don’t usually like to think for themselves and do any research. One reason for that is that they find it exhausting and not worth their time. Another reason is that they find it threatening to their worldview.
You see, when people are attached to certain beliefs that aren’t based on critical thinking and scientific understanding, doing research might prove them wrong, and so many choose not to know the truth at all, lest it will shatter their beliefs.
Thus, living in ignorance yet thinking they know, they can’t grow into wiser individuals and are unconsciously spreading untruths.
If you’re a lover of wisdom, you’ll need to actively search for truth, no matter how difficult that might be. You’ll need to think a lot and educate yourself. You’ll need to read books, watch documentaries, listen to talks, take part in discussions, or use other tools that can assist you in your journey to expanding your understanding of reality.
Lastly yet most importantly, you’ll need to be ready to accept the truth when you encounter it, no matter if it contradicts your long-held beliefs.
The journey to truth might at times be rough, but it’s definitely worth taking
By questioning your beliefs, rebelling against the herd and thinking for yourself, you’ll be able to free your mind from the constraints of blind conformity and dogmatic ideology.
This way you’ll be able to better understand yourself and the world you live in, as well as to take responsibility for your life, without being easily fooled, exploited or manipulated by power-hungry individuals who care about nothing but their personal gain.
Top Ten Facts About The Vaccine Industry That The Dishonest Media Refuses To Report October 28 2021 | From: NaturalNews / Various The mainstream media is largely funded by drug companies and vaccine manufacturers and demonstrates extreme conflicts of interest in reporting on vaccines.
Perhaps that’s why dishonest media outlets refuse to report the following ten stunning facts about the vaccine industry that are all provably true.
FACT #1.Mercury is still used in vaccines, and the CDC openly admits it. There is NO safe level of mercury for injecting into a human child. Not even “trace” levels.
There is NO evidence of safety for mercury at any dose whatsoever.
Any doctor who says the level of mercury in a vaccine is “safe” to inject into a child is only demonstrating their outrageous ignorance of scientific facts.
Mercury is arguably the most neurotoxic element on the entire Table of Elements. It is used in vaccines for the convenience of the vaccine manufacturer at the expense of the safety of the child. Any doctor who injects mercury into a child - at any dose! - should be immediately stripped of their medical license.
See the list of studies on the neurotoxicity of mercury at SCIENCE.naturalnews.com, now the largest relational research resource for chemicals, health, nutrients and drugs.
Additional FACT: There is no “safe” form of mercury as is often ridiculously claimed by vaccine pushers.
Both ethyl and methyl mercury are extremely toxic to the human nervous system. Neither should, under ANY circumstances, be deliberately injected into a human child at any dose whatsoever.
FACT #2. Injecting any substance into the human body makes it orders of magnitude more potentially toxic because it bypasses the protections of the digestive tract or the respiratory system.
Injecting mercury into a human being - at any dose - should be globally condemned as a criminal act.
That it is currently considered an acceptable act in the field of medicine only condemns the true destructive nature of modern medicine. Under the vaccine doctrine, “First do no harm” has become “Poison children for profit.”
FACT #3. For decades, polio vaccines injected into tens of millions of people actually contained hidden cancer viruses (SV40 and others). This was openly admitted by a top Merck vaccine scientist named Hilleman.
FACT #4.Top virologists working for Merck have blown the whistle and gone public with shocking revelations that claim the company routinely fabricated lab results to claim a 95% efficacy rate of its mumps vaccine in order to continue receiving government contracts on a vaccine that didn’t work.
See the False Claims document these scientists filed with the U.S. government here: naturalnews.com/gallery
FACT #6. The claimed history of vaccine “successes” against polio and other diseases is a pure fabrication. This is discussed and exposed in great detail in the powerful book, “Dissolving Illusions” by Dr. Suzanne Humphries. Click here to see the book at Amazon.com, or click here to visit the website (and view the charts).
As these charts show, measles was almost completely eradicated before the arrival of the measles vaccine. Why the decline?
Mostly due to improvements in public hygiene and sanitation. It’s no exaggeration to say that good plumbing saves more lives than vaccines ever did.
FACT #7.The vaccine industry refuses to conduct scientific tests on the health outcomes of vaccinated children vs. unvaccinated children. Why?
Because these test would no doubt show unvaccinated children to be healthier, smarter and far better off than vaccinated children in terms of behavioral disorders, allergies and even autoimmune disorders.
Check the people you know: Don’t you routinely find that the most heavily-vaccinated kids are the ones who get sick all the time?
FACT #8. The U.S. Supreme Court has already declared that the secret “vaccine court” is a higher power than the Supreme Court. The so-called “vaccine court” is granted extraordinary powers to operate utterly outside the Constitution, the Bill of Rights and completely outside the rules of due process and law.
The vaccine court itself - which isn’t even a court of law - is a violation of law and a violation of basic human rights. It must be abolished like Apartheid.
FACT #9.The mainstream media receives a significant portion of its revenues from the very same drug companies selling vaccines. This financial influence results in the media refusing to cover stories about vaccine-damaged children for fear of losing advertising revenues.
This is why the mainstream media frequently features guests and authors who ridiculously claim that all the vaccine damaged children across America do not exist or are “mere delusions” of their parents.
These despicable vaccine apologists are intellectual bullies who, like Hitler’s minions, relish in aiding and abetting a real-life holocaust that’s harming millions of children around the globe.
All of these substances are toxic to human biology when injected. All of them are still listed on the CDC website as vaccine additives.
There is no rational doctor or scientist in the world who can say they believe injecting infants and children with mercury, formaldehyde, MSG and aluminum is somehow “safe,” yet doctors inject children with these substances every single day in the form of vaccines.
Doctors who inject children with vaccines are delusional. They are practicing a medical holocaust against humanity while fraudulently calling it “immunization.” For the record, vaccination does not equal immunization. Click here to see the book of the same title.
Corporate-Controlled “Science” Isn’t Real Science At All
The real truth is that science never has a monopoly on facts, and science makes enormous mistakes (such as condoning smoking cigarettes) on a regular basis. Science is also for sale and easy corrupted by corporate interests.
Peer-reviewed science journals, too, are often little more than a collection of corporate-funded make-believe science tabloids.
“It is simply no longer possible to believe much of the clinical research that is published, or to rely on the judgment of trusted physicians or authoritative medical guidelines,” writes the former editor of The New England Journal of Medicine, Marcia Angell.
“I take no pleasure in this conclusion, which I reached slowly and reluctantly over my two decades as an editor of The New England Journal of Medicine,” she says in Drug Companies & Doctors: A Story of Corruption.
With that in mind, take a look at the similarities between Big Tobacco science lies and vaccine industry science lies: Related Articles:
Here Are The 147 Transnational Companies That Run The World October 27 2021 | From: TechnocracyNews
A study by the Swiss Federal Institute of Technology in Zurich found that a mere 147 corporations control the world – orchestrating events and controlling governments.
These companies are run by Technocrats who are all busy perfecting the the ultimate and interconnected global supply chain. The list is not necessarily perfect, but it is representative of a class of super-companies who are running the global show.
The analysis, which looked at the relationships between 43,000 transnational corporations, identified that only a tiny handful of mega-corporations, mostly banks, had a disproportionate amount of power over world events.
Newscientist.com reports: “Reality is so complex, we must move away from dogma, whether it’s conspiracy theories or free-market,” says James Glattfelder. “Our analysis is reality-based.”
Previous studies have found that a few TNCs [Trans-National Corporations] own large chunks of the world’s economy, but they included only a limited number of companies and omitted indirect ownerships, so could not say how this affected the global economy – whether it made it more or less stable, for instance.
The Zurich team can. From Orbis 2007, a database listing 37 million companies and investors worldwide, they pulled out all 43,060 TNCs and the share ownerships linking them. Then they constructed a model of which companies controlled others through shareholding networks, coupled with each company’s operating revenues, to map the structure of economic power.
The work, to be published in PLoS One, revealed a core of 1318 companies with interlocking ownerships. Each of the 1318 had ties to two or more other companies, and on average they were connected to 20.
Top 10 Evil Corporations
“Thought big companies got to the top by being nice? This video might make you think again, starting with IBM.”
What’s more, although they represented 20 per cent of global operating revenues, the 1318 appeared to collectively own through their shares the majority of the world’s large blue chip and manufacturing firms – the “real” economy – representing a further 60 per cent of global revenues.
When the team further untangled the web of ownership, it found much of it tracked back to a “super-entity” of 147 even more tightly knit companies – all of their ownership was held by other members of the super-entity – that controlled 40 per cent of the total wealth in the network.
“In effect, less than 1 per cent of the companies were able to control 40 per cent of the entire network,” says Glattfelder. Most were financial institutions. The top 20 included Barclays Bank, JPMorgan Chase & Co, and The Goldman Sachs Group.
John Driffill of the University of London, a macroeconomics expert, says the value of the analysis is not just to see if a small number of people controls the global economy, but rather its insights into economic stability.
Concentration of power is not good or bad in itself, says the Zurich team, but the core’s tight interconnections could be. As the world learned in 2008, such networks are unstable. “If one [company] suffers distress,” says Glattfelder, “this propagates.”
“It’s disconcerting to see how connected things really are,” agrees George Sugihara of the Scripps Institution of Oceanography in La Jolla, California, a complex systems expert who has advised Deutsche Bank.
Yaneer Bar-Yam, head of the New England Complex Systems Institute (NECSI), warns that the analysis assumes ownership equates to control, which is not always true. Most company shares are held by fund managers who may or may not control what the companies they part-own actually do. The impact of this on the system’s behaviour, he says, requires more analysis.
Crucially, by identifying the architecture of global economic power, the analysis could help make it more stable. By finding the vulnerable aspects of the system, economists can suggest measures to prevent future collapses spreading through the entire economy.
Glattfelder says we may need global anti-trust rules, which now exist only at national level, to limit over-connection among TNCs. Sugihara says the analysis suggests one possible solution: firms should be taxed for excess interconnectivity to discourage this risk.
One thing won’t chime with some of the protesters’ claims: the super-entity is unlikely to be the intentional result of a conspiracy to rule the world. “Such structures are common in nature,” says Sugihara.
Newcomers to any network connect preferentially to highly connected members. TNCs buy shares in each other for business reasons, not for world domination. If connectedness clusters, so does wealth, says Dan Braha of NECSI: in similar models, money flows towards the most highly connected members.
The Zurich study, says Sugihara, “is strong evidence that simple rules governing TNCs give rise spontaneously to highly connected groups”. Or as Braha puts it:
“The Occupy Wall Street claim that 1 per cent of people have most of the wealth reflects a logical phase of the self-organising economy.”
So, the super-entity may not result from conspiracy. The real question, says the Zurich team, is whether it can exert concerted political power. Driffill feels 147 is too many to sustain collusion. Braha suspects they will compete in the market but act together on common interests. [Comment: If you are reading this then you should already know what's going on.]
Resisting changes to the network structure may be one such common interest.
The Top 50 of the 147 Superconnected Companies
1. Barclays plc
2. Capital Group Companies Inc
3. FMR Corporation
4. AXA
5. State Street Corporation
6. JP Morgan Chase & Co
7. Legal & General Group plc
8. Vanguard Group Inc
9. UBS AG
10. Merrill Lynch & Co Inc
11. Wellington Management Co LLP
12. Deutsche Bank AG
13. Franklin Resources Inc
14. Credit Suisse Group
15. Walton Enterprises LLC
16. Bank of New York Mellon Corp
17. Natixis
18. Goldman Sachs Group Inc
19. T Rowe Price Group Inc
20. Legg Mason Inc
21. Morgan Stanley
22. Mitsubishi UFJ Financial Group Inc
23. Northern Trust Corporation
24. Société Générale
25. Bank of America Corporation
26. Lloyds TSB Group plc
27. Invesco plc
28. Allianz SE 29. TIAA
30. Old Mutual Public Limited Company
31. Aviva plc
32. Schroders plc
33. Dodge & Cox
34. Lehman Brothers Holdings Inc*
35. Sun Life Financial Inc
36. Standard Life plc
37. CNCE
38. Nomura Holdings Inc
39. The Depository Trust Company
40. Massachusetts Mutual Life Insurance
41. ING Groep NV
42. Brandes Investment Partners LP
43. Unicredito Italiano SPA
44. Deposit Insurance Corporation of Japan
45. Vereniging Aegon
46. BNP Paribas
47. Affiliated Managers Group Inc
48. Resona Holdings Inc
49. Capital Group International Inc
50. China Petrochemical Group Company
If You Hate Poverty, You Should Love Capitalism
A look into why Capitalism is the best thing that ever happened to average citizens.
Arthur Brooks, president of the American Enterprise Institute, explains how Capitalism is struggling to attract new followers despite helping millions of average people control their own destinies and accumulate wealth through hard work.
Left-Wing Media Run By Actual Demon-Possessed Anti-Human Evil Entities October 26 2021 | From: NaturalNews / Various
If you’re wondering why the left-wing media is infused with absolute evil, a seething, anti-human hatred of life, truth, healthy babies and human liberty, the answer is far larger than what you might have supposed.
An increasing number of so-called “journalists” working for the anti-human media are actually demon-possessed entities working to destroy human life, Christianity and belief in God.
Beyond a mere political war, we are engaged in a spiritual war of cosmic importance, as pure evil has taken over nearly the entire left-wing media, government bureaucracies, universities and public schools, Hollywood and the pop culture media, and even the ranks of “science” and medicine.
“They first cropped up seemingly out of nowhere about six years ago, adorned in black capes with curved devil horns affixed to their heads, holding posters and black American flags as they shouted ‘Hail, Satan’ on the steps of government institutions,”reports the UK Daily Mail in a story documenting the rise of Satanism in America.
“And they were growing, exponentially. Since The Satanic Temple’s founding in 2012, the organization has increased from a handful of members to tens of thousands, with chapters all over the US and the globe, from Stockholm to London and Los Angeles to Texas.”
Satanism is on the rise in the United States and around the world. Human-looking entities that were born as humans and previously possessed human souls are now entirely possessed by demonic spirits working to serve their dark lord Satan.
“The next thing I came to understand was they weren’t pretending to be Satanists to make a political point. They were Satanists,” says one observer quoted in the story. Read how Satanists define their movement:
“To us, Satan is the symbol that best suits the nature of we who are carnal by birth – people who feel no battles raging between our thoughts and feelings, we who do not embrace the concept of a soul imprisoned in a body.
He represents pride, liberty, and individualism – qualities often defined as Evil by those who worship external deities, who feel there is a war between their minds and emotions..”
Satan worshipers are now running the pop culture of America, where everything from Superbowl half-time shows to star-studded music videos now features overt Satanic imagery and symbolism as a form of mass indoctrination.
These Satanists relish evil and the destruction of all that is good.
How to Spot a Demon in Human Form – Watch the Mini-Documentary
How can you tell the difference between an actual human being with a divine soul vs. a human vessel that has been occupied and taken over by a demonic dark spirit?
In the following mini-documentary, I explain how you can “spot a demon” in human form.
Some of the more obvious signs are that demons in human form relish the thought of murdering babies (abortion), injecting people with vaccines made from aborted human babies (aborted human fetal tissue is one of the primary ingredients used in modern vaccines), attacking Christians and seeking harm upon children through toxic medicine, physical violence (the recent Covington Catholic School hoax) and mental indoctrination.
The goal of the Satanists is to attack all human vessels and possess them with demonic spirits by driving out divine human souls.
This war is already well under way. Many of the “people” you meet in society today are no longer humans on the inside. They are literal demon souls that have possessed and now operate human bodies like biological puppets.
These demonic entities appear human, but answer only to Satan. They operate at the highest levels of society, having infiltrated politics, media, entertainment, finance, science, medicine and even organized religion.
When you see people celebrating abortion and “shouting” praise for the murder of unborn babies, rest assured you are looking at a demon spirit which has possessed and taken over a human body.
They are anti-human for the simple reason that they are not human themselves.
Five So-Called “Conspiracy Theories” That Are Actually Supported By Mainstream Science October 25 2021 | From: NaturalNews
Telling the truth about a scandal that hasn’t been approved by the legacy media and their owners often yields a predictable result: You’ll be labeled a conspiracy theorist - even when there is plenty of evidence to support the truth.
Comfortable lies may help some people sleep at night, but the truth is that many supposed “conspiracy theories” are actually real, and are supported by science.
Who would have thought? Here are five truths that are widely misrepresented as conspiracy theories, and the evidence which supports them:
1. Atrazine Disrupts, Damages the Endocrine System
Atrazine is on the fast-track to becoming one of the most widely used pesticides in the United States. And because of this, there is a high amount of it in groundwater.
It is consistently detected in public water supplies - which in and of itself is really quite concerning. But when the profound potential for this toxic chemical to spur endocrine disruption is taken into account, atrazine becomes downright frightening.
Research led by Dr. Tyrone Hayes, a scientist from the University of California at Berkeley, has shown that in frogs, atrazine is capable of causing lasting endocrine damage.
In males, the disruption to endocrine function can be so severe that it results in chemical castration. In one study, Hayes exposed 40 tadpoles to water tainted with atrazine, at a concentration of 2.5 parts per billion - well within the EPA’s allotment for drinking water.
Nearly one-tenth of the tadpoles that were reared in the atrazine-laden water became “functionally female,” according to Hayes. Despite reportedly being born male, they ended up producing eggs.
And as sources report;
“After being exposed to atrazine, many of the 36 male-presenting frogs reportedly showed decreased testosterone, reduced breeding gland size, poor laryngeal development, suppressed mating behavior, and reduced fertility. Similar effects have been seen in other amphibious creatures.”
Studies from Purdue University and other esteemed research teams have found similar results regarding atrazine’s potential to disrupt the endocrine system - even at amounts regarded by federal agencies as “safe.”
Indeed, it would seem they are emphatically not safe. Perhaps that’s why Europe banned atrazine. So, why is it still used in the U.S.?
2. Cellphones Cause Brain Tumors
Is this really that far-fetched? That cellphones produce radiation is well established at this point - as is radiation’s connection to cancer.
It’s often reported that because cellphones produce a different type of radiation (compared to say, nuclear radiation), it poses no health risk. But numerous scientific studies have said otherwise. Indeed, the risk of cellphone use is widely under-reported.
Recently, research again implicated cellphones as a player in the cancer-causing game: This time, mobile devices were linked to brain and heart tumors.
In a study of rats, exposure to radio frequency radiation produced by cellphones led to the onset of a few different types of cancer - including rare Schwann cell tumors in the brain and heart.
“The weight of the evidence is clear: Cell phones do cause brain cancer,” stated Dr. Devra Davis, president of the Environmental Health Trust.
Children are particularly susceptible to the woes of cellphones, and Davis contended further that pregnant women should be especially careful about their cellphone use and storage.
“Keep the phone away from the abdomen - especially toward the end of pregnancy,” she cautioned.
There have been multiple warnings about the threat of cancer posed by cellphones, but many refuse to acknowledge the science that backs it up.
3. Chemtrails and Geoengineering Are Real
Mentioning the word “chemtrails” is a great way to earn the scorn of mainstream media pundits and their ilk. But a quick search of the term “geoengineering” yields a number of results - including a Geoengineering program at University of Oxford.
The program page notes that stratospheric aerosols (more commonly known as chemtrails) are one tool of choice in the geoengineering industry.
While there are many facets to the geoengineering scheme, chemtrails have long been one of the most easily visible tactics - and also the most denied. According to the U.S. government’s own records, aerosol spraying efforts have been underway for decades.
Even NASA has reportedly admitted to spraying lithium into the atmosphere. And in 2017, an EPA scientist was fired for sounding the alarm on the dangers of spraying aluminum into the atmosphere.
These efforts may be an attempt at controlling the climate - but as many have warned, geoengineering may come with a hefty price.
The mass fluoridation of the American people is probably one of the greatest shams of all time.
First and foremost, there is no evidence to support the claim that fluoride consumption prevents cavities.
Fluoride is not an essential nutrient (quite the opposite, really) and it is not necessary for human health in any way, shape or form.
But it’s not just “nonessential,” this compound is actually quite dangerous to human health - especially when it comes to the health of your brain. Nearly 60 studies have reported a link between fluoride consumption and a reduction in IQ.
Many have likened the fluoridation of public water supplies to mass medication, especially given fluoride’s link to lower IQs in children and other neurological impairments. Even research from Harvard University has shown this potential for harm.
There is no shortage of reasons to end water fluoridation, but mainstream media and their keepers surely don’t want you to know about that.
5. Vaccines Contain Mercury, Aborted Fetal Cells and Other Hazardous Ingredients
Last but certainly not least is perhaps the most widely contested truth of all: Vaccines are a veritable cocktail of unsavory ingredients.
From thimerosal in flu shots to aluminum adjuvants to human diploid cells from fetal tissue, there’s no shortage of things to be disgusted with when it comes to vaccines - or the vaccine industry’s propaganda, for that matter.
Despite media attempts at misinforming the public, the FDA admits that some vaccines still contain thimerosal as a preservative - and some vaccine-makers still use thimerosal as part of their “manufacturing process.”
As the FDA itself notes, thimerosal is 50 percent mercury by weight - and a thimerosal-containing vaccine will deliver a 25-microgram dose of mercury to its recipients that are over the age of three.
Children under three get a half-dose, which means they’re still being injected with over 12 micrograms of mercury. This may not sound like a lot, but as Trace Amounts explains - that is more than enough to do harm.
A child would have to weigh 550 pounds to safely withstand a 25-microgram dose of mercury.
Mercury is a toxic heavy metal with no currently identified safe level of exposure. It does not belong in any vaccine, whether it’s being labeled as “preservative” or a “manufacturing process” agent.
Mike Adams, founder of Natural News and Director of CWC Labs, has repeatedly broken stories about the presence of other detestable vaccine ingredients.
In 2017, the Health Ranger revealed that the chicken pox vaccine was made with human embryonic lung cell cultures and human diploid cell cultures, among other crazy things like guinea pig cells - information he pulled from the CDC’s own website.
Sadly, the list of scandalous ingredients in vaccines doesn’t end there; there are many parts to a vaccine cocktail, and none of them sound like anything you’d want injected into your body.
Learn more about the truth behind so-called conspiracy theories at Conspiracy.news.
To Sell You Happiness, They First Make You Feel Like Shit
October 24 2021 | From: TheUnboundedSpirit
Each and every day we’re bombarded with hundreds, if not thousands of images that are trying to convince us that we’re not good enough as we are.
You guessed right, I’m talking about advertisements.
The advertising industry has one and only mission: to persuade us into buying stuff with the promise that it’ll bring us happiness. But how exactly does it achieve that?
By first making us feel like shit.
“Look, this shiny, attractive and popular actress is sporting this swimsuit and by purchasing it you’ll feel sexy and successful like her.”
“Look, this handsome and confident businessman is driving this luxurious car and all the babes are begging to sleep with him like crazy. Get it and within moments you’ll get laid with more beautiful women that you could have ever imagined.”
The message implied in advertisements is simple: As you are, you suck, and you need to be different to not suck. Here, get this product and you won’t suck anymore.
Once they convince us that we suck, we do as they tell us, because who in the world wants to be a sucker?
No one.
You might be thinking: That’s bullshit! I’m not affected by those stupid ads.
Well, almost everyone I know says the same. I admit, I used to think like that too. But the truth is that we’re all affected, although in most cases we aren’t even aware of it.
Ponder on this: why would companies invest most of their money on advertising, if it wasn’t effective?
Advertising is all about persuasion, and those who are good at it see tremendous financial gains. But for persuasion to work at its best, it needs to happen subconsciously - that is, it needs to bypass conscious reasoning and take place on an emotional level. That’s precisely why we don’t know that it’s influencing us.
Let me offer you an example. When you are exposed to a Coca Cola ad again and again, at some point you become so accustomed to it that you unconsciously associate it with certain positive psychological states (such as love and joy), and so next time you go out to buy a drink, you grab the Coke can without wondering why.
You buy it just because you were persuaded to, while you’re under the impression that you did solely out of our own conscious decision.
‘Yes Girl’ – 1946 Cardboard Coca Cola Poster by Haddon Sundblom
I could go off on a tangent about the different tactics the advertising industry is using to manipulate us, but the point is that, as all big marketers know, great advertising is sneaky and its basic objective is to lower your self-esteem (with its ultimate objective being, of course, to sell you some crap in the name of happiness).
Starving for Connection
If you’re feeling shitty, there might be a good reason to blame it on advertising. Yet the advertising industry itself is nothing but a natural outgrowth of our profoundly sick society, where deception and competition are an everyday reality.
Indeed, advertising would barely be as effective in a society where people were honest and worked together for the common good. In fact, in such a society advertising as we know it wouldn’t exist at all.
Because of the competitive world we were brought up in and have to endure on a daily basis, most of us feel disconnected from our fellow humans. Of course, when others are constantly trying to maximize their personal gain at your expense, how can you feel a loving connection to them?
You can’t. Rather, you feel threatened by their presence. To protect yourself from them, you build big walls around you. And for a while, you feel safe and secure.
But eventually you experience the painful consequences: loneliness, anxiety, depression.
As every psychologist knows, humans are highly social beings - that is, we all have an inherent need to connect and share with others.
Connection is crucial to our emotional health, and when we don’t find it, we suffer.
No wonder in our disconnected society what we deep down crave more than anything else is to open our hearts and connect with other people. We want to feel a sense of belonging to community. We want to feel loved and accepted. We want to feel heard and understood.
Human disconnection is deeply affecting our psyche
Here’s why: The more problems you have, the easier you can be emotionally manipulated and financially exploited.
“Do you feel lonely? Don’t worry. Just pay $2000 for this escort and you’ll be in the company of an affectionate being.”
“Do you feel that your life is lacking adventure? This can easily be fixed. Buy these pair of Jordan sneakers for just $199 and you’ll feel like a basketball superstar.”
“Do you feel worried over the meaninglessness of your life? Let us help you. Get this cheap yet immensely effective pill and your mind will be relieved of distressing thoughts in just a matter of seconds.”
We may not be aware of it, but the main reason we keep on buying stuff is to find connection to those things we’ve lost and we emotionally starve for. The cunning ones in the marketing business know this very well, and are trying to exploit our insecurities through deceitful advertising just so they can empty our pockets and fill in theirs.
By purchasing this or that product, they make us believe that we’ll feel satisfied and content. Yet no matter how many products we manage to acquire, we always end up feeling sad and unfulfilled.
Shopping can never emotionally satisfy us because it provides us only with substitutes of what we’re longing for. And although it can at times bring us a temporary feeling of completeness and euphoria, that is soon followed by disappointment and a sense of inner emptiness.
Acquiring a fancy car may help attract a lot of eyes on you, and for a while this could make you feel like you’re the most important person in the world. You might start thinking that people appreciate you and would love to be in your presence, which in turn might bring you some egotistic gratification.
Yet this won’t be enough to satisfy your psychological need to genuinely connect and intimately bond with people who actually embrace you for who you are and not merely for what you have.
Getting a 14-day return ticket to some exotic part of the world and staying there in a 5-star hotel that provides you with all the luxury you desire can help you to forget the painful reality of everyday life, and might even make you feel like your life is filled with adventure and joy.
Yet before you realize it you’ll be forced to get back from your happy holidays and face the harsh truth that was there awaiting you all along.
Obtaining clothes from expensive fashion brands in an effort to feel beautiful and special might work as long as you’re in the company of individuals who praise you solely based on your appearance.
But when you are on your own or in the presence of people who don’t care about your looks, status and wealth, you won’t help it but feel that old familiar voice creeping in your mind again, whispering that you’re ugly and unworthy of love.
What some call “retail therapy” is actually a symptom of psychological dis-ease
Substitutes offer nothing more than a quick fix - they work for a short while, but eventually they always let us down. Hence, to fill in our emotional void and find lasting contentment, we need to stop foolishly running after things that bring us a fleeting sense of joy, and instead pursue those ones that can truly enrich our lives in the long run.
We need to stop collecting material possessions, and instead collect memories from mind-expanding and heart-touching experiences.
We need to stop showing off how much stuff we own, and instead openly express our truest thoughts and feelings. We need to stop amassing financial wealth, and instead realize our inner yet long-forgotten wealth.
We need to stop searching for the next thing to force us out of our chronic boredom and stress, and instead create a life that’s worth waking up to.
Changing the System
For all the above to happen, it is important that we realize what truly matters to our well-being and act accordingly. However, personal behavioral change alone isn’t enough.
No matter how strong our individual efforts to live meaningfully, purposefully and peacefully are, the external pressures of our competitive, materialistic and consumption-driven society will most likely cancel them out.
Therefore, if we want to see a lasting change happening for the benefit of ourselves and future generations, we need to focus our attention on transforming the very foundation of our socioeconomic system that is at the root of most problems our civilization is currently faced with.
I’ll try to explain what I mean with an example. A few paragraphs above, I wrote: “The cunning ones in the marketing business [ … ] are trying to exploit our insecurities through deceitful advertising just so they can empty our pockets and fill in theirs.”
This might sound as if the professional marketers are some kind of evil people who don’t give a damn about others and care only about their own financial gain.
The truth, however, is that they are people like you and me - people who somehow need to “earn a living” or else starve and live on the street.
They might actually be quite loving and compassionate, but at the same time they need some kind of a job, and because of the market’s immense competition, it’s extremely difficult - if not impossible - to find/create one they like and which aligns with their values.
They do what they got to do to increase their competitive advantage and keep on surviving in a harsh and unforgiving system, and in most cases that requires cunningness and deceit.
You see, our economic system is a scarcity-based system, since money isn’t enough to go around (if you didn’t know, money is created as interest-bearing debt, which means that there’s always more debt than money in existence).
Therefore, we all feel compelled to compete with one another in order to stay in a position of financial security and power, and that feeds the selfish and acquisitive part of our nature.
Yet the reality is that we’re living on a planet of abundance where all people’s needs could be easily met, if only we realized that our monetary system is obsolete, and worked together using our technical know-how to equitably distribute resources, instead of toiling day in and day out so as to outsmart others.
Once we stop fighting against each other and join our efforts in order to turn our world into a more beautiful place for all to enjoy, we’ll begin to feel connected again as well as to carry out work that is meaningful.
Then we will experience such an emotional satisfaction that we won’t be drawn to the momentary pleasure derived from shopping anymore; rather, we’ll be able to direct our attention on those things that actually matter to our happiness and build our lives around them.
How To Become A Freethinker: A Practical Guide + 7 Lessons You Should Learn Early In Life
October 23 2021 | From: TheUnboundedSpirit / AustralianNationalReview
We humans like to think that we are freethinkers, but how many of us truly are?
How many people actually think for themselves, without falling victims to beliefs or ideologies?
How many are not heavily influenced by the biased information that the media is presenting them with? How many are choosing to have certain opinions just because an authority figure told them to or because tradition holds them to be true?
The reality is that most people don’t know how to think critically, and blindly accept the beliefs that were handed to them by society. But unless one learns to think for oneself, how can one grow into a more conscious, wise person? It’s impossible.
So how can one learn to think for himself or herself? Well, here’s a small yet concise practical guide on how to become a freethinker that will help you to break free from the prison of belief and arrive at your own conclusions in your quest for truth.
How to Become a Freethinker?
Doubt your beliefs.
The first and most important step to become a freethinking individual is to doubt the beliefs that have been forced upon you by others. Whatever your beliefs are - whether religious, political, philosophical and so on - be sure to question them, scrutinize them, and discard any of them when you find no solid evidence supporting them.
Question authority. Most people choose to obey and follow what authority tells them is true and right. They don’t think for themselves- they let others do the thinking for them instead. A freethinker never accepts anything on authority. He/she asks questions and is open to accept any answers that point to the truth, even if they go against the opinions and beliefs of authority.
Observe your behavior. Although we tend to think that we have free will, most of our actions are actually carried out on an unconscious level. In a sense, we are victims to our habits.
To become a freethinker, you need to become more aware of your thoughts, actions, and overall behavior. Once you do so, you’ll be able to better understand yourself and make more conscious choices in life, without behaving in certain ways just because you feel compelled to.
Stop conforming. Another important step to become a freethinker is to detach yourself from group thinking. People choose to conform in all sorts of ways just in order to feel accepted and liked by others. To achieve that, many people unquestionably accept what others tell them out of the fear of being left out.
By escaping the herd mentality you’ll be able to think more clearly, without feeling the pressure to comply with others.
Use critical thinking. Learning how to use critical thinking is of utmost importance to freethinking. If you can’t analyze and critically assess the information that you come across, you’ll be an easy target for manipulation and thought control.
Critical thinking will assist you in your search to discover the truth, by helping you to avoid being influenced by biased opinions and false information.
Voice your mind. A freethinker is a rebel. It’s a person who is not afraid to speak his/her mind, no matter how opposing his/her ideas are to the establishment. Whatever you consider as true, right and of importance to be communicated to others, do openly talk about it, even if you are the only person who has the guts to do so.
Research. A freethinker cares about truth like nothing else. In the journey to finding truth, there are guides that can help one approach it easier and quicker. If you’re searching for truth, it would be beneficial if you gathered knowledge from as many sources as you can, whether that is books, documentaries, podcasts, and so on. Do whatever helps to expand your consciousness.
Keep an open mind. Last but not least, a freethinker is a person with an open mind. That means, a person who is open to learning new things and ready to change his mind when presented with evidence that contradicts his opinions and beliefs. A freethinker doesn’t accept anything blindly but at the same time doesn’t shrink from considering emerging perspectives and ideas that may challenge his/her worldview.
7 Lessons You Should Learn Early In Life
Most people experience a crisis at some point in their lives. It’s different for every individual and it is even harder to predict what that crisis may be.
However, at times like these we often regret not learning some key lessons in our earlier years.
Here are 7 such things that we should realise while we are still young.
Live In The Present
We often spend hours pondering about our past experiences and what the future holds for us. However, it’s important to realise that we can be happy only if we live in the present.
If we get too bothered with our past or too worried about the future, we miss living in the moment. The present belongs to us and we need to make the most of it.
Don’t live your life based on other people’s expectations
Our friends and family expect a lot from us. We shouldn’t always give priority to their expectations, especially when it contradicts our personal dreams and goals.
All your life there will be people who will tell you what you should and shouldn’t do. It is important for you to introspect and comprehend what is best for you.
Don’t make your problems bigger than they really are
Hurdles are inevitable. However, it is human tendency to magnify the scale of our problems by simply over-thinking.
Stop thinking too much because that’s not the solution to your obstacle. On the contrary, over-thinking actually makes it harder to resolve issues.
Get out of your comfort zone
Most of us are intimidated by something or the other. To reach our highest potential, it is important to deal with these fears and nip them in the bud.
If you tackle your fears with a straight head, you may realise that they perhaps weren’t so scary in the first place.
Don’t Race
Young people want to achieve everything and often they want to do it before everyone else. We must realise that one of the most essential aspects of life is tenacity. We should have patience and faith, and only then can we become truly successful.
Don’t assume what others think of you
Realistically, the harsh truth is, you matter much less to other people than you think. You are not the centre of the universe and not everyone has an opinion about you or your opinions.
Stop fretting over your impression on others and live your life to the fullest.
Be Appreciative
Appreciate your life experiences and most importantly, appreciate yourself, your friends and your family. Give a 100 per cent to those who deserve it because it will make you happier in the long-run.
How To Get Rid Of Paranoid Conspiracy Theorists October 22 2021 | From: Medium
Are you as sick and tired as I am of all those tinfoil hat-wearing conspiracy nutters who express skepticism whenever the kind and beneficent US intelligence agencies bestow us with urgent information about a new country in need of regime change?
Do you want to get rid of that kooky fringe 74 percent of Americans who believe in a “Deep State” which controls the elected government?
Well you’re in luck, bucko! I happen to have compiled right here a list of six simple steps that our compassionate government and fearless media can take to rid America of these looney toon paranoid conspiracy theorists once and for all:
1. Stop Fucking Lying All the Time
Simple, right? Just stop lying and people will stop wondering how the narrative they’re being spoon fed by their politicians and the media differs from reality!
End the practice of defense and intelligence agencies collaborating with think tanks and unelected insiders to manufacture false narratives which are then promulgated by pundits and politicians of both mainstream parties to advance imperialist agendas.
What will Alex Jones and Sputnik talk about if the voices of power start telling the truth all of a sudden instead of lying about the justifications for imperialist wars, excluding and censoring skeptics of establishment orthodoxies from the mainstream conversation, and being forthright about the massive and ubiquitous problems in America’s democratic system?
That’ll show those crackpots!
2. Try Some Actual Fucking Government Transparency
That’s right! Add government transparency into the mix and what will hostile non-state intelligence operatives like Julian Assange have to publish?
I say we drive the WikiLeaks fake news complex right out of business by eliminating the immense veil of secrecy which shrouds so many levels of US government.
That way when those annoying conspiracy kooks try to say we’re not being given the full story about the behavior of America and its allies, our leaders can just tell them “Uh, yes we are actually” and show unredacted documentation of all their behaviors.
How do you like that, Russian WikiLeaks? We are the WikiLeaks now!
3. Stop Fucking Killing People
Of course, it’s hard to be transparent when you’re conducting countless military operations all over the planet at any given moment, so we’ll probably have to stop that too. We don’t want to give away the secret plans and locations of America’s brave servicemen and women, after all.
Dedicate the US military to defending America’s own shores and close down the hundreds of US military bases which dot the world like freckles on a Scotsman, and the next time those paranoid conspiracy freaks start questioning what they’re being told they can just be shown the truth.
Not as much fun as drone bombing children, I’ll admit, but if we want to get serious about this conspiracy theory epidemic we’ve got to start somewhere.
4. Stop Promoting Fucking Conspiracy Theories
I don’t like to be a Debbie downer, but when we’ve got news stories coming out every few days promoting theories about the US president conspiring with the Russian government, it gets a little difficult to tell people not to indulge in conspiracy theories.
Unproven claims about powerful people conspiring together is the exact thing that a conspiracy theory is, and while I understand that these are authorized conspiracy theories, we can’t rely on these crazy loons to understand the distinction.
Better to lead by example and avoid trafficking in conspiracy theories altogether, in my opinion.
5. Stop Being Such Fucking Assholes
If US intelligence agencies weren’t torturing people, they wouldn’t have to lie about torturing. If US intelligence agencies weren’t surveilling US citizens, they wouldn’t have to lie about their surveillance programs.
If US intelligence agencies weren’t constantly committing horrific atrocities to protect the interests of the powerful from the powerless, everyone would trust them and you’d stop seeing all these ridiculous conspiracy theories about what those agencies have been up to.
Call me crazy, but I’ve got this wild notion that maybe if highly secretive defense and intelligence agencies weren’t inflicting unspeakable acts of depravity and degradation upon humanity all the time from behind the veil of government opacity, humanity would be less paranoid about them.
People are beginning to notice that no matter who they vote for they get the same exploitative neoliberal policies at home and the same murderous neoconservative policies abroad, which doesn’t do much to dispel those wacky notions about a permanent unelected government pulling the strings while the official elected government puts on a pretend democracy show every few years.
It would probably be a good idea to do something about how America has the worst electoral system in the western world, how ordinary Americans have virtually no influence over US policy or behavior compared to wealthy Americans, and the way the rigidly-enforced two-party system necessarily creates an extortion scheme where both parties serve the same plutocratic interests but bully Americans into supporting one or the other under the threat of losing civil liberties.
And again, I hate to be a wet blanket, but those defense and intelligence agencies technically are unelected and technically do wield an immense amount of power, and technically do have an immense amount of influence over Washington, Wall Street, Silicon Valley, Hollywood, the mainstream media, big oil, plutocratic interests, US allies, world trade, and countless major world events.
By restoring power to the people instead of leaving it all in the hands of an elite class of secretive agencies and their plutocratic allies, people might feel like they have a bit more control over what’s going on in their country and won’t have to make up nonsensical stories about a “deep state”.
If we could pull these steps off, what will these conspiracy-mongering grifters have to sell to the naive populace? If everyone trusts their government and feels confident in the democratic process, who will believe stories about powerful unelected forces ruling over them?
You certainly wouldn’t have 74 percent of them subscribing to this absurd “deep state” conspiracy theory, that’s for sure.
2018 Was The Year That Climate Change Scare Stories All Fell Apart: See The List Of Debunked Climate Hoaxes + The “Global Warming” Hoax: 30 Years Of Failed Predictions That Never Happened October 21 2021 | From: NaturalNews / NaturalNews / Various Climate change fanatics are constantly railing on about how “climate deniers” refuse to acknowledge some ever-elusive consortium of sound climate science.
But if the many climate narrative debacles that occurred in 2018 are any indication, it’s actually the global warming hysterics who’ve buried their heads in pseudoscientific denialism concerning the state of our planet.
No, Earth Won’t Experience A Four or Five Degree Celsius Temperature Increase by the Year 2100
Back in January, a paper published in the journal Nature exposed United Nations (UN) climate change predictions about massive increases in global temperature as absolute bunk.
A revised set of calculations found that the UN’s worst-case scenario temperature increases of four or five degrees Celsius will not be happening any time soon.
Pacific Nation That Climate Fanatics Claim is “Sinking” is Actually Growing
Contrary to what you might have heard, the island nation of Tuvalu out in the Pacific Ocean isn’t shrinking in size due to global warming.
In fact, it was revealed back in February that Tuvalu is actually growing in size – this, despite the fact that sea levels around the island have been rising at twice the global average.
No, Hurricanes Aren’t Getting Stronger Because of “Gobal Warming”
Back in March, BBC News tried to claim that the recent uptick in strong hurricanes is the result of a “warmer world.” As usual, this claim turned out to be false, and the fake news outlet eventually retracted these ridiculous claims.
Climate lunatics love to talk about coral reefs and how they’re allegedly depleting as a result of global warming.
But it was discovered back in April that coral are actually developing new heat-tolerant genes that, would you believe it, are helping to extend their lifespans another 100-250 years, even if the planet does heat up a bit more.
As it turns out, the world’s beaches are actually getting larger rather than smaller, even as fossil fuel emissions have steadily increased by about 64 percent since 1984.
Research published by NASA glaciologist Jay Zwally back in June found that, contrary to what many climate fanatics claim, Antarctic ice is increasing in size, not shrinking.
Polar Bears Aren’t Starving Due to Global Warming
Just one month later, National Geographic was forced to admit that a viral photo of a starving polar bear had nothing to do with climate change – a fact that was reluctantly admitted by the person who took the photo.
France is Experiencing Fewer Climate-Related Disasters
Despite being ground zero for the Paris Climate Accord, the European nation of France is actually experiencing fewer climate-related disasters, despite increases in CO2 (carbon dioxide) output.
Coral Bleaching is Completely Natural
Some climate lunatics have tried to claim that coral bleaching, particularly on the Great Barrier Reef, is being caused by global warming. Wrong. It’s actually been happening naturally for hundreds of years.
In October, it was revealed that “settled” climate predictions for the United Kingdom and Europe may not be so settled after all. As usual, apocalyptic predictions were way overblown, and everything appears to be business as usual.
No, Hurricanes are Not Increasing in Frequency
Getting back to those pesky hurricanes, it turns out that both the number and intensity of such events has remained largely constant for at least the past 117 years, completely debunking climate fear-mongering that claims hurricanes are on the rise.
In December, U.S. climate scientist Judith Curry published an in-depth report looking at peer-reviewed climate studies, revealing that catastrophic sea level rises are highly unlikely, despite what climate fanatics often claim.
The “Global Warming” Hoax: 30 Years Of Failed Predictions That Never Happened
Once upon a time in the late 1980s, the Left devised a behavioral modification scheme aimed at one thing: Future control of as much of the population as possible.
The problem was convincing enough Americans to willingly go along with the plan - a scheme most would never voluntarily agree to because it would involve radical deindustrialization and modification of their lifestyles.
They settled on human-caused “global warming” - the determination that modern existence was causing the planet to heat up so much all life would soon be exterminated…if we didn’t stop being so modern.
The crackpot theory was first introduced by NASA ‘scientist’ Dr. James Hansen in testimony before the U.S. Senate in 1988: “Global warming has begun.”
"The earth has been warmer in the first five months of this year than in any comparable period since measurements began 130 years ago, and the higher temperatures can now be attributed to a long-expected global warming trend linked to pollution, a space agency scientist reported today."
At the time, Hansen - said to be a “leading expert on climate change” - told a Senate committee that he was “99 percent certain” that the warming trend of the day wasn’t due to natural Earth variations but instead was being “caused by a buildup of carbon dioxide and other artificial gases in the atmosphere,” the Times reported.
The Times intoned with this dire warning: “If Dr. Hansen and other scientists are correct, then humans, by burning of fossil fuels and other activities, have altered the global climate in a manner that will affect life on earth for centuries to come.”
Since then, of course, there has been no shortage of wild predictions of mass gloom, doom, and death, thanks to selfish humans (Americans mostly) who care more about their SUV than heating up the planet to the point of extinction.
And while the Left continues to tout this theory as legitimate, none of their predictions have come true. In fact, Hansen’s own charts and computer models from 1988 and earlier have been shown to be ridiculously flawed.
Here are some of the most bizarre, insane, and just plain wrong predictions of disaster:
One of our day’s biggest climate hoaxers, former Vice President Al Gore, predicted in 2006 as he was hyping in his BS (but nevertheless Oscar-winning) documentary, “An Inconvenient Truth,” that unless we took “drastic measures” to reduce “greenhouse gases,” then the world would reach a “point of no return” within a decade.
That prediction is now 12 years old. Mind you, Gore has never been a climate scientist or even a scientist at all; he’s just a political huckster like any other Democrat who claims to have intimate knowledge about the Earth.
In March 2000, a writer for the UK’s Independent wrote that “snowfalls are now just a thing of the past,” as Britain was undergoing “striking environmental change” (thanks to selfish humans).
But then a strange thing happened; England kept seeing snowfall. In fact, in March of this year rural UK received so much snow, one longtime resident of rural England remarked: “I’ve never seen anything like this.”
In 2007, Australia’s The Age pondered, “Can climate change get worse? It has,” onto its way to predict “more catastrophic damages from climate change than in the worst-case scenario forecast by international experts.”
That, ostensibly, included losing most of the Australian continent to flooding as melting ice dramatically increased the sea level.
There are many more, and Tony Heller of RealClimateScience.com put together a video of 30 years’ worth of bogus global warming/climate change predictions that never came true (and never will).
Dr. Russell Blaylock Explains Why The Masses Are Becoming Cognitively Retarded And Incapable Of Rational Thought October 20 2021 | From: NaturalNews / Various
Is society getting dumber by the day? It may not just be your imagination: As Dr. Russell Blaylock, a retired neurosurgeron, posits, the stupidity of the masses may be by design.
Through a barrage of toxic chemicals and compounds, Blaylock says the government is purposely trying to dumb-down the masses. A dumber society is more easily controlled, after all.
Whether it’s the mercury in vaccines, the fluoride in our water, or the dozens of pesticides applied to our food, it’s hard not to suspect that the government knows exactly what they’re doing.
The toxicity of these chemicals and compounds is well-documented, yet nothing is ever done to reduce the presence of harmful compounds in our environment. Why else would the government willingly pollute the environment, public water supplies and more?
Where Has Intelligence Gone?
Dr. Blaylock explained in a video lecture that we are bombarded with a stream of toxins that are known to disrupt normal brain function.
“We’re seeing a society that not only has a lot more people of lower IQ, but a lot fewer people of higher IQ. In other words, a dumbing down, a chemical dumbing down of society,” he stated.
Blaylock contends that this trend has made people more dependent on the government.
“We have these people of lower IQ, who are totally dependent.
Then we have this mass of people who are going to believe anything they are told because they can’t really think clearly - and very few people of a very high IQ have good cognitive function who can figure this all out,” he explained.
“That’s what they want,” Blaylock said.
As Natural Newswriter S.D. Wells explains, the FDA is easily seen as an edifice of fraud. The federal agency, which is purportedly charged with ensuring food and drugs are safe, actually does neither.
The FDA never conducts their own testing; they rely on “data” cherry-picked for them by manufacturers. The FDA doesn’t test food additives to see if they are safe, or if they will react negatively with other additives.
In short, the FDA knows nothing about what’s in our food or how it might affect humans. The same can be said of prescription drugs.
Depleting Intelligence at Every Turn
There are a bevy of toxins that people are exposed to everyday
Whether its toxic food additives, mercury-laden vaccines, pesticides and herbicides or fluoride, the sad truth is that toxicity has become a part of daily life for many people.
Fluoride is a known neurotoxin, yet it is added to our water supplies in the name of “public health.” Fluoride is not an essential nutrient; it’s not a nutrient at all, actually.
Almost 67 percent of public water in the U.S. is fluoridated, under the erroneous notion that it will protect teeth against tooth decay. Many of our “peer” nations have rejected the idea of water fluoridation, such as Denmark, Finland, Norway, the Netherlands, Sweden, China and Japan.
But it’s not just what they’re adding to food and water and vaccines that’s making America [the Western world] stupid: Even the education system is complicit in the plan to dumb down the country.
A study by NASA scientists recently confirmed that many people are born “creative geniuses” but their intelligence is ultimately hampered by the U.S. education system. Perhaps calling it the “re-education” system would be more appropriate?
The end-goal of the government is not to have a free and intelligent society; the globalists would rather turn us into a sea of malleable drones that do as they’re told.
See more coverage of stories about society’s agenda at Globalism.news.
“Do Not Resist”: The Police Militarization Documentary Everyone Should See
October 19 2021 | From: TheIntercept / Various
On a sunny afternoon last summer [historic], Craig Atkinson, a New York City-based filmmaker, stood in a front yard in South Carolina surrounded by several heavily armed police officers.
The officers, members of the Richland County Sheriff’s Department tactical team, were descending on a modest one-story house looking for drugs and guns. The team smashed through the windows of the home with iron pikes, then stormed the front door with rifles raised.
Inside, they found a terrified family of four, including an infant. As the family members were pulled outside, Atkinson’s camera captured a scene that plays out with startling regularity in cities and towns across the country, one of many included in his new documentary, “Do Not Resist,” an examination of police militarization in the United States.
The police begin rooting through the trash. “Where the fuck is the weed?” one officer asks, as the team ransacks a car parked in the driveway. “Boy that was sweet,” another says, commenting on the speed of the raid. One officer finds a backpack, which yields a bit of marijuana - it’s not enough to roll a joint, but it’s something.
The officer in charge questions the owner of the backpack, a young African-American man. In a conversation captured on Atkinson’s microphone, the young man, a local community college student, tells the officer he runs a small landscaping business.
Knowing he’s being taken into custody, with his hands cuffed in front of him, he asks the officer for a favor: Can he remove the $876 in his pocket set aside for new lawn-care equipment and give it to one of his employees to go to the hardware store? Instead of handing the cash to the arrestee’s co-worker, the tactical team seizes the money.
“I never one time said you’re a bad person,” the officer tells the young man before he’s led off. “I just have a job to do, and you happen to be in the middle of it.”
The pernicious practice of civil asset forfeiture, which allows law enforcement to grab cash or property during the course of raids, then requires people to prove the assets were not related to criminal activity in order to get them back - and allows police to keep the assets if they fail to do so - has been well documented.
What’s less common is to see one of those interactions play out on camera. Capturing those kinds of moments is what “Do Not Resist” is all about.
Trailer for “Do Not Resist,” a New Documentary Examining Police Militarization in the United States:
Atkinson’s directorial debut has already taken home this year’s prize for best documentary at the Tribeca Film Festival and is currently making the rounds in select cities around the country.
Radley Balko, author of “Rise of the Warrior Cop: The Militarization of America’s Police Forces,” has called the film “terrifying,”“powerful,” and “important.”
Based on substantial on-the-ground reporting, “Do Not Resist” is both unsettling to watch and necessary to see.
The film begins in Ferguson, Missouri, on a rainy night of protest in August 2014 that erupted into a melee of tear gas and screaming.
It then quickly moves to a seminar with Dave Grossman, a law enforcement guru who gives trainings on lethal force and the application of a warrior mentality in the name of the law.
“The policeman is the man of the city,” Grossman begins, before explaining that cops he’s spoken to routinely describe their first on-the-job kill as a prelude to the best sex of their lives.
“Both partners are very invested in some very intense sex,” Grossman says.
“There’s not a whole lot of perks that come with this job. You find one, relax and enjoy it.”
Grossman believes that a violent reckoning between law enforcement and critics of police militarization is fast approaching.
“We are at war,” Grossman tells the crowd, “and you are the front-line troops in this war.”
The language reflects a theme that runs throughout “Do Not Resist.”
Atkinson began the project three years ago in the wake of the Boston Marathon bombings. The images of armored cars and commando cops in the streets resonated for him on a personal level. Atkinson’s father spent 29 years as a police officer outside Detroit - 13 of them on a SWAT team, where he held the rank of commander.
Atkinson and his brother would take part in their dad’s training, playing the part of hostages when they were little and mock shooters when they were big enough to handle weapons.
Watching the footage from Boston, it was obvious to Atkinson that something profound had shifted since his dad’s days on the force. He set out to create a film that would capture that shift.
The “Do Not Resist” crew attended expos and trade shows, community meetings and federal hearings, training seminars and SWAT contests. All told, the team traveled to 19 states, went on roughly 20 police ride-a-longs, observed half a dozen raids, and interacted with hundreds of police officers.
The hope was to be on-hand for an incident in which a SWAT team’s use of heavy weapons would be unquestionably warranted.
“I thought the whole time I would be able to show something that would kind of reflect the entire scope of what a SWAT officer might go through sometimes, where you actually do need the equipment,” Atkinson explained.
Instead, the filmmaker repeatedly found himself watching police with military-grade weaponry executing dubious search warrants.
The frequency of the raids was particularly shocking, with one of the officers in the film claiming his team does 200 such operations a year.
By comparison, Atkinson notes, his father performed a total of 29 search warrant raids over his entire 13 years in SWAT - according to some estimates, SWAT teams now carry out between 50,000 to 80,000 raids across the country annually.
“The search warrants, we’re told, are always used for massive drug dealers and kingpins, and then we run in these homes and we never found anything,” Atkinson said.
Beyond the day-to-day breaking down of doors, “Do Not Resist” explores the growing role of private surveillance companies in local policing, and law enforcement’s thirst for technology that can predict crimes before they happen.
An analyst inspects video feeds of a wide-scale aerial surveillance system being utilized by local police departments
The film highlights Persistence Surveillance Systems, a company offering low-cost aerial surveillance honed in Fallujah to domestic law enforcement. “We’re not out to watch the whole world, just all the world that’s got crime,” Ross McNutt, the president of the company, insists.
“That’s the next wave in the militarization of police,” Atkinson told The Intercept in an interview.
“What we found was a whole slew of retired military officers now in the private sector now selling the exact same surveillance technology that they just got back from Iraq and Afghanistan with to local law enforcement for small money on the dollar.”
The intent of “Do Not Resist,” Atkinson said, is to provide a glimpse inside the realities of American policing, challenge the policing-for-profit model that has caused departments in economically depressed communities to treat their citizens as walking ATM machines, call out a warrior culture that divides law enforcement from the public they’re sworn to serve, and flag the dangers of war-zone technologies being applied domestically.
For the most part, the reaction from law enforcement has been positive, Atkinson said.
“I’ve had a lot of law enforcement really respond well to the film and say that it reflects these issues that a lot of them have been working on themselves,” he said.
As for his father, Atkinson said, watching the film stirs up uncomfortable feelings.
“His major reaction was just disappointment in seeing how far the mission creep had actually gone,” he said.
“It’s obviously disappointing to see something that you were dedicating your life to so completely, evolve into something that you would never want to be a part of.”
The “Great Reset” Elite Coup: Taking Control By Destroying Cash - ReshapingThe Human “Individual” October 18 2021 | From: GlobalResearch / Various
Beware of the "Cyber Polygon" as Part of the Elite Coup. So How Can We Resist? For many people desperate to see a return to a life that is more familiar, it is still easy to believe that the upheavals we have experienced since March 2020 and the changes that have been wrought in their train are ‘temporary’, even if they are starting to ‘drag on’ somewhat longer than hoped.
However, anyone who is paying attention to what is taking place in the background is well aware that the life we knew before 2020 has already ended and what is being systematically put in its place as the World Economic Forum (WEF) implements its ‘Great Reset’ will bear no comparison to any period prior to last year.
Of course, those of us who qualify as ‘ordinary people’ have had no say in the shape of what is being implemented: that shaping has been the prerogative of the criminal global elite which is now implementing a plan that has been decades in the making and built on hundreds of years of steady consolidation of elite power.
Also, of course, there is nothing about this shaping that is good for us.
In simple terms, it is reshaping the human ‘individual’ so that previously fundamental concepts such as human identity, human liberty, human rights (such as freedom of speech, assembly and movement), human privacy and human volition are not just notions of the past but are beyond the comprehension of the typical ‘transhuman’.
At the same time, the global elite is restructuring human society into a technocratic dystopia which is a nightmarish cross between ‘Brave New World’, ‘1984’ and the Dark Age.
The only question remaining is this: ‘Can we mobilize adequate strategic resistance – that is, resistance that systematically undermines the power of the global elite to conduct this coup and restores power to ordinary people – to defeat this coup?'
But before I answer that question, I wish to highlight just one element of the elite coup that is taking place and outline the profound changes that are being left in its wake unless we stop them.
These changes are essentially related to the capacities of computerized technologies to deprive us of what little we have left of our financial autonomy, including because any notion of privacy is rapidly vanishing.
Vanishing Money
One reason for highlighting the issue of money is because while it is good to see increasing critical attention being paid to the ‘injectables’ program, with its devastating consequences for humanity, far too little attention is being paid to the profoundly important transformation being wrought under cover of the elite-driven narrative which has virtually all people’s attention distracted from this deeper agenda.
And while this deeper agenda entails a great many aspects, one subset of these is related to the way in which the global financial system is being re-engineered to play its role in fully controlling the human population.
However, these reports are contradicted by other research and the ongoing evidence that cash is vanishing. Most importantly, there is no doubt about the elite intention in this regard. They want cash gone.
The digitization of money has been occurring for decades and it is now being accelerated dramatically.
Moreover, the World Economic Forum and other elite organizations have been actively working towards achieving a cashless economy for years.
"You have to understand one thing about the Illuminati, they made many many promises to many many people.
At one time there were about 600 trustees but none could act alone. There was a major conductor who orchestrated it all and kept them all in line.
I know these people, the structure and what happened then and now. there were deposits in 173 countries all moved even before WWII many agreements, the Green Hilton just one of them, and the whole reason the Green Hilton treaty was allowed was to siphon more money into the Fed. It's only the tip of just one iceberg.
We have come very far though, and I thought if you had the time one of these days I would explain where the rest of us who don't show ourselves on the internet are in fighting the battle. I too have traveled around the world.
History is not what these folks say it is. I am only a member of one family who had a lot of assets stolen, and I have been successful in getting mine back for disbursement, not for my own use.
Yes, I have managed to use them, but it has to be done in such a way the "cabal" as you call it doesn't even know what happened.”
Notably, in this respect, the ‘Better Than Cash Alliance’ has 78 members ‘committed to digitizing payments.’
If you think that this is a grassroots initiative set up by people like you and me, you will be surprised to read that the Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation is a ‘Resource Partner’ to the initiative along with some UN agencies, many national governments and corporations such as Mastercard and Visa.
So while the trend toward a cashless society has been progressing steadily for some decades, with countries like Denmark, Norway and Sweden already virtually cashless and India rapidly moving in that direction – see ‘India’s PM Modi defends cash ban, announces incentives’ – the so-called ‘Covid-19 pandemic’ was contrived partly to provide a pretext for further accelerating the move from cash to cards and apps, with increasing numbers of people using the digital methods, even for small sums, partly because some people were scared into believing that the ‘virus’ could be transmitted by bills and coins.
But there is more. In addition to measures not mentioned here, other plans include the use of a facial scan that records your entry to a store and is linked to artificial intelligence that identifies you and your credit rating.
This then enables, or otherwise, your ability to pay for goods and services based on this facial scan.
‘Does all of this matter’, you might ask.
Well the convenience of cards and apps has two significant costs: Your privacy and your freedom.
You lose both simply because while paying with cash is anonymous, paying by card or app leaves a digital trail that is as difficult to follow as an elephant whose tail you are already holding.
And this digital trail forms a vital part of the surveillance grid that enables all of those who are tracking and documenting your movement, your payments and your behaviour to do so without leaving the comfort of their chairs.
But it goes beyond this. As touched on above in relation to privacy and explained at some length by Whitney Webb, ‘there is a related push by WEF partners to “tackle cybercrime” that seeks to end privacy and the potential for anonymity on the internet in general, by linking government-issued IDs to internet access.
Such a policy would allow governments to surveil every piece of online content accessed as well as every post or comment authored by each citizen, supposedly to ensure that no citizen can engage in “criminal” activity online.
‘Notably, the WEF Partnership against Cybercrime employs a very broad definition of what constitutes a “cybercriminal” as they apply this label readily to those who post or host content deemed to be “disinformation” that represents a threat to “democratic” governments.
The WEF’s interest in criminalizing and censoring online content has been made evident by its recent creation of a new Global Coalition for Digital Safety to facilitate the increased regulation of online speech by both the public and private sectors.’
But to get back to cash: Unfortunately for us, the global elite does not intend to leave the abolition of cash to our ‘preference for the convenience of cards’ and other moves to entice us to switch to digital payment.
It fully intends to force us to accept digital methods as the only means of payment.
In part, this is because electronic payments are extremely lucrative for banks and payment service providers, while the data broker industry is also making huge revenues.
Two obvious ways of doing so are by removing ATMs (including from shopping centres) and closing local bank branches so that cash is simply unavailable. As has been happening for some time.
But, in this instance, even profitability is at the trivial end of the elite motivation spectrum.
Cash is being forced out of existence because it undermines the elite agenda to take all power from ordinary people.
So, in parallel with other regressions over the past 18 months as the elite coup to take complete control of our lives has continued to unfold, there have been ‘warnings’ from various institutions – including the World Economic Forum and the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace – about the possibility of an ‘allegedly imminent cyber attack that will collapse the existing financial system’.
Following a simulation in 2020, in which the World Economic Forum along with the Russian government and global banks conducted a high-profile cyberattack simulation that targeted the financial industry, another simulation was held on 9 July 2021 involving the World Economic Forum and the Russian government-owned Sberbank as well as other key financial agents.
In reality, of course, such a collapse of the financial system would constitute ‘the final yet necessary step’ to implement the World Economic Forum’s desired outcome of forcing a widespread shift ‘to digital currency and increased global governance of the international economy’.
If this financial collapse happens, the ‘solution’ suggested by key agencies – ‘to unite the national security apparatus and the finance industry first, and then use that as a model to do the same with other sectors of the economy’ – will ensure that we lose what little control is left in our lives, not just in relation to our financial resources but in all other domains as well.
And for another account of the deeper agenda and its financial impacts already, including its ‘economic genocide’, as well as what is yet to happen, watch this interview of Catherine Austin Fitts: ‘Globalist Central Banking New World Order Reset Plan’.
Beyond this, if you want some insight into another key threat in the cybercrime realm, check out this video by the Ice Age Farmer in relation to the cyber threat to the power grid.
Psychological warfare. Public opinion warfare. Legal warfare.
Known as the “three warfares” doctrine and relatively unknown in the West, these concepts serve as key strategies guiding the Chinese Communist Party (CCP) in its quest to win a war against the free world without firing a single shot.
Psychological warfare seeks to demoralize the enemy; public opinion warfare seeks to shape the hearts and minds of the masses; legal warfare seeks to use systems of law to deter enemy attacks.
This explanation was set out in a recently released 650-page report that provides a comprehensive illustration of the Chinese communist regime’s global influence operations.
In response to concerns in the United States that businesses that refuse cash will disadvantage communities with poor access to traditional banking systems, there are signs that ‘a national movement protecting consumers’ ability to pay in cash may be emerging’ with a number of states and cities already outlawing cashless outlets.
Realistically, however, given what is at stake, considerable elite pressure will be applied to reverse these decisions in time.
So we need our defense to be more rigorous and less reliant on agents who are unlikely to be tough enough to defend our interests or will be sidelined or killed for doing so, as at least two national presidents who resisted the elite intention last year have since been killed.
Moreover, given the likelihood that the financial system will be deliberately crashed at some point – and possibly soon – we need to employ a variety of tactics, that build resilience into our resistance, to defeat this initiative.
Hence, storing and paying with cash, moving your accounts to local community banks or credit unions (and away from the large corporate banks) and making the effort to become more self-reliant, particularly in food production, will increase your resilience, as will participating in local trading schemes, whether involving local currencies or goods and services directly.
As with all elements of the defense we implement, it will need to be multi-layered and integrated into the overall defense strategy.
The elite intends to kill off many of us – as the depopulation measures within the coup, including the destruction of the global economy throwing 500,000,000 people out of work and killing millions as a result, as well as the ‘injectables’ program already killing tens of thousands, make perfectly clear – and enslave the rest.
For an integrated strategy to defeat the elite coup, see the ‘We Are Human, We Are Free’ campaign, which has 29 strategic goals for defeating the coup including meaningful engagement with police and military forces to assist them to understand and resist, rather than support, the elite agenda.
One of the interesting challenges about the current ‘Covid-19 Crisis’ is that it continues to very successfully distract most people from awareness of the deeper agenda:
The Global Elite’s ‘Great Reset’ and related initiatives, such as that discussed above in relation to money.
Hence, apart from the perennial problem of raising awareness and mobilizing resistance among those still believing the elite-driven propaganda, we face two key strategic hazards.
The first hazard is a longstanding one: While virtually all people believe that elite agents – in this case, governments – are controlling events, much ‘resistance’ will focus on begging governments, through such things as petitions and protest demonstrations, to ‘fix it’ for us.
The elite has long dissipated our dissent by having us direct it at one or other of its agents.
How to Brainwash Society | Kate Wand
“Free men in a free society must learn not only to recognize this stealthy attack on mental integrity and fight it, but must learn also what there is inside man’s mind that makes him vulnerable to this attack, what it is that makes him, in many cases, actually long for a way out of the responsibilities that republican democracy and maturity place on him.”
And while we are not using our occasional large rallies to inform people how to resist powerfully every day of their life, these rallies are a waste of time whatever solidarity they build in the short term.
History is categorically instructive on that point.
A second strategic hazard we face is that resistance to the ‘vaccine’ and the ‘vaccine’ passport might be ‘successful’ (in the sense that concerted actions stall some government implementation of some measures in relation to these two initiatives) and leave most people believing that they have ‘won’, while the deeper agenda remains in the shadows with virtually no-one resisting.
It is important, therefore, that those who are aware of the deeper agenda continue to provide opportunities for others to become aware of this too and the fundamental threat it poses to us all while also sharing how we can resist its key dimensions in a way that makes a difference.
It is not enough to complain about elite agents, such as governments, the medical and pharmaceutical industries, and the corporate media.
We must strategically resist the elite coup itself with actions such as those in the 7 Days Campaign to Resist The Great Reset before we find ourselves locked in a technocratic prison without the free-willed minds necessary to analyze, critique, plan and act.
This Is How Your ‘Aura’ Affects Your Health & Those Around You + Magnetic Fields Of The Human Body And Their Functions & 13 Signs You Are Experiencing A Spiritual Awakening October 17 2021 | From: CollectiveEvolution / SitsShow / TheUnboundedSpirit
An ‘aura’ field can be defined as a luminous glow or radiation that surrounds a person’s body, almost like a halo. Ancient depictions of religious and spiritual figures often feature this aura, but today, modern science is discovering that we are all, in fact, surrounded by this type of field, and it can actually affect the way we feel.
We know that energy cannot be seen with the naked human eye, which is why attempts to measure invisible phenomena scientifically are often greeted with harsh criticism, but thanks to the groundbreaking work of dedicated scientists from all over the world, the concept of non-material science is starting to become accepted in the mainstream.
This refers to the idea that the physical material reality we perceive with our senses isn’t the only reality that’s available for us to study in a modern day scientific manner.
“The day science begins to study non-physical phenomena, it will make more progress in one decade than in all the previous centuries of its existence.”
– Nikola Tesla
Before getting into how our aura can affect us and those around us, I’d like to mention that human thoughts, intentions, feelings and emotions - ‘factors associated with consciousness’ - have been shown to have a direct effect on and correlation to our physical material world.
"The stream of knowledge is heading toward a non-mechanical reality; the universe begins to look more like a great thought than like a great machine.
Mind no longer appears to be an accidental intruder into the realm of matter, we ought rather hail it as the creator and governor of the realm of matter. Get over it, and accept the inarguable conclusion. The universe is immaterial-mental and spiritual."
- Sir James Jeans (“The Mental Universe” ; Nature 436:29,2005)
To see a more in-depth explanation of how factors associated with consciousness are intertwined with our physical material reality you can read this article:
Work by the brilliant scientists over at the Institute of HeartMath can perhaps best shed light on one aspect of human aura. A large portion of their research has investigated heart and brain interaction.
Researchers have examined how the heart and brain communicate with each other and how that affects our consciousness and the way in which we perceive our world. For example, when a person is feeling really positive emotions like gratitude, love, or appreciation, the heart beats out a certain message.
Because the heart beats out the largest electromagnetic field produced in the body, researchers are able to gather significant data from it. According to Rolin McCratey, Ph.D, and Director of Research at the Institute:
"Emotional information is actually included and modulated into these fields. By learning to shift our emotions, we are changing the information coded into the magnetic fields that are radiated by the heart, and that can impact those around us.
We are fundamentally and deeply connected with each other and the planet itself, and what we do individually really does count and matters."
Did you know that your heart emits electromagnetic fields which change according to your emotions, or that the human heart has a magnetic field that can be measured up to several feet away from the human body?
Did you know that positive emotions create physiological benefits in your body, or that you can boost your immune system by conjuring up positive emotions?
Did you know that negative emotions can create nervous system chaos, and that positive emotions do the complete opposite?
The bottom line is, feelings of love, gratitude, and compassion – any positive feelings whatsoever – have a larger impact than we could have ever imagined.
The Spiritual Heart - is in a way a little like a smart phone, invisibly connecting us to a large network of information. It is through an unseen energy that the heart emits that humans are profoundly connected to all living things. The energy of the heart literally links us to each other. Every person's heart contributes to a 'collective field environment.' This short video explains the importance of this connection and how we each add to this collective energy field. The energetic field of the heart even connects us with the earth itself.
It’s fascinating to consider how the heart’s magnetic field might be interacting with and affecting other people, and it leads me to wonder if perhaps the electromagnetic fields around our bodies are somehow connected to that of the Earth.
What type of effect, if any, might the information coded into our electromagnetic fields have on the information coded into the Earth’s field? It’s all very exciting, and there are so many questions still left to answer.
Below is a video of Dr. Konstantin Korotkov, a professor of physics at St. Petersburg State Technical University, who believes that our positive and negative thoughts each have a different impact on our surrounding environment.
A Russian scientist is trying to convince people they can change the world simply by using their own energy. He claims that thinking in a certain way can have a positive or negative effect on the surrounding environment. "We are developing the idea that our consciousness is part of the material world and that with our consciousness we can directly influence our world," said Dr. Konstantin Korotkov, a professor of physics at St. Petersburg State Technical University. To bridge our understanding of the unseen world of energy, scientific experiments are being carried out using a technique called bioelectrophotography. The assumption is that we are constantly emitting energy. Bioelectrophotography aims to capture these energy fields seen as a light around the body -- or what some people would call your aura.
He has developed a scientific device based on the ancient Chinese system of energy meridians which measures the bio-energy of living organisms, as well as the environment.
The device, called the GDV, uses a completely painless electrical current applied to the fingertips - taking less than one millisecond to work - to highlight potential health (physiological and psycho-emotional) abnormalities.
The body’s response is measured in the form of an “electron cloud” which is composed of light energy photons. The glow of this discharge is invisible to the human eye (humans can only see one percent of the entire electromagnetic spectrum) and is captured by an optical CCD camera system and then translated into a digital computer.
In the GDV software programs, the glow from the different sectors of the finger images is projected onto the shape of a human body in correspondence with the location of the different organs and systems. As a result, it produces energy field images that allow for intuitive analysis of the physiological level of human body functioning.
It has been approved and received registration as a routine medical diagnostic device by the Russian Ministry of Health upon recommendation of the Russian Academy of Sciences.
According to Eastern metaphysical theories of Ayurvedic Indian medicine, there are seven “Chakras,” or integrated energy centers, correlated with physical, mental, emotional, and spiritual well-being.
These energy Chakras are positioned or embedded into the spinal column at various locations beginning with the coccyx, rising all the way to the crown of the head.
Dr. Pradeep B. Deshpande, a Professor Emeritus at the Department of Chemical Engineering at the University of Louisville, explains:
"Each Chakra is considered to resonate at a different frequency level. With new BioWell software, it is now possible to quantitatively estimate the energy of Chakras and graphically display their level of activation, and indicate whether this level of activation is above or below the level found from large numbers of subjects.
"Each individual sector or portion of the fingertip is connected energetically with specific organs and organ systems such as the respiratory system. When the data of the 10 individual BIO-grams are collated and interpolated, an image of the entire full body energy field is created.
An example of the full body energy field from a healthy and unhealthy/emotionally unbalanced individual are shown above. The gaps and the reduced emissions and out-of-balance Chakras for the unhealthy individual are quite obvious."
Please keep in mind that clinical studies of more than 10,000 patient cases with various health challenges have also been well documented in Russia.
How to See a Human Aura in 5 Minutes
Magnetic Fields Of The Human Body And Their Functions
Manly P. Hall is a philosopher and mystic from the early 20th century. Some view him as a pillar of esoteric knowledge, while others think he was part of a dark cabal that has infiltrated Masonic lodges throughout the globe.
Hall did not work his way up the degrees as most Masons do. Instead, he was given an honorary 33rd degree after establishing himself as a learned scholar in many fields.
While it is all too easy to label someone "evil" purely for an association to a group that has overall been corrupted to a large extent, those who truly seek knowledge and wisdom beyond armchair judgments can see past a book's cover, for the wisdom within its pages.
Those who dismiss what Hall had to say are the ones who miss out on the knowledge he has to offer but if one can look past appearances, then a wealth of information can be claimed.
I think that knowledge is everywhere, even held within the hands of some of the most diabolical people on the planet. But in receiving these gems of wisdom, we need not consider ourselves evil or supporting those who act insidiously.
Knowledge is amoral. When used in the right hands it can be a powerful tool. but in the wrong hands (usually the ignorant), it can be a destructive weapon. But for the one who foolishly dismisses wisdom because of an appearance alone, they will suffer the pitfalls of their own prejudice.
But for the truly discerning, the ability to absorb data from any source is the key to personal growth and evolution. To the discerning mind, wisdom can be found everywhere, but it will remain hidden behind a veil if we never explore it.
As such, if you have prejudices about Manly P. Hall because of his association with Freemasonry, I ask you to set them aside and open your heart and mind to hear what he has to say.
And I will share that the concept of magnetic fields affecting the body is hardly new and has been well established for years. Our energetic body connects directly to the Earth-mother in many ways, earthing and geomagnetic fields are some of them. Both of these play an important role in restoring the health of mind, body, and soul.
Magnetic Fields of the Human Body and Their Functions is the title of an interview with Manly P. Hall, a Freemason who was very knowledgeable in esoteric teachings.
I do not agree with everything that Manly teaches; however, in the interview, he shared a lot of very important information about energy fields and the human body, so if you want to learn some empowering information about energy fields and the human body, I highly encourage you to watch and listen to the interview.
Manly Palmer Hall (March 18, 1901 – August 29, 1990) was a Canadian-born author and mystic. He is perhaps most famous for his work The Secret Teachings of All Ages: An Encyclopedic Outline of Masonic, Hermetic, Qabbalistic and Rosicrucian Symbolical Philosophy, which is widely regarded as his magnum opus, and which he published at the age of 25 (or 27, 1928)
He has been widely recognized as a leading scholar in the fields of religion, mythology, mysticism, and the occult.
Carl Jung, when writing Psychology and Alchemy, borrowed material from Hall’s private collection.
In 1934, Hall founded the Philosophical Research Society (PRS) in Los Angeles, California, dedicating it to an idealistic approach to the solution of human problems.
The PRS claims to be non-sectarian and entirely free from educational, political, or ecclesiastical control, and the Society’s programs stress the need for the integration of philosophy, religion, and science into one system of instruction.
The PRS Library, a public facility devoted to source materials in obscure fields, has many rare and scarce items now impossible to obtain elsewhere.
In 1973 (47 years after writing The Secret Teachings of All Ages), Hall was recognized as a 33º Mason (the highest honor conferred by the Supreme Council of the Scottish Rite), at a ceremony held at PRS on December 8th, despite never being initiated into the physical craft.
In his over 70-year career, Hall delivered approximately 8,000 lectures in the United States and abroad, authored over 150 books and essays, and wrote countless magazine articles.
Manly Hall: Magnetic Fields of the Human Body and Their Functions
13 Signs You Are Experiencing A Spiritual Awakening
Here are 13 crystal clear signs that you’re experiencing a spiritual awakening:
1. You desire less stuff and more simplicity. You realize that the less you possess the more unburdened your psyche is, and instead of wanting to acquire material wealth, you are seeking to find your inner wealth.
2. You are drawn to mind-expanding books. You don’t read books anymore just in order to entertain yourself when you feel like having nothing better to do, and choose to read those books that help you to become the greatest version of yourself.
3. You spend more time alone in silence. You go for solitary walks in nature and meditate in silence so as to reconnect and make peace with yourself.
4. You eat healthier and take better care of your body. You start treating your body like it’s sacred, listening to its wisdom, and keeping it as healthy as you can.
5. You feel more connected to nature and all living beings. You recognize the interconnectedness and interdependence of all beings and feel a sense of oneness with everyone and everything.
6. You feel compassion about the suffering in the world. You become aware of how much pain there is all around you and do your best to alleviate it in any way you can.
7. You take responsibility in your hands. You realize that there’s no point in having a victim’s mentality and blaming others for what’s going wrong in your life, and you take conscious action to shape your destiny.
8. You are mindful of your actions. You’ve discovered the tremendous power of your actions and you make sure to act in ways that don’t negatively affect yourself and the world.
9. The past and the future lose control over your life. You understand that the past and future don’t truly exist, and the only moment that was, is, and will ever be is the present.
10. You have a deep yearning for meaning. You comprehend that living a normal life is empty of meaning and purpose, and you seek to create your own path in your life’s journey.
11. You are more creative. You feel an increased desire to creatively express yourself and turn your dreams into reality.
12. You expose your true self to the world. You’ve dropped your social masks of pretense and you are open to communicate your innermost thoughts and feelings with others without feeling guilty or ashamed.
13. You have a loss of interest in competition. You realize that competition brings conflict and suffering, and that the only way to live in harmony with others is by having a loving and compassionate attitude towards them.
Someone Else’s Country - The Neoliberal Revolution In New Zealand October 16 2021 | From: AlisterBerry
The Globalist's test case trial of Corporatisation: In the early 1980s a group of free market economists came to dominate policy at the New Zealand Treasury.
With the election of the Labour Party in 1984 and the appointment of Roger Douglas as finance minister, the new right elite took power and began relentlessly and ruthlessly turning New Zealand into their vision of the model free market state.
Many Scientific “Truths” Are, In Fact, False + A Scientist Explains Why "Everything Is Fucked" October 15 2021 | From: QZ / Inverse / Various
In 2005, John Ioannidis, a professor of medicine at Stanford University, published a paper, “Why most published research findings are false,” mathematically showing that a huge number of published papers must be incorrect.
He also looked at a number of well-regarded medical research findings, and found that, of 34 that had been retested, 41% had been contradicted or found to be significantly exaggerated.
Since then, researchers in several scientific areas have consistently struggled to reproduce major results of prominent studies. By some estimates, at least 51% - and as much as 89% - of published papers are based on studies and experiments showing results that cannot be reproduced.
Researchers have recreated prominent studies from several scientific fields and come up with wildly different results.
And psychology has become something of a poster child for the “reproducibility crisis” since Brian Nosek, a psychology professor at the University of Virginia, coordinated a Reproducibility Initiative project to repeat 100 psychological experiments, and could only successfully replicate 40%.
Now, an attempt to replicate another key psychological concept (ego depletion: the idea that willpower is finite and can be worn down with overuse) has come up short.
Martin Hagger, psychology professor at Curtin University in Australia, led researchers from 24 labs in trying to recreate a key effect, but found nothing. Their findings are due to be published in Perspectives on Psychological Science in the coming weeks.
Why Are They Getting it Wrong?
No one is accusing the psychologists behind the initial experiments of intentionally manipulating their results. But some of them may have been tripped up by one or more of the various aspects of academic science that inadvertently encourage bias.
For example, there’s massive academic pressure to publish in journals, and these journals tend to publish exciting studies that show strong results.
"Journals favor novelty, originality, and verification of hypotheses over robustness, stringency of method, reproducibility, and falsifiability,” Hagger tells Quartz.
“Therefore researchers have been driven to finding significant effects, finding things that are novel, testing them on relatively small samples.”
This has created a publication bias, where studies that show strong, positive results get published, while similar studies that come up with no significant effects sit at the bottom of researchers’ drawers.
Meanwhile, in cases where researchers have access to large amounts of data, there’s a dangerous tendency to hunt for significant correlations. Researchers can thus convince themselves that they’ve spotted a meaningful connection, when in fact such connections are totally random.
A Sign of Strength
The idea that papers are publishing false results might sound alarming but the recent crisis doesn’t mean that the entire scientific method is totally wrong. In fact, science’s focus on its own errors is a sign that researchers are on exactly the right path.
Ivan Oransky, producer of the blog Retraction Watch, which tracks retractions printed in journals, tells Quartz that ultimately, the alarm will lead to increased rigor.
"There’s going to be some short-term and maybe mid-term pain as all of this shakes out, but that’s how you move forward,” he says. “It’s like therapy - if you never get angry in therapy, you’re probably not pushing hard enough. If you never find mistakes, or failures to reproduce in your field, you’re probably not asking the right questions.”
For psychologists, who have seen so many results crumble in such a short space of time, the replication crisis could be disheartening. But it also presents a chance to be at the forefront of developing new policies.
Ioannidis tells Quartz that he views the most recent psychology reproducibility failures as a positive.
"It shows how much effort and attention has gone towards improving the accuracy of the knowledge produced,” he says.
“Psychology is a discipline that has always been very strong methodologically and was at the forefront at describing various biases and better methods. Now they are again taking the lead in improving their replication record.”
For example, there’s already widespread discussion within psychology about pre-registering trials (which would prevent researchers from shifting their methods so as to capture more eye-catching results), making data and scientific methods more open, making sample sizes larger and more representative, and promoting collaboration.
Dorothy Bishop, a professor of developmental neuropsychology at Oxford University, tells Quartz that several funding bodies and journals seem to be receptive to these ideas and that, once one or two adopt such policies, she expects them to spread rapidly.
Doing Science on Science
Each scientific field must adopt its own methods of ensuring accuracy. But ultimately, this self-reflection is a key part of the scientific process.
As Bishop notes, “Science has proved itself to be an incredibly powerful method.” And yet there’s always room for further advancement.
"There’s never an end point,” says Bishop. “We’re always groping towards the next thing. Sometimes science does disappear down the wrong path for a bit before it corrects itself.”
For Nosek, who led the re-testing of 100 psychology papers, the current focus on reproducibility is simply part of the scientific process.
"Science isn’t about truth and falsity, it’s about reducing uncertainty,” he says.
“Really this whole project is science on science: Researchers doing what science is supposed to do, which is be skeptical of our own process, procedure, methods, and look for ways to improve.”
A Scientist Explains Why "Everything Is Fucked"
But that doesn't mean we should give up.
Between the duping of the American public from Big Sugar, shocking moral fact-checks on some of history’s most groundbreaking experiments, and failure after failure of science research we’ve accepted as truth, science is teetering on the verge of being, well, fucked.
Those fears drove University of Oregon psychologist Sanjay Srivastava, Ph.D., to design the fictitious course “Everything Is Fucked.” The imagined ten-week seminar, written up as a syllabus on his blog, is Srivastava’s version of a reality check for young scientists:
Do you seriously think you’re going to cure the world’s diseases and elevate humanity through technology? You won’t - because everything is fucked.
But that’s the problem with science, Srivastava argues: We’re so intent on focusing on the results that we don’t see the path toward finding these results, and that’s fucked up. Would CRISPR have become 2015’s biological buzzword if academic journal editors hadn’t decided gene editing papers were worth publishing?
What else did we find out (or not find out) about Mars that wasn’t deemed publishable? Can we even trust the data showing the pandas and whales are thriving? We don’t know, and not only is it fucked up, it raises questions about the foundations of modern science altogether.
The “everything” in “Everything Is Fucked,” Srivastava explains, refers to scientific methods, the ways researchers acquire funding, the universities that support research, and our channels for publishing and disseminating scientific knowledge.
He defines something as fucked if:
"It presents hard conceptual challenges to which implementable, real-world solutions for working scientists are either not available or routinely ignored in practice.”
For Srivastava, the way we discover and share scientific knowledge is so riddled with these problems that there’s no way we can fully trust what we believe to be true.
Take week eight’s theme, “Scientific publishing is fucked.” In the science community, a published paper in an academic journal is professional currency; everyone’s striving to collect them, and anyone who doesn’t have one is professionally broke. Academic journals - big-name, respected publications like Nature, Science, and the New England Journal of Medicine - are academia’s banks.
In Srivastava’s view, this is troublesome, because it means they’re in control. “The problem is, there’s this incentive to find things that meet the publishable standards,” he says, referring to science that shows positive results, like a drug that promises a cure.
If journals only pay attention to the “success” stories, it means they’re ignoring all of the research that doesn’t produce sexy results. In turn, the temptation to falsify results and fudge graphs only grows stronger.
Scientists behind the unsexy studies are screwed: If they don’t get published, they don’t get tenure at research institutions or grants to continue their work, and their scientific pursuits inevitably come to a standstill.
But does their work deserve to come to an end? Most of those studies are not “wrong” or “useless,” because negative results are often just as useful for advancing scientific discovery as positive ones.
But they aren’t treated that way because they don’t make for good publishing.
"That’s really where it starts: Publication decisions becoming hinged, not on whether it’s a good question, but on whether the answer comes out, one way or another,” Srivastava says.
The cycle continues, and fucked-ness persists.
He has other, finer bones to pick. In week six, he discusses the issue of replicability, which is the idea that an experiment needs to be repeatable. If it’s not, the data it produces is, statistically, a one-off, and therefore pretty much useless.
And yet, there are an alarming number of scientific studies out there that are not replicable, cited by everyone from Big Pharma to the federal government.
He claims that the scientific profession as a whole is fucked in week ten because the pressure on scientists to publish more papers, faster, leads to smaller sample sizes, which in turn lead to weaker, less statistically sound results.
The scientists that design better, more thorough experiments may be doing better science, but because they aren’t publishing as many studies, they’re ultimately viewed as less accomplished.
"Where do truth and publishability depart?” Srivastava ponders. “When it comes time to hire people, we’re still going to hire someone with more papers.”
If it sounds like a massive clusterfuck, then Srivastava has made his point. Does that mean the pursuit of science in 2016 is a completely futile endeavor?
No, Srivastava surprisingly argues. Look to week seven - “Interlude” - for a scientific salvation, right about the time when his fictional students consider switching to a liberal arts degree, which can be distilled to this: Sure, everything is fucked, but it’s up to the next generation of scientists to make science less so.
There’s hope, and the replicability crisis might ironically offer that by being a cautionary tale for the arrogance of science.
The rest of us should be at least calmed by the fact that sexy results are garnering more upturned eyebrows and head scratching than ever before.
Social Engineering - The War On The Higher Mind Of Humans: Here’s Why You Should Consider Converting Your Music To A=432 Hz October 14 2021 | From: CollectiveEvolution “If you want to find the secrets of the universe, think in terms of energy, frequency and vibration.” - Nikola Tesla
“What we have called matter is energy, whose vibration has been so lowered as to be perceptible to the senses. There is no matter.” – Albert Einstein
Tesla said it. Einstein agreed. Science proved it. It is a known fact that everything - including our own bodies - is made up of energy vibrating at different frequencies. That being said, it seems logical to wonder, can sound frequencies affect us?
It would appear that this is the case. Frequencies affect frequencies, much like mixing ingredients with other ingredients affects the overall flavour of a meal. The way frequencies affect the physical world has been demonstrated through various experiments, such as the science of Cymatics and water memory.
Cymatics illustrate that when sound frequencies move through a particular medium such as water, air, or sand, they directly alter the vibration of matter. Below are pictures demonstrating how particles adjust to different frequencies.
We all hold a certain vibrational frequency, and our bodies are estimated to be about 70% water. Given the above experiments, it stands to reason that musical frequencies could also alter our own vibrational state.
Every expression through sound, emotion, or thought holds a specific frequency which influences everything around it - much like a single drop of water can create a larger ripple effect in a large body of water.
Music Frequency
With this concept in mind, let us bring our attention to the frequency of the music we listen to. Most music worldwide has been tuned to A=440 Hz since the International Standards Organization (ISO) promoted it in 1953.
However, when looking at the vibratory nature of the universe, it’s possible that this pitch is disharmonious with the natural resonance of nature and may generate negative effects on human behaviour and consciousness.
Some theories (although unproven) even suggest that the Nazi regime had been in favor of adopting this pitch as standard after conducting scientific research to determine which range of frequencies best induce fear and aggression.
Whether or not the conspiracy is factual, interesting studies have pointed towards the benefits of tuning music to A=432 Hz instead.
When our atoms and DNA start to resonate in harmony with the spiralling pattern of nature, our sense of connection to nature is said to be magnified. The number 432 is also reflected in ratios of the sun, Earth, and moon, as well as the precession of the equinoxes, the Great Pyramid of Egypt, Stonehenge, and the Sri Yantra, among many other sacred sites.
“From my own observations, some of the harmonic overtone partials of A=432hz 12T5 appear to line up to natural patterns and also the resonance of solitons. Solitons need a specific range to form into the realm of density and span from the micro to the macro cosmos. Solitons are not only found in water mechanics, but also in the ion-acoustic breath between electrons and protons.”
Another interesting factor to consider is that the A=432 Hz tuning correlates with the color spectrum and chakra system, while the A=440 Hz does not.
“The Solar Spectrum & The Cosmic Keyboard
All of the frequencies in the spectrum are related in octaves, from gamma rays to subharmonics. These colors and notes are also related to our Chakras and other important energy centers. I
f we are to understand that… Chakras are connected to the Seven Rays of the Solar Spectrum, then the notes and frequencies we use for the same should be the same.
A432 Hz is the tuning of the Cosmic Keyboard or Cosmic Pitchfork, as opposed to the A440 Hz modern ‘standard.’ It places C# at 136.10 Hz ‘Om,’ which is the main note of the Sitar in classical Indian music and the pitch of the chants of the Tibetan monks, who tell us, ‘It comes from nature.'”
– Dameon Keller
Exploring The Difference
Let’s explore the experiential difference between A=440 Hz and A=432 Hz. Music lovers and musicians have noticed that music tuned in A=432 Hz is not only more beautiful and harmonious to the ears, but it also induces a more inward experience that is felt inside the body at the spine and heart.
Music tuned in A=440 Hz was felt as a more outward and mental experience, and was felt at the side of the head which projected outwards.
Audiophiles have also stated that A=432hz music seems to be non-local and can fill an entire room, whereas A=440hz can be perceived as directional or linear in sound propagation.
“The ancients tuned their instruments at an A of 432 Hz instead of 440 Hz – and for a good reason. There are plenty of music examples on the internet that you can listen to, in order to establish the difference for yourself. Attuning the instrument to 432 Hz results in a more relaxing sound, while 440 Hz slightly tenses up to body.
This is because 440 Hz is out of tune with both macrocosmos and microcosmos. 432 Hz on the contrary is in tune. To give an example of how this is manifested microcosmically: our breath (0,3 Hz) and our pulse (1,2 Hz) relate to the frequency of the lower octave of an A of 432 Hz (108 Hz) as 1:360 and 1:90.”
“The overall sound difference was noticeable, the 432 version sounding warmer, clearer and instantly sounded more listenable but the 440 version felt tighter, with more aggressive energy.”
– Anonymous guitarist
The video below was created by someone with no opinion on whether A=432 Hz or A=440 Hz is better. Therefore, the way both versions of the melody is played is unbiased. It is up to us to tune in and feel which one feels more harmonious to us!
I personally have enjoyed many bands, artists, and styles of music even though they were tuning in A=440 hz, however, after comparing a few songs in both A=432 hz and A=440 hz I can say I definitely feel and hear the difference.
I wouldn’t say that my experience of 440hz music has turned me into an aggressive person, but I can understand how an entire population being exposed to music that is more mind directed as opposed to heart directed - not to mention all of the materialistic and ego-driven lyrics in most popular music - is a perfect combination to maintain a more discordant frequency and state of consciousness within humanity.
This is, of course, simply my own opinion.
“Music based on C=128hz (C note in concert A=432hz) will support humanity on its way towards spiritual freedom. The inner ear of the human being is built on C=128 hz.” – Rudolph Steiner
I cannot state with complete certainty that every idea suggested in this article is 100% accurate, nor am I an expert on the subject. I simply gathered interesting information from others who researched this issue more deeply.
For this reason, if we are looking for scientific validation for these claims, I suggest that we each do our own research on the matter with an open yet discerning mind. Perhaps more research on this topic will be done in the near future to help explain the phenomenon.
I believe we all possess intuition and the ability to observe without judgment, which can be more useful than resorting to ridicule when exposed to information that has not yet been accepted by the scientific community.
It is therefore up to us to tone down the urge to jump to conclusions and instead EXPERIENCE the difference between A=440 Hz and A=432 Hz. To do so, we need to listen with our entire body and a neutral awareness as opposed to with our mental ideas, judgments, and preconceptions.
If you are interested in changing your music’s pitch to A=432 hz, click here to learn how to do it.
What Seven Creepy Patents Reveal About Facebook October 13 2021 | From: NewYorkTimes / Various
Facebook has filed thousands of patent applications since it went public in 2012. One of them describes using forward-facing cameras to analyze your expressions and detect whether you’re bored or surprised by what you see on your feed.
Another contemplates using your phone’s microphone to determine which TV show you’re watching. Others imagine systems to guess whether you’re getting married soon, predict your socioeconomic status and track how much you’re sleeping.
A review of hundreds of Facebook’s patent applications reveals that the company has considered tracking almost every aspect of its users’ lives: where you are, who you spend time with, whether you’re in a romantic relationship, which brands and politicians you’re talking about. The company has even attempted to patent a method for predicting when your friends will die.
Facebook has said repeatedly that its patent applications should not be taken as indications of future product plans.
“Most of the technology outlined in these patents has not been included in any of our products, and never will be,” Allen Lo, a Facebook vice president and deputy general counsel, and the company’s head of intellectual property, said in an email.
Taken together, Facebook’s patents show a commitment to collecting personal information, despite widespread public criticism of the company’s privacy policies and a promise from its chief executive to “do better.”
“A patent portfolio is a map of how a company thinks about where its technology is going,” said Jason M. Schultz, a law professor at New York University.
Here are seven Facebook patent applications that show how the company has contemplated gathering and exploiting your personal information.
Reading Your Relationships
One patent application discusses predicting whether you’re in a romantic relationship using information such as how many times you visit another user’s page, the number of people in your profile picture and the percentage of your friends of a different gender.
Another proposes using your posts and messages to infer personality traits. It describes judging your degree of extroversion, openness or emotional stability, then using those characteristics to select which news stories or ads to display.
U.S. PATENT NO. 9,740,752 Determining user personality characteristics from social networking system communications and characteristics
This patent application describes using your posts and messages, in addition to your credit card transactions and location, to predict when a major life event, such as a birth, death or graduation, is likely to occur.
Another considers analyzing pictures to create a unique camera “signature” using faulty pixels or lens scratches. That signature could be used to figure out that you know someone who uploads pictures taken on your device, even if you weren’t previously connected.
Or it might be used to guess the “affinity” between you and a friend based on how frequently you use the same camera.
This patent application explores using your phone microphone to identify the television shows you watched and whether ads were muted. It also proposes using the electrical interference pattern created by your television power cable to guess which show is playing.
Another patent application discusses tracking your weekly routine and sending notifications to other users of deviations from the routine. In addition, it describes using your phone’s location in the middle of the night to establish where you live.
This patent proposes correlating the location of your phone to locations of your friends’ phones to deduce whom you socialize with most often. It also proposes monitoring when your phone is stationary to track how many hours you sleep.
In some cases, companies file patents defensively, to beat their rivals to a new technology, even if they have no intention of using it.
While that could be the case for some of Facebook’s patents, many of them imagine new ways to collect, analyze and use personal information and package it for advertisers - a process that is essential to the company’s business model. In the first quarter of 2018, almost 99 percent of Facebook’s revenue came from advertising.
As long as Facebook keeps collecting personal information, we should be wary that it could be used for purposes more insidious than targeted advertising, including swaying elections or manipulating users’ emotions, said Jennifer King, the director of consumer privacy at the Center for Internet and Society at Stanford Law School.
“There could be real consequences,” she said.
Other technology companies have filed unsettling patent applications, too. They include Amazon’s wristbands for tracking warehouse employees and the Google teddy bear equipped with a camera and a microphone.
But with more than two billion monthly active users, most of whom share their thoughts and feelings on the platform, Facebook is amassing our personal details on an unprecedented scale.
That isn’t likely to change, said Siva Vaidhyanathan, a professor of media studies at the University of Virginia.
“I’ve seen no indication that Facebook has changed its commitment to watch everything we do, record everything we do and exploit everything we do,” he said.
The Globalization Of Media: A Failing Strike Force October 12 2021 | From: JonRappoport
I begin this piece with three quotes from my work-in-progress, The Underground:
“There is a media metaphysics. Its basic principle states that nothing exists until it becomes information. Now we have a new twist: information only becomes real when it reaches a mind already attuned to it. In other words, the tree falling in the forest makes a sound only if a user/consumer who wants a tree to fall receives video and audio of the event…”
“Information can be dressed up a thousand different ways. But it tends to have an ‘elastic’ quality. By that I mean you eventually get to see the person who dressed it up. That’s a problem for chronic liars who inhabit the press. They expose themselves, even though they don’t want to. It takes a surprisingly small push to expose the whole operation. This is happening now, right in front of our eyes.”
“The basis of big media is theater. News is theater. Its directors and producers think they’re doing a first-rate job. But they’re sadly mistaken. Gaps and obfuscations are growing larger. The outright non-sequiturs and gibberish are becoming more apparent. The audience is wising up to the farce. Who are these fools who direct the news?
They’re simply people who want to sell their souls and have found an elite buyer. But that transaction doesn’t contain any guarantees about shelf life. Mainstream news is decaying, and the expiration date is approaching. Like civilizations, the petty princes of information rise and fall…”
Globalized media. It’s nice plan. Let’s examine it.
The new technocratic media is based on profiling users. There is no impactful news unless each member of the audience is surveilled and analyzed on the basis of what he already likes and wants.
Shocking? It’s to be expected. How else would technocrats parlay the untold hours they’ve spent sizing up their consumers/users?
Several years ago, I wrote:
“Tech blather has already begun, since Jeff Bezos, CEO of Amazon, bought the Washington Post at a fire sale. Jeff Genius will invent new ways to transmit the news to ‘people on the go’ and make the Post a smashing success. Mobile devices. Multiple platforms.
Digital taking over from print. Ads customized to fit readers’ interests (profiling). News stories customized to fit readers’ interests (more profiling).”
In other words, non-news. If you thought media were irrelevant and deceptive before, you haven’t seen anything. The “new news” will create millions of virtual bubbles in which profiled users can float contentedly, under the cozy cottage roofs of their favorite little separate paradigms.
The tech giant Apple has waded into this territory with an app that will deliver news to users. Yahoo:
“Apple News, part of the upcoming iOS 9 operating system, aims to be the primary news source for users of the iPhone and iPad… Apple says its news app ‘follows over a million topics and pulls relevant stories based on your specific interests’…
Joshua Benton of the Nieman Journalism Lab said the app will be important because ‘through the awesome power of default, Apple distribution puts it in an entirely other league. This [news] app will be on hundreds of millions of devices within 24 hours of its debut’.”
Translation: Profiling their users down to their toenails, Apple will present them with virtual bubbles of news they want to see and read.
Not just one overall presentation for all; no, different “news outlets” for Apple’s audiences.
This introduces a whole new layer of mind control.
“You’re an Obama fan? Here are stories confirming your belief in the Prophet.”
“You want neo-con on the rocks with a conservative Republican twist? Here’s some war footage that’ll warm your heart.”
“Do you believe ‘government gridlock’ is our biggest concern? Congress can’t get anything done? We’ve got headlines for that from here to the moon.”
“Tuned into celeb gossip? Here’s your world in three minutes.”
The idea: convince users, one day at a time, that what they already believe is important IS the news of the day.
It’s Decentralized Centralization. One media giant carving its global audience up into little pieces and delivering them a whole host of different algorithmically appropriate lies and fluff and no-context psyops.
And for “fringe users?” “You’re doubtful about GMOs? Well, look at what Whole Foods is planning for their healthier produce section. Cheer up.” Nothing about Maui voters declaring a temporary ban on devastatingly toxic Monsanto/Dow experiments or the dangers of Roundup.
“You’re anti-vaccine? Sorry, you don’t count. You’re not a recognized demographic. But here’s a piece about a little unvaccinated boy who was involved in car crash on the I5.”
Does this sound like science fiction? It isn’t. It’s the mainstream look of the near-future. Search engines are already “personalizing” your inquiries. US ABC national news is climbing in the ratings because it’s giving viewers “lighter stories,” and spending less time on thorny issues like the Middle East.
The mainstream news business is desperately looking for audience; and treating every “user” as a profiled social-construct-bundle of superficial preferences is their answer.
“Mr. X, we’ve studied the little virtual bubble you live in, and now we can sell you your own special brand of truth.”
“Hello, audience. We’re going to pitch you on becoming full-fledged obsessed consumers, as if there is no other worthy goal in life - and then we’re going to profile you from top to bottom, to find out exactly what kind of obsessed consumer you are, so we can hit you and trigger you with information that uniquely stimulates your adrenal glands…”
The one-two punch.
Trey Gowdy Joins Trump and Gives a Great Mainstream Media Attack
Any actual event occurring in the world will be pre-digested by robot media editors and profilers, and then split up into variously programmed bits of information for different audiences.
Who cares what really happened? In the new world, there is no ‘what really happened’. That’s a gross misnomer. A faulty idea. A metaphysical error.
No, there is only a multi-forked media tongue that simultaneously spits out a dozen or a hundred variations of the same event…because different viewers want and expect different realities.
In 1984, Orwell’s Big Brother was issuing a single voice into the homes of the population. That was old-school. That was primitive technology. That was achieving unity by hammering unity into people’s skulls. This, now, is the frontier of unity through diversity.
“We want to make all of you into androids, through basic PR and propaganda and a pathetic excuse for education. However, we recognize you’ll become different varieties of androids, and we’ll serve that outcome with technological sophistication. Trust us. We care about what you prefer.”
User A: “Wow, did you see the coverage of the border war in Chula Vista?”
User B: “War? They had a fantastic exhibit of drones down there. At least a hundred different types. And then I watched an old WW2 movie about aerial combat.”
User C: “Chula Vista? They had a great food show. This woman made a lemon pie. I could practically taste it.”
User D: “That wasn’t a border war. It was a drill. And then afterwards, these cops gave a demonstration of all their gear. Vests, shields, communication devices, flash-bangs, auto rifles with silencers, batons. I watch drills all over the country. Love them.”
User E: “Chula Vista? The only thing I saw on the news was ‘sunny and mild’ this week. I watch all the weather channels. I love them.”
BUT when a Big One comes along, like the 2016 national election in the US, the separate tunes come together and ring as one. Then the overriding need to extend Globalism’s goals (in the person of Hillary Clinton) blot out every other priority.
Then the major media twist whatever they need to twist. Then it’s the same bubble for everyone.
One problem, though. Major media have been lanced thousands of times by alt news sites, and by Wikileaks and Project Veritas. This attack has exposed the truth and the Clinton crimes.
And alt news reflects the growing interest of the public in what’s actually happening on many fronts.
The technocratic plan for the news is failing.
It was a nice plan, but… It’s turning out to be a dud.
Alt media are forcing public awareness of one giant scandal after another: Hillary/Obama support for ISIS; pro-vaccine liars; the collapse of Obamacare; the GMO hustle; pesticide damage... on and on and on.
The result? Major media are being backed into a corner, where they must defend lies and build monolithic lies for EVERYONE all the time. The idea of creating separate news for each profiled user is collapsing.
Major media are playing defense against the rest of the world.
It’s quite a party. And it has no expiration date.
A final note: Trump, Wikileaks, Project Veritas, Drudge, and many alt news sites created a perfect storm in 2016, raining down on major media.
It was and is unprecedented.
The mainstream press has been exposed down to its roots, as never before. The lying, the collusion, the arrogant sense of entitlement, the desperation, the corruption - it’s all there to see, for anyone who has eyes and a few working brain cells.
Expect more to come, regardless of the outcome of the election. The train has really left the station…
Dear Mainstream Media…
You f**king suck! You’ve almost succeeded in destroying the 4th estate and you should be ashamed of yourselves.
This is why 94% of the American people don’t trust you. When are you going to get that through your thick skulls?
You lie, you smear, you ingratiate yourselves with wanton abandon.
Dear mainstream media: You’ve betrayed your profession, sacrificed its once sacred principles, and stabbed the American people in the back.
The Rise And Rise Of Control-Freak Government October 11 2021 | From: BreakingViews / Various
The ancient Greeks left us several words describing various forms of government: Democracy, Autocracy and Oligarchy, to give just three examples.
But there was one omission, probably because it describes a type of administration that the Greeks never envisaged. For want of a better term, I’ll call it control-freak government.
This is a form of government in which policy-makers, politicians and bureaucrats constantly devise new ways of controlling our behaviour on the pretext that they have to protect us from our own foolishness. Perhaps we could call it a bullyocracy.
Control-freak government is based on the supposition that we’re all basically incapable of making our own responsible decisions.
We need paternalistic minders and a suffocating regulatory regime to stop us from getting into trouble.
This busybody culture pervades our lives slowly and insidiously, eventually reaching the point where we become so accustomed to it that we assume it’s the natural order of things and accept restrictions on what we can do without a murmur of complaint.
In the meantime it restricts individual autonomy, erodes personal responsibility and piles needless extra costs on society.
One tiny example: Small-scale cheesemaker Biddy Fraser-Davies recently protested that at least half the $40,000 annual income from her four jersey cows gets swallowed up by government fees.
Fraser-Davies, who farms near Eketahuna, has been hounded for years by food safety officers from the Ministry for Primary Industries. This, incidentally, is the same government department that turns a blind eye to the large-scale, illegal dumping of fish.
Elderly women (Fraser-Davies is 74) are clearly a much more tempting target than big, hairy fishing companies . She says she was recently billed $10,000 for testing 10 of her cheeses and calculates the cost comes to $240 per kilo.
On radio recently, she recalled that after she featured on Country Calendar in 2009, the Food Safety Authority pounced within minutes because it had no record of her having filed a risk management plan. I suppose we should be impressed by the authority’s 24/7 vigilance (it was a Saturday night, after all), but this suggests an almost obsessive level of control-freakery.
To my knowledge no one ever fell sick or died from eating Fraser-Davies’ cheeses, unless she’s buried the bodies somewhere on her farm. Perhaps the MPI should send some men to start digging the place up.
To her credit, she refuses to be cowed by the public-sector commissars. This sets her apart from most timid New Zealand business owners, who keep their heads down and meekly comply. Presumably, getting offside with the enforcers is more trouble than it’s worth.
The MPI justifies its cheese-testing regime because there’s a theoretical risk of harmful pathogens. Eliminating risk can be used to justify all manner of bureaucratic meddling. It’s all part of the grand mission to create a perfect world where Nanny State keeps us all safe.
A priceless example was the edict that went out years ago forbidding brass bands from playing on the backs of trucks. I must have missed the news reports about hapless tuba players toppling from truck decks and being crushed under the wheels while playing God Rest Ye Merry Gentlemen in Christmas parades.
Perhaps I also missed hearing the anguished cries of builders and roofers plummeting from house rooftops. There must have been an epidemic of such deaths to justify the requirement that safety scaffolding now be erected around the roofs of houses under construction.
I'm told even chimney sweepers are now saying they can’t work without protective scaffolding, which can bump up the cost of the job from $200 to $1000.
It goes without saying there’s an element of risk in many undertakings. The crucial consideration should surely be whether the action taken to minimise risk is proportionate – or, to put it another way, whether the cost of trying to eliminate risk far outweighs any possible benefit.
Compulsory scaffolding around rooftops may have averted a few broken limbs, but at what cost to house owners and home buyers?
The police, too, have been captured by a control-freak mentality. Just look at their heavy-handed enforcement of liquor controls. Wellington Police have an “alcohol harm reduction officer” (how Big Brother is that?) who gives the impression of being on a moral crusade.
And while police numbers are stretched and burglars are able to strike with apparent impunity, there always seem to be enough officers to operate drink-drive checkpoints in the hope of nabbing some harmless mug who’s unwittingly had one glass of sauvignon blanc too many.
It’s another case of low-hanging fruit. Burglars are hard to catch; women on the way home from bowls, not so much.
Speaking of which, I wrote a column in this space roughly a year ago criticising the lower drink-drive limits introduced in 2014, which I predicted would catch out responsible, otherwise law-abiding people while hard-core recidivist drunk drivers would continue to behave as they always had.
I also said I would quite likely get pinged myself, since the new limits had made it much harder to judge when you were at risk of breaking the law.
My column attracted a pompous response from an overpaid poo-bah in the New Zealand Transport Agency. He wrote that there was no such thing as safe drink-driving, thus confirming what I’d suspected: that the objective of the law change was to deter us from drinking altogether.
But here’s the thing: road deaths have increased since drink-drive limits were lowered, from 293 in 2014 to 319 in 2015 and 263 so far this year compared with 253 at this time last year.
It’s a crude measure, admittedly, but it reminds us of what the economist Milton Friedman said about the folly of judging things by their intentions rather than their results.
Of course a few more country pubs have gone out of business in the meantime, because the people who previously socialised in them are terrified of having one too many and getting caught.
But why should the city-dwelling bureaucrats worry? They never drank in them anyway. And if they go one over the limit at a fashionable Thorndon café, they can just call a cab.
Theirs is a different world from the one inhabited by the people whose lives they seek to control.
Weather Weapons Are Real, They Have A Treaty To Regulate Them
October 10 2021| From: Geopolitics / Various
There is still a sizable portion of our society who cannot grasp the reality of weather altering devices and technologies which have made us all unsure about which weather is real, and which ones are not.
This poses a big problem for those who understand how these weather devices are being used, but want to inform the public about the impending danger of the draconian laws that have been legislated based on the false pretext of global warming.
Surely, Al Gore’s Inconvenient Truth movie and his green energy companies continue making money for the guy, but when the lie became impossible enough to sustain, they have begun using the more generic term, i.e. climate change.
Kilimanjaro Still Has Snow
One of the first glaring claims Gore makes is about Mount Kilimanjaro in Africa. He claims Africa’s tallest peak will be snow-free “within the decade.” Gore shows slides of Kilimanjaro’s peak in the 1970s versus today to conclude the snow is disappearing.
Well, it’s been a decade and, yes, there’s still snow on Kilimanjaro year-round. It doesn’t take a scientist to figure this out.
Climate does change, it’s been that way since the birth of our solar system, but the phrase is now synonymous to abnormal weather patterns, flash flooding, forest wildfires, and to some extent, even earthquakes, all of which could be the handiwork of highly covert government entities trying to justify their subsequent invasive policies.
All of these calamitous events can affect the economic productivity and greatly hamper the development of the targeted regions on the planet. Indeed, weather weapons are a very effective tool for geopolitical coercion.
The nations possessing these weather weapons agreed that they won’t be used in wars and geopolitical conflicts. But who can ever refuse the power to play like the mythical gods of thunder and lightning?
We are not only talking here about “cloud seeding” technologies like Wikipedia would like us to limit our understanding about weather warfare:
With much less success, the United States also dropped salt on the airbase during the siege of Khe Sanh in an attempt to reduce the fog that hindered air operations.
A research paper produced for the United States Air Force written in 1996 speculates about the future use of nanotechnology to produce “artificial weather”, clouds of microscopic computer particles all communicating with each other to form an intelligent fog that could be used for various purposes. “Artificial weather technologies do not currently exist… "
- Wikipedia (the trusted source...)
The above phrase, “Artificial weather technologies do not currently exist…” is in disagreement to the statement made by the US Air Force during a budget hearing for HAARP, like so:
HAARP, or High Altitude Auroral Research Program, is said to be an experimental electromagnetic wave propagator which could deliver radio signals in any desired frequencies with a twist of a button, to strike at any target. But as that US congressional hearing suggest, the Air Force is already using a more advanced version, they are now willing to abandon the existing HAARP site in Alaska.
There are, of course, radar systems mounted on mobile platforms which could emit high powered EM signals, and can be positioned in any of the 1,000 US military bases, for steering “weather disturbance” to any triangulated terrestrial and extraterrestrial targets.
The other side of this all-in-one ultrahigh powered radiobroadcast technology is to foster positive disposition, fry the electronics of an incoming ICBM, or MiRVs simultaneously, and render their thermonuclear/chemical warhead inert, and deliver controlled rainfall on arid deserts of Africa so that food abundance is assured at last.
Yes, the most versatile weather weapon is staring right in plain sight and is using that same technology still being used in the wireless broadcast industry today.
The only notable difference is that the weaponized version is using billion watts of sheer power which is very feasible just by transforming the transmission voltage from a few hundred volts into the range of hundreds of million volts which is what Tesla was actually playing with.
Consider three radar installations firing upward in a triangle configuration, all at the same time. Those three hot nodes will then experience high gas pressures, and as a result, their common center will then become the “low pressure area [LPA],” which will be news broadcasted by your weather channel as where the potential typhoon will come from.
The fact that they can move the three points of attack will make the typhoon steerable to hit at any desired target.
For more in-depth study, the researcher can refer to the US Patent 4686605 by clicking on the image below:
But no, the United Nations, Inc., or any of its subsidiary corporate states, are not capable of providing these commonsensical solutions any time soon. It can only afford to pay lip service to those pressing problems, because the Old Men running the show can’t get over with their myopic appreciation of the power entrusted to them, which they use only to impress young women.
Considering that our body, like everything else in nature, is made up of EM waves propagating at certain frequencies in space, we can also be altered, or our bodily functions can be influence for any desired effect.
If at certain microwave frequencies, a radar system can cook the atmosphere to increase gas pressure, and change the weather, it can also be used to deliver modulated brain wave frequencies to stimulate docility, or hyperactivity to destroy an entire targeted population without firing a single bullet.
This is the reason why the authorities sought to limit, or eradicate, its use in actual conflict scenario.
Convention on the Prohibition of Military or Any Other Hostile Use of Environmental Modification Techniques
The States Parties to this Convention,
Guided by the interest of consolidating peace, and wishing to contribute to the cause of halting the arms race, and of bringing about general and complete disarmament under strict and effective international control, and of saving mankind from the danger of using new means of warfare,
Determined to continue negotiations with a view to achieving effective progress towards further measures in the field of disarmament,
Recognizing that scientific and technical advances may open new possibilities with respect to modification of the environment,
Realizing that the use of environmental modification techniques for peaceful purposes could improve the interrelationship of man and nature and contribute to the preservation and improvement of the environment for the benefit of present and future generations,
Recognizing, however, that military or any other hostile use of such techniques could have effects extremely harmful to human welfare,
Desiring to prohibit effectively military or any other hostile use of environmental modification techniques in order to eliminate the dangers to mankind from such use, and affirming their willingness to work towards the achievement of this objective,
Desiring also to contribute to the strengthening of trust among nations and to the further improvement of the international situation in accordance with the purposes and principles of the Charter of the United Nations,
Have agreed as follows:
Article I
Each State Party to this Convention undertakes not to engage in military or any other hostile use of environmental modification techniques having widespread, long-lasting or severe effects as the means of destruction, damage or injury to any other State Party.
Each State Party to this Convention undertakes not to assist, encourage or induce any State, group of States or international organization to engage in activities contrary to the provisions of paragraph 1 of this article.
Article II
As used in article 1, the term “environmental modification techniques” refers to any technique for changing – through the deliberate manipulation of natural processes – the dynamics, composition or structure of the Earth, including its biota, lithosphere, hydrosphere and atmosphere, or of outer space.
Article III
The provisions of this Convention shall not hinder the use of environmental modification techniques for peaceful purposes and shall be without prejudice to the generally recognized principles and applicable rules of international law concerning such use.
The States Parties to this Convention undertake to facilitate, and have the right to participate in, the fullest possible exchange of scientific and technological information on the use of environmental modification techniques for peaceful purposes. States Parties in a position to do so shall contribute, alone or together with other States or international organizations, to international economic and scientific co-operation in the preservation, improvement and peaceful utilization of the environment, with due consideration for the needs of the developing areas of the world.
Article IV
Each State Party to this Convention undertakes to take any measures it considers necessary in accordance with its constitutional processes to prohibit and prevent any activity in violation of the provisions of the Convention anywhere under its jurisdiction or control. Blah, blah,blah.
In witness whereof, the undersigned, being duly authorized thereto, have signed this Convention at Geneva, on the 18 day of May 1977.
The reality on the ground is far from being straightforward, i.e. countries possessing weather weaponry may not be actively firing at each other, but that doesn’t mean that the United States government, for example, is not using the same capability against its own people, or its smaller nation allies, you know, to keep them in line.
The chemical based geoengineering, for instance, is being extended to spray harmful chemicals instead of merely “cloud seeding”.
Historical Perspectives
It was Dr. Nikola Tesla who tried to give us wireless power so that global prosperity can be achieved by providing free and unlimited access to energy, for the benefit of all.
He constructed a “magnifying transmitter” which could deliver both power and data wirelessly to far off distances. In the process, he realized the vast potential of his device and the dangers it may pose when the technology falls into the wrong hands.
On April 28, 1997 U.S. Defense Secretary William Cohen made the following statement:
'"Others [terrorists] are engaging even in an eco-type of terrorism whereby they can alter the climate, set off earthquakes, volcanoes remotely through the use of electromagnetic waves…
So there are plenty of ingenious minds out there that are at work finding ways in which they can wreak terror upon other nations…
It’s real, and that’s the reason why we have to intensify our [counterterrorism] efforts.”
In February 1998, the European Parliament’s Committee on Foreign Affairs, Security and Defense Policy held public hearings in Brussels on the U.S based weather warfare facility developed under the HAARP program.
The Committee’s “Motion for Resolution” submitted to the European Parliament:
'Considers HAARP… by virtue of its far-reaching impact on the environment to be a global concern and calls for its legal, ecological and ethical implications to be examined by an international independent body…; [the Committee] regrets the repeated refusal of the United States Administration… to give evidence to the public hearing …into the environmental and public risks [of] the HAARP program.”
-
European Parliament, Committee on Foreign Affairs, Security and Defense Policy, Brussels, doc. no. A4-0005/99, 14 January 1999
The weapons referred to by Secretary Cohen are longitudinal EM wave interferometers (LWIs). Longitudinal EM waves easily travel through the ocean and earth with very little loss. In a distant interference zone, there appears real EM energy again, of the kind we have in our textbooks.
However, the energy arises from spacetime itself in the interference zone, as proven by M.W. Evans, P.K. Anastasovski, T.E. Bearden et al., “On Whittaker’s Representation of the Electromagnetic Entity in Vacuo: The Production of Transverse Fields and Energy by Scalar Interferometry,” Journal of New Energy, 4(3), Winter 1999, p. 76-78. (That entire issue of JNE contains some 60 papers by the Alpha Foundation’s Institute for Advanced Study (AIAS), dealing with the kind of higher symmetry electrodynamics needed to understand such weapons).
Though tested in prototype in the 1950s, the first strategic LWIs were deployed in Russia in April 1963, and were used to kill the U.S.S. Thresher nuclear attack submarine, underwater off the East coast of the United States, in April 1963. The signatures of the kill are 100% decisive.
One day later, the same weapon placed an enormous electromagnetic burst (explosion) deep underwater, 100 miles north of Puerto Rico. From the surface of the ocean there arose a giant cone of water, rising a half mile into the air, turning into a mushroom, and falling back into the sea.
This was the second test of the new Russian strategic LWIs, under KGB control. By this test and the fact that the West did not even recognize what killed the Thresher, Khrushchev managed to stay in power another two years or so, after his Cuban Crisis fiasco where he lost face in front of the entire world.
World-wide weather engineering started in earnest by the Russians on July 4, 1976 - as a quirky sense of humor and “bicentennial gift” to the United States. The weapons have been used to shoot down aircraft, etc. worldwide also, mostly as tests, and have also destroyed ICBMs shortly after launch.
Both the scientific and political priesthoods are being used by the plutocrats at the highest totem pole of our society to impose upon humanity a world of endless scarcity in all aspects of our existence. They justify this policy by saying that if everything is free and easily accessible, people get lazy and just play around. What’s wrong with that?
We are the only species in the entire solar system that consented to making life very difficult after we have discovered ways and means to make it easier.
"When I first joined the American Physical Society sixty-seven years ago it was much smaller, much gentler, and as yet uncorrupted by the money flood (a threat against which Dwight Eisenhower warned a half-century ago).
…The giants no longer walk the earth, and the money flood has become the raison d’être of much physics research, the vital sustenance of much more, and it provides the support for untold numbers of professional jobs.
For reasons that will soon become clear my former pride at being an APS Fellow all these years has been turned into shame, and I am forced, with no pleasure at all, to offer you my resignation from the Society.
It is of course, the global warming scam, with the (literally) trillions of dollars driving it, that has corrupted so many scientists, and has carried APS before it like a rogue wave.
It is the greatest and most successful pseudoscientific fraud I have seen in my long life as a physicist.
Anyone who has the faintest doubt that this is so should force himself to read the ClimateGate documents, which lay it bare. (Montford’s book organizes the facts very well.)
I don’t believe that any real physicist, nay scientist, can read that stuff without revulsion. I would almost make that revulsion a definition of the word scientist.
So what has the APS, as an organization, done in the face of this challenge? It has accepted the corruption as the norm, and gone along with it…”
In February 1998, the European Parliament’s Committee on Foreign Affairs, Security and Defense Policy held public hearings in Brussels on the U.S based weather warfare facility developed under the HAARP program.
The Committee’s “Motion for Resolution” submitted to the European Parliament:
"Considers HAARP… by virtue of its far-reaching impact on the environment to be a global concern and calls for its legal, ecological and ethical implications to be examined by an international independent body…; [the Committee] regrets the repeated refusal of the United States Administration… to give evidence to the public hearing …into the environmental and public risks [of] the HAARP program.”
-
European Parliament, Committee on Foreign Affairs, Security and Defense Policy, Brussels, doc. no. A4-0005/99, 14 January 1999
The Committee’s request to draw up a “Green Paper” on “the environmental impacts of military activities”, however, was casually dismissed on the grounds that the European Commission lacked the required jurisdiction to delve into “the links between environment and defense”. Brussels was anxious to avoid a showdown with Washington. (see European Report, 3 February 1999).
The possibility of climatic or environmental manipulations as part of a military and intelligence agenda, while tacitly acknowledged, has never been considered relevant. Military analysts are mute on the subject.
Meteorologists are not investigating the matter, and environmentalists are strung on global warming and the Kyoto protocol.
Ironically, the Pentagon, while recognizing its ability to modify the World’s climate for military use, has joined the global warming consensus. In a major study (pdf) , the Pentagon has analyzed in detail the implications of various global warming scenarios.
Power is never given, or handed down in a silver platter. It must be taken away from those who are incapable of using it wisely for the good and benefit of all lifeforms everywhere.
In lieu of these deplorables, we must put in management positions the visionaries, engineers and technologists, so that only the progressive use of science and technology is given the light of day.
The Corruption Of Evidence Based Medicine - Killing For Profit October 9 2021 | From: Medium / Various
The idea of Evidence Based Medicine (EBM) is great. The reality, though, not so much.
Human perception is often flawed, so the premise of EBM is to formally study medical treatments and there have certainly been some successes.
Consider the procedure of angioplasty. Doctors insert a catheter into the blood vessels of the heart and use a balloon like device to open up the artery and restore blood flow.
In acute heart attacks studies confirm that this is an effective procedure. In chronic heart disease the COURAGE study and more recently the ORBITA study showed that angioplasty is largely useless. EBM helped distinguish the best use of an invasive procedure.
“It is simply no longer possible to believe much of the clinical research that is published, or to rely on the judgment of trusted physicians or authoritative medical guidelines. I take no pleasure in this conclusion, which I reached slowly and reluctantly over my two decades as an editor”
This has huge implications. Evidence based medicine is completely worthless if the evidence base is false or corrupted. It’s like building a wooden house knowing the wood is termite infested.
“The medical profession is being bought by the pharmaceutical industry, not only in terms of the practice of medicine, but also in terms of teaching and research. The academic institutions of this country are allowing themselves to be the paid agents of the pharmaceutical industry. I think it’s disgraceful”
The people in charge of the system - the editors of the most important medical journals in the world, gradually learn over a few decades that their life’s work is being slowly and steadily corrupted.
Physicians and universities have allowed themselves to be bribed.
Trials run by industry are 70% more likely than government funded trials to show a positive result.
Think about that for a second. If EBM says that 2+2 = 5 is correct 70% of the time, would you trust this sort of ‘science’?
Selective Publication - Negative trials (those that show no benefit for the drugs) are likely to be suppressed. For example, in the case of antidepressants, 36/37 studies that were favourable to drugs were published. But of the studies not favorable to drugs, a paltry 3/36 were published.
Selective publication of positive (for the drug company) results means that a review of the literature would suggest that 94% of studies favor drugs where in truth, only 51% were actually positive.
Suppose you know that your stockbroker publishes all his winning trades, but suppresses all his losing trades. Would you trust him with your money? But yet, we trust EBM with our lives, even though the same thing is happening.
Let’s look at the following graph of the number of trials completed versus those that were published. In 2008, the company Sanofi completed 92 studies but only a piddly 14 were published. Who gets to decide which gets published and which does not? Right. Sanofi.
Which ones do you think will be published? The ones that favor its drugs, or the ones that prove their drugs do not work? Right. Keep in mind that this is the only rational course of action for Sanofi, or any other company to pursue. It’s idiotic to publish data that harms yourself.
It’s financial suicide. So this sort of rational behavior will happen now, and it will not stop in the future. But knowing this, why do we still believe the evidence based medicine, when the evidence base is completely biased?
An outside observer, only looking at all published data, will conclude that the drugs are far, far more effective than they are in reality.
Yet, if you point this out in academic circles, people label you a quack, who does not ‘believe the evidence’.
Rigging of Outcomes - Or consider the example of registration of primary outcomes. Prior to year 2000, companies doing trials did not need to declare what end points they measured.
So they measure many different endpoints and simply figured out which one looked best and then declared the trial a success.
Kind of like tossing a coin, looking at which one come up more, and saying that they were backing the winning side. If you measured enough outcomes, something was bound to come up positive.
In 2000, the government moved to stop these shenanigans. They required companies to register what they were measuring ahead of time. Prior to 2000, 57% of trials showed a positive result. After 2000, a paltry 8% showed good results.
More evidence of the evidence base being completely corrupted by commercial interest, and the academic physicians who were getting rich on it tacitly allowing corruption because they know that you don’t bite the hand that feeds you.
‘Advertorials’ - Or this example of a review paper in the NEJM that fracture rates caused by the lucrative bisphosphonate drugs were “very rare”. Not only did the drug companies pay lots of consulting fees to the doctors, three of the authors of this review were full time employees!
To allow an advertorial to be published as the best scientific fact is scandalous. Doctors, trusting the NEJM to publish quality, unbiased advice have no idea that this review article is pure advertising. Yet, we still consider the NEJM to be the very pinnacle of evidence based medicine. Instead, as all the editors of the journals sadly recognize, it has become lucre-based publishing. More money = better results.
Money from Reprints - The reasons for this problem is obvious to all - it’s insanely profitable for journals to take money from Big Pharma. Journals want to be read. So they all try to get a high Impact Factor (IF). To do this, you need to get cited by other authors.
And nothing boosts ratings like a blockbuster produced by Big Pharma. They have the contacts and the sales force to make any study a landmark.
A less obvious benefit is the fees that are generated by Big Pharma purchasing articles for reprint. If a company publishes an article in the NEJM, they may order several hundred thousand copies of the article to be distributed to unsuspecting doctors everywhere.
These fees are not trivial. The NEJM publisher Massachusetts Medical Society gets 23% of its income from reprints. The Lancet - 41%. The American Medical Association - a gut busting 53%. No wonder these journals are ready to sell their readers (ordinary physicians) down the river. It pays.
Who needs journalistic ethics when there’s a Mercedes in the driveway? Mo money, baby. Mo money.
Bribery of Journal Editors - A recent study by Liu et al in the BMJ shed more light on the problem of crooked journals. Crooked journal editors. Editors play a crucial role in determining the scientific dialogue by deciding which manuscripts are published.
They determine who the peer reviewers are. Using the Open Payments database, they looked at how much money the editors of the most influential journals in the world were taking from industry sources. This includes ‘research’ payments, which are largely unregulated.
As mention previously, much ‘research’ consists of going to meetings in exotic locale. It funny how many conferences are held in beautiful European cities like Barcelona, and how few are done in brutally cold Quebec City.
Of all journal editors that could be assessed, 50.6% were on the take. The average payment in 2014 was $27,564. Each. This does not include an average $37, 330 given for ‘research’ payments.
This is slightly horrifying. Each editor of the Journal of the American College of Cardiology received, on average $475 072 personally and another $119 407 for ‘research’. With 35 editors, that’s about $15 million in bribes to doctors. No wonder the JACC loves drugs and devices.
It pays the private school bills. Mo money = we’ll publish your crooked studies for you. Mo money, baby, mo money.
Publication Bias - The evidence base that EBM depends upon is completely biased. Some people think I’m really anti-Pharma, but this is not really true. Big Pharma companies have a duty to their shareholders to make money. They have no duty to patients. On the other hand, doctors have a duty to patients. Universities have a duty to remain unbiased.
It is the failure of doctors and universities to keep their greedy paws out of the corrupting influence of Big Pharma money that is the problem. If Big Pharma is allowed to spend lots of $$$ paying off doctors and universities and professors, then it should do so to maximize profits.
That is their mission statement. Doctors love to blame Big Pharma companies because it takes peoples gaze off the real problem - lots of doctors taking $$$ from anybody who will pay. The pharma industry is not the problem.
Bribery of university doctors is the problem - one that is easily fixed if the political will exists.
Consider this study. Looking at studies in the field of neurodegenerative disease, researchers looked at all the studies that were started but never finished or never published.
Approximately 28% of studies never made it to the finish line. That’s a problem.
If all the studies that don’t look promising for drug candidates are not published, then it appears that the drugs are way way more effective than they really are. But the published ‘evidence base’ would falsely support the drug. Indeed, Pharma sponsored trials were 5 times more likely to be unpublished.
Imagine you have a coin flipping contest. Suppose a player call ‘Big Pharma” chooses heads, and also pays the coin flipper. Every time the coin flipper pulls up tails, the results don’t count. Every time it comes up heads, it counts. This happens 28% of the time.
Now, instead of a 50/50 split of heads and tails, it’s more like a 66/34 split of heads/tails. So the ‘evidence based medicine’ lover claims that heads is far more likely to come up than tails, and castigates people who don’t believe the results as ‘anti-science’.
Evidence based medicine depends entirely upon having a reliable base of evidence (studies). If the evidence base is tampered with, and paid for, then EBM as a science is completely useless.
Indeed, the very editors whose entire careers have been EBM have now discovered it to be worthless.
Does the CEO of Phillip Morris (maker of Marlboro cigarettes) smoke? That tells you all you need to know about the health risks.
Do the editors of the NEJM and the Lancet believe EBM anymore? Not at all. So neither should we. We can’t believe evidence based medicine until the evidence has been cleaned up from the corrupting influence of commercial interests.
Financial conflicts of interest (COI), also known as gifts to doctors, is a well accepted practice. A national survey in the New England Journal of Medicine in 2007 shows that 94% of physicians had ties to the pharmaceutical industry. This gravy train only rides in one direction.
Many medical schools have limited exposure of medical students in response, but declined to get off the gravy train themselves. There is a simple relationship between how prominent a physician is (more articles published - almost always academic doctors and professors) and how much money they take from Big Pharma.
What, you thought people teach at prestigious institutions like universities for the good of mankind? Maybe that’s why they went there, but that’s not why they stay. They came for the science.
They stayed for the money.
So here’s a damning list of all the problems of EBM:
1.
Selective Publication
2.
Rigged outcomes
3.
Advertorials
4.
Reprint Revenues
5.
Bribery of Journal Editors
6.
Publication Bias
7.
Financial Conflicts of Interests
When the evidence base of medicine is bought and paid for, people die.
That is how doctors have created this opioid crisis that kills thousands of people. Pharmaceutical companies want to pay off doctors, just as drug lord want to pay off judges and police officers.
Doctors, being human, should put safeguards against this temptation. Unfortunately, doctors and universities have been willing participants in this game of killing for profit. We need to end it now. End the corruption of the universities. Stop the bribery of doctors.
1. False Positives
Australian Health Minister Strangely Quits With Little Notice
Concluding Remarks
Graphene Oxide: A Toxic Substance in the Vial of the COVID-19 mRNA Vaccine? 
Siri and Alexa, I Love You
2. Foolers: 
The Man Who Discovered The Cause Of Cancer Wrote A Book On Curing It
The Crime is Money That No One Ever Earned is Used to Capture People’s Real Wealth
The Silent War On "Q" Continues
Pres. Trump: media barely mentioning Mueller report showed no collusion 
CURRENT AFFAIRS
1. At age 39, John had made up his mind to launch his political career by seeking an electoral mandate in New York State, and he was about to announce it publicly. 
Question: Have the mRNA vaccines been tested on animals?
Establish a Clear Communication Channel
1. their identity accepted.
User A: “Wow, did you see the coverage of the border war in Chula Vista?”
